GMT Manpages

GMT(1)
Generic Mapping Tools
GMT(1)
NAME
GMT The Generic Mapping Tools data processing and display software package
INTRODUCTION
GMT is a collection of public-domain Unix tools that allows you to manipulate x,y and x,y,z data sets (ltering, trend tting, gridding, projecting, etc.) and produce PostScript illustrations ranging from simple x-y plots, via contour maps, to articially illuminated surfaces and 3-D perspective views in black/white or full color. Linear, log10, and power scaling is supported in addition to 25 common map projections. The processing and display routines within GMT are completely general and will handle any (x,y) or (x,y,z) data as input.
SYNOPSIS
GMT is also a wrapper script that can start any of the programs: GMT module module-options where module is the name of a GMT program and the options are those that pertain to that particular program.
GMT OVERVIEW
The following is a summary of all the programs supplied with GMT and a very short description of their purpose. Detailed information about each program can be found in the separate manual pages. blockmean blockmedian blockmode lter1d tcircle gmt2rgb gmtconvert gmtdefaults gmtmath gmtset gmtselect grdlter grd2cpt grd2xyz grdblend grdclip grdcontour grdcut grdedit grdfft grdgradient grdhisteq grdimage grdinfo grdlandmask grdmask grdmath grdpaste grdproject grdreformat grdsample grdtrend grdtrack L2 (x,y,z) data lter/decimator L1 (x,y,z) data lter/decimator Mode (x,y,z) data lter/decimator Filter 1-D data sets (time series) Finds the best-tting great circle to a set of points Convert Sun rasterle or grid to r, g, b grids Convert between ASCII and binary 1-D tables List the current default settings Mathematical operations on data tables Set individual default parameters Extract data subsets based on spatial criteria Filter 2-D data sets in the space domain Make a color palette table from grid les Conversion from 2-D grid le to table data Blend several partially over-lapping grid les onto one grid Limit the z-range in gridded data Contouring of 2-D gridded data Cut a sub-region from a grid le Modify header information in a 2-D grid le Operate on grid les in the wavenumber (or frequency) domain Compute directional gradient from grid les Histogram equalization for grid les Produce images from 2-D gridded data Get information about grid les Create mask grid le from shoreline data base Reset nodes outside a clip path to a constant Mathematical operations on grid les Paste together grid les along a common edge Project gridded data onto a new coordinate system Converting between different grid le formats Resample a 2-D gridded data set onto a new grid Fits polynomial trends to grid les Sampling of 2-D data set along 1-D track
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GMT(1)
GMT(1)
grdvector grdview grdvolume greenspline makecpt mapproject minmax nearneighbor project ps2raster psbasemap psclip pscoast pscontour pshistogram psimage pslegend psmask psrose psscale pstext pswiggle psxy psxyz sample1d spectrum1d splitxyz surface trend1d trend2d triangulate xyz2grd
Plot vector elds from grid les 3-D perspective imaging of 2-D gridded data Volume calculations from 2-D gridded data Interpolation using Greens functions for splines in 1-3 dimensions Make color palette tables Forward or inverse map projections of table data Find extreme values in data tables Nearest-neighbor gridding scheme Project data onto lines/great circles Crop and convert PostScript les to raster images, EPS, and PDF Create a basemap plot Use polygon les to dene clipping paths Plot coastlines and lled continents on maps Contour xyz-data by triangulation Plot a histogram Plot images (EPS or Sun raster les) on maps Plot legend on maps Create overlay to mask out regions on maps Plot sector or rose diagrams Plot gray scale or color scale on maps Plot text strings on maps Draw time-series along track on maps Plot symbols, polygons, and lines on maps Plot symbols, polygons, and lines in 3-D Resampling of 1-D table data sets Compute various spectral estimates from time-series Split xyz-les into several segments A continuous curvature gridding algorithm Fits polynomial or Fourier trends to y = f(x) data Fits polynomial trends to z = f(x,y) data Perform optimal Delaunay triangulation and gridding Convert equidistant xyz data to a 2-D grid le
SEE ALSO
Look up the individual man pages for more details and full syntax. Run GMT without options to list all GMT programs and to show all installation directories. Information is also available on the GMT home page gmt.soest.hawaii.edu
REFERENCES
Wessel, P., and W. H. F. Smith, 2012, The Generic Mapping Tools (GMT) version 4.5.8 Technical Reference & Cookbook, SOEST/NOAA. Wessel, P., and W. H. F. Smith, 1998, New, Improved Version of Generic Mapping Tools Released, EOS Trans., AGU, 79 (47), p. 579. Wessel, P., and W. H. F. Smith, 1995, New Version of the Generic Mapping Tools Released, EOS Trans., AGU, 76 (33), p. 329. Wessel, P., and W. H. F. Smith, 1995, New Version of the Generic Mapping Tools Released, http://www.agu.org/eos_elec/95154e.html, Copyright 1995 by the American Geophysical Union. Wessel, P., and W. H. F. Smith, 1991, Free Software Helps Map and Display Data, EOS Trans., AGU, 72 (41), p. 441.
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
BLOCKMEAN(1)
BLOCKMEAN(1)
NAME
blockmean lter to block average (x,y,z) data by L2 norm
SYNOPSIS
blockmean [ xyz[w]le(s) ] Ixinc[unit][=|+][/yinc[unit][=|+]] Rxmin/xmax/ymin/ymax[r] [ C ] [ E ] [ F ] [ H[i][nrec] ] [ S[w|z] ] [ V ] [ W[io] ] [ :[i|o] ] [ b[i|o][s|S|d|D[ncol]|c[var1/...]] ] [ f[i|o]colinfo ]
DESCRIPTION
blockmean reads arbitrarily located (x,y,z) triples [or optionally weighted quadruples (x,y,z,w)] from standard input [or xyz[w]le(s)] and writes to standard output a mean position and value for every non-empty block in a grid region dened by the R and I arguments. Either blockmean, blockmedian, or blockmode should be used as a pre-processor before running surface to avoid aliasing short wavelengths. These routines are also generally useful for decimating or averaging (x,y,z) data. You can modify the precision of the output format by editing the D_FORMAT parameter in your .gmtdefaults4 le, or you may choose binary input and/or output using single or double precision storage. xyz[w]le(s) 3 [or 4] column ASCII le(s) [or binary, see b] holding (x,y,z[,w]) data values. [w] is an optional weight for the data. If no le is specied, blockmean will read from standard input. I x_inc [and optionally y_inc] is the grid spacing. Optionally, append a sufx modier. Geographical (degrees) coordinates: Append m to indicate arc minutes or c to indicate arc seconds. If one of the units e, k, i, or n is appended instead, the increment is assumed to be given in meter, km, miles, or nautical miles, respectively, and will be converted to the equivalent degrees longitude at the middle latitude of the region (the conversion depends on ELLIPSOID). If /y_inc is given but set to 0 it will be reset equal to x_inc; otherwise it will be converted to degrees latitude. All coordinates: If = is appended then the corresponding max x (east) or y (north) may be slightly adjusted to t exactly the given increment [by default the increment may be adjusted slightly to t the given domain]. Finally, instead of giving an increment you may specify the number of nodes desired by appending + to the supplied integer argument; the increment is then recalculated from the number of nodes and the domain. The resulting increment value depends on whether you have selected a gridline-registered or pixel-registered grid; see Appendix B for details. Note: if Rgrdle is used then grid spacing has already been initialized; use I to override the values. xmin, xmax, ymin, and ymax specify the Region of interest. For geographic regions, these limits correspond to west, east, south, and north and you may specify them in decimal degrees or in [+-]dd:mm[:ss.xxx][W|E|S|N] format. Append r if lower left and upper right map coordinates are given instead of w/e/s/n. The two shorthands Rg and Rd stand for global domain (0/360 and -180/+180 in longitude respectively, with -90/+90 in latitude). Alternatively, specify the name of an existing grid le and the R settings (and grid spacing, if applicable) are copied from the grid. For calendar time coordinates you may either give (a) relative time (relative to the selected TIME_EPOCH and in the selected TIME_UNIT; append t to JX|x), or (b) absolute time of the form [date]T[clock] (append T to JX|x). At least one of date and clock must be present; the T is always required. The date string must be of the form [-]yyyy[-mm[-dd]] (Gregorian calendar) or yyyy[-Www[-d]] (ISO week calendar), while the clock string must be of the form hh:mm:ss[.xxx]. The use of delimiters and their type and positions must be exactly as indicated (however, input, output and plot formats are customizable; see gmtdefaults). Use the center of the block as the output location [Default uses the mean location]. Provide Extended report which includes s (the standard deviation of the mean), l, the lowest value, and h, the high value for each block. Output order becomes x,y,z,s,l,h[,w]. [Default outputs x,y,z[,w]. See W for w output. Force pixel node registration [Default is gridline registration]. (Node registrations are dened in GMT Cookbook Appendix B on grid le formats.) Each block is the locus of points nearest the grid value location. For example, with R10/15/10/15 and and I1: with the F option 10 <=
OPTIONS
C E
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
BLOCKMEAN(1)
BLOCKMEAN(1)
(x,y) < 11 is one of 25 blocks; without it 9.5 <= (x,y) < 10.5 is one of 36 blocks. H Input le(s) has header record(s). If used, the default number of header records is N_HEADER_RECS. Use Hi if only input data should have header records [Default will write out header records if the input data have them]. Blank lines and lines starting with # are always skipped. Not used with binary data. Use Sz to report the sum of all z-values inside a block, or Sw to report the sum of weights [Default reports mean value]. If Sw is selected and no weights are supplied (i.e., no W given), then the weight sum will equal the number of points inside each block. Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"]. Weighted modier[s]. Unweighted input and output has 3 columns x,y,z; Weighted i/o has 4 columns x,y,z,w. Weights can be used in input to construct weighted mean values in blocks. Weight sums can be reported in output for later combining several runs, etc. Use W for weighted i/o, Wi for weighted inputonly, Wo for weighted output only. [Default uses unweighted i/o]. Toggles between (longitude,latitude) and (latitude,longitude) input and/or output. [Default is (longitude,latitude)]. Append i to select input only or o to select output only. [Default affects both]. Selects binary input. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of columns in your binary input le if it exceeds the columns needed by the program. Or append c if the input le is netCDF. Optionally, append var1/var2/... to specify the variables to be read. [Default is 3 (or 4 if Wi is set)]. Selects binary output. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of desired columns in your binary output le. [Default is 3 (or 4 if Wo is set)]. E adds 3 additional columns. Special formatting of input and/or output columns (time or geographical data). Specify i or o to make this apply only to input or output [Default applies to both]. Give one or more columns (or column ranges) separated by commas. Append T (absolute calendar time), t (relative time in chosen TIME_UNIT since TIME_EPOCH), x (longitude), y (latitude), or f (oating point) to each column or column range item. Shorthand f[i|o]g means f[i|o]0x,1y (geographic coordinates).
V W
: bi
bo
ASCII FORMAT PRECISION

The ASCII output formats of numerical data are controlled by parameters in your .gmtdefaults4 le. Longitude and latitude are formatted according to OUTPUT_DEGREE_FORMAT, whereas other values are formatted according to D_FORMAT. Be aware that the format in effect can lead to loss of precision in the output, which can lead to various problems downstream. If you nd the output is not written with enough precision, consider switching to binary output (bo if available) or specify more decimals using the D_FORMAT setting.
EXAMPLES
To nd 5 by 5 minute block mean values from the ASCII data in hawaii.xyg, run blockmean hawaii.xyg R198/208/18/25 I5m > hawaii_5x5.xyg
SEE ALSO
blockmedian(1), blockmode(1), gmtdefaults(1), GMT (1), nearneighbor(1), surface(1), triangulate(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
BLOCKMEDIAN(1)
BLOCKMEDIAN(1)
NAME
blockmedian lter to block average (x,y,z) data by L1 norm.
SYNOPSIS
blockmedian [ xyz[w]le(s) ] Ixinc[unit][=|+][/yinc[unit][=|+]] Rxmin/xmax/ymin/ymax[r] [ C ] [ E[b] ] [ F ] [ H[i][nrec] ] [ Q ] [ Tquantile ] [ V ] [ W[io] ] [ :[i|o] ] [ b[i|o][s|S|d|D[ncol]|c[var1/...]] ] [ f[i|o]colinfo ]
DESCRIPTION
blockmedian reads arbitrarily located (x,y,z) triples [or optionally weighted quadruples (x,y,z,w)] from standard input [or xyz[w]le(s)] and writes to standard output a median position and value for every non-empty block in a grid region dened by the R and I arguments. Either blockmean, blockmedian, or blockmode should be used as a pre-processor before running surface to avoid aliasing short wavelengths. These routines are also generally useful for decimating or averaging (x,y,z) data. You can modify the precision of the output format by editing the D_FORMAT parameter in your .gmtdefaults4 le, or you may choose binary input and/or output using single or double precision storage. xyz[w]le(s) 3 [or 4] column ASCII le(s) [or binary, see b] holding (x,y,z[,w]) data values. [w] is an optional weight for the data. If no le is specied, blockmedian will read from standard input. I x_inc [and optionally y_inc] is the grid spacing. Optionally, append a sufx modier. Geographical (degrees) coordinates: Append m to indicate arc minutes or c to indicate arc seconds. If one of the units e, k, i, or n is appended instead, the increment is assumed to be given in meter, km, miles, or nautical miles, respectively, and will be converted to the equivalent degrees longitude at the middle latitude of the region (the conversion depends on ELLIPSOID). If /y_inc is given but set to 0 it will be reset equal to x_inc; otherwise it will be converted to degrees latitude. All coordinates: If = is appended then the corresponding max x (east) or y (north) may be slightly adjusted to t exactly the given increment [by default the increment may be adjusted slightly to t the given domain]. Finally, instead of giving an increment you may specify the number of nodes desired by appending + to the supplied integer argument; the increment is then recalculated from the number of nodes and the domain. The resulting increment value depends on whether you have selected a gridline-registered or pixel-registered grid; see Appendix B for details. Note: if Rgrdle is used then grid spacing has already been initialized; use I to override the values. xmin, xmax, ymin, and ymax specify the Region of interest. For geographic regions, these limits correspond to west, east, south, and north and you may specify them in decimal degrees or in [+-]dd:mm[:ss.xxx][W|E|S|N] format. Append r if lower left and upper right map coordinates are given instead of w/e/s/n. The two shorthands Rg and Rd stand for global domain (0/360 and -180/+180 in longitude respectively, with -90/+90 in latitude). Alternatively, specify the name of an existing grid le and the R settings (and grid spacing, if applicable) are copied from the grid. For calendar time coordinates you may either give (a) relative time (relative to the selected TIME_EPOCH and in the selected TIME_UNIT; append t to JX|x), or (b) absolute time of the form [date]T[clock] (append T to JX|x). At least one of date and clock must be present; the T is always required. The date string must be of the form [-]yyyy[-mm[-dd]] (Gregorian calendar) or yyyy[-Www[-d]] (ISO week calendar), while the clock string must be of the form hh:mm:ss[.xxx]. The use of delimiters and their type and positions must be exactly as indicated (however, input, output and plot formats are customizable; see gmtdefaults). Use the center of the block as the output location [Default uses the median x and median y as location (but see Q)].. Provide Extended report which includes s (the L1 scale of the median), l, the lowest value, and h, the high value for each block. Output order becomes x,y,z,s,l,h[,w]. [Default outputs x,y,z[,w]. For box-and-whisker calculation, use Eb which will output x,y,z,l,q25,q75,h[,w], where q25 and q75 are the 25% and 75% quantiles, respectively. See W for w output.
OPTIONS
C E
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
BLOCKMEDIAN(1)
BLOCKMEDIAN(1)
Force pixel node registration [Default is gridline registration]. (Node registrations are dened in GMT Cookbook Appendix B on grid le formats.) Each block is the locus of points nearest the grid value location. For example, with R10/15/10/15 and and I1: with the F option 10 <= (x,y) < 11 is one of 25 blocks; without it 9.5 <= (x,y) < 10.5 is one of 36 blocks. Input le(s) has header record(s). If used, the default number of header records is N_HEADER_RECS. Use Hi if only input data should have header records [Default will write out header records if the input data have them]. Blank lines and lines starting with # are always skipped. Not used with binary data. (Quicker) Finds median z and (x, y) at that the median z [Default nds median x, median y independent of z]. Also see C. Sets the quantile of the distribution to be returned [Default is 0.5 which returns the median z]. Here, 0 < quantile < 1. Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"]. Weighted modier[s]. Unweighted input and output has 3 columns x,y,z; Weighted i/o has 4 columns x,y,z,w. Weights can be used in input to construct weighted mean values in blocks. Weight sums can be reported in output for later combining several runs, etc. Use W for weighted i/o, Wi for weighted inputonly, Wo for weighted output only. [Default uses unweighted i/o]. Toggles between (longitude,latitude) and (latitude,longitude) input and/or output. [Default is (longitude,latitude)]. Append i to select input only or o to select output only. [Default affects both]. Selects binary input. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of columns in your binary input le if it exceeds the columns needed by the program. Or append c if the input le is netCDF. Optionally, append var1/var2/... to specify the variables to be read. [Default is 3 (or 4 if Wi is set)]. Selects binary output. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of desired columns in your binary output le. [Default is 3 (or 4 if Wo is set)]. E adds 3 additional columns. Special formatting of input and/or output columns (time or geographical data). Specify i or o to make this apply only to input or output [Default applies to both]. Give one or more columns (or column ranges) separated by commas. Append T (absolute calendar time), t (relative time in chosen TIME_UNIT since TIME_EPOCH), x (longitude), y (latitude), or f (oating point) to each column or column range item. Shorthand f[i|o]g means f[i|o]0x,1y (geographic coordinates).
Q T V W
: bi
bo

EXAMPLES
To nd 5 by 5 minute block medians from the double precision binary data in hawaii_b.xyg and output an ASCII table, run blockmedian hawaii_b.xyg R198/208/18/25 I5m bi3 > hawaii_5x5.xyg To compute the shape of a data distribution per bin via a box-and-whisker diagram we need the 0%, 25%, 50%, 75%, and 100% quantiles. To do so on a global 5 by 5 degree basis from the ASCII table depths.xyz and send output to an ASCII table, run blockmedian depths.xyz Rg I5 F Eb > depths_5x5.txt
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
BLOCKMEDIAN(1)
BLOCKMEDIAN(1)
SEE ALSO
blockmean(1), blockmode(1), GMT (1), gmtdefaults(1), nearneighbor(1), surface(1), triangulate(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
BLOCKMODE(1)
BLOCKMODE(1)
NAME
blockmode lter to block average (x,y,z) data by mode estimation.
SYNOPSIS
blockmode [ xyz[w]le(s) ] Ixinc[unit][=|+][/yinc[unit][=|+]] Rxmin/xmax/ymin/ymax[r] [ C ] [ E ] [ F ] [ H[i][nrec] ] [ Q ] [ V ] [ W[io] ] [ :[i|o] ] [ b[i|o][s|S|d|D[ncol]|c[var1/...]] ] [ f[i|o]colinfo ]
DESCRIPTION
blockmode reads arbitrarily located (x,y,z) triples [or optionally weighted quadruples (x,y,z,w)] from standard input [or xyz[w]le(s)] and writes to standard output mode estimates of position and value for every non-empty block in a grid region dened by the R and I arguments. Either blockmean, blockmedian, or blockmode should be used as a pre-processor before running surface to avoid aliasing short wavelengths. These routines are also generally useful for decimating or averaging (x,y,z) data. You can modify the precision of the output format by editing the D_FORMAT parameter in your .gmtdefaults4 le, or you may choose binary input and/or output using single or double precision storage. xyz[w]le(s) 3 [or 4] column ASCII le(s) [or binary, see b] holding (x,y,z[,w]) data values. [w] is an optional weight for the data. If no le is specied, blockmode will read from standard input. I x_inc [and optionally y_inc] is the grid spacing. Optionally, append a sufx modier. Geographical (degrees) coordinates: Append m to indicate arc minutes or c to indicate arc seconds. If one of the units e, k, i, or n is appended instead, the increment is assumed to be given in meter, km, miles, or nautical miles, respectively, and will be converted to the equivalent degrees longitude at the middle latitude of the region (the conversion depends on ELLIPSOID). If /y_inc is given but set to 0 it will be reset equal to x_inc; otherwise it will be converted to degrees latitude. All coordinates: If = is appended then the corresponding max x (east) or y (north) may be slightly adjusted to t exactly the given increment [by default the increment may be adjusted slightly to t the given domain]. Finally, instead of giving an increment you may specify the number of nodes desired by appending + to the supplied integer argument; the increment is then recalculated from the number of nodes and the domain. The resulting increment value depends on whether you have selected a gridline-registered or pixel-registered grid; see Appendix B for details. Note: if Rgrdle is used then grid spacing has already been initialized; use I to override the values. xmin, xmax, ymin, and ymax specify the Region of interest. For geographic regions, these limits correspond to west, east, south, and north and you may specify them in decimal degrees or in [+-]dd:mm[:ss.xxx][W|E|S|N] format. Append r if lower left and upper right map coordinates are given instead of w/e/s/n. The two shorthands Rg and Rd stand for global domain (0/360 and -180/+180 in longitude respectively, with -90/+90 in latitude). Alternatively, specify the name of an existing grid le and the R settings (and grid spacing, if applicable) are copied from the grid. For calendar time coordinates you may either give (a) relative time (relative to the selected TIME_EPOCH and in the selected TIME_UNIT; append t to JX|x), or (b) absolute time of the form [date]T[clock] (append T to JX|x). At least one of date and clock must be present; the T is always required. The date string must be of the form [-]yyyy[-mm[-dd]] (Gregorian calendar) or yyyy[-Www[-d]] (ISO week calendar), while the clock string must be of the form hh:mm:ss[.xxx]. The use of delimiters and their type and positions must be exactly as indicated (however, input, output and plot formats are customizable; see gmtdefaults). Use the center of the block as the output location [Default uses the modal xy location (but see Q)]. C overrides Q. Provide Extended report which includes s (the L1 scale of the mode), l, the lowest value, and h, the high value for each block. Output order becomes x,y,z,s,l,h[,w]. [Default outputs x,y,z[,w]. See W for w output. Force pixel node registration [Default is gridline registration]. (Node registrations are dened in GMT Cookbook Appendix B on grid le formats.) Each block is the locus of points nearest the grid value location. For example, with R10/15/10/15 and and I1: with the F option 10 <=
OPTIONS
C E
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
BLOCKMODE(1)
BLOCKMODE(1)
(x,y) < 11 is one of 25 blocks; without it 9.5 <= (x,y) < 10.5 is one of 36 blocks. H Input le(s) has header record(s). If used, the default number of header records is N_HEADER_RECS. Use Hi if only input data should have header records [Default will write out header records if the input data have them]. Blank lines and lines starting with # are always skipped. Not used with binary data. (Quicker) Finds mode z and mean (x, y) [Default nds mode x, mode y, mode z]. Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"]. Weighted modier[s]. Unweighted input and output has 3 columns x,y,z; Weighted i/o has 4 columns x,y,z,w. Weights can be used in input to construct weighted mean values in blocks. Weight sums can be reported in output for later combining several runs, etc. Use W for weighted i/o, Wi for weighted inputonly, Wo for weighted output only. [Default uses unweighted i/o]. Toggles between (longitude,latitude) and (latitude,longitude) input and/or output. [Default is (longitude,latitude)]. Append i to select input only or o to select output only. [Default affects both]. Selects binary input. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of columns in your binary input le if it exceeds the columns needed by the program. Or append c if the input le is netCDF. Optionally, append var1/var2/... to specify the variables to be read. [Default is 3 (or 4 if Wi is set)]. Selects binary output. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of desired columns in your binary output le. [Default is 3 (or 4 if Wo is set)]. E adds 3 additional columns. Special formatting of input and/or output columns (time or geographical data). Specify i or o to make this apply only to input or output [Default applies to both]. Give one or more columns (or column ranges) separated by commas. Append T (absolute calendar time), t (relative time in chosen TIME_UNIT since TIME_EPOCH), x (longitude), y (latitude), or f (oating point) to each column or column range item. Shorthand f[i|o]g means f[i|o]0x,1y (geographic coordinates).
Q V W
: bi
bo

EXAMPLES
To nd 5 by 5 minute block mode estimates from the double precision binary data in hawaii_b.xyg and output an ASCII table, run: blockmode hawaii_b.xyg R198/208/18/25 I5m bi3 > hawaii_5x5.xyg
SEE ALSO
blockmean(1), blockmedian(1), GMT (1), gmtdefaults(1), nearneighbor(1), surface(1), triangulate(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
FILTER1D(1)
FILTER1D(1)
NAME
lter1d Time domain ltering of 1-D time series
SYNOPSIS
lter1d [ inle ] F<type><width>[mode] [ Dincrement ] [ E ] [ H[i][nrec] ] [ Iignore_val ] [ Llack_width ] [ Nn_cols/t_col ] [ Qq_factor ] [ Ssymmetry_factor ] [ Tstart/stop/int ] [ V ] [ b[i|o][s|S|d|D[ncol]|c[var1/...]] ] [ f[i|o]colinfo ]
DESCRIPTION
lter1d is a general time domain lter for multiple column time series data. The user species the number of columns of input and which column is the time. (See N option below). The fastest operation occurs when the input time series are equally spaced and have no gaps or outliers and the special options are not needed. lter1d has options -L, -Q, and -S for unevenly sampled data with gaps. inle F Multi-column ASCII (or binary, see b) le holding data values to be ltered. Sets the lter type. Choose among convolution and non-convolution lters. Append the lter code followed by the full lter width in same units as time column. Available convolution lters are: (b) Boxcar: All weights are equal. (c) Cosine Arch: Weights follow a cosine arch curve. (g) Gaussian: Weights are given by the Gaussian function. (f) Custom: Instead of width give name of a one-column le with your own weight coefcients. Non-convolution lters are: (m) Median: Returns median value. (p) Maximum likelihood probability (a mode estimator): Return modal value. If more than one mode is found we return their average value. Append - or + to the lter width if you rather want to return the smallest or largest of the modal values. (l) Lower: Return the minimum of all values. (L) Lower: Return minimum of all positive values only. (u) Upper: Return maximum of all values. (U) Upper: Return maximum or all negative values only. Upper case type B, C, G, M, P, F will use robust lter versions: i.e., replace outliers (2.5 L1 scale off median) with median during ltering. In the case of L|U it is possible that no data passes the initial sign test; in that case the lter will return 0.0. increment is used when series is NOT equidistantly sampled. Then increment will be the abscissae resolution, i.e., all abscissae will be rounded off to a multiple of increment. Alternatively, resample data with sample1d. Include Ends of time series in output. Default loses half the lter-width of data at each end. Input le(s) has header record(s). If used, the default number of header records is N_HEADER_RECS. Use Hi if only input data should have header records [Default will write out header records if the input data have them]. Blank lines and lines starting with # are always skipped. To ignore values; If an input value equals ignore_val it will be set to NaN. Checks for Lack of data condition. If input data has a gap exceeding width then no output will be given at that point [Default does not check Lack]. Sets number of columns in input and which column contains the independent variable (time). The left-most column is # 0, the right-most is # (n_cols - 1). [Default is n_cols = 2, t_col = 0; i.e., le has t, f(t) pairs]. assess Quality of output value by checking mean weight in convolution. Enter q_factor between 0 and 1. If mean weight < q_factor, output is suppressed at this point [Default does not check Quality].
OPTIONS
D
E H
I L N
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
FILTER1D(1)
FILTER1D(1)
Checks symmetry of data about window center. Enter a factor between 0 and 1. If ( (abs(n_left n_right)) / (n_left + n_right) ) > factor, then no output will be given at this point [Default does not check Symmetry]. Make evenly spaced timesteps from start to stop by int [Default uses input times]. Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"]. Selects binary input. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of columns in your binary input le if it exceeds the columns needed by the program. Or append c if the input le is netCDF. Optionally, append var1/var2/... to specify the variables to be read. Selects binary output. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of desired columns in your binary output le. [Default is same as input]. Special formatting of input and/or output columns (time or geographical data). Specify i or o to make this apply only to input or output [Default applies to both]. Give one or more columns (or column ranges) separated by commas. Append T (absolute calendar time), t (relative time in chosen TIME_UNIT since TIME_EPOCH), x (longitude), y (latitude), or f (oating point) to each column or column range item. Shorthand f[i|o]g means f[i|o]0x,1y (geographic coordinates).
T V bi
bo

EXAMPLES
To lter the data set in the le cruise.gmtd containing evenly spaced gravity, magnetics, topography, and distance (in m) with a 10 km Gaussian lter, removing outliers, and output a ltered value every 2 km between 0 and 100 km: lter1d cruise.gmtd T0/1.0e5/2000 FG10000 N4/3 V > ltered_cruise.gmtd Data along track often have uneven sampling and gaps which we do not want to interpolate using sample1d. To nd the median depth in a 50 km window every 25 km along the track of cruise v3312, stored in v3312.dt, checking for gaps of 10km and asymmetry of 0.3: lter1d v3312.dt FM50 T0/100000/25 L10 S0.3 > v3312_lt.dt
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), sample1d(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
FITCIRCLE(1)
FITCIRCLE(1)
NAME
tcircle nd mean position and pole of best-t great [or small] circle to points on a sphere.
SYNOPSIS
tcircle [ xyle ] Lnorm [ H[i][nrec] ] [ S[lat] ] [ V ] [ :[i|o] ] [ bi[s|S|d|D[ncol]|c[var1/...]] ] [ f[i|o]colinfo ]
DESCRIPTION
tcircle reads lon,lat [or lat,lon] values from the rst two columns on standard input [or xyle]. These are converted to Cartesian three-vectors on the unit sphere. Then two locations are found: the mean of the input positions, and the pole to the great circle which best ts the input positions. The user may choose one or both of two possible solutions to this problem. The rst is called L1 and the second is called L2. When the data are closely grouped along a great circle both solutions are similar. If the data have large dispersion, the pole to the great circle will be less well determined than the mean. Compare both solutions as a qualitative check. The L1 solution is so called because it approximates the minimization of the sum of absolute values of cosines of angular distances. This solution nds the mean position as the Fisher average of the data, and the pole position as the Fisher average of the cross-products between the mean and the data. Averaging cross-products gives weight to points in proportion to their distance from the mean, analogous to the "leverage" of distant points in linear regression in the plane. The L2 solution is so called because it approximates the minimization of the sum of squares of cosines of angular distances. It creates a 3 by 3 matrix of sums of squares of components of the data vectors. The eigenvectors of this matrix give the mean and pole locations. This method may be more subject to roundoff errors when there are thousands of data. The pole is given by the eigenvector corresponding to the smallest eigenvalue; it is the least-well represented factor in the data and is not easily estimated by either method. L Specify the desired norm as 1 or 2, or use L or L3 to see both solutions. ASCII [or binary, see b] le containing lon,lat [lat,lon] values in the rst 2 columns. If no le is specied, tcircle will read from standard input. Input le(s) has header record(s). If used, the default number of header records is N_HEADER_RECS. Use Hi if only input data should have header records [Default will write out header records if the input data have them]. Blank lines and lines starting with # are always skipped. Attempt to t a small circle instead of a great circle. The pole will be constrained to lie on the great circle connecting the pole of the best-t great circle and the mean location of the data. Optionally append the desired xed latitude of the small circle [Default will determine the latitude]. Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"]. Toggles between (longitude,latitude) and (latitude,longitude) input and/or output. [Default is (longitude,latitude)]. Append i to select input only or o to select output only. [Default affects both]. Selects binary input. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of columns in your binary input le if it exceeds the columns needed by the program. Or append c if the input le is netCDF. Optionally, append var1/var2/... to specify the variables to be read. [Default is 2 input columns]. Special formatting of input and/or output columns (time or geographical data). Specify i or o to make this apply only to input or output [Default applies to both]. Give one or more columns (or column ranges) separated by commas. Append T (absolute calendar time), t (relative time in chosen TIME_UNIT since TIME_EPOCH), x (longitude), y (latitude), or f (oating point) to each column or column range item. Shorthand f[i|o]g means f[i|o]0x,1y (geographic coordinates).
OPTIONS
xyle H
V : bi
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
FITCIRCLE(1)
FITCIRCLE(1)

EXAMPLES
Suppose you have lon,lat,grav data along a twisty ship track in the le ship.xyg. You want to project this data onto a great circle and resample it in distance, in order to lter it or check its spectrum. Do the following: tcircle ship.xyg L2 project ship.xyg Cox/oy Tpx/py S Fpz | sample1d S100 I1 > output.pg Here, ox/oy is the lon/lat of the mean from tcircle, and px/py is the lon/lat of the pole. The le output.pg has distance, gravity data sampled every 1 km along the great circle which best ts ship.xyg
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), project(1), sample1d(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GMT2RGB(1)
GMT2RGB(1)
NAME
gmt2rgb Converting a grid le, a raw, or a Sun raster le to r/g/b grids
SYNOPSIS
gmt2rgb inle Gtemplate [ Ccptle ] [ F ] [ Ixinc[m|c][/yinc[m|c]] ] [ Llayer ] [ Rxmin/xmax/ymin/ymax[r] ] [ V ] [ Wwidth/height[/n_bytes] ]
DESCRIPTION
gmt2rgb reads one of three types of input les: (1) A Sun 8-, 24-, or 32-bit raster le; we the write out the red, green, and blue components (0-255 range) to separate grid les. Since the raster le header is limited you may use the R, F, I options to set a complete header record [Default is simply based on the number of rows and columns]. (2) A binary 2-D grid le; we then convert the z-values to red, green, blue via the provided cpt le. Optionally, only write out one of the r, g, b, layers. (3) A RGB or RGBA raw raster le. Since raw rasterles have no header, you have to give the image dimensions via the W option. inle G The (1) Sun raster le, (2) 2-D binary grid le, or (3) raw raster le to be converted. Provide an output name template for the three output grids. The template should be a regular grid le name except it must contain the string %c which on output will be replaced by r, g, or b. name of the color palette table (for 2-D binary input grid only). Force pixel node registration [Default is gridline registration]. (Node registrations are dened in GMT Cookbook Appendix B on grid le formats.) x_inc [and optionally y_inc] is the grid spacing. Optionally, append a sufx modier. Geographical (degrees) coordinates: Append m to indicate arc minutes or c to indicate arc seconds. If one of the units e, k, i, or n is appended instead, the increment is assumed to be given in meter, km, miles, or nautical miles, respectively, and will be converted to the equivalent degrees longitude at the middle latitude of the region (the conversion depends on ELLIPSOID). If /y_inc is given but set to 0 it will be reset equal to x_inc; otherwise it will be converted to degrees latitude. All coordinates: If = is appended then the corresponding max x (east) or y (north) may be slightly adjusted to t exactly the given increment [by default the increment may be adjusted slightly to t the given domain]. Finally, instead of giving an increment you may specify the number of nodes desired by appending + to the supplied integer argument; the increment is then recalculated from the number of nodes and the domain. The resulting increment value depends on whether you have selected a gridline-registered or pixel-registered grid; see Appendix B for details. Note: if Rgrdle is used then grid spacing has already been initialized; use I to override the values. Output only the specied layer (r, g, or b). [Default outputs all 3 layers]. xmin, xmax, ymin, and ymax specify the Region of interest. For geographic regions, these limits correspond to west, east, south, and north and you may specify them in decimal degrees or in [+-]dd:mm[:ss.xxx][W|E|S|N] format. Append r if lower left and upper right map coordinates are given instead of w/e/s/n. The two shorthands Rg and Rd stand for global domain (0/360 and -180/+180 in longitude respectively, with -90/+90 in latitude). Alternatively, specify the name of an existing grid le and the R settings (and grid spacing, if applicable) are copied from the grid. For calendar time coordinates you may either give (a) relative time (relative to the selected TIME_EPOCH and in the selected TIME_UNIT; append t to JX|x), or (b) absolute time of the form [date]T[clock] (append T to JX|x). At least one of date and clock must be present; the T is always required. The date string must be of the form [-]yyyy[-mm[-dd]] (Gregorian calendar) or yyyy[-Www[-d]] (ISO week calendar), while the clock string must be of the form hh:mm:ss[.xxx]. The use of delimiters and their type and positions must be exactly as indicated (however, input, output and plot formats are customizable; see gmtdefaults). Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"]. Sets the size of the raw raster le. By default an RGB le (which has 3 bytes/pixel) is assumed. For RGBA les use n_bytes = 4. Use W for guessing the image size of a RGB raw le, and W=/=/4 if the raw image is of the RGBA type. Notice that this might be a bit slow because the
OPTIONS
C F I
L R
V W
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GMT2RGB(1)
GMT2RGB(1)
guessing algorithm makes uses of FFTs.
EXAMPLES
To use the color palette topo.cpt to create r, g, b component grids from hawaii_grv.grd le, use gmt2rgb hawaii_grv.grd Ctopo.cpt Ghawaii_grv_%c.grd To output the red component from the Sun raster radiation.ras le, use gmt2rgb radiation.ras Lr Gcomp_%c.grd
SEE ALSO
gmtdefaults(1), GMT (1), grdedit(1), grdimage(1), grdmath(1), grdview(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GMT_SHELL_FUNCTIONS.SH(1)
NAME
gmt_shell_functions.sh Practical functions to be used in GMT bourne shell scripts
SYNOPSIS
gmt_init_tmpdir gmt_remove_tmpdir gmt_clean_up [prex] gmt_message message gmt_abort message gmt_nrecords le(s) gmt_nelds string gmt_get_eld string gmt_get_region le(s) [options] gmt_get_gridregion le [options] gmt_get_map_width R J gmt_get_map_height R J gmt_set_psle le gmt_set_framename prex framenumber gmt_set_framenext framenumber
DESCRIPTION
gmt_shell_functions.sh provides a set of functions to Bourne (again) shell scripts in support of GMT. The calling shell script should include the following line, before the functions can be used: . gmt_shell_functions.sh Once included in a shell script, gmt_shell_functions.sh allows GMT users to do some scripting more easily than otherwise. The functions made available are: gmt_init_tmpdir Creates a temporary directory in /tmp or (when dened) in the directory specied by the environment variable TMPDIR. The name of the temporary directory is returned as environment variable GMT_TMPDIR. This function also causes GMT to run in isolation mode, i.e., all temporary les will be created in GMT_TMPDIR and the .gmtdefaults le will not be adjusted. gmt_remove_tmpdir Removes the temporary directory and unsets the GMT_TMPDIR environment variable. gmt_cleanup Remove all les and directories in which the current process number is part of the le name. If the optional prex is given then we also delete all les and directories that begins with the given prex. gmt_message Send a message to standard error. gmt_abort Send a message to standard error and exit the shell. gmt_nrecords Returns the total number of lines in le(s) gmt_nelds Returns the number of elds or words in string gmt_get_eld Returns the given eld in a string. Must pass string between double quotes to preserve it as one item.
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
gmt_get_region Returns the region in the form w/e/s/n based on the data in table le(s). Optionally add -Idx/dy to round off the answer. gmt_get_gridregion Returns the region in the form w/e/s/n based on the header of a grid le. Optionally add -Idx/dy to round off the answer. gmt_map_width Expects the user to give the desired -R J settings and returns the map width in the current measurement unit. gmt_map_height Expects the user to give the desired -R J settings and returns the map height in the current measurement unit. gmt_set_psle Create the output PostScript le name based on the base name of a given le (usually the script name $0). gmt_set_framename Returns a lexically ordered lename stem (i.e., no extension) given the le prex and the current frame number, using a width of 6 for the integer including leading zeros. Useful when creating animations and lexically sorted lenames are required. gmt_set_framenext Accepts the current frame integer counter and returns the next integer counter.
NOTES
1. These functions only work in the bourne shell (sh) and their derivatives (like ash, bash, ksh and zsh). These functions do not work in the C shell (csh) or their derivatives (like tcsh), and cannot be used in DOS batch scripts either. 2. gmt_shell_functions.sh were rst introduced in GMT version 4.2.2 and have since been regularly expanded with other practical scripting short-cuts. If you want to suggest other functions, please do so by mailing to the GMT mailing list: [email protected].
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), sh(1), bash(1), minmax(1), grdinfo(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GMTCOLORS(5)
GMTCOLORS(5)
NAME
gmtcolors Explanation of color codes in GMT
DESCRIPTION
Colors can be specied in GMT as arguments to commands, generally as part of the G or W options to select polygon ll or outline pen. Colors are also used in color pallette tables (cpt les) that help convert numerical values to colors. GMT allows several ways to represent a color: Colorname Specify one of the named colors below. All names are case-insensitive. R/G/B Specify Red, Green, and Blue levels. Each value is separated by a slash and is in the range from 0 (dark) to 255 (light). This representation is used to color monitors. #RRGGBB Specify Red, Green, and Blue levels in the way that it is done in HTML. Use two characters for each color channel, ranging from 00 (dark) to FF (light). Upper and lower case are allowed. Graylevel For shades of gray, R = G = B, and only one number needs to be used. This representation is popular with black and white printers. H-S-V Specify Hue in the range 0 to 360 (degrees), S saturation between 0 (not saturated) and 1 (fully saturated), and value V between 0 (dark) and 1 (light). Number are separated by hyphens. This representation can be helpful when hue varies a lot. C/M/Y/K Specify Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and blacK. Each number is in the range from 0 (no paint) to 1 (maximum paint). This representation is used by most color printers.
LIST OF COLORS
The following list contains the named colors that can be used in GMT and their equivalent color codes. R 255 248 255 255 253 250 250 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 240 245 240 240 230 255 255 25 G 250 248 250 245 245 240 235 239 235 228 218 222 228 250 248 255 255 255 255 248 230 240 228 25 B 250 255 240 238 230 230 215 213 205 196 185 173 181 205 220 240 240 250 255 255 250 245 225 112 Name snow ghostwhite oralwhite seashell oldlace linen antiquewhite papayawhip blanchedalmond bisque peachpuff navajowhite moccasin lemonchiffon cornsilk ivory honeydew mintcream azure aliceblue lavender lavenderblush mistyrose midnightblue
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GMTCOLORS(5)
GMTCOLORS(5)
0 0 100 72 106 123 132 0 65 0 0 30 70 0 135 135 119 119 112 112 176 173 224 176 175 95 0 72 64 0 0 47 47 102 127 0 144 143 46 60 32 152 0 124 0 127 0 173 50 154 34 107 85 189
0 0 149 61 90 104 112 0 105 0 0 144 130 191 206 206 136 136 128 128 196 216 255 224 238 158 206 209 224 255 139 79 79 205 255 100 238 188 139 179 178 251 255 252 255 255 250 255 205 205 139 142 107 183
128 128 237 139 205 238 255 205 225 255 139 255 180 255 235 250 153 153 144 144 222 230 255 230 238 160 209 204 208 255 139 79 79 170 212 0 144 143 87 113 170 152 127 0 0 0 154 47 50 50 34 35 47 107
navy navyblue cornowerblue darkslateblue slateblue mediumslateblue lightslateblue mediumblue royalblue blue darkblue dodgerblue steelblue deepskyblue skyblue lightskyblue lightslategray lightslategrey slategray slategrey lightsteelblue lightblue lightcyan powderblue paleturquoise cadetblue darkturquoise mediumturquoise turquoise cyan darkcyan darkslategray darkslategrey mediumaquamarine aquamarine darkgreen lightgreen darkseagreen seagreen mediumseagreen lightseagreen palegreen springgreen lawngreen green chartreuse mediumspringgreen greenyellow limegreen yellowgreen forestgreen olivedrab darkolivegreen darkkhaki
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GMTCOLORS(5)
GMTCOLORS(5)
240 238 238 255 250 255 128 255 218 184 188 205 139 160 205 222 245 245 244 210 210 178 235 165 120 233 250 255 255 255 255 255 240 255 255 255 255 139 255 255 255 255 219 176 199 208 139 255 255 238 218 221 186 153
230 232 221 255 250 255 128 215 165 134 143 92 69 82 133 184 245 222 164 180 105 34 190 42 60 150 128 160 192 165 140 127 128 99 69 0 128 0 20 105 192 182 112 48 21 32 0 0 128 130 112 160 85 50
140 170 130 224 210 0 0 0 32 11 143 92 19 45 63 135 220 179 96 140 30 34 85 42 30 122 114 122 128 0 0 80 128 71 0 0 128 0 147 180 203 193 147 96 133 144 139 255 255 238 214 221 211 204
khaki palegoldenrod lightgoldenrod lightyellow lightgoldenrodyellow yellow darkyellow gold goldenrod darkgoldenrod rosybrown indianred saddlebrown sienna peru burlywood beige wheat sandybrown tan chocolate rebrick lightbrown brown darkbrown darksalmon salmon lightsalmon lightorange orange darkorange coral lightcoral tomato orangered red lightred darkred deeppink hotpink pink lightpink palevioletred maroon mediumvioletred violetred darkmagenta magenta lightmagenta violet orchid plum mediumorchid darkorchid
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GMTCOLORS(5)
GMTCOLORS(5)
148 138 160 147 216 0 105 105 169 169 190 190 211 211 220 245 255 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 240
0 43 32 112 191 0 105 105 169 169 190 190 211 211 220 245 255 250 233 201 137 245 229 197 134 239 223 192 131 228 213 183 125 218 203 175 119 222 207 179 121 250 233 201 137 248 232 200 136 255 238 205 139 255
211 226 240 219 216 0 105 105 169 169 190 190 211 211 220 245 255 250 233 201 137 238 222 191 130 219 204 176 120 196 183 158 107 185 173 149 101 173 161 139 94 205 191 165 112 220 205 177 120 240 224 193 131 240
darkviolet blueviolet purple mediumpurple thistle black dimgray dimgrey darkgray darkgrey gray grey lightgrey lightgray gainsboro whitesmoke white snow1 snow2 snow3 snow4 seashell1 seashell2 seashell3 seashell4 antiquewhite1 antiquewhite2 antiquewhite3 antiquewhite4 bisque1 bisque2 bisque3 bisque4 peachpuff1 peachpuff2 peachpuff3 peachpuff4 navajowhite1 navajowhite2 navajowhite3 navajowhite4 lemonchiffon1 lemonchiffon2 lemonchiffon3 lemonchiffon4 cornsilk1 cornsilk2 cornsilk3 cornsilk4 ivory1 ivory2 ivory3 ivory4 honeydew1
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GMTCOLORS(5)
GMTCOLORS(5)
224 193 131 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 240 224 193 131 131 122 105 71 72 67 58 39 0 0 0 0 30 28 24 16 99 92 79 54 0 0 0 0 135 126 108 74 176 164 141 96 198 185 159 108 202 188 162
238 205 139 240 224 193 131 228 213 183 125 255 238 205 139 111 103 89 60 118 110 95 64 0 0 0 0 144 134 116 78 184 172 148 100 191 178 154 104 206 192 166 112 226 211 182 123 226 211 182 123 225 210 181
224 193 131 245 229 197 134 225 210 181 123 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205
honeydew2 honeydew3 honeydew4 lavenderblush1 lavenderblush2 lavenderblush3 lavenderblush4 mistyrose1 mistyrose2 mistyrose3 mistyrose4 azure1 azure2 azure3 azure4 slateblue1 slateblue2 slateblue3 slateblue4 royalblue1 royalblue2 royalblue3 royalblue4 blue1 blue2 blue3 blue4 dodgerblue1 dodgerblue2 dodgerblue3 dodgerblue4 steelblue1 steelblue2 steelblue3 steelblue4 deepskyblue1 deepskyblue2 deepskyblue3 deepskyblue4 skyblue1 skyblue2 skyblue3 skyblue4 lightskyblue1 lightskyblue2 lightskyblue3 lightskyblue4 slategray1 slategray2 slategray3 slategray4 lightsteelblue1 lightsteelblue2 lightsteelblue3
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GMTCOLORS(5)
GMTCOLORS(5)
110 191 178 154 104 224 209 180 122 187 174 150 102 152 142 122 83 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 151 141 121 82 127 118 102 69 193 180 155 105 84 78 67 46 154 144 124 84 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 127
123 239 223 192 131 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 245 229 197 134 245 229 197 134 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255
139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 212 198 170 116 193 180 155 105 159 148 128 87 154 144 124 84 127 118 102 69 0 0 0 0 0
lightsteelblue4 lightblue1 lightblue2 lightblue3 lightblue4 lightcyan1 lightcyan2 lightcyan3 lightcyan4 paleturquoise1 paleturquoise2 paleturquoise3 paleturquoise4 cadetblue1 cadetblue2 cadetblue3 cadetblue4 turquoise1 turquoise2 turquoise3 turquoise4 cyan1 cyan2 cyan3 cyan4 darkslategray1 darkslategray2 darkslategray3 darkslategray4 aquamarine1 aquamarine2 aquamarine3 aquamarine4 darkseagreen1 darkseagreen2 darkseagreen3 darkseagreen4 seagreen1 seagreen2 seagreen3 seagreen4 palegreen1 palegreen2 palegreen3 palegreen4 springgreen1 springgreen2 springgreen3 springgreen4 green1 green2 green3 green4 chartreuse1
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GMTCOLORS(5)
GMTCOLORS(5)
118 102 69 192 179 154 105 202 188 162 110 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205
238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 246 230 198 134 236 220 190 129 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 215 201 173 117 193 180 155 105 185 173 149 101 193 180 155 105 106 99 85 58 130 121 104 71 211 197 170
0 0 0 62 58 50 34 112 104 90 61 143 133 115 78 139 130 112 76 224 209 180 122 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 37 34 29 20 15 14 12 8 193 180 155 105 106 99 85 58 71 66 57 38 155 145 125
chartreuse2 chartreuse3 chartreuse4 olivedrab1 olivedrab2 olivedrab3 olivedrab4 darkolivegreen1 darkolivegreen2 darkolivegreen3 darkolivegreen4 khaki1 khaki2 khaki3 khaki4 lightgoldenrod1 lightgoldenrod2 lightgoldenrod3 lightgoldenrod4 lightyellow1 lightyellow2 lightyellow3 lightyellow4 yellow1 yellow2 yellow3 yellow4 gold1 gold2 gold3 gold4 goldenrod1 goldenrod2 goldenrod3 goldenrod4 darkgoldenrod1 darkgoldenrod2 darkgoldenrod3 darkgoldenrod4 rosybrown1 rosybrown2 rosybrown3 rosybrown4 indianred1 indianred2 indianred3 indianred4 sienna1 sienna2 sienna3 sienna4 burlywood1 burlywood2 burlywood3
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GMTCOLORS(5)
GMTCOLORS(5)
139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255
115 231 216 186 126 165 154 133 90 127 118 102 69 48 44 38 26 64 59 51 35 140 130 112 76 160 149 129 87 165 154 133 90 127 118 102 69 114 106 91 62 99 92 79 54 69 64 55 37 0 0 0 0 20
85 186 174 150 102 79 73 63 43 36 33 29 19 48 44 38 26 64 59 51 35 105 98 84 57 122 114 98 66 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 86 80 69 47 71 66 57 38 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 147
burlywood4 wheat1 wheat2 wheat3 wheat4 tan1 tan2 tan3 tan4 chocolate1 chocolate2 chocolate3 chocolate4 rebrick1 rebrick2 rebrick3 rebrick4 brown1 brown2 brown3 brown4 salmon1 salmon2 salmon3 salmon4 lightsalmon1 lightsalmon2 lightsalmon3 lightsalmon4 orange1 orange2 orange3 orange4 darkorange1 darkorange2 darkorange3 darkorange4 coral1 coral2 coral3 coral4 tomato1 tomato2 tomato3 tomato4 orangered1 orangered2 orangered3 orangered4 red1 red2 red3 red4 deeppink1
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GMTCOLORS(5)
GMTCOLORS(5)
238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 224 209 180 122 191 178 154 104 155 145 125 85 171 159 137
18 16 10 110 106 96 58 181 169 145 99 174 162 140 95 130 121 104 71 52 48 41 28 62 58 50 34 0 0 0 0 131 122 105 71 187 174 150 102 102 95 82 55 62 58 50 34 48 44 38 26 130 121 104
137 118 80 180 167 144 98 197 184 158 108 185 173 149 101 171 159 137 93 179 167 144 98 150 140 120 82 255 238 205 139 250 233 201 137 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205 139 255 238 205
deeppink2 deeppink3 deeppink4 hotpink1 hotpink2 hotpink3 hotpink4 pink1 pink2 pink3 pink4 lightpink1 lightpink2 lightpink3 lightpink4 palevioletred1 palevioletred2 palevioletred3 palevioletred4 maroon1 maroon2 maroon3 maroon4 violetred1 violetred2 violetred3 violetred4 magenta1 magenta2 magenta3 magenta4 orchid1 orchid2 orchid3 orchid4 plum1 plum2 plum3 plum4 mediumorchid1 mediumorchid2 mediumorchid3 mediumorchid4 darkorchid1 darkorchid2 darkorchid3 darkorchid4 purple1 purple2 purple3 purple4 mediumpurple1 mediumpurple2 mediumpurple3
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GMTCOLORS(5)
GMTCOLORS(5)
93 255 238 205 139 0 0 3 3 5 5 8 8 10 10 13 13 15 15 18 18 20 20 23 23 26 26 28 28 31 31 33 33 36 36 38 38 41 41 43 43 46 46 48 48 51 51 54 54 56 56 59 59 61
71 225 210 181 123 0 0 3 3 5 5 8 8 10 10 13 13 15 15 18 18 20 20 23 23 26 26 28 28 31 31 33 33 36 36 38 38 41 41 43 43 46 46 48 48 51 51 54 54 56 56 59 59 61
139 255 238 205 139 0 0 3 3 5 5 8 8 10 10 13 13 15 15 18 18 20 20 23 23 26 26 28 28 31 31 33 33 36 36 38 38 41 41 43 43 46 46 48 48 51 51 54 54 56 56 59 59 61
mediumpurple4 thistle1 thistle2 thistle3 thistle4 gray0 grey0 gray1 grey1 gray2 grey2 gray3 grey3 gray4 grey4 gray5 grey5 gray6 grey6 gray7 grey7 gray8 grey8 gray9 grey9 gray10 grey10 gray11 grey11 gray12 grey12 gray13 grey13 gray14 grey14 gray15 grey15 gray16 grey16 gray17 grey17 gray18 grey18 gray19 grey19 gray20 grey20 gray21 grey21 gray22 grey22 gray23 grey23 gray24
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
10
GMTCOLORS(5)
GMTCOLORS(5)
61 64 64 66 66 69 69 71 71 74 74 77 77 79 79 82 82 84 84 87 87 89 89 92 92 94 94 97 97 99 99 102 102 105 105 107 107 110 110 112 112 115 115 117 117 120 120 122 122 125 125 127 127 130
61 64 64 66 66 69 69 71 71 74 74 77 77 79 79 82 82 84 84 87 87 89 89 92 92 94 94 97 97 99 99 102 102 105 105 107 107 110 110 112 112 115 115 117 117 120 120 122 122 125 125 127 127 130
61 64 64 66 66 69 69 71 71 74 74 77 77 79 79 82 82 84 84 87 87 89 89 92 92 94 94 97 97 99 99 102 102 105 105 107 107 110 110 112 112 115 115 117 117 120 120 122 122 125 125 127 127 130
grey24 gray25 grey25 gray26 grey26 gray27 grey27 gray28 grey28 gray29 grey29 gray30 grey30 gray31 grey31 gray32 grey32 gray33 grey33 gray34 grey34 gray35 grey35 gray36 grey36 gray37 grey37 gray38 grey38 gray39 grey39 gray40 grey40 gray41 grey41 gray42 grey42 gray43 grey43 gray44 grey44 gray45 grey45 gray46 grey46 gray47 grey47 gray48 grey48 gray49 grey49 gray50 grey50 gray51
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
11
GMTCOLORS(5)
GMTCOLORS(5)
130 133 133 135 135 138 138 140 140 143 143 145 145 148 148 150 150 153 153 156 156 158 158 161 161 163 163 166 166 168 168 171 171 173 173 176 176 179 179 181 181 184 184 186 186 189 189 191 191 194 194 196 196 199
130 133 133 135 135 138 138 140 140 143 143 145 145 148 148 150 150 153 153 156 156 158 158 161 161 163 163 166 166 168 168 171 171 173 173 176 176 179 179 181 181 184 184 186 186 189 189 191 191 194 194 196 196 199
130 133 133 135 135 138 138 140 140 143 143 145 145 148 148 150 150 153 153 156 156 158 158 161 161 163 163 166 166 168 168 171 171 173 173 176 176 179 179 181 181 184 184 186 186 189 189 191 191 194 194 196 196 199
grey51 gray52 grey52 gray53 grey53 gray54 grey54 gray55 grey55 gray56 grey56 gray57 grey57 gray58 grey58 gray59 grey59 gray60 grey60 gray61 grey61 gray62 grey62 gray63 grey63 gray64 grey64 gray65 grey65 gray66 grey66 gray67 grey67 gray68 grey68 gray69 grey69 gray70 grey70 gray71 grey71 gray72 grey72 gray73 grey73 gray74 grey74 gray75 grey75 gray76 grey76 gray77 grey77 gray78
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
12
GMTCOLORS(5)
GMTCOLORS(5)
199 201 201 204 204 207 207 209 209 212 212 214 214 217 217 219 219 222 222 224 224 227 227 229 229 232 232 235 235 237 237 240 240 242 242 245 245 247 247 250 250 252 252 255 255
199 201 201 204 204 207 207 209 209 212 212 214 214 217 217 219 219 222 222 224 224 227 227 229 229 232 232 235 235 237 237 240 240 242 242 245 245 247 247 250 250 252 252 255 255
199 201 201 204 204 207 207 209 209 212 212 214 214 217 217 219 219 222 222 224 224 227 227 229 229 232 232 235 235 237 237 240 240 242 242 245 245 247 247 250 250 252 252 255 255
grey78 gray79 grey79 gray80 grey80 gray81 grey81 gray82 grey82 gray83 grey83 gray84 grey84 gray85 grey85 gray86 grey86 gray87 grey87 gray88 grey88 gray89 grey89 gray90 grey90 gray91 grey91 gray92 grey92 gray93 grey93 gray94 grey94 gray95 grey95 gray96 grey96 gray97 grey97 gray98 grey98 gray99 grey99 gray100 grey100
FURTHER INFORMATION
For more information on the use of color, read Appendix I of the GMT TECHNICAL REFERENCE AND COOKBOOK.
SEE ALSO
gmtdefaults(1), gmtlogo(1), grdcontour(1), grdvector(1), grdview(1), psbasemap(1), pscoast(1), pscontour(1), pshistogram(1), psimage(1), pslegend(1), psmask(1), psrose(1), pstext(1), pswiggle(1), psxy(1), psxyz(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
13
GMTCONVERT(1)
GMTCONVERT(1)
NAME
gmtconvert Converts, Pastes, and/or Extracts columns from ASCII and binary 1-D tables
SYNOPSIS
gmtconvert [ inputles ] [ A ] [ D[template] ] [ E[f|l] ] [ Fcols ] [ H[i][nrec] ] [ L ] [ I ] [ N ] [ S[]"search string" ] [ V ] [ :[i|o] ] [ b[i|o][s|S|d|D[ncol]|c[var1/...]] ] [ f[i|o]colinfo ] [ g[a]x|y|d|X|Y|D|[col]z[+|-]gap[u] ] [ m[i|o][ag] ]
DESCRIPTION
gmtconvert reads its standard input [or inputles] and writes out the desired information to standard output. It can do a combination of three things: (1) convert between binary and ASCII data tables, (2) paste corresponding records from multiple les into a single le, (3) extract a subset of the columns, (4) only extract segments whose header matches a text pattern search, (5) just list all multisegment headers and no data records, and (6) extract rst and last data record for each segment. Input (and hence output) may have multiple subheaders if m is selected, and ASCII tables may have regular headers as well. datale(s) ASCII (or binary, see bi) le(s) holding a number of data columns.
OPTIONS
A The records from the input les should be pasted horizontally, not appended vertically. [Default processes one le at the time]. Note for binary input, all the les you want to paste must have the same number of columns (as set with bi). For multiple segment data, dump each segment to a separate output le [Default writes a multiple segment le to stdout]. Append a format template for the individual le names; this template must contain a C format specier that can format an integer argument (the segment number); this is usually %d but could be %8.8d which gives leading zeros, etc. [Default is gmtconvert_segment_%d.d]. Only extract the rst and last record for each segment of interest [Default extracts all records]. Optionally, append f or l to only extract the rst or last record of each segment, respectively. Give a comma-separated list of desired columns or ranges (0 is rst column) [Default outputs all columns]. Input le(s) has header record(s). If used, the default number of header records is N_HEADER_RECS. Use Hi if only input data should have header records [Default will write out header records if the input data have them]. Blank lines and lines starting with # are always skipped. Invert the order of rows, i.e., output the nal records in reverse order, starting with the last and ending up with the rst input row [Default goes forward]. Only output a listing of all multisegment header records and no data records (requires m and ASCII data). Do not write records that only contain NaNs in every eld [Default writes all records]. Only output those segments whose header record contains the specied text string. To reverse the search, i.e., to output segments whose headers do not contain the specied pattern, use S. Should your pattern happen to start with you need to escape this character with a backslash [Default output all segments]. Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"]. Toggles between (longitude,latitude) and (latitude,longitude) input and/or output. [Default is (longitude,latitude)]. Append i to select input only or o to select output only. [Default affects both]. Selects binary input. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of columns in your binary input le if it exceeds the columns needed by the program. Or append c if the input le is netCDF. Optionally, append var1/var2/... to specify the variables to be read.
E F H
I L N S
V : bi
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GMTCONVERT(1)
GMTCONVERT(1)
bo
Selects binary output. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of desired columns in your binary output le. [Default is same as input]. Special formatting of input and/or output columns (time or geographical data). Specify i or o to make this apply only to input or output [Default applies to both]. Give one or more columns (or column ranges) separated by commas. Append T (absolute calendar time), t (relative time in chosen TIME_UNIT since TIME_EPOCH), x (longitude), y (latitude), or f (oating point) to each column or column range item. Shorthand f[i|o]g means f[i|o]0x,1y (geographic coordinates). Examine the spacing between consecutive data points in order to impose breaks in the line. Append x|X or y|Y to dene a gap when there is a large enough change in the x or y coordinates, respectively, or d|D for distance gaps; use upper case to calculate gaps from projected coordinates. For gap-testing on other columns use [col]z; if col is not prepended the it defaults to 2 (i.e., 3rd column). Append [+|-]gap and optionally a unit u. Regarding optional signs: -ve means previous minus current column value must exceed |gap to be a gap, +ve means current minus previous column value must exceed gap, and no sign means the absolute value of the difference must exceed gap. For geographic data (x|y|d), the unit u may be meter [Default], kilometer, miles, or nautical miles. For projected data (X|Y|D), choose from inch, centimeter, meter, or points [Default unit set by MEASURE_UNIT]. Note: For x|y|z with time data the unit is instead controlled by TIME_UNIT. Repeat the option to specify multiple criteria, of which any can be met to produce a line break. Issue an additional ga to indicate that all criteria must be met instead. Multiple segment le(s). Segments are separated by a special record. For ASCII les the rst character must be ag [Default is >]. For binary les all elds must be NaN and b must set the number of output columns explicitly. By default the m setting applies to both input and output. Use mi and mo to give separate settings to input and output.

EXAMPLES
To convert the binary le test.b (single precision) with 4 columns to ASCII: gmtconvert test.b bis4 > test.dat To convert the multiple segment ASCII table test.d to a double precision binary le: gmtconvert test.d m bo > test.b You have an ASCII table with 6 columns and you want to plot column 5 versus column 0. Try gmtconvert table.d F5,0 | psxy ... If the le instead is the binary le results.b which has 9 single-precision values per record, we extract the last column and columns 4-6 and write ASCII with the command gmtconvert results.b F8,4-6 -bi9s | psxy ... You want to plot the 2nd column of a 2-column le left.d versus the rst column of a le right.d: gmtconvert left.d right.d A F1,2 | psxy ...
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GMTCONVERT(1)
GMTCONVERT(1)
To extract all segments in the le big_le.d whose headers contain the string "RIDGE AXIS", try gmtconvert big_le.d m S"RIDGE AXIS" > subset.d
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), minmax(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GMTDEFAULTS(1)
GMTDEFAULTS(1)
NAME
gmtdefaults To list current GMT defaults
SYNOPSIS
gmtdefaults D[u|s] | L
DESCRIPTION
gmtdefaults lists the GMT parameter defaults if the option D is used. There are three ways to change some of the settings: (1) Use the command gmtset, (2) use any texteditor to edit the le .gmtdefaults4 in your home, /.gmt or current directory (if you do not have this le, run gmtdefaults -D > /.gmtdefaults4 to get one with the system default settings), or (3) override any parameter by specifying one or more PARAMETER=value statements on the commandline of any GMT command (PARAMETER and VALUE are any combination listed below). The rst two options are permanent changes until explicitly changed back, while the last option is ephemeral and only applies to the single GMT command that received the override. GMT can provide default values in US or SI units. This choice is determined by the contents of the gmt.conf le in GMTs share directory. D L Print the system GMT defaults to standard output. Append u for US defaults or s for SI defaults. [D alone gives current choice in gmt.conf]. Print the users currently active defaults to standard output. Your currently active defaults come from the .gmtdefaults4 le in the current working directory, if present; else from the .gmtdefaults4 le in your home directory, if present; else from the le /.gmt/.gmtdefaults4, if present; else from the system defaults set at the time GMT was compiled.
GMT PARAMETERS
The following is a list of the parameters that are user-denable in GMT. The parameter names are always given in UPPER CASE. The parameter values are case-insensitive unless otherwise noted. The system defaults are given in brackets [ for SI (and US) ]. Those marked * can be set on the command line as well (the corresponding option is given in parentheses). Note that default distances and lengths below are given in both cm or inch; the chosen default depends on your choice of default unit (see MEASURE_UNIT). You can explicitly specify the unit used for distances and lengths by appending c (cm), i (inch), m (meter), or p (points). When no unit is indicated the value will be assumed to be in the unit set by MEASURE_UNIT. Note that the printer resolution DOTS_PR_INCH is always the number of dots or pixels per inch. Several parameters take only TRUE or FALSE. ANNOT_FONT_PRIMARY Font used for upper annotations, etc. [Helvetica]. Specify either the font number or the font name (case sensitive!). The 35 available fonts are: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Helvetica Helvetica-Bold Helvetica-Oblique Helvetica-BoldOblique Times-Roman Times-Bold Times-Italic Times-BoldItalic Courier Courier-Bold Courier-Oblique Courier-BoldOblique Symbol AvantGarde-Book AvantGarde-BookOblique AvantGarde-Demi AvantGarde-DemiOblique
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GMTDEFAULTS(1)
GMTDEFAULTS(1)
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
Bookman-Demi Bookman-DemiItalic Bookman-Light Bookman-LightItalic Helvetica-Narrow Helvetica-Narrow-Bold Helvetica-Narrow-Oblique Helvetica-Narrow-BoldOblique NewCenturySchlbk-Roman NewCenturySchlbk-Italic NewCenturySchlbk-Bold NewCenturySchlbk-BoldItalic Palatino-Roman Palatino-Italic Palatino-Bold Palatino-BoldItalic ZapfChancery-MediumItalic ZapfDingbats
ANNOT_FONT_SIZE_PRIMARY Font size (> 0) for map annotations [14p]. ANNOT_FONT_SECONDARY Font to use for time axis secondary annotations. See ANNOT_FONT_PRIMARY for available fonts [Helvetica]. ANNOT_FONT_SIZE_SECONDARY Font size (> 0) for time axis secondary annotations [16p]. ANNOT_MIN_ANGLE If the angle between the map boundary and the annotation baseline is less than this minimum value (in degrees), the annotation is not plotted (this may occur for certain oblique projections.) Give a value in the range 090. [20] ANNOT_MIN_SPACING If an annotation would be plotted less than this minimum distance from its closest neighbor, the annotation is not plotted (this may occur for certain oblique projections.) [0] ANNOT_OFFSET_PRIMARY Distance from end of tickmark to start of annotation [0.2c (or 0.075i)]. A negative offset will place the annotation inside the map border. ANNOT_OFFSET_SECONDARY Distance from base of primary annotation to the top of the secondary annotation [0.2c (or 0.075i)] (Only applies to time axes with both primary and secondary annotations). BASEMAP_AXES Sets which axes to draw and annotate. Case sensitive: Upper case means both draw and annotate, lower case means draw axis only. [WESN]. BASEMAP_FRAME_RGB Color used to draw map boundaries and annotations. Give a red/green/blue triplet, with each element in the 0255 range. Prepend + to replicate this color to the tick-, grid-, and frame-pens. [0/0/0] (black). BASEMAP_TYPE Choose between inside, graph, plain and fancy (thick boundary, alternating black/white frame; append + for rounded corners) [fancy]. For some map projections (e.g., Oblique Mercator), plain is the only option even if fancy is set as default. In general, fancy only applies to situations where the projected x and y directions parallel the lon and lat directions (e.g., rectangular projections,
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GMTDEFAULTS(1)
GMTDEFAULTS(1)
polar projections). For situations where all boundary ticks and annotations must be inside the maps (e.g., for preparing geotiffs), chose inside. Finally, graph is used for linear projections only and will extend the axis by 7.5% and add arrow heads. CHAR_ENCODING Names the eight bit character set being used for text in les and in command line parameters. This allows GMT to ensure that the PostScript output generates the correct characters on the plot.. Choose from Standard, Standard+, ISOLatin1, ISOLatin1+, and ISO-8859-x (where x is in the ranges 1-10 or 13-15). See Appendix F for details [ISOLatin1+ (or Standard+)]. COLOR_BACKGROUND Color used for the background of images (i.e., when z < lowest colortable entry). Give a red/green/blue triplet, with each element in the 0255 range. [0/0/0] (black) COLOR_FOREGROUND Color used for the foreground of images (i.e., when z > highest colortable entry). Give a red/green/blue triplet, with each element in the 0255 range. [255/255/255] (white) COLOR_IMAGE Selects which operator to use when rendering bit-mapped color images. Due to the lack of the colorimage operator in some PostScript implementations, as well as some PostScript editors inability to handle color gradations, GMT offers two different options: adobe (Adobes colorimage denition) [Default]. tiles (Plot image as many individual rectangles). COLOR_MODEL Selects if color palette les contain RGB values (r,g,b in 0-255 range), HSV values (h in 0-360, s,v in 0-1 range), or CMYK values (c,m,y,k in 0-1 range). A COLOR_MODEL setting in the color palette le will override this setting. Internally, color interpolation takes place directly on the RGB values which can give unexpected hues, whereas interpolation directly on the HSV values better preserves the hues. Prepend the prex "+" to force interpolation in the selected color system (does not apply to the CMYK system). For this additional option, the defaults take precedence over the color palette le [rgb]. COLOR_NAN Color used for the non-dened areas of images (i.e., where z == NaN). Give a red/green/blue triplet, with each element in the 0255 range. [128/128/128] (gray) D_FORMAT Output format (C language printf syntax) to be used when printing double precision oating point numbers. For geographic coordinates, see OUTPUT_DEGREE_FORMAT. [%.12g]. DEGREE_SYMBOL Determines what symbol is used to plot the degree symbol on geographic map annotations. Choose between ring, degree, colon, or none [ring]. DOTS_PR_INCH Resolution of the plotting device (dpi). Note that in order to be as compact as possible, GMT PostScript output uses integer formats only so the resolution should be set depending on what output device you are using. E.g, using 300 and sending the output to a Linotype 300 phototypesetter (2470 dpi) will not take advantage of the extra resolution (i.e., positioning on the page and line thicknesses are still only done in steps of 1/300 inch; of course, text will look smoother) [300]. ELLIPSOID The (case sensitive) name of the ellipsoid used for the map projections [WGS-84]. Choose among: WGS-84 : World Geodetic System [Default] (1984) OSU91A : Ohio State University (1991)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GMTDEFAULTS(1)
GMTDEFAULTS(1)
OSU86F : Ohio State University (1986) Engelis : Goddard Earth Models (1985) SGS-85 : Soviet Geodetic System (1985) TOPEX : Used commonly for altimetry (1990) MERIT-83 : United States Naval Observatory (1983) GRS-80 : International Geodetic Reference System (1980) Hughes-1980 : Hughes Aircraft Company for DMSP SSM/I grid products (1980) Lerch : For geoid modelling (1979) ATS77 : Average Terrestrial System, Canada Maritime provinces (1977) IAG-75 : International Association of Geodesy (1975) Indonesian : Applies to Indonesia (1974) WGS-72 : World Geodetic System (1972) NWL-10D : Naval Weapons Lab (Same as WGS-72) (1972) South-American : Applies to South America (1969) Fischer-1968 : Used by NASA for Mercury program (1968) Modied-Mercury-1968 : Same as Fischer-1968 (1968) GRS-67 : International Geodetic Reference System (1967) International-1967 : Worldwide use (1967) WGS-66 : World Geodetic System (1966) NWL-9D : Naval Weapons Lab (Same as WGS-66) (1966) Australian : Applies to Australia (1965) APL4.9 : Appl. Physics (1965) Kaula : From satellite tracking (1961) Hough : Applies to the Marshall Islands (1960) WGS-60 : World Geodetic System (1960) Fischer-1960 : Used by NASA for Mercury program (1960) Mercury-1960 : Same as Fischer-1960 (1960) Modied-Fischer-1960 : Applies to Singapore (1960) Fischer-1960-SouthAsia : Same as Modied-Fischer-1960 (1960) Krassovsky : Used in the (now former) Soviet Union (1940) War-Ofce : Developed by G. T. McCaw (1926) International-1924 : Worldwide use (1924) Hayford-1909 : Same as the International 1924 (1909) Helmert-1906 : Applies to Egypt (1906) Clarke-1880 : Applies to most of Africa, France (1880) Clarke-1880-Arc1950 : Modied Clarke-1880 for Arc 1950 (1880) Clarke-1880-IGN : Modied Clarke-1880 for IGN (1880) Clarke-1880-Jamaica : Modied Clarke-1880 for Jamaica (1880) Clarke-1880-Merchich : Modied Clarke-1880 for Merchich (1880) Clarke-1880-Palestine : Modied Clarke-1880 for Palestine (1880) Andrae : Applies to Denmark and Iceland (1876) Clarke-1866 : Applies to North America, the Philippines (1866) Clarke-1866-Michigan : Modied Clarke-1866 for Michigan (1866) Struve : Friedrich Georg Wilhelm Struve (1860) Clarke-1858 : Clarkes early ellipsoid (1858) Airy : Applies to Great Britain (1830) Airy-Ireland : Applies to Ireland in 1965 (1830) Modied-Airy : Same as Airy-Ireland (1830) Bessel : Applies to Central Europe, Chile, Indonesia (1841) Bessel-Schwazeck : Applies to Namibia (1841) Bessel-Namibia : Same as Bessel-Schwazeck (1841) Bessel-NGO1948 : Modied Bessel for NGO 1948 (1841) Everest-1830 : India, Burma, Pakistan, Afghanistan, Thailand (1830) Everest-1830-Kalianpur : Modied Everest for Kalianpur (1956) (1830)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GMTDEFAULTS(1)
GMTDEFAULTS(1)
Everest-1830-Kertau : Modied Everest for Kertau, Malaysia & Singapore (1830) Everest-1830-Timbalai : Modied Everest for Timbalai, Sabah Sarawak (1830) Everest-1830-Pakistan : Modied Everest for Pakistan (1830) Walbeck : First least squares solution by Finnish astronomer (1819) Plessis : Old ellipsoid used in France (1817) Delambre : Applies to Belgium (1810) CPM : Comm. des Poids et Mesures, France (1799) Maupertius : Really old ellipsoid used in France (1738) Sphere : The mean radius in WGS-84 (for spherical/plate tectonics applications) (1984) Moon : Moon (IAU2000) (2000) Mercury : Mercury (IAU2000) (2000) Venus : Venus (IAU2000) (2000) Mars : Mars (IAU2000) (2000) Jupiter : Jupiter (IAU2000) (2000) Saturn : Saturn (IAU2000) (2000) Uranus : Uranus (IAU2000) (2000) Neptune : Neptune (IAU2000) (2000) Pluto : Pluto (IAU2000) (2000) Note that for some global projections, GMT may use a spherical approximation of the ellipsoid chosen, setting the attening to zero, and using a mean radius. A warning will be given when this happens. If a different ellipsoid name than those mentioned here is given, GMT will attempt to parse the name to extract the semi-major axis (a in m) and the attening. Formats allowed are: a implies a zero attening a,inv_f where inv_f is the inverse attening a,b=b where b is the semi-minor axis (in m) a,f=f where f is the attening This way a custom ellipsoid (e.g., those used for other planets) may be used. Further note that coordinate transformations in mapproject can also specify specic datums; see the mapproject man page for further details and how to view ellipsoid and datum parameters. FIELD_DELIMITER This setting determines what character will separate ASCII output data columns written by GMT. Choose from tab, space, comma, and none [tab]. FRAME_PEN Pen attributes used to draw plain map frame in dpi units or points (append p) [1.25p]. FRAME_WIDTH Width (> 0) of map borders for fancy map frame [0.2c (or 0.075i)]. GLOBAL_X_SCALE Global x-scale (> 0) to apply to plot-coordinates before plotting. Normally used to shrink the entire output down to t a specic height/width [1.0]. GLOBAL_Y_SCALE Same, but for y-coordinates [1.0]. GRID_CROSS_SIZE_PRIMARY Size (>= 0) of grid cross at lon-lat intersections. 0 means draw continuous gridlines instead [0]. GRID_CROSS_SIZE_SECONDARY Size (>= 0) of grid cross at secondary lon-lat intersections. 0 means draw continuous gridlines instead [0].
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GMTDEFAULTS(1)
GMTDEFAULTS(1)
GRID_PEN_PRIMARY Pen attributes used to draw grid lines in dpi units or points (append p) [0.25p]. GRID_PEN_SECONDARY Pen attributes used to draw grid lines in dpi units or points (append p) [0.5p]. GRIDFILE_FORMAT Default le format for grids, with optional scale, offset and invalid value, written as ff/scale/offset/invalid. The 2-letter format indicator can be one of [bcnsr][bsifd]. The rst letter indicates native GMT binary, old format netCDF, COARDS-compliant netCDF, Surfer format or Sun Raster format. The second letter stands for byte, short, int, oat and double, respectively. When /invalid is omitted the appropriate value for the given format is used (NaN or largest negative). When /scale/offset is omitted, /1.0/0.0 is used. [nf]. GRIDFILE_SHORTHAND If TRUE, all grid le names are examined to see if they use the le extension shorthand discussed in Section 4.17 of the GMT Technical Reference and Cookbook. If FALSE, no lename expansion is done [FALSE]. HEADER_FONT Font to use when plotting headers. See ANNOT_FONT_PRIMARY for available fonts [Helvetica]. HEADER_FONT_SIZE Font size (> 0) for header [36p]. HEADER_OFFSET Distance from top of axis annotations (or axis label, if present) to base of plot header [0.5c (or 0.1875i)]. HISTORY If TRUE, passes the history of past common command options via the hidden .gmtcommands4 le [TRUE]. HSV_MAX_SATURATION Maximum saturation (01) assigned for most positive intensity value [0.1]. HSV_MIN_SATURATION Minimum saturation (01) assigned for most negative intensity value [1.0]. HSV_MAX_VALUE Maximum value (01) assigned for most positive intensity value [1.0]. HSV_MIN_VALUE Minimum value (01) assigned for most negative intensity value [0.3]. INPUT_CLOCK_FORMAT Formatting template that indicates how an input clock string is formatted. This template is then used to guide the reading of clock strings in data elds. To properly decode 12-hour clocks, append am or pm (or upper case) to match your data records. As examples, try hh:mm, hh:mm:ssAM, etc. [hh:mm:ss]. INPUT_DATE_FORMAT Formatting template that indicates how an input date string is formatted. This template is then used to guide the reading of date strings in data elds. You may specify either Gregorian calendar format or ISO week calendar format. Gregorian calendar: Use any combination of yyyy (or yy for 2-digit years; if so see Y2K_OFFSET_YEAR), mm (or o for abbreviated month name in the current time language), and dd, with or without delimiters. For day-of-year data, use jjj instead of mm and/or dd. Examples can be ddmmyyyy, yy-mm-dd, dd-o-yyyy, yyyy/dd/mm, yyyy-jjj, etc. ISO Calendar: Expected template is yyyy[-]W[-]ww[-]d, where ww is ISO week and d is ISO week day. Either template must be consistent, e.g., you cannot specify months if you dont specify years. Examples are yyyyWwwd, yyyy-Www, etc. [yyyy-mm-dd].
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GMTDEFAULTS(1)
GMTDEFAULTS(1)
INTERPOLANT Determines if linear (linear), Akimas spline (akima), natural cubic spline (cubic) or no interpolation (none) should be used for 1-D interpolations in various programs [akima]. IO_HEADER (* H) Species whether input/output ASCII les have header record(s) or not [FALSE]. LABEL_FONT Font to use when plotting labels below axes. See ANNOT_FONT_PRIMARY for available fonts [Helvetica]. LABEL_FONT_SIZE Font size (> 0) for labels [24p]. LABEL_OFFSET Distance from base of axis annotations to the top of the axis label [0.3c (or 0.1125i)]. LINE_STEP Determines the maximum length (> 0) of individual straight line-segments when drawing arcuate lines [0.025c (or 0.01i)] MAP_SCALE_FACTOR Changes the default map scale factor used for the Polar Stereographic [0.9996], UTM [0.9996], and Transverse Mercator [1] projections in order to minimize areal distortion. Provide a new scale-factor or leave as default. MAP_SCALE_HEIGHT Sets the height (> 0) on the map of the map scale bars drawn by various programs [0.2c (or 0.075i)]. MEASURE_UNIT Sets the unit length. Choose between cm, inch, m, and point. [cm]. Note that, in GMT, one point is dened as 1/72 inch (the PostScript denition), while it is often dened as 1/72.27 inch in the typesetting industry. There is no universal denition. N_COPIES (* c) Number of plot copies to make [1]. N_HEADER_RECS Species how many header records to expect if H is turned on [1]. NAN_RECORDS Determines what happens when input records containing NaNs for x or y (and in some cases z) are read. Choose between skip, which will simply report how many bad records were skipped, and pass [Default], which will pass these records on to the calling programs. For most programs this will result in output records with NaNs as well, but some will interpret these NaN records to indicate gaps in a series; programs may then use that information to detect segmentation (if applicable). OBLIQUE_ANNOTATION This integer is a sum of 6 bit ags (most of which only are relevant for oblique projections): If bit 1 is set (1), annotations will occur wherever a gridline crosses the map boundaries, else longitudes will be annotated on the lower and upper boundaries only, and latitudes will be annotated on the left and right boundaries only. If bit 2 is set (2), then longitude annotations will be plotted horizontally. If bit 3 is set (4), then latitude annotations will be plotted horizontally. If bit 4 is set (8), then oblique tickmarks are extended to give a projection equal to the specied tick_length. If bit 5 is set (16), tickmarks will be drawn normal to the border regardless of gridline angle. If bit 6 is set (32), then latitude annotations will be plotted parallel to the border. To set a combination of these, add up the values in parentheses. [1].
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GMTDEFAULTS(1)
GMTDEFAULTS(1)
OUTPUT_CLOCK_FORMAT Formatting template that indicates how an output clock string is to be formatted. This template is then used to guide the writing of clock strings in data elds. To use a oating point format for the smallest unit (e.g., seconds), append .xxx, where the number of x indicates the desired precision. If no oating point is indicated then the smallest specied unit will be rounded off to nearest integer. For 12-hour clocks, append am, AM, a.m., or A.M. (GMT will replace a|A with p|P for pm). If your template starts with a leading hyphen (-) then each integer item (y,m,d) will be printed without leading zeros (default uses xed width formats). As examples, try hh:mm, hh.mm.ss, hh:mm:ss.xxxx, hha.m., etc. [hh:mm:ss]. OUTPUT_DATE_FORMAT Formatting template that indicates how an output date string is to be formatted. This template is then used to guide the writing of date strings in data elds. You may specify either Gregorian calendar format or ISO week calendar format. Gregorian calendar: Use any combination of yyyy (or yy for 2-digit years; if so see Y2K_OFFSET_YEAR), mm (or o for abbreviated month name in the current time language), and dd, with or without delimiters. For day-of-year data, use jjj instead of mm and/or dd. As examples, try yy/mm/dd, yyyy=jjj, dd-o-yyyy, dd-mm-yy, yy-mm, etc. ISO Calendar: Expected template is yyyy[-]W[-]ww[-]d, where ww is ISO week and d is ISO week day. Either template must be consistant, e.g., you cannot specify months if you dont specify years. As examples, try yyyyWww, yy-W-ww-d, etc. If your template starts with a leading hyphen (-) then each integer item (y,m,d) will be printed without leading zeros (default uses xed width formats) [yyyy-mm-dd]. OUTPUT_DEGREE_FORMAT Formatting template that indicates how an output geographical coordinate is to be formatted. This template is then used to guide the writing of geographical coordinates in data elds. The template is in general of the form [+|-]D or [+|-]ddd[:mm[:ss]][.xxx][F]. By default, longitudes will be reported in the -180/+180 range. The various terms have the following purpose: + D ddd : mm ss F Output longitude in the 0 to 360 range [-180/+180] Output longitude in the -360 to 0 range [-180/+180] Use D_FORMAT for oating point degrees. Fixed format integer degrees delimiter used Fixed format integer arc minutes Fixed format integer arc seconds Encode sign using WESN sufx
The default is +D. PAGE_COLOR Sets the color of the imaging background, i.e., the paper. Give a red/green/blue triplet, with each element in the 0255 range. [255/255/255] (white). PAPER_MEDIA Sets the physical format of the current plot paper [A4 (or Letter)]. The following formats (and their widths and heights in points) are recognized (Additional site-specic formats may be specied in the gmt_custom_media.conf le in $GMT_SHAREDIR/conf or /.gmt; see that le for details): Media A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 width 2380 1684 1190 842 595 421 height 3368 2380 1684 1190 842 595
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GMTDEFAULTS(1)
GMTDEFAULTS(1)
A6 297 A7 210 A8 148 A9 105 A10 74 B0 2836 B1 2004 B2 1418 B3 1002 B4 709 B5 501 archA 648 archB 864 archC 1296 archD 1728 archE 2592 sa 612 haletter 396 statement note 540 letter 612 legal 612 11x17 792 tabloid 792 ledger 1224
421 297 210 148 105 4008 2836 2004 1418 1002 709 864 1296 1728 2592 3456 936 612 396 720 792 1008 1224 1224 792
612
For a completely custom format (e.g., for large format plotters) you may also specify Custom_WxH, where W and H are in points unless you append a unit to each dimension (c, i, m or p [Default]). To force the printer to request a manual paper feed, append - to the media name, e.g., A3- will require the user to insert a A3 paper into the printers manual feed slot. To indicate you are making an EPS le, append + to the media name. Then, GMT will attempt to issue a tight bounding box [Default Bounding Box is the paper dimension]. PAGE_ORIENTATION (* P) Sets the orientation of the page. Choose portrait or landscape [landscape]. PLOT_CLOCK_FORMAT Formatting template that indicates how an output clock string is to be plotted. This template is then used to guide the formatting of clock strings in plot annotations. See OUTPUT_CLOCK_FORMAT for details. [hh:mm:ss]. PLOT_DATE_FORMAT Formatting template that indicates how an output date string is to be plotted. This template is then used to guide the plotting of date strings in data elds. See OUTPUT_DATE_FORMAT for details. In addition, you may use a single o instead of mm (to plot month name) and u instead of W[-]ww to plot "Week ##". Both of these text strings will be affected by the TIME_LANGUAGE, TIME_FORMAT_PRIMARY and TIME_FORMAT_SECONDARY setting. [yyyymm-dd]. PLOT_DEGREE_FORMAT Formatting template that indicates how an output geographical coordinate is to be plotted. This template is then used to guide the plotting of geographical coordinates in data elds. See OUTPUT_DEGREE_FORMAT for details. In addition, you can append A which plots the absolute value of the coordinate. The default is ddd:mm:ss. Not all items may be plotted as this depends on the annotation interval.
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GMTDEFAULTS(1)
GMTDEFAULTS(1)
POLAR_CAP Controls the appearance of gridlines near the poles for all azimuthal projections and a few others in which the geographic poles are plotted as points (Lambert Conic, Hammer, Mollweide, Sinusoidal, and van der Grinten). Specify either none (in which case there is no special handling) or pc_lat/pc_dlon. In that case, normal gridlines are only drawn between the latitudes -pc_lat/+pc_lat, and above those latitudes the gridlines are spaced at the (presumably coarser) pc_dlon interval; the two domains are separated by a small circle drawn at the pc_lat latitude [85/90]. Note for r-theta (polar) projection where r = 0 is at the center of the plot the meaning of the cap is reversed, i.e., the default 85/90 will draw a r = 5 radius circle at the center of the map with less frequent radial lines there. PS_COLOR Determines whether PostScript output should use RGB, HSV, CMYK, or GRAY when specifying color [rgb]. Note if HSV is selected it does not apply to images which in that case uses RGB. When selecting GRAY, all colors will be converted to gray scale using YIQ (television) conversion. PS_IMAGE_COMPRESS Determines if PostScript images are compressed using the Run-Length Encoding scheme (rle), Lempel-Ziv-Welch compression (lzw), or not at all (none) [lzw]. PS_IMAGE_FORMAT Determines whether images created in PostScript should use ASCII or binary format. The latter takes up less space and executes faster but may choke some printers, especially those off serial ports. Select ascii or bin [ascii]. PS_LINE_CAP Determines how the ends of a line segment will be drawn. Choose among a butt cap (default) where there is no projection beyond the end of the path, a round cap where a semicircular arc with diameter equal to the linewidth is drawn around the end points, and square cap where a half square of size equal to the linewidth extends beyond the end of the path [butt]. PS_LINE_JOIN Determines what happens at kinks in line segments. Choose among a miter join where the outer edges of the strokes for the two segments are extended until they meet at an angle (as in a picture frame; if the angle is too acute, a bevel join is used instead, with threshold set by PS_MITER_LIMIT), round join where a circular arc is used to ll in the cracks at the kinks, and bevel join which is a miter join that is cut off so kinks are triangular in shape [miter]. PS_MITER_LIMIT Sets the threshold angle in degrees (integer in 0-180 range) used for mitered joins only. When the angle between joining line segments is smaller than the threshold the corner will be bevelled instead of mitered. The default threshold is 35 degrees. Setting the threshold angle to 0 implies the PostScript default of about 11 degrees. Setting the threshold angle to 180 causes all joins to be beveled. PS_VERBOSE If TRUE we will issue comments in the PostScript le that explain the logic of operations. These are useful if you need to edit the le and make changes; otherwise you can set it to FALSE which yields a somewhat slimmer PostScript le [FALSE]. TICK_LENGTH The length of a tickmark. Normally, tickmarks are drawn on the outside of the map boundaries. To select interior tickmarks, use a negative tick_length [0.2c (or 0.075i)]. TICK_PEN Pen attributes to be used for tickmarks in dpi units or points (append p) [0.5p].
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
10
GMTDEFAULTS(1)
GMTDEFAULTS(1)
TIME_EPOCH Species the value of the calendar and clock at the origin (zero point) of relative time units (see TIME_UNIT). It is a string of the form yyyy-mm-ddT[hh:mm:ss] (Gregorian) or yyyy-WwwddT[hh:mm:ss] (ISO) Default is 2000-01-01T12:00:00, the epoch of the J2000 system. TIME_FORMAT_PRIMARY Controls how primary month-, week-, and weekday-names are formatted. Choose among full, abbreviated, and character. If the leading f, a, or c are replaced with F, A, and C the entire annotation will be in upper case. TIME_FORMAT_SECONDARY Controls how secondary month-, week-, and weekday-names are formatted. Choose among full, abbreviated, and character. If the leading f, a, or c are replaced with F, A, and C the entire annotation will be in upper case. TIME_INTERVAL_FRACTION Determines if partial intervals at the start and end of an axis should be annotated. If the range of the partial interval exceeds the specied fraction of the normal interval stride we will place the annotation centered on the partial interval [0.5]. TIME_IS_INTERVAL Used when input calendar data should be truncated and adjusted to the middle of the relevant interval. In the following discussion, the unit u can be one of these time units: (y year, o month, u ISO week, d day, h hour, m minute, and c second). TIME_IS_INTERVAL can have any of the following three values: (1) OFF [Default]. No adjustment, time is decoded as given. (2) +nu. Activate interval adjustment for input by truncate to previous whole number of n units and then center time on the following interval. (3) -nu. Same, but center time on the previous interval. For example, with TIME_IS_INTERVAL = +1o, an input data string like 1999-12 will be interpreted to mean 1999-12-15T12:00:00.0 (exactly middle of December), while if TIME_IS_INTERVAL = OFF then that date is interpreted to mean 1999-12-01T00:00:00.0 (start of December) [OFF]. TIME_LANGUAGE Language to use when plotting calendar items such as months and days. Select from: BR Brazilian Portuguese CN1 Simplied Chinese CN2 Traditional Chinese DE German DK Danish EH Basque ES Spanish FI Finnish FR French GR Greek HI Hawaiian HU Hungarian IE Irish IL Hebrew IS Icelandic IT Italian JP Japanese NL Dutch NO Norwegian PL Polish PT Portuguese RU Russian SE Swedish SG Scottish Gaelic
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
11
GMTDEFAULTS(1)
GMTDEFAULTS(1)
TO TR UK US
Tongan Turkish British English US English
If your language is not supported, please examine the $GMT_SHAREDIR/time/us.d le and make a similar le. Please submit it to the GMT Developers for ofcial inclusion. Custom language les can be placed in directories $GMT_SHAREDIR/time or /.gmt. TIME_SYSTEM Shorthand for a combination of TIME_EPOCH and TIME_UNIT, specifying which time epoch the relative time refers to and what the units are. Choose from one of the preset systems below (epoch and units are indicated): JD -4713-11-25T12:00:00 d (Julian Date) MJD 1858-11-27T00:00:00 d (Modied Julian Date) J2000 2000-01-01T12:00:00 d (Astronomical time) S1985 1985-01-01T00:00:00 c (Altimetric time) UNIX 1970-01-01T00:00:00 c (UNIX time) RD0001 0001-01-01T00:00:00 c RATA 0000-12-31T00:00:00 d This parameter is not stored in the .gmtdefaults4 le but is translated to the respective values of TIME_EPOCH and TIME_UNIT. TIME_UNIT Species the units of relative time data since epoch (see TIME_EPOCH). Choose y (year assumes all years are 365.2425 days), o (month - assumes all months are of equal length y/12), d (day), h (hour), m (minute), or c (second) [d]. TIME_WEEK_START When weeks are indicated on time axes, this parameter determines the rst day of the week for Gregorian calendars. (The ISO weekly calendar always begins weeks with Monday.) [Monday (or Sunday)]. TRANSPARENCY Makes printed material transparent. Specify transparency in percent: 0 is opaque (normal overlay plotting), 100 is fully transparent (i.e., nothing will show). Use either as a pair (stroke/ll) to set the transparency of stroked material (lines) or lled material (polygons) separately, or use a single number to set both to the same value [0]. Warning: Most printers and PostScript viewers can not print or will not show transparency. They will simply ignore your attempt to create transparency and will plot any material as opaque. Ghostscript and all its derivatives like ps2raster, Apples Preview and the CUPS printing system are among those programs incapable of dealing with transparency. If you want to view transparent material you need to use Acrobat Distiller to create a PDF le. Note that the settings of Acrobat Distiller need to be changed to make transparency effective: change /AllowTransparency to true in the .joboptions le. UNIX_TIME (* U) Species if a UNIX system time stamp should be plotted at the lower left corner of the plot [FALSE]. UNIX_TIME_POS (* U) Sets the justication and the position of the UNIX time stamp box relative to the current plots lower left corner of the plot [BL/-2c/-2c (or BL/-0.75i/-0.75i)]. UNIX_TIME_FORMAT Denes the format of the time information in the UNIX time stamp. This format is parsed by the C function strftime, so that virtually any text can be used (even not containing any time information) [%Y %b %d %H:%M:%S].
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
12
GMTDEFAULTS(1)
GMTDEFAULTS(1)
VECTOR_SHAPE Determines the shape of the head of a vector. Normally (i.e., for vector_shape = 0), the head will be triangular, but can be changed to an arrow (1) or an open V (2). Intermediate settings give something in between. Negative values (up to -2) are allowed as well [0]. VERBOSE (* V) Determines if GMT programs should display run-time information or run silently [FALSE]. X_AXIS_LENGTH Sets the default length (> 0) of the x-axis [25c (or 9i)]. X_ORIGIN (* X) Sets the x-coordinate of the origin on the paper for a new plot [2.5c (or 1i)]. For an overlay, the default offset is 0. XY_TOGGLE (* :) Set if the rst two columns of input and output les contain (latitude,longitude) or (y,x) rather than the expected (longitude,latitude) or (x,y). FALSE means we have (x,y) both on input and output. TRUE means both input and output should be (y,x). IN means only input has (y,x), while OUT means only output should be (y,x). [FALSE]. Y_AXIS_LENGTH Sets the default length (> 0) of the y-axis [15c (or 6i)]. Y_ORIGIN (* Y) Sets the y-coordinate of the origin on the paper for a new plot [2.5c (or 1i)]. For an overlay, the default offset is 0. Y_AXIS_TYPE Determines if the annotations for a y-axis (for linear projections) should be plotted horizontally (hor_text) or vertically (ver_text) [hor_text]. Y2K_OFFSET_YEAR When 2-digit years are used to represent 4-digit years (see various DATE_FORMATs), Y2K_OFFSET_YEAR gives the rst year in a 100-year sequence. For example, if Y2K_OFFSET_YEAR is 1729, then numbers 29 through 99 correspond to 1729 through 1799, while numbers 00 through 28 correspond to 1800 through 1828. [1950]. SPECIFYING PENS pen The attributes of lines and symbol outlines as dened by pen is a comma delimetered list of width, color and texture, each of which is optional. width can be indicated as a measure (points, centimeters, inches) or as faint, thin[ner|nest], thick[er|est], fat[ter|test], or obese. color species a gray shade or color (see SPECIFYING COLOR below). texture is a combination of dashes - and dots .. SPECIFYING FILL ll The attribute ll species the solid shade or solid color (see SPECIFYING COLOR below) or the pattern used for lling polygons. Patterns are specied as pdpi/pattern, where pattern gives the number of the built-in pattern (1-90) or the name of a Sun 1-, 8-, or 24-bit raster le. The dpi sets the resolution of the image. For 1-bit rasters: use Pdpi/pattern for inverse video, or append :Fcolor[B[color]] to specify fore- and background colors (use color = - for transparency). See GMT Cookbook & Technical Reference Appendix E for information on individual patterns. SPECIFYING COLOR color The color of lines, areas and patterns can be specied by a valid color name; by a gray shade (in the range 0255); by a decimal color code (r/g/b, each in range 0255; h-s-v, ranges 0360, 01, 01; or c/m/y/k, each in range 01); or by a hexadecimal color code (#rrggbb, as used in HTML). See the gmtcolors manpage for more information and a full list of color names.
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
13
GMTDEFAULTS(1)
GMTDEFAULTS(1)
EXAMPLES
To get a copy of the GMT parameter defaults in your home directory, run gmtdefaults D > /.gmtdefaults4 You may now change the settings by editing this le using a text editor of your choice, or use gmtset to change specied parameters on the command line.
BUGS
If you have typographical errors in your .gmtdefaults4 le(s), a warning message will be issued, and the GMT defaults for the affected parameters will be used.
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), gmtcolors(5), gmtget(1), gmtset(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
14
GMTGET(1)
GMTGET(1)
NAME
gmtget To list a single GMT parameter
SYNOPSIS
gmtget PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
gmtget will list the value of a single GMT default parameter.
EXAMPLE
To list the value of the parameter PS_VERBOSE: gmtget PS_VERBOSE
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), gmtdefaults(1), gmtset(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GMTLOGO(1)
GMTLOGO(1)
NAME
gmtlogo Adding a GMT graphics logo overlay to an illustration
SYNOPSIS
gmtlogo dx dy scale [ Gll ] [ W[pen] ] >> plot.ps
DESCRIPTION
This scrips appends the GMT logo to an "open" PostScript le. The logo is 2 times scale wide and scale high and will be positioned with the lower left corner at the position (dx,dy) relative to the current plot origin.
OPTIONS
G W Select color or pattern for lling the underlying box [Default is no ll]. (See SPECIFYING FILL below). Set pen attributes for the outline of the box [Default is no outline]. (See SPECIFYING PENS below).
SPECIFYING PENS pen The attributes of lines and symbol outlines as dened by pen is a comma delimetered list of width, color and texture, each of which is optional. width can be indicated as a measure (points, centimeters, inches) or as faint, thin[ner|nest], thick[er|est], fat[ter|test], or obese. color species a gray shade or color (see SPECIFYING COLOR below). texture is a combination of dashes - and dots .. SPECIFYING FILL ll The attribute ll species the solid shade or solid color (see SPECIFYING COLOR below) or the pattern used for lling polygons. Patterns are specied as pdpi/pattern, where pattern gives the number of the built-in pattern (1-90) or the name of a Sun 1-, 8-, or 24-bit raster le. The dpi sets the resolution of the image. For 1-bit rasters: use Pdpi/pattern for inverse video, or append :Fcolor[B[color]] to specify fore- and background colors (use color = - for transparency). See GMT Cookbook & Technical Reference Appendix E for information on individual patterns. SPECIFYING COLOR color The color of lines, areas and patterns can be specied by a valid color name; by a gray shade (in the range 0255); by a decimal color code (r/g/b, each in range 0255; h-s-v, ranges 0360, 01, 01; or c/m/y/k, each in range 01); or by a hexadecimal color code (#rrggbb, as used in HTML). See the gmtcolors manpage for more information and a full list of color names.
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), gmtcolors(5), psimage(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GMTMATH(1)
GMTMATH(1)
NAME
gmtmath Reverse Polish Notation calculator for data tables
SYNOPSIS
gmtmath [ At_f(t).d ] [ Ccols ] [ Fcols ] [ H[i][nrec] ] [ I ] [ Nn_col/t_col ] [ Q ] [ S[f|l] ] [ Tt_min/t_max/t_inc[+]|tle ] [ V ] [ b[i|o][s|S|d|D[ncol]|c[var1/...]] ] [ f[i|o]colinfo ] [ m[i|o][ag] ] operand [ operand ] OPERATOR [ operand ] OPERATOR ... = [ outle ]
DESCRIPTION
gmtmath will perform operations like add, subtract, multiply, and divide on one or more table data les or constants using Reverse Polish Notation (RPN) syntax (e.g., Hewlett-Packard calculator-style). Arbitrarily complicated expressions may therefore be evaluated; the nal result is written to an output le [or standard output]. When two data tables are on the stack, each element in le A is modied by the corresponding element in le B. However, some operators only require one operand (see below). If no data tables are used in the expression then options T, N can be set (and optionally b to indicate the data domain). If STDIN is given, <stdin> will be read and placed on the stack as if a le with that content had been given on the command line. By default, all columns except the "time" column are operated on, but this can be changed (see C). operand If operand can be opened as a le it will be read as an ASCII (or binary, see bi) table data le. If not a le, it is interpreted as a numerical constant or a special symbol (see below). The special argument STDIN means that stdin will be read and placed on the stack; STDIN can appear more than once if necessary. outle The name of a table data le that will hold the nal result. If not given then the output is sent to stdout.
OPERATORS Choose among the following 131 operators. "args" are the number of input and output arguments. Operator args ABS 11 ACOS ACOSH ACOT ACSC ADD AND ASEC ASIN ASINH ATAN ATAN2 ATANH BEI 11 BER 11 CEIL CHICRIT CHIDIST COL CORRCOEFF COS 11 COSD COSH COT Returns abs (A). 11 acos (A). 11 acosh (A). 11 acot (A). 11 acsc (A). 21 A + B. 21 NaN if A and B == NaN, B if A == NaN, else A. 11 asec (A). 11 asin (A). 11 asinh (A). 11 atan (A). 21 atan2 (A, B). 11 atanh (A). bei (A). ber (A). 11 ceil (A) (smallest integer >= A). 21 Critical value for chi-squared-distribution, with alpha = A and n = B. 21 chi-squared-distribution P(chi2,n), with chi2 = A and n = B. 11 Places column A on the stack. 21 Correlation coefcient r(A, B). cos (A) (A in radians). 11 cos (A) (A in degrees). 11 cosh (A). 11 cot (A) (A in radians).
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GMTMATH(1)
GMTMATH(1)
COTD CPOISS B. CSC 11 CSCD D2DT2 D2R 11 DDT DILOG DIV 21 DUP 12 EQ 21 ERF 11 ERFC ERFINV EXCH EXP 11 FACT FCRIT FDIST FLIPUD FLOOR FMOD GE 21 GT 21 HYPOT I0 11 I1 11 IN 21 INRANGE INT 11 INV 11 ISNAN J0 11 J1 11 JN 21 K0 11 K1 11 KEI 11 KER KN 21 KURT LE 21 LMSSCL LOG LOG10 LOG1P LOG2 LOWER LRAND LSQFIT LT 21 MAD MAX
11 21
cot (A) (A in degrees). Cumulative Poisson distribution F(x,lambda), with x = A and lambda =
csc (A) (A in radians). 11 csc (A) (A in degrees). 11 d2(A)/dt2 2nd derivative. Converts Degrees to Radians. 11 d(A)/dt Central 1st derivative. 11 dilog (A). A / B. Places duplicate of A on the stack. 1 if A == B, else 0. Error function erf (A). 11 Complementary Error function erfc (A). 11 Inverse error function of A. 22 Exchanges A and B on the stack. exp (A). 11 A! (A factorial). 31 Critical value for F-distribution, with alpha = A, n1 = B, and n2 = C. 31 F-distribution Q(F,n1,n2), with F = A, n1 = B, and n2 = C. 11 Reverse order of each column. 11 oor (A) (greatest integer <= A). 21 A % B (remainder after truncated division). 1 if A >= B, else 0. 1 if A > B, else 0. 21 hypot (A, B) = sqrt (A*A + B*B). Modied Bessel function of A (1st kind, order 0). Modied Bessel function of A (1st kind, order 1). Modied Bessel function of A (1st kind, order B). 31 1 if B <= A <= C, else 0. Numerically integrate A. 1 / A. 11 1 if A == NaN, else 0. Bessel function of A (1st kind, order 0). Bessel function of A (1st kind, order 1). Bessel function of A (1st kind, order B). Modied Kelvin function of A (2nd kind, order 0). Modied Bessel function of A (2nd kind, order 1). kei (A). 11 ker (A). Modied Bessel function of A (2nd kind, order B). 11 Kurtosis of A. 1 if A <= B, else 0. 11 LMS scale estimate (LMS STD) of A. 11 log (A) (natural log). 11 log10 (A) (base 10). 11 log (1+A) (accurate for small A). 11 log2 (A) (base 2). 11 The lowest (minimum) value of A. 21 Laplace random noise with mean A and std. deviation B. 10 Let current table be [A | b]; return least squares solution x = A \ b. 1 if A < B, else 0. 11 Median Absolute Deviation (L1 STD) of A. 21 Maximum of A and B.
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GMTMATH(1)
GMTMATH(1)
MEAN 11 Mean value of A. MED 11 Median value of A. MIN 21 Minimum of A and B. MOD 21 A mod B (remainder after oored division). MODE 11 Mode value (Least Median of Squares) of A. MUL 21 A * B. NAN 21 NaN if A == B, else A. NEG 11 -A. NEQ 21 1 if A != B, else 0. NOT 11 NaN if A == NaN, 1 if A == 0, else 0. NRAND 21 Normal, random values with mean A and std. deviation B. OR 21 NaN if A or B == NaN, else A. PLM 31 Associated Legendre polynomial P(A) degree B order C. PLMg 3 1 Normalized associated Legendre polynomial P(A) degree B order C (geophysical convention). POP 10 Delete top element from the stack. POW 21 A B. PQUANT 21 The Bth Quantile (0-100%) of A. PSI 11 Psi (or Digamma) of A. PV 31 Legendre function Pv(A) of degree v = real(B) + imag(C). QV 31 Legendre function Qv(A) of degree v = real(B) + imag(C). R2 21 R2 = A2 + B2. R2D 11 Convert Radians to Degrees. RAND 21 Uniform random values between A and B. RINT 11 rint (A) (nearest integer). ROOTS 21 Treats col A as f(t) = 0 and returns its roots. ROTT 21 Rotate A by the (constant) shift B in the t-direction. SEC 11 sec (A) (A in radians). SECD 11 sec (A) (A in degrees). SIGN 11 sign (+1 or -1) of A. SIN 11 sin (A) (A in radians). SINC 11 sinc (A) (sin (pi*A)/(pi*A)). SIND 11 sin (A) (A in degrees). SINH 11 sinh (A). SKEW 11 Skewness of A. SQR 11 A2. SQRT 11 sqrt (A). STD 11 Standard deviation of A. STEP 11 Heaviside step function H(A). STEPT 11 Heaviside step function H(t-A). SUB 21 A - B. SUM 11 Cumulative sum of A. TAN 11 tan (A) (A in radians). TAND 11 tan (A) (A in degrees). TANH 11 tanh (A). TCRIT 21 Critical value for Students t-distribution, with alpha = A and n = B. TDIST 21 Students t-distribution A(t,n), with t = A, and n = B. TN 21 Chebyshev polynomial Tn(-1<A<+1) of degree B. UPPER 11 The highest (maximum) value of A. XOR 21 B if A == NaN, else A. Y0 11 Bessel function of A (2nd kind, order 0). Y1 11 Bessel function of A (2nd kind, order 1). YN 21 Bessel function of A (2nd kind, order B). ZCRIT 11 Critical value for the normal-distribution, with alpha = A.
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GMTMATH(1)
GMTMATH(1)
ZDIST
11
Cumulative normal-distribution C(x), with x = A.
SYMBOLS The following symbols have special meaning: PI 3.1415926... E 2.7182818... EULER 0.5772156... TMIN Minimum t value TMAX Maximum t value TINC t increment N The number of records T Table with t-coordinates
OPTIONS
A C Requires N and will partially initialize a table with values from the given le containing t and f(t) only. The t is placed in column t_col while f(t) goes into column n_col - 1 (see N). Select the columns that will be operated on until next occurrence of C. List columns separated by commas; ranges like 1,3-5,7 are allowed. C (no arguments) resets the default action of using all columns except time column (see N). Ca selects all columns, including time column, while Cr reverses (toggles) the current choices. Give a comma-separated list of desired columns or ranges that should be part of the output (0 is rst column) [Default outputs all columns]. Input le(s) has header record(s). If used, the default number of header records is N_HEADER_RECS. Use Hi if only input data should have header records [Default will write out header records if the input data have them]. Blank lines and lines starting with # are always skipped. Reverses the output row sequence from ascending time to descending [ascending]. Select the number of columns and the column number that contains the "time" variable. Columns are numbered starting at 0 [2/0]. Quick mode for scalar calculation. Shorthand for Ca N1/0 T0/0/1. Only report the rst or last row of the results [Default is all rows]. This is useful if you have computed a statistic (say the MODE) and only want to report a single number instead of numerous records with identical values. Append l to get the last row and f to get the rst row only [Default]. Required when no input les are given. Sets the t-coordinates of the rst and last point and the equidistant sampling interval for the "time" column (see N). Append + if you are specifying the number of equidistant points instead. If there is no time column (only data columns), give T with no arguments; this also implies Ca. Alternatively, give the name of a le whose rst column contains the desired t-coordinates which may be irregular. Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"]. Selects binary input. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of columns in your binary input le if it exceeds the columns needed by the program. Or append c if the input le is netCDF. Optionally, append var1/var2/... to specify the variables to be read. Selects binary output. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of desired columns in your binary output le. [Default is same as input, but see F] Multiple segment le(s). Segments are separated by a special record. For ASCII les the rst character must be ag [Default is >]. For binary les all elds must be NaN and b must set the number of output columns explicitly. By default the m setting applies to both input and output. Use mi and mo to give separate settings to input and output.
F H
I N Q S
V bi
bo
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GMTMATH(1)
GMTMATH(1)

NOTES ON OPERATORS
(1) The operators PLM and PLMg calculate the associated Legendre polynomial of degree L and order M in x which must satisfy -1 <= x <= +1 and 0 <= M <= L. x, L, and M are the three arguments preceding the operator. PLM is not normalized and includes the Condon-Shortley phase (-1)M. PLMg is normalized in the way that is most commonly used in geophysics. The C-S phase can be added by using -M as argument. PLM will overow at higher degrees, whereas PLMg is stable until ultra high degrees (at least 3000). (2) Files that have the same names as some operators, e.g., ADD, SIGN, =, etc. should be identied by prepending the current directory (i.e., ./LOG). (3) The stack depth limit is hard-wired to 100. (4) All functions expecting a positive radius (e.g., LOG, KEI, etc.) are passed the absolute value of their argument. (5) The DDT and D2DT2 functions only work on regularly spaced data. (6) All derivatives are based on central nite differences, with natural boundary conditions. (7) ROOTS must be the last operator on the stack, only followed by =.
EXAMPLES
To take the square root of the content of the second data column being piped through gmtmath by process1 and pipe it through a 3rd process, use process1 | gmtmath STDIN SQRT = | process3 To take log10 of the average of 2 data les, use gmtmath le1.d le2.d ADD 0.5 MUL LOG10 = le3.d Given the le samples.d, which holds seaoor ages in m.y. and seaoor depth in m, use the relation depth(in m) = 2500 + 350 * sqrt (age) to print the depth anomalies: gmtmath samples.d T SQRT 350 MUL 2500 ADD SUB = | lpr To take the average of columns 1 and 4-6 in the three data sets sizes.1, sizes.2, and sizes.3, use gmtmath C1,4-6 sizes.1 sizes.2 ADD sizes.3 ADD 3 DIV = ave.d To take the 1-column data set ages.d and calculate the modal value and assign it to a variable, try set mode_age = gmtmath S T ages.d MODE = To evaluate the dilog(x) function for coordinates given in the le t.d: gmtmath Tt.d T DILOG = dilog.d
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GMTMATH(1)
GMTMATH(1)
To use gmtmath as a RPN Hewlett-Packard calculator on scalars (i.e., no input les) and calculate arbitrary expressions, use the Q option. As an example, we will calculate the value of Kei (((1 + 1.75)/2.2) + cos (60)) and store the result in the shell variable z: set z = gmtmath Q 1 1.75 ADD 2.2 DIV 60 COSD ADD KEI = To use gmtmath as a general least squares equation solver, imagine that the current table is the augmented matrix [ A | b ] and you want the least squares solution x to the matrix equation A * x = b. The operator LSQFIT does this; it is your job to populate the matrix correctly rst. The A option will facilitate this. Suppose you have a 2-column le ty.d with t and b(t) and you would like to t a the model y(t) = a + b*t + c*H(t-t0), where H is the Heaviside step function for a given t0 = 1.55. Then, you need a 4-column augmented table loaded with t in column 0 and your observed y(t) in column 3. The calculation becomes gmtmath N4/1 Aty.d -C0 1 ADD C2 1.55 STEPT ADD Ca LSQFIT = solution.d Note we use the C option to select which columns we are working on, then make active all the columns we need (here all of them, with Ca) before calling LSQFIT. The second and fourth columns (col numbers 1 and 3) are preloaded with t and y(t), respectively, the other columns are zero. If you already have a precalculated table with the augmented matrix [ A | b ] in a le (say lsqsys.d), the least squares solution is simply gmtmath T lsqsys.d LSQFIT = solution.d
REFERENCES
Abramowitz, M., and I. A. Stegun, 1964, Handbook of Mathematical Functions, Applied Mathematics Series, vol. 55, Dover, New York. Holmes, S. A., and W. E. Featherstone, 2002, A unied approach to the Clenshaw summation and the recursive computation of very high degree and order normalised associated Legendre functions. Journal of Geodesy, 76, 279-299. Press, W. H., S. A. Teukolsky, W. T. Vetterling, and B. P. Flannery, 1992, Numerical Recipes, 2nd edition, Cambridge Univ., New York. Spanier, J., and K. B. Oldman, 1987, An Atlas of Functions, Hemisphere Publishing Corp.
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), grdmath(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GMTSELECT(1)
GMTSELECT(1)
NAME
gmtselect Select data subsets based on multiple spatial criteria
SYNOPSIS
gmtselect [ inles ] [ Amin_area[/min_level/max_level][+r|l][ppercent] ] [ C[f]dist/ptle ] [ Dresolution[+] ] [ Fpolygonle ] [ H[i][nrec] ] [ I[crsz] ] [ Jparameters ] [ L[p]dist/linele ] [ Nmaskvalues[o] ] [ Rwest/east/south/north[r] ] [ V ] [ Zmin/max] ] [ :[i|o] ] [ b[i|o][s|S|d|D[ncol]|c[var1/...]] ] [ f[i|o]colinfo ] [ m[i|o][ag] ]
DESCRIPTION
gmtselect is a lter that reads (longitude, latitude) positions from the rst 2 columns of inles [or standard input] and uses a combination of 1-6 criteria to pass or reject the records. Records can be selected based on whether or not they are 1) inside a rectangular region (R [and J]), 2) within dist km of any point in ptle, 3) within dist km of any line in linele, 4) inside one of the polygons in the polygonle, 5) inside geographical features (based on coastlines), or 6) has z-values within a given range. The sense of the tests can be reversed for each of these 6 criteria by using the I option. See option : on how to read (latitude,longitude) les. inles ASCII (or binary, see b) data le(s) to be operated on. If not given, standard input is read.
OPTIONS
No space between the option ag and the associated arguments. A Features with an area smaller than min_area in km2 or of hierarchical level that is lower than min_level or higher than max_level will not be plotted [Default is 0/0/4 (all features)]. Level 2 (lakes) contains regular lakes and wide river bodies which we normally include as lakes; append +r to just get river-lakes or +l to just get regular lakes (requires GSHHS 2.0.1 or higher). Finally, append +ppercent to exclude polygons whose percentage area of the corresponding full-resolution feature is less than percent (requires GSHHS 2.0 or higher). See GSHHS INFORMATION below for more details. Ignored unless N is set. Pass all records whose location is within dist of any of the points in the ASCII le ptle. If dist is zero then the 3rd column of ptle must have each points individual radius of inuence. Distances are Cartesian and in user units; specify fg to indicate spherical distances in km. Use Cf to indicate you want at Earth distances (quicker but approximate) rather than geodesic distances (slower but exact). If ELLIPSOID is spherical then geodesics become great circles (faster to compute than geodesic). Alternatively, if R and J are used then geographic coordinates are projected to map coordinates (in cm, inch, m, or points, as determined by MEASURE_UNIT) before Cartesian distances are compared to dist. Ignored unless N is set. Selects the resolution of the coastline data set to use ((f)ull, (h)igh, (i)ntermediate, (l)ow, or (c)rude). The resolution drops off by 80% between data sets. [Default is l]. Append + to automatically select a lower resolution should the one requested not be available [abort if not found]. Note that because the coastlines differ in details it is not guaranteed that a point will remain inside [or outside] when a different resolution is selected. Pass all records whose location is within one of the closed polygons in the multiple-segment le polygonle. For spherical polygons (lon, lat), make sure no consecutive points are separated by 180 degrees or more in longitude. Note that polygonle must be in ASCII regardless of whether b is used. Input le(s) has header record(s). If used, the default number of header records is N_HEADER_RECS. Use Hi if only input data should have header records [Default will write out header records if the input data have them]. Blank lines and lines starting with # are always skipped. Reverses the sense of the test for each of the criteria specied: c select records NOT inside any points circle of inuence. f select records NOT inside any of the polygons. l select records NOT within the specied distance of any line.
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GMTSELECT(1)
GMTSELECT(1)
r select records NOT inside the specied rectangular region. s select records NOT considered inside as specied by N (and A, D). z select records NOT within the range specied by Z. J Selects the map projection. Scale is UNIT/degree, 1:xxxxx, or width in UNIT (upper case modier). UNIT is cm, inch, or m, depending on the MEASURE_UNIT setting in .gmtdefaults4, but this can be overridden on the command line by appending c, i, or m to the scale/width value. When central meridian is optional, default is center of longitude range on R option. Default standard parallel is the equator. For map height, max dimension, or min dimension, append h, +, or to the width, respectively. More details can be found in the psbasemap man pages. CYLINDRICAL PROJECTIONS: Jclon0/lat0/scale (Cassini) Jcyl_stere/[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Stereographic) Jj[lon0/]scale (Miller) Jm[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Mercator) Jmlon0/lat0/scale (Mercator - Give meridian and standard parallel) Jo[a]lon0/lat0/azimuth/scale (Oblique Mercator - point and azimuth) Jo[b]lon0/lat0/lon1/lat1/scale (Oblique Mercator - two points) Joclon0/lat0/lonp/latp/scale (Oblique Mercator - point and pole) Jq[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Equidistant) Jtlon0/[lat0/]scale (TM - Transverse Mercator) Juzone/scale (UTM - Universal Transverse Mercator) Jy[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Equal-Area) CONIC PROJECTIONS: Jblon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Albers) Jdlon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Conic Equidistant) Jllon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Lambert Conic Conformal) Jpoly/[lon0/[lat0/]]scale ((American) Polyconic) AZIMUTHAL PROJECTIONS: Jalon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Lambert Azimuthal Equal-Area) Jelon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Azimuthal Equidistant) Jflon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Gnomonic) Jglon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Orthographic) Jglon0/lat0/altitude/azimuth/tilt/twist/Width/Height/scale (General Perspective). Jslon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (General Stereographic) MISCELLANEOUS PROJECTIONS: Jh[lon0/]scale (Hammer) Ji[lon0/]scale (Sinusoidal) Jkf[lon0/]scale (Eckert IV) Jk[s][lon0/]scale (Eckert VI) Jn[lon0/]scale (Robinson) Jr[lon0/]scale (Winkel Tripel) Jv[lon0/]scale (Van der Grinten) Jw[lon0/]scale (Mollweide) NON-GEOGRAPHICAL PROJECTIONS:
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GMTSELECT(1)
GMTSELECT(1)
Jp[a]scale[/origin][r|z] (Polar coordinates (theta,r)) Jxx-scale[d|l|ppow|t|T][/y-scale[d|l|ppow|t|T]] (Linear, log, and power scaling) L Pass all records whose location is within dist of any of the line segments in the ASCII multiplesegment le linele. If dist is zero then the 2nd column of each sub-header in the ptle must have each liness individual distance value. Distances are Cartesian and in user units; specify fg to indicate spherical distances in km. If ELLIPSOID is spherical then geodesics become great circles (faster to compute than geodesic). Alternatively, if R and J are used then geographic coordinates are projected to map coordinates (in cm, inch, m, or points, as determined by MEASURE_UNIT) before Cartesian distances are compared to dist. Use Lp to ensure only points whose orthogonal projections onto the nearest line-segment fall within the segments endpoints [Default considers points "beyond" the lines endpoints. Pass all records whose location is inside specied geographical features. Specify if records should be skipped (s) or kept (k) using 1 of 2 formats: Nwet/dry. Nocean/land/lake/island/pond. Append o to let points exactly on feature boundaries be considered outside the feature [Default is inside]. [Default is s/k/s/k/s (i.e., s/k), which passes all points on dry land]. xmin, xmax, ymin, and ymax specify the Region of interest. For geographic regions, these limits correspond to west, east, south, and north and you may specify them in decimal degrees or in [+-]dd:mm[:ss.xxx][W|E|S|N] format. Append r if lower left and upper right map coordinates are given instead of w/e/s/n. The two shorthands Rg and Rd stand for global domain (0/360 and -180/+180 in longitude respectively, with -90/+90 in latitude). Alternatively, specify the name of an existing grid le and the R settings (and grid spacing, if applicable) are copied from the grid. For calendar time coordinates you may either give (a) relative time (relative to the selected TIME_EPOCH and in the selected TIME_UNIT; append t to JX|x), or (b) absolute time of the form [date]T[clock] (append T to JX|x). At least one of date and clock must be present; the T is always required. The date string must be of the form [-]yyyy[-mm[-dd]] (Gregorian calendar) or yyyy[-Www[-d]] (ISO week calendar), while the clock string must be of the form hh:mm:ss[.xxx]. The use of delimiters and their type and positions must be exactly as indicated (however, input, output and plot formats are customizable; see gmtdefaults). If no map projection is supplied we implicitly set Jx1. Note: only supply J when your R is indicating a rectangular region in the projected coordinates (i.e., an oblique projection). Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"]. Pass all records whose 3rd column (z) lies within the given range. Input le must have at least three columns. To indicate no limit on min or max, specify a hyphen (-). If your 3rd column is absolute time then remember to supply f2T. Toggles between (longitude,latitude) and (latitude,longitude) input and/or output. [Default is (longitude,latitude)]. Append i to select input only or o to select output only. [Default affects both]. Selects binary input. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of columns in your binary input le if it exceeds the columns needed by the program. Or append c if the input le is netCDF. Optionally, append var1/var2/... to specify the variables to be read. [Default is 2 input columns]. Selects binary output. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of desired columns in your binary output le. [Default is same as input]. Special formatting of input and/or output columns (time or geographical data). Specify i or o to make this apply only to input or output [Default applies to both]. Give one or more columns (or column ranges) separated by commas. Append T (absolute calendar time), t (relative time in chosen TIME_UNIT since TIME_EPOCH), x (longitude), y (latitude), or f (oating point) to each column or column range item. Shorthand f[i|o]g means f[i|o]0x,1y (geographic coordinates).
V Z
: bi
bo
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GMTSELECT(1)
GMTSELECT(1)
Multiple segment le(s). Segments are separated by a special record. For ASCII les the rst character must be ag [Default is >]. For binary les all elds must be NaN and b must set the number of output columns explicitly. By default the m setting applies to both input and output. Use mi and mo to give separate settings to input and output. The m option make sure that segment headers in the input les are copied to output, but it has no effect on the data selection. Selection is always done point by point, not by segment.

The ASCII output formats of numerical data are controlled by parameters in your .gmtdefaults4 le. Longitude and latitude are formatted according to OUTPUT_DEGREE_FORMAT, whereas other values are formatted according to D_FORMAT. Be aware that the format in effect can lead to loss of precision in the output, which can lead to various problems downstream. If you nd the output is not written with enough precision, consider switching to binary output (bo if available) or specify more decimals using the D_FORMAT setting. This note applies to ASCII output only in combination with binary or netCDF input or the : option. See also the note below.
NOTE ON PROCESSING ASCII INPUT RECORDS

Unless you are using the : option, selected ASCII input records are copied verbatim to output. That means that options like foT and settings like D_FORMAT and OUTPUT_DEGREE_FORMAT will not have any effect on the output. On the other hand, it allows selecting records with diverse content, including character strings, quoted or not, comments, and other non-numerical content.
NOTE ON DISTANCES
If options C or L are selected then distances are Cartesian and in user units; use fg to imply spherical distances in km and geographical (lon, lat) coordinates. Alternatively, specify R and J to measure projected Cartesian distances in map units (cm, inch, m, or points, as determined by MEASURE_UNIT). This program has evolved over the years. Originally, the R and J were mandatory in order to handle geographic data, but now there is full support for spherical calculations. Thus, J should only be used if you want the tests to be applied on projected data and not the original coordinates. If J is used the distances given via C and L are projected distances.
EXAMPLES
To extract the subset of data set that is within 300 km of any of the points in pts.d but more than 100 km away from the lines in lines.d, run gmtselect lonlatle fg C300/pts.d L100/lines.d Il > subset Here, you must specify fg so the program knows you are processing geographical data (otherwise 300 would be interpreted as Cartesian distance in x-y units instead of km). To keep all points in data.d within the specied region, except the points on land (as determined by the high-resolution coastlines), use gmtselect data.d R120/121/22/24 Dh Nk/s > subset To return all points in quakes.d that are inside the spherical polygon lonlatpath.d, try gmtselect quakes.d Flonlatpath.d fg > subset1 To return all points in stations.d that are within 5 cm of the point in origin.d for a certain projection, try gmtselect stations.d Forigin.d R20/50/-10/20 JM20c > subset2
GSHHS INFORMATION
The coastline database is GSHHS which is compiled from two sources: World Vector Shorelines (WVS) and CIA World Data Bank II (WDBII). In particular, all level-1 polygons (ocean-land boundary) are
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GMTSELECT(1)
GMTSELECT(1)
derived from the more accurate WVS while all higher level polygons (level 2-4, representing land/lake, lake/island-in-lake, and island-in-lake/lake-in-island-in-lake boundaries) are taken from WDBII. Much processing has taken place to convert WVS and WDBII data into usable form for GMT: assembling closed polygons from line segments, checking for duplicates, and correcting for crossings between polygons. The area of each polygon has been determined so that the user may choose not to draw features smaller than a minimum area (see A); one may also limit the highest hierarchical level of polygons to be included (4 is the maximum). The 4 lower-resolution databases were derived from the full resolution database using the Douglas-Peucker line-simplication algorithm. The classication of rivers and borders follow that of the WDBII. See the GMT Cookbook and Technical Reference Appendix K for further details.
SEE ALSO
gmtdefaults(1), GMT (1), grdlandmask(1), pscoast(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GMTSET(1)
GMTSET(1)
NAME
gmtset To change individual GMT default parameters
SYNOPSIS
gmtset [ Gdefaultsle ] PARAMETER1 [=] value1 PARAMETER2 [=] value2 PARAMETER3 [=] value3 ...
DESCRIPTION
gmtset will adjust individual GMT defaults settings in the current directorys .gmtdefaults4 le. If no such le exists one will be created. The main purpose of gmtset is temporarily to change certain parameters inside a shell script, e.g., set the dots-per-inch to 600, run the script, and reset to 300 dpi. Optionally, you can specify one or more temporary changes directly on any GMT command line with the syntax PARAMETER=value; such changes are only in effect for that command and do not permanently change the default settings on disk. PARAMETER value Provide one or several pairs of parameter/value combinations that you want to modify. For a complete listing of available parameters and their meaning, see the gmtdefaults man page.
OPTIONS
G Name of specic .gmtdefaults4 le to modify [Default looks rst in current directory, then in your home directory, then in /.gmt and nally in the system defaults].
EXAMPLES
To change the dpi to 600, set annotation font to Helvetica, and select grid-crosses of size 0.1 inch, and set annotation offset to 0.2 cm: gmtset DOTS_PR_INCH 600 ANNOT_FONT_PRIMARY Helvetica GRID_CROSS_SIZE_PRIMARY 0.1i ANNOT_OFFSET_PRIMARY 0.2c
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), gmtdefaults(1), gmtget(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRD2CPT(1)
GRD2CPT(1)
NAME
grd2cpt Make a color palette table from grid les
SYNOPSIS
grd2cpt grdles [ Ccptmaster ] [ D ] [ Enlevels ] [ I ] [ Lminlimit/maxlimit ] [ M ] [ N ] [ Q[i|o] ] [ Rwest/east/south/north[r] ] [ Szstart/zstop/zinc ] [ T-|+|_|= ] [ V ] [ Z ]
DESCRIPTION
grd2cpt reads one or more grid les and writes a color palette (cpt) le to standard output. The cpt le is based on an existing master cpt le of your choice, and the mapping from data value to colors is through the datas cumulative distribution function (CDF), so that the colors are histogram equalized. Thus if the grid(s) and the resulting cpt le are used in grdimage with a linear projection, the colors will be uniformly distributed in area on the plot. Let z be the data values in the grid. Dene CDF(Z) = (# of z < Z) / (# of z in grid). (NaNs are ignored). These z-values are then normalized to the master cpt le and colors are sampled at the desired intervals. The color palette includes three additional colors beyond the range of z-values. These are the background color (B) assigned to values lower than the lowest z-value, the foreground color (F) assigned to values higher than the highest z-value, and the NaN color (N) painted whereever values are undened. If the master cpt le includes B, F, and N entries, these will be copied into the new master le. If not, the parameters COLOR_BACKGROUND, COLOR_FOREGROUND, and COLOR_NAN from the .gmtdefaults4 le or the command line will be used. This default behavior can be overruled using the options D, M or N. The color model (RGB, HSV or CMYK) of the palette created by makecpt will be the same as specied in the header of the master cpt le. When there is no COLOR_MODEL entry in the master cpt le, the COLOR_MODEL specied in the .gmtdefaults4 le or on the command line will be used. grdles Names of one or more 2-D binary grid les used to derive the color palette table. All grids need to have the same size and dimensions. (See GRID FILE FORMATS below).
OPTIONS
C D Selects the master color table to use in the interpolation. Choose among the built-in tables (type grd2cpt to see the list) or give the name of an existing cpt le [Default gives a rainbow cpt le]. Select the colors for lowest and highest z-values in the output cpt le as the back- and foreground colors that will be written to the cpt le [Default uses the colors specied in the master le, or those dened by the parameters COLOR_BACKGROUND, COLOR_FOREGROUND, and COLOR_NAN]. Create a linear color table by dividing the grid z-range into nlevels equidistant slices. Reverses the sense of color progression in the master cpt le. Also exchanges the foreground and background colors, including those specied by the parameters COLOR_BACKGROUND and COLOR_FOREGROUND. Limit range of cpt le to minlimit/maxlimit, and dont count data outside range when estimating CDF(Z). [Default uses min and max of data.] Overrule background, foreground, and NaN colors specied in the master cpt le with the values of the parameters COLOR_BACKGROUND, COLOR_FOREGROUND, and COLOR_NAN specied in the .gmtdefaults4 le or on the command line. When combined with D, only COLOR_NAN is considered. Do not write out the background, foreground, and NaN-color elds [Default will write them]. Selects a logarithmic interpolation scheme [Default is linear]. Qi expects input z-values to be log10(z), assigns colors, and writes out z [Default]. Qo takes log10(z) rst, assigns colors, and writes out z. xmin, xmax, ymin, and ymax specify the Region of interest. For geographic regions, these limits correspond to west, east, south, and north and you may specify them in decimal degrees or in [+-]dd:mm[:ss.xxx][W|E|S|N] format. Append r if lower left and upper right map coordinates are given instead of w/e/s/n. The two shorthands Rg and Rd stand for global domain (0/360 and
E I
L M
N Q
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRD2CPT(1)
GRD2CPT(1)
-180/+180 in longitude respectively, with -90/+90 in latitude). Alternatively, specify the name of an existing grid le and the R settings (and grid spacing, if applicable) are copied from the grid. For calendar time coordinates you may either give (a) relative time (relative to the selected TIME_EPOCH and in the selected TIME_UNIT; append t to JX|x), or (b) absolute time of the form [date]T[clock] (append T to JX|x). At least one of date and clock must be present; the T is always required. The date string must be of the form [-]yyyy[-mm[-dd]] (Gregorian calendar) or yyyy[-Www[-d]] (ISO week calendar), while the clock string must be of the form hh:mm:ss[.xxx]. The use of delimiters and their type and positions must be exactly as indicated (however, input, output and plot formats are customizable; see gmtdefaults). S T V Z Set steps in cpt le. Calculate entries in cpt le from zstart to zstop in steps of (zinc). [Default chooses arbitrary values by a crazy scheme.] Force the color table to be symmetric about zero (from -R to +R). Append ag to set the range R: for R =|zmin|, + for R = |zmax|, _ for R = min(|zmin|, |zmax|), or = for R = max(|zmin|, |zmax|). Verbose operation. This will write CDF(Z) estimates to stderr. [Default is silent.] Will create a continuous color palette. [Default is discontinuous, i.e., constant color intervals]
GRID FILE FORMATS

GMT is able to recognize many of the commonly used grid le formats, as well as the precision, scale and offset of the values contained in the grid le. When GMT needs a little help with that, you can add the sufx =id[/scale/offset[/nan]], where id is a two-letter identier of the grid type and precision, and scale and offset are optional scale factor and offset to be applied to all grid values, and nan is the value used to indicate missing data. See grdreformat(1) and Section 4.17 of the GMT Technical Reference and Cookbook for more information. When reading a netCDF le that contains multiple grids, GMT will read, by default, the rst 2-dimensional grid that can nd in that le. To coax GMT into reading another multi-dimensional variable in the grid le, append ?varname to the le name, where varname is the name of the variable. Note that you may need to escape the special meaning of ? in your shell program by putting a backslash in front of it, or by placing the lename and sufx between quotes or double quotes. See grdreformat(1) and Section 4.18 of the GMT Technical Reference and Cookbook for more information, particularly on how to read splices of 3-, 4-, or 5-dimensional grids.
EXAMPLES
Sometimes you dont want to make a cpt le (yet) but would nd it helpful to know that 90% of your data lie between z1 and z2, something you cannot learn from grdinfo. So you can do this to see some points on the CDF(Z) curve (use V option to see more): grd2cpt mydata.grd V > /dev/null To make a cpt le with entries from 0 to 200 in steps of 20, and ignore data below zero in computing CDF(Z), and use the built-in master cpt le relief, run grd2cpt mydata.grd Crelief -L0/10000 -S0/200/20 > mydata.cpt
SEE ALSO
gmtdefaults(1), GMT (1), grdhisteq(1), grdinfo(1), makecpt(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRD2XYZ(1)
GRD2XYZ(1)
NAME
grd2xyz Converting grid le(s) to ASCII or binary data
SYNOPSIS
grd2xyz grdles [ E[f][nodata] ] [ H[i][nrec] ] [ Nnodata ] [ Rwest/east/south/north[r] ] [ S[r] ] [ V ] [ W[weight] ] [ Z[ags] ] [ bo[s|S|d|D[ncol]|c[var1/...]] ] [ fcolinfo ]
DESCRIPTION
grd2xyz reads one or more binary 2-D grid les and writes out xyz-triplets in ASCII [or binary] format to standard output. Modify the precision of the ASCII output format by editing the D_FORMAT parameter in your .gmtdefaults4 le or use D_FORMAT=value on the command line, or choose binary output using single or double precision storage. As an option you may output z-values without the (x,y) in a number of formats, see E or Z below. grdles Names of 2-D binary grid les to be converted. (See GRID FILE FORMATS below.)
OPTIONS
E H N R Output an ESRI ArcInfo ASCII interchange grid format le. Append f for oat output [Default is integer]. Append nodata which will be used wherever the grid value equals NaN [-9999]. Output 1 header record based on information in the rst grid le header. Ignored if binary output is selected. [Default is no header]. Output this z-value where the latter equals NaN [Default writes NaN]. xmin, xmax, ymin, and ymax specify the Region of interest. For geographic regions, these limits correspond to west, east, south, and north and you may specify them in decimal degrees or in [+-]dd:mm[:ss.xxx][W|E|S|N] format. Append r if lower left and upper right map coordinates are given instead of w/e/s/n. The two shorthands Rg and Rd stand for global domain (0/360 and -180/+180 in longitude respectively, with -90/+90 in latitude). Alternatively, specify the name of an existing grid le and the R settings (and grid spacing, if applicable) are copied from the grid. For calendar time coordinates you may either give (a) relative time (relative to the selected TIME_EPOCH and in the selected TIME_UNIT; append t to JX|x), or (b) absolute time of the form [date]T[clock] (append T to JX|x). At least one of date and clock must be present; the T is always required. The date string must be of the form [-]yyyy[-mm[-dd]] (Gregorian calendar) or yyyy[-Www[-d]] (ISO week calendar), while the clock string must be of the form hh:mm:ss[.xxx]. The use of delimiters and their type and positions must be exactly as indicated (however, input, output and plot formats are customizable; see gmtdefaults). Using the R option will select a subsection of the grid. If this subsection exceeds the boundaries of the grid, only the common region will be output. Suppress output for nodes whose z-value equals NaN [Default outputs all nodes]. Append r to reverse the suppression, i.e., only output the nodes whose z-value equals NaN. Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"]. Write out x,y,z,w, where w is the supplied weight (or 1 if not supplied) [Default writes x,y,z only]. Write a 1-column ASCII [or binary] table. Output will be organized according to the specied ordering convention contained in ags. If data should be written by rows, make ags start with T(op) if rst row is y = ymax or B(ottom) if rst row is y = ymin. Then, append L or R to indicate that rst element should start at left or right end of row. Likewise for column formats: start with L or R to position rst column, and then append T or B to position rst element in a row. For gridline registered grids: If grid is periodic in x but the outcoming data should not contain the (redundant) column at x = xmax, append x. For grid periodic in y, skip writing the redundant row at y = ymax by appending y. If the byte-order needs to be swapped, append w. Select one of several data types (all binary except a): a ASCII representation c signed 1-byte character u unsigned 1-byte character
S V W Z
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRD2XYZ(1)
GRD2XYZ(1)
h short 2-byte integer i 4-byte integer l long (4- or 8-byte) integer [architecture-dependent!] f 4-byte oating point single precision d 8-byte oating point double precision Default format is scanline orientation of ASCII numbers: ZTLa. Note that Z only applies to 1-column output. bo Selects binary output. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of desired columns in your binary output le. [Default is 3]. This option only applies to xyz output; see Z for z table output. Special formatting of input and/or output columns (time or geographical data). Specify i or o to make this apply only to input or output [Default applies to both]. Give one or more columns (or column ranges) separated by commas. Append T (absolute calendar time), t (relative time in chosen TIME_UNIT since TIME_EPOCH), x (longitude), y (latitude), or f (oating point) to each column or column range item. Shorthand f[i|o]g means f[i|o]0x,1y (geographic coordinates). See also TIME COORDINATES below.

GRID FILE FORMATS

TIME COORDINATES
Time coordinates in netCDF grids, be it the x, y, or z coordinate, will be recognized as such. The variables unit attribute is parsed to determine the unit and epoch of the time coordinate in the grid. Values are then converted to the internal time system specied by TIME_UNIT and TIME_EPOCH in the .gmtdefaults le or on the command line. The default output is relative time in that time system, or absolute time when using the option f0T, f1T, or f2T for x, y, or z coordinate, respectively.
EXAMPLES
To edit individual values in the 5 by 5 hawaii_grv.grd le, dump the .grd to ASCII: grd2xyz hawaii_grv.grd > hawaii_grv.xyz To write a single precision binary le without the x,y positions from the le raw_data.grd le, using scanline orientation, run
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRD2XYZ(1)
GRD2XYZ(1)
grd2xyz raw_data.grd ZTLf > hawaii_grv.b
SEE ALSO
gmtdefaults(1), GMT (1), grdedit(1), xyz2grd(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDBLEND(1)
GRDBLEND(1)
NAME
grdblend Blend several partially over-lapping grids into one large grid
SYNOPSIS
grdblend blendle Ggrdle Ixinc[unit][=|+][/yinc[unit][=|+]] Rwest/east/south/north[r] [ Nnodata ] [ Q ] [ Zscale ] [ V ] [ W ] [ fcolinfo ]
DESCRIPTION
grdblend reads a listing of grid les and blend parameters and creates a binary grid le by blending the other grids using cosine-taper weights. grdblend will report if some of the nodes are not lled in with data. Such unconstrained nodes are set to a value specied by the user [Default is NaN]. Nodes with more than one value will be set to the weighted average value. Note: Due to the row-by-row i/o nature of operations in grdblend we only support the netCDF and native binary grid formats for both input and output. blendle ASCII le with one record per grid le to include in the blend. Each record must contain three items, separated by spaces or tabs: the gridle name, the R-setting for the interior region, and the relative weight wr. In the combined weighting scheme, this grid will be given zero weight outside its domain, weight = wr inside the interior region, and a 2-D cosine-tapered weight between those end-members in the boundary strip. However, if a negative wr is given then the sense of tapering is inverted (i.e., zero weight inside its domain). If the inner region should instead exactly match the grid region then specify a - instead of the R-setting. If the ASCII le is not given grdblend will read standard input. G I grdle is the name of the binary output grid le. (See GRID FILE FORMATS below). Only netCDF and native binary grid formats are supported. x_inc [and optionally y_inc] is the grid spacing. Optionally, append a sufx modier. Geographical (degrees) coordinates: Append m to indicate arc minutes or c to indicate arc seconds. If one of the units e, k, i, or n is appended instead, the increment is assumed to be given in meter, km, miles, or nautical miles, respectively, and will be converted to the equivalent degrees longitude at the middle latitude of the region (the conversion depends on ELLIPSOID). If /y_inc is given but set to 0 it will be reset equal to x_inc; otherwise it will be converted to degrees latitude. All coordinates: If = is appended then the corresponding max x (east) or y (north) may be slightly adjusted to t exactly the given increment [by default the increment may be adjusted slightly to t the given domain]. Finally, instead of giving an increment you may specify the number of nodes desired by appending + to the supplied integer argument; the increment is then recalculated from the number of nodes and the domain. The resulting increment value depends on whether you have selected a gridline-registered or pixel-registered grid; see Appendix B for details. Note: if Rgrdle is used then grid spacing has already been initialized; use I to override the values. xmin, xmax, ymin, and ymax specify the Region of interest. For geographic regions, these limits correspond to west, east, south, and north and you may specify them in decimal degrees or in [+-]dd:mm[:ss.xxx][W|E|S|N] format. Append r if lower left and upper right map coordinates are given instead of w/e/s/n. The two shorthands Rg and Rd stand for global domain (0/360 and -180/+180 in longitude respectively, with -90/+90 in latitude). Alternatively, specify the name of an existing grid le and the R settings (and grid spacing, if applicable) are copied from the grid. For calendar time coordinates you may either give (a) relative time (relative to the selected TIME_EPOCH and in the selected TIME_UNIT; append t to JX|x), or (b) absolute time of the form [date]T[clock] (append T to JX|x). At least one of date and clock must be present; the T is always required. The date string must be of the form [-]yyyy[-mm[-dd]] (Gregorian calendar) or yyyy[-Www[-d]] (ISO week calendar), while the clock string must be of the form hh:mm:ss[.xxx]. The use of delimiters and their type and positions must be exactly as indicated (however, input, output and plot formats are customizable; see gmtdefaults). No data. Set nodes with no input grid to this value [Default is NaN].
OPTIONS
N
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDBLEND(1)
GRDBLEND(1)
Q V W Z f
Create a header-less grid le suitable for use with grdraster. Requires that the output grid le is a native format (i.e., not netCDF). Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"]. Do not blend, just output the weights used for each node. This option is valid when only one input grid is provided [Default makes the blend]. Scale output values by scale before writing to le. [1]. Special formatting of input and/or output columns (time or geographical data). Specify i or o to make this apply only to input or output [Default applies to both]. Give one or more columns (or column ranges) separated by commas. Append T (absolute calendar time), t (relative time in chosen TIME_UNIT since TIME_EPOCH), x (longitude), y (latitude), or f (oating point) to each column or column range item. Shorthand f[i|o]g means f[i|o]0x,1y (geographic coordinates).
GRID FILE FORMATS

By default GMT writes out grid as single precision oats in a COARDS-complaint netCDF le format. However, GMT is able to produce grid les in many other commonly used grid le formats and also facilitates so called "packing" of grids, writing out oating point data as 2- or 4-byte integers. To specify the precision, scale and offset, the user should add the sufx =id[/scale/offset[/nan]], where id is a two-letter identier of the grid type and precision, and scale and offset are optional scale factor and offset to be applied to all grid values, and nan is the value used to indicate missing data. See grdreformat(1) and Section 4.17 of the GMT Technical Reference and Cookbook for more information. When writing a netCDF le, the grid is stored by default with the variable name "z". To specify another variable name varname, append ?varname to the le name. Note that you may need to escape the special meaning of ? in your shell program by putting a backslash in front of it, or by placing the lename and sufx between quotes or double quotes.
GEOGRAPHICAL AND TIME COORDINATES

When the output grid type is netCDF, the coordinates will be labeled "longitude", "latitude", or "time" based on the attributes of the input data or grid (if any) or on the f or R options. For example, both f0x f1t and R90w/90e/0t/3t will result in a longitude/time grid. When the x, y, or z coordinate is time, it will be stored in the grid as relative time since epoch as specied by TIME_UNIT and TIME_EPOCH in the .gmtdefaults le or on the command line. In addition, the unit attribute of the time variable will indicate both this unit and epoch.
EXAMPLES
To create a grid le from the four grid les piece_?.nc, make the blendle like this piece_1.nc piece_2.nc piece_3.nc piece_4.nc Then run grdblend blend.job Gblend.nc R<full_region> I<dx/dy> -V -R<subregion_1> 1 -R<subregion_2> 1 -R<subregion_3> 1 -R<subregion_4> 1
RESTRICTIONS
Currently, all grids processed must have the exact same node registration and grid spacing as the nal output grid.
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), grd2xyz(1), grdedit(1) grdraster(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDCLIP(1)
GRDCLIP(1)
NAME
grdclip Clipping of range in grid les.
SYNOPSIS
grdclip input_le.grd Goutput_le.grd [ Sahigh/above ] [ Sblow/below ] [ V ]
DESCRIPTION
grdclip will set values < low to below and/or values > high to above. Useful when you want all of a continent or an ocean to fall into one color or grayshade in image processing, or clipping of the range of data values is required. above/below can be any number or NaN (Not a Number). You must choose at least one of Sa or Sb. input_le.grd The input 2-D binary grid le. G output_le.grd is the modied output grid le. Set all data[i] > high to above. Set all data[i] < low to below. Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"].
OPTIONS
Sa Sb V
GRID FILE FORMATS

By default GMT writes out grid as single precision oats in a COARDS-complaint netCDF le format. However, GMT is able to produce grid les in many other commonly used grid le formats and also facilitates so called "packing" of grids, writing out oating point data as 2- or 4-byte integers. To specify the precision, scale and offset, the user should add the sufx =id[/scale/offset[/nan]], where id is a two-letter identier of the grid type and precision, and scale and offset are optional scale factor and offset to be applied to all grid values, and nan is the value used to indicate missing data. When reading grids, the format is generally automatically recognized. If not, the same sufx can be added to input grid le names. See grdreformat(1) and Section 4.17 of the GMT Technical Reference and Cookbook for more information. When reading a netCDF le that contains multiple grids, GMT will read, by default, the rst 2-dimensional grid that can nd in that le. To coax GMT into reading another multi-dimensional variable in the grid le, append ?varname to the le name, where varname is the name of the variable. Note that you may need to escape the special meaning of ? in your shell program by putting a backslash in front of it, or by placing the lename and sufx between quotes or double quotes. The ?varname sufx can also be used for output grids to specify a variable name different from the default: "z". See grdreformat(1) and Section 4.18 of the GMT Technical Reference and Cookbook for more information, particularly on how to read splices of 3-, 4-, or 5-dimensional grids.
EXAMPLES
To set all values > 70 to NaN and all values < 0 to 0 in le data.grd: grdclip data.grd Gnew_data.grd Sa70/NaN Sb0/0 V
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), grdlandmask(1), grdmask(1), grdmath(1), grd2xyz(1), xyz2grd(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDCONTOUR(1)
GRDCONTOUR(1)
NAME
grdcontour Contouring of 2-D gridded data sets
SYNOPSIS
grdcontour grdle Ccont_int Jparameters [ A[-|annot_int][labelinfo] ] [ B[p|s]parameters ] [ Ddumple ] [ Eazimuth/elevation ] [ F[l|r] ] [ G[d|f|n|l|L|x|X]params ] [ K ] [ Llow/high ] [ O ] [ P ] [ Qcut ] [ Rwest/east/south/north[r] ] [ Ssmoothfactor ] [ T[+|-][gap/length][:LH] ] [ U[just/dx/dy/][c|label] ] [ V ] [ W[+][type]pen ] [ X[a|c|r][x-shift[u]] ] [ Y[a|c|r][y-shift[u]] ] [ Z[factor[/shift]][p] ] [ ccopies ] [ bo[s|S|d|D[ncol]|c[var1/...]] ] [ m[ag] ]
DESCRIPTION
grdcontour reads a 2-D grid le and produces a contour map by tracing each contour through the grid. As an option, the x/y/z positions of the contour lines may be dumped to a single multisegment le or many separate les. PostScript code is generated and sent to standard output. Various options that affect the plotting are available. grdle C 2-D gridded data set to be contoured. (See GRID FILE FORMATS below). The contours to be drawn may be specied in one of three possible ways: (1) If cont_int has the sufx ".cpt" and can be opened as a le, it is assumed to be a color palette table. The color boundaries are then used as contour levels. If the cpt-le has annotation ags in the last column then those contours will be annotated. By default all contours are labeled; use A to disable all annotations. (2) If cont_int is a le but not a cpt-le, it is expected to contain contour levels in column 1 and a C(ontour) OR A(nnotate) in col 2. The levels marked C (or c) are contoured, the levels marked A (or a) are contoured and annotated. Optionally, a third column may be present and contain the xed annotation angle for this contour level. (3) If no le is found, then cont_int is interpreted as a constant contour interval. If A is set and C is not, then the contour interval is set equal to the specied annotation interval. If a le is given and T is set, then only contours marked with upper case C or A will have tickmarks. In all cases the contour values have the same units as the grid. Selects the map projection. Scale is UNIT/degree, 1:xxxxx, or width in UNIT (upper case modier). UNIT is cm, inch, or m, depending on the MEASURE_UNIT setting in .gmtdefaults4, but this can be overridden on the command line by appending c, i, or m to the scale/width value. When central meridian is optional, default is center of longitude range on R option. Default standard parallel is the equator. For map height, max dimension, or min dimension, append h, +, or to the width, respectively. More details can be found in the psbasemap man pages. CYLINDRICAL PROJECTIONS: Jclon0/lat0/scale (Cassini) Jcyl_stere/[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Stereographic) Jj[lon0/]scale (Miller) Jm[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Mercator) Jmlon0/lat0/scale (Mercator - Give meridian and standard parallel) Jo[a]lon0/lat0/azimuth/scale (Oblique Mercator - point and azimuth) Jo[b]lon0/lat0/lon1/lat1/scale (Oblique Mercator - two points) Joclon0/lat0/lonp/latp/scale (Oblique Mercator - point and pole) Jq[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Equidistant) Jtlon0/[lat0/]scale (TM - Transverse Mercator) Juzone/scale (UTM - Universal Transverse Mercator) Jy[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Equal-Area) CONIC PROJECTIONS:
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDCONTOUR(1)
GRDCONTOUR(1)
Jblon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Albers) Jdlon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Conic Equidistant) Jllon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Lambert Conic Conformal) Jpoly/[lon0/[lat0/]]scale ((American) Polyconic) AZIMUTHAL PROJECTIONS: Jalon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Lambert Azimuthal Equal-Area) Jelon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Azimuthal Equidistant) Jflon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Gnomonic) Jglon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Orthographic) Jglon0/lat0/altitude/azimuth/tilt/twist/Width/Height/scale (General Perspective). Jslon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (General Stereographic) MISCELLANEOUS PROJECTIONS: Jh[lon0/]scale (Hammer) Ji[lon0/]scale (Sinusoidal) Jkf[lon0/]scale (Eckert IV) Jk[s][lon0/]scale (Eckert VI) Jn[lon0/]scale (Robinson) Jr[lon0/]scale (Winkel Tripel) Jv[lon0/]scale (Van der Grinten) Jw[lon0/]scale (Mollweide) NON-GEOGRAPHICAL PROJECTIONS: Jp[a]scale[/origin][r|z] (Polar coordinates (theta,r)) Jxx-scale[d|l|ppow|t|T][/y-scale[d|l|ppow|t|T]] (Linear, log, and power scaling)
OPTIONS
No space between the option ag and the associated arguments. A annot_int is annotation interval in data units; it is ignored if contour levels are given in a le. [Default is no annotations]. Append - to disable all annotations implied by C. The optional labelinfo controls the specics of the label formatting and consists of a concatenated string made up of any of the following control arguments: +aangle For annotations at a xed angle, +an for line-normal, or +ap for line-parallel [Default]. By appending the u or d we get annotations whose top face the next upper or lower annotation, respectively. +cdx[/dy] Sets the clearance between label and optional text box. Append c|i|m|p to specify the unit or % to indicate a percentage of the label font size [15%]. +d +ffont Turns on debug which will draw helper points and lines to illustrate the workings of the quoted line setup. Sets the desired font [Default ANNOT_FONT_PRIMARY].
+g[color] Selects opaque text boxes [Default is transparent]; optionally specify the color [Default is PAGE_COLOR]. (See SPECIFYING COLOR below). +jjust Sets label justication [Default is MC]. Ignored when -SqN|n+|-1 is used.
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDCONTOUR(1)
GRDCONTOUR(1)
+kcolor Sets color of text labels [Default is COLOR_BACKGROUND]. (See SPECIFYING COLOR below). +ndx[/dy] Nudges the placement of labels by the specied amount (append c|i|m|p to specify the units). Increments are considered in the coordinate system dened by the orientation of the line; use +N to force increments in the plot x/y coordinates system [no nudging]. +o +p[pen] Draws the outline of text boxsets [Default is no outline]; optionally specify pen for outline [Default is width = 0.25p, color = black, texture = solid]. (See SPECIFYING PENS below). +rmin_rad Will not place labels where the lines radius of curvature is less than min_rad [Default is 0]. +ssize Sets the desired font size in points [Default is 9]. +uunit Appends unit to all line labels. If unit starts with a leading hyphen (-) then there will be no space between label value and the unit. If no unit is appended we use the units listed in the grid le. [Default is no unit]. +v +w +=prex Prepends prex to all line labels. If prex starts with a leading hyphen (-) then there will be no space between label value and the prex. [Default is no prex]. B D Sets map boundary annotation and tickmark intervals; see the psbasemap man page for all the details. Dump the (x,y,z) coordinates of each contour to separate les, one for each contour segment. The les will be named dumple_cont_segment[_i].xyz (or .b is b is selected), where cont is the contour value and segment is a running segment number for each contour interval (for closed contours we append _i.) If the prex is given as - the le names are instead C#_i (interior) or C#_e (external) plus extension, and # is just a running number. This allows us to make short le names that will work with GNU utilities under DOS. However, when m is used in conjunction with D a single multisegment le is created instead. Sets the viewpoints azimuth and elevation (for perspective view) [180/90]. For frames used for animation, you may want to append + to x the center of your data domain (or specify a particular world coordinate point with +wlon0/lat[/z]) which will project to the center of your page size (or specify the coordinates of the projected view point with +vx0/y0). Force dumped contours to be oriented so that higher z-values are to the left (Fl [Default]) or right (-Fr) as we move along the contour [Default is arbitrary orientation]. Requires D. Controls the placement of labels along the contours. Choose among ve controlling algorithms: Gddist[c|i|m|p] or GDdist[d|e|k|m|n] For lower case d, give distances between labels on the plot in your preferred measurement unit c (cm), i (inch), m (meter), or p (points), while for upper case D, specify distances in map units and append the unit; choose among e (m), k (km), m (mile), n (nautical mile), or d (spherical degree). [Default is 10c or 4i]. Species curved labels following the path [Default is straight labels]. Species how many (x, y) points will be used to estimate label angles [Default is 10]. Selects rounded rectangular text box [Default is rectangular]. Not applicable for curved text (+v) and only makes sense for opaque text boxes.
F G
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDCONTOUR(1)
GRDCONTOUR(1)
Gffle.d Reads the ascii le fle.d and places labels at locations in the le that matches locations along the contours. Inexact matches and points outside the region are skipped. Gl|Lline1[,line2,...] Give start and stop coordinates for one or more comma-separated straight line segments. Labels will be placed where these lines intersect the contours. The format of each line specication is start/stop, where start and stop are either a specied point lon/lat or a 2-character XY key that uses the justication format employed in pstext to indicate a point on the map, given as [LCR][BMT]. In addition, you may use Z+ and Z- which correspond to the locations of the global max and min locations in the grid, respectively. GL will interpret the point pairs as dening great circles [Default is straight line]. Gnn_label Species the number of equidistant labels for contours line [1]. Upper case GN starts labeling exactly at the start of the line [Default centers them along the line]. GN-1 places one justied label at start, while GN+1 places one justied label at the end of contours. Optionally, append /min_dist[c|i|m|p] to enforce that a minimum distance separation between successive labels is enforced. Gx|Xxle.d Reads the multi-segment le xle.d and places labels at the intersections between the contours and the lines inxle.d. GX will resample the lines rst along great-circle arcs. In addition, you may optionally append +rradius[c|i|m|p] to set a minimum label separation in the x-y plane [no limitation]. K L O P Q R More PostScript code will be appended later [Default terminates the plot system]. Limit range: Do not draw contours for data values below low or above high. Selects Overlay plot mode [Default initializes a new plot system]. Selects Portrait plotting mode [Default is Landscape, see gmtdefaults to change this]. Do not draw contours with less than cut number of points [Draw all contours]. xmin, xmax, ymin, and ymax specify the Region of interest. For geographic regions, these limits correspond to west, east, south, and north and you may specify them in decimal degrees or in [+-]dd:mm[:ss.xxx][W|E|S|N] format. Append r if lower left and upper right map coordinates are given instead of w/e/s/n. The two shorthands Rg and Rd stand for global domain (0/360 and -180/+180 in longitude respectively, with -90/+90 in latitude). Alternatively, specify the name of an existing grid le and the R settings (and grid spacing, if applicable) are copied from the grid. For calendar time coordinates you may either give (a) relative time (relative to the selected TIME_EPOCH and in the selected TIME_UNIT; append t to JX|x), or (b) absolute time of the form [date]T[clock] (append T to JX|x). At least one of date and clock must be present; the T is always required. The date string must be of the form [-]yyyy[-mm[-dd]] (Gregorian calendar) or yyyy[-Www[-d]] (ISO week calendar), while the clock string must be of the form hh:mm:ss[.xxx]. The use of delimiters and their type and positions must be exactly as indicated (however, input, output and plot formats are customizable; see gmtdefaults). [Default is region dened in the grid le]. Used to resample the contour lines at roughly every (gridbox_size/smoothfactor) interval. Will draw tickmarks pointing in the downward direction every gap along the innermost closed contours. Append gap and tickmark length or use defaults [0.5c/0.1c or 0.2i/0.04i]. User may choose to tick only local highs or local lows by specifying T+ or T, respectively. Appending :LH will plot the characters L and H at the center of closed innermost contours (local lows and highs). L and H can be any single character (e.g., LH, -+, etc.) If a le is given by C and T is set, then only contours marked with upper case C or A will have tickmarks [and annotation].
S T
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDCONTOUR(1)
GRDCONTOUR(1)
Draw Unix System time stamp on plot. By adding just/dx/dy/, the user may specify the justication of the stamp and where the stamp should fall on the page relative to lower left corner of the plot. For example, BL/0/0 will align the lower left corner of the time stamp with the lower left corner of the plot. Optionally, append a label, or c (which will plot the command string.). The GMT parameters UNIX_TIME, UNIX_TIME_POS, and UNIX_TIME_FORMAT can affect the appearance; see the gmtdefaults man page for details. The time string will be in the locale set by the environment variable TZ (generally local time). Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"]. type, if present, can be a for annotated contours or c for regular contours [Default]. pen sets the attributes for the particular line. Default values for annotated contours: width = 0.75p, color = black, texture = solid. Regular contours have default width = 0.25p. (See SPECIFYING PENS below). If the + ag is specied then the color of the contour lines are taken from the cpt le (see C).
V W
X Y Shift plot origin relative to the current origin by (x-shift,y-shift) and optionally append the length unit (c, i, m, p). You can prepend a to shift the origin back to the original position after plotting, or prepend r [Default] to reset the current origin to the new location. If O is used then the default (x-shift,y-shift) is (0,0), otherwise it is (r1i, r1i) or (r2.5c, r2.5c). Alternatively, give c to align the center coordinate (x or y) of the plot with the center of the page based on current page size. Z Use to subtract shift from the data and multiply the results by factor before contouring starts [1/0]. (Numbers in A, C, L refer to values after this scaling has occurred.) Append p to indicate that this grid le contains z-values that are periodic in 360 degrees (e.g., phase data, angular distributions) and that special precautions must be taken when determining 0-contours. Selects binary output. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of desired columns in your binary output le. Species the number of plot copies. [Default is 1]. Special formatting of input and/or output columns (time or geographical data). Specify i or o to make this apply only to input or output [Default applies to both]. Give one or more columns (or column ranges) separated by commas. Append T (absolute calendar time), t (relative time in chosen TIME_UNIT since TIME_EPOCH), x (longitude), y (latitude), or f (oating point) to each column or column range item. Shorthand f[i|o]g means f[i|o]0x,1y (geographic coordinates). When used in conjunction with D a single multisegment le is created, and each contour section is preceded by a header record whose rst column is ag followed by the contour level.
bo
c f
SPECIFYING PENS pen The attributes of lines and symbol outlines as dened by pen is a comma delimetered list of width, color and texture, each of which is optional. width can be indicated as a measure (points, centimeters, inches) or as faint, thin[ner|nest], thick[er|est], fat[ter|test], or obese. color species a gray shade or color (see SPECIFYING COLOR below). texture is a combination of dashes - and dots .. SPECIFYING COLOR color The color of lines, areas and patterns can be specied by a valid color name; by a gray shade (in the range 0255); by a decimal color code (r/g/b, each in range 0255; h-s-v, ranges 0360, 01, 01; or c/m/y/k, each in range 01); or by a hexadecimal color code (#rrggbb, as used in HTML). See the gmtcolors manpage for more information and a full list of color names.

The ASCII output formats of numerical data are controlled by parameters in your .gmtdefaults4 le. Longitude and latitude are formatted according to OUTPUT_DEGREE_FORMAT, whereas other values are formatted according to D_FORMAT. Be aware that the format in effect can lead to loss of precision in the output, which can lead to various problems downstream. If you nd the output is not written with enough
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDCONTOUR(1)
GRDCONTOUR(1)
precision, consider switching to binary output (bo if available) or specify more decimals using the D_FORMAT setting.
FILE FORMATS
EXAMPLES
To contour the le hawaii_grav.grd every 25 mGal on a Mercator map at 0.5 inch/degree, annotate every 50 mGal (using fontsize = 10), using 1 degree tickmarks, and draw 30 minute gridlines: grdcontour hawaii_grav.grd Jm0.5i C25 A50+f10 B1g30m > hawaii_grav.ps To contour the le image.grd using the levels in the le cont.d on a linear projection at 0.1 cm/x-unit and 50 cm/y-unit, using 20 (x) and 0.1 (y) tickmarks, smooth the contours a bit, use "RMS Mist" as plot-title, use a thick red pen for annotated contours, and a thin, dashed, blue pen for the rest, and send the output to the default printer: grdcontour image.grd Wcthinnest,blue,- | lp Jx0.1c/50.0c Ccont.d S4 B20/0.1:."RMS Mist": Wathick,red
The labeling of local highs and lows may plot outside the innermost contour since only the mean value of the contour coordinates is used to position the label.
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), gmtdefaults(1), gmtcolors(5), psbasemap(1), grdimage(1), grdview(1), pscontour(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDCUT(1)
GRDCUT(1)
NAME
grdcut Extract a subregion out of a grid le
SYNOPSIS
grdcut input_le.grd Goutput_le.grd Rwest/east/south/north[r] [ V ] [ Z[n]min/max] ] [ f[i|o]colinfo ]
DESCRIPTION
grdcut will produce a new output_le.grd le which is a subregion of input_le.grd. The subregion is specied with R as in other programs; the specied range must not exceed the range of input_le.grd. If in doubt, run grdinfo to check range. Alternatively, dene the subregion indirectly via a range check on the node values. Complementary to grdcut there is grdpaste, which will join together two grid les along a common edge. input_le.grd this is the input .grd format le. Goutput_le.grd this is the output .grd format le. R xmin, xmax, ymin, and ymax specify the Region of interest. For geographic regions, these limits correspond to west, east, south, and north and you may specify them in decimal degrees or in [+-]dd:mm[:ss.xxx][W|E|S|N] format. Append r if lower left and upper right map coordinates are given instead of w/e/s/n. The two shorthands Rg and Rd stand for global domain (0/360 and -180/+180 in longitude respectively, with -90/+90 in latitude). Alternatively, specify the name of an existing grid le and the R settings (and grid spacing, if applicable) are copied from the grid. For calendar time coordinates you may either give (a) relative time (relative to the selected TIME_EPOCH and in the selected TIME_UNIT; append t to JX|x), or (b) absolute time of the form [date]T[clock] (append T to JX|x). At least one of date and clock must be present; the T is always required. The date string must be of the form [-]yyyy[-mm[-dd]] (Gregorian calendar) or yyyy[-Www[-d]] (ISO week calendar), while the clock string must be of the form hh:mm:ss[.xxx]. The use of delimiters and their type and positions must be exactly as indicated (however, input, output and plot formats are customizable; see gmtdefaults). This denes the subregion to be cut out. Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"]. Determine the new rectangular region so that all nodes outside this region are also outside the given z-range [-inf/+inf]. To indicate no limit on min or max, specify a hyphen (-). Normally, any NaNs encountered are simply skipped. Use Zn to consider a NaN to be outside the z-range. Special formatting of input and/or output columns (time or geographical data). Specify i or o to make this apply only to input or output [Default applies to both]. Give one or more columns (or column ranges) separated by commas. Append T (absolute calendar time), t (relative time in chosen TIME_UNIT since TIME_EPOCH), x (longitude), y (latitude), or f (oating point) to each column or column range item. Shorthand f[i|o]g means f[i|o]0x,1y (geographic coordinates).
OPTIONS
V Z
GRID FILE FORMATS

By default GMT writes out grid as single precision oats in a COARDS-complaint netCDF le format. However, GMT is able to produce grid les in many other commonly used grid le formats and also facilitates so called "packing" of grids, writing out oating point data as 2- or 4-byte integers. To specify the precision, scale and offset, the user should add the sufx =id[/scale/offset[/nan]], where id is a two-letter identier of the grid type and precision, and scale and offset are optional scale factor and offset to be applied to all grid values, and nan is the value used to indicate missing data. When reading grids, the format is generally automatically recognized. If not, the same sufx can be added to input grid le names. See grdreformat(1) and Section 4.17 of the GMT Technical Reference and Cookbook for more information. When reading a netCDF le that contains multiple grids, GMT will read, by default, the rst 2-dimensional grid that can nd in that le. To coax GMT into reading another multi-dimensional variable in the grid le,
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDCUT(1)
GRDCUT(1)
append ?varname to the le name, where varname is the name of the variable. Note that you may need to escape the special meaning of ? in your shell program by putting a backslash in front of it, or by placing the lename and sufx between quotes or double quotes. The ?varname sufx can also be used for output grids to specify a variable name different from the default: "z". See grdreformat(1) and Section 4.18 of the GMT Technical Reference and Cookbook for more information, particularly on how to read splices of 3-, 4-, or 5-dimensional grids.

EXAMPLES
Suppose you have used surface to grid ship gravity in the region between 148E - 162E and 8N - 32N, and you do not trust the gridding near the edges, so you want to keep only the area between 150E - 160E and 10N - 30N, then: grdcut grav_148_162_8_32.nc Ggrav_150_160_10_30.nc R150/160/10/30 V To return the subregion of a grid such that any boundary strips where all values are entirely above 0, try grdcut bathy.nc Gtrimmed_bathy.nc Z-/0 V
SEE ALSO
grdpaste(1), grdinfo(1), GMT (1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDEDIT(1)
GRDEDIT(1)
NAME
grdedit Modifying the header or content of a 2-D grid le
SYNOPSIS
grdedit grdle [ A ] [ Dxname/yname/zname/scale/offset/title/remark ] [ E ] [ Nxyzle ] [ Rwest/east/south/north[r] ] [ S ] [ T ] [ V ] [ :[i|o] ] [ bi[s|S|d|D[ncol]|c[var1/...]] ] [ f[i|o]colinfo ]
DESCRIPTION
grdedit reads the header information in a binary 2-D grid le and replaces the information with values provided on the command line [if any]. As an option, global, geographical grids (with 360 degrees longitude range) can be rotated in the east-west direction, and individual nodal values can be replaced from a table of x, y, z values. grdedit only operates on les containing a grdheader. grdle Name of the 2-D grid le to modify. (See GRID FILE FORMATS below).
OPTIONS
No space between the option ag and the associated arguments. A If necessary, adjust the les x_inc, y_inc to be compatible with its domain (or a new domain set with R). Older grid les (i.e., created prior to GMT 3.1) often had excessive slop in x_inc, y_inc and an adjustment is necessary. Newer les are created correctly. Give new values for xname, yname, zname, scale, offset, title, and remark. To leave some of the values untouched, specify = as the new value. Alternatively, to allow "/" to be part of one of the values, use any non-alphanumeric character (and not the equal sign) as separator by both starting and ending with it. For example: D:xname:yname:zname:scale:offset:title:remark: Transpose the grid and exchange the x and y information. Incompatible with the other options. Input le(s) has header record(s). If used, the default number of header records is N_HEADER_RECS. Use Hi if only input data should have header records [Default will write out header records if the input data have them]. Blank lines and lines starting with # are always skipped. Read the ASCII (or binary; see bi) le xyzle and replace the corresponding nodal values in the grid with these z values. xmin, xmax, ymin, and ymax specify the Region of interest. For geographic regions, these limits correspond to west, east, south, and north and you may specify them in decimal degrees or in [+-]dd:mm[:ss.xxx][W|E|S|N] format. Append r if lower left and upper right map coordinates are given instead of w/e/s/n. The two shorthands Rg and Rd stand for global domain (0/360 and -180/+180 in longitude respectively, with -90/+90 in latitude). Alternatively, specify the name of an existing grid le and the R settings (and grid spacing, if applicable) are copied from the grid. For calendar time coordinates you may either give (a) relative time (relative to the selected TIME_EPOCH and in the selected TIME_UNIT; append t to JX|x), or (b) absolute time of the form [date]T[clock] (append T to JX|x). At least one of date and clock must be present; the T is always required. The date string must be of the form [-]yyyy[-mm[-dd]] (Gregorian calendar) or yyyy[-Www[-d]] (ISO week calendar), while the clock string must be of the form hh:mm:ss[.xxx]. The use of delimiters and their type and positions must be exactly as indicated (however, input, output and plot formats are customizable; see gmtdefaults). The new w/e/s/n values will replace those in the grid, and the x_inc, y_inc values are adjusted, if necessary. For global, geographical grids only. Grid values will be shifted longitudinally according to the new borders given in R. Make necessary changes in the header to convert a gridline-registered grid to a pixel-registered grid, or vice-versa. Basically, gridline-registered grids will have their domain extended by half the x- and y-increments whereas pixel-registered grids will have their domain shrunk by the same amount. Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"].
E H
N R
S T
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDEDIT(1)
GRDEDIT(1)
bi
Selects binary input. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of columns in your binary input le if it exceeds the columns needed by the program. Or append c if the input le is netCDF. Optionally, append var1/var2/... to specify the variables to be read. [Default is 3 input columns]. Special formatting of input and/or output columns (time or geographical data). Specify i or o to make this apply only to input or output [Default applies to both]. Give one or more columns (or column ranges) separated by commas. Append T (absolute calendar time), t (relative time in chosen TIME_UNIT since TIME_EPOCH), x (longitude), y (latitude), or f (oating point) to each column or column range item. Shorthand f[i|o]g means f[i|o]0x,1y (geographic coordinates).
GRID FILE FORMATS


EXAMPLES
Let us assume the le data.grd covers the area 300/310/10/30. We want to change the boundaries from geodetic longitudes to geographic and put a new title in the header. We accomplish this by grdedit data.grd R-60/-50/10/30 D=/=/=/=/=/"Gravity Anomalies"/= The grid world.grd has the limits 0/360/-72/72. To shift the data so that the limits would be -180/180/-72/72, use grdedit world.grd R-180/180/-72/72 S The le junk.grd was created prior to GMT 3.1 with incompatible R and I arguments. To reset the xand y-increments we run grdedit junk.grd A The le junk.grd was created prior to GMT 4.1.3 and does not contain the required information to indicate that the grid is geographic. To add this information, run
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDEDIT(1)
GRDEDIT(1)
grdedit junk.grd fg
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), grd2xyz(1), xyz2grd(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDFFT(1)
GRDFFT(1)
NAME
grdfft Perform mathematical operations on grid les in the wavenumber (or frequency) domain
SYNOPSIS
grdfft in_grdle Gout_grdle [ Aazimuth ] [ Czlevel ] [ D[scale|g] ] [ E[x|y][w] ] [ F[x|y]params ] [ I[scale|g] ] [ L ] [ M ] [ Nstuff ] [ Sscale ] [ Tte/rl/rm/rw/ri ] [ V ]
DESCRIPTION
grdfft will take the 2-D forward Fast Fourier Transform and perform one or more mathematical operations in the frequency domain before transforming back to the space domain. An option is provided to scale the data before writing the new values to an output le. The horizontal dimensions of the grid are assumed to be in meters. Geographical grids may be used by specifying the M option that scales degrees to meters. If you have grids with dimensions in km, you could change this to meters using grdedit or scale the output with grdmath. in_grdle 2-D binary grid le to be operated on. (See GRID FILE FORMATS below). G Specify the name of the output grid le. (See GRID FILE FORMATS below).
OPTIONS
No space between the option ag and the associated arguments. A C D Take the directional derivative in the azimuth direction measured in degrees CW from north. Upward (for zlevel > 0) or downward (for zlevel < 0) continue the eld zlevel meters. Differentiate the eld, i.e., take d(eld)/dz. This is equivalent to multiplying by kr in the frequency domain (kr is radial wave number). Append a scale to multiply by (kr * scale) instead. Alternatively, append g to indicate that your data are geoid heights in meters and output should be gravity anomalies in mGal. [Default is no scale]. Estimate power spectrum in the radial direction. Place x or y immediately after E to compute the spectrum in the x or y direction instead. No grid le is created; f (i.e., frequency or wave number), power[f], and 1 standard deviation in power[f] are written to stdout. Append w to write wavelength instead of frequency. Filter the data. Place x or y immediately after F to lter x or y direction only; default is isotropic. Choose between a cosine-tapered band-pass, a Gaussian band-pass lter, or a Butterworth bandpass lter. Cosine-taper: Specify four wavelengths lc/lp/hp/hc in correct units (see M) to design a bandpass lter: wavelengths greater than lc or less than hc will be cut, wavelengths greater than lp and less than hp will be passed, and wavelengths in between will be cosine-tapered. E.g., F1000000/250000/50000/10000 M will bandpass, cutting wavelengths > 1000 km and < 10 km, passing wavelengths between 250 km and 50 km. To make a highpass or lowpass lter, give hyphens (-) for hp/hc or lc/lp. E.g., Fx-/-/50/10 will lowpass x, passing wavelengths > 50 and rejecting wavelengths < 10. Fy1000/250/-/- will highpass y, passing wavelengths < 250 and rejecting wavelengths > 1000. Gaussian band-pass: Append lo/hi, the two wavelengths in correct units (see M) to design a bandpass lter. At the given wavelengths the Gaussian lter weights will be 0.5. To make a highpass or lowpass lter, give a hyphen (-) for the hi or lo wavelength, respectively. E.g., F-/30 will lowpass the data using a Gaussian lter with half-weight at 30, while F400/- will highpass the data. Butterworth band-pass: Append lo/hi/order, the two wavelengths in correct units (see M) and the lter order (an integer) to design a bandpass lter. At the given wavelengths the Butterworth lter weights will be 0.5. To make a highpass or lowpass lter, give a hyphen (-) for the hi or lo wavelength, respectively. E.g., F-/30/2 will lowpass the data using a 2nd-order Butterworth lter, with half-weight at 30, while F400/-/2 will highpass the data. Integrate the eld, i.e., compute integral_over_z (eld * dz). This is equivalent to divide by kr in the frequency domain (kr is radial wave number). Append a scale to divide by (kr * scale) instead. Alternatively, append g to indicate that your data set is gravity anomalies in mGal and output should be geoid heights in meters. [Default is no scale].
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDFFT(1)
GRDFFT(1)
L M
Leave trend alone. By default, a linear trend will be removed prior to the transform. Map units. Choose this option if your grid le is a geographical grid and you want to convert degrees into meters. If the data are close to either pole, you should consider projecting the grid le onto a rectangular coordinate system using grdproject. Choose or inquire about suitable grid dimensions for FFT. Nf will force the FFT to use the dimensions of the data. Nq will inQuire about more suitable dimensions. Nnx/ny will do FFT on array size nx/ny (Must be >= grid le size). Default chooses dimensions >= data which optimize speed, accuracy of FFT. If FFT dimensions > grid le dimensions, data are extended and tapered to zero. Multiply each element by scale in the space domain (after the frequency domain operations). [Default is 1.0]. Compute the isostatic compensation from the topography load (input grid le) on an elastic plate of thickness te. Also append densities for load, mantle, water, and inll in SI units. If te == 0 then the Airy response is returned. T implicitly sets L. Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"].
S T
GRID FILE FORMATS

EXAMPLES
To upward continue the sea-level magnetic anomalies in the le mag_0.grd to a level 800 m above sealevel: grdfft mag_0.grd C800 V Gmag_800.grd To transform geoid heights in m (geoid.grd) on a geographical grid to free-air gravity anomalies in mGal: grdfft geoid.grd Dg V Ggrav.grd To transform gravity anomalies in mGal (faa.grd) to deections of the vertical (in micro-radians) in the 038 direction, we must rst integrate gravity to get geoid, then take the directional derivative, and nally scale radians to micro-radians: grdfft faa.grd Ig38 S1e6 V Gde_38.grd Second vertical derivatives of gravity anomalies are related to the curvature of the eld. We can compute these as mGal/m2 by differentiating twice: grdfft gravity.grd D D V Ggrav_2nd_derivative.grd
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDFFT(1)
GRDFFT(1)
The rst order gravity anomaly (in mGal) due to the compensating surface caused by the topography load topo.grd (in m) on a 20 km thick elastic plate, assumed to be 4 km beneath the observation level can be computed as grdfft topo.grd T20000/2800/3330/1030/2300 S0.022 C4000 Gcomp_faa.grd where 0.022 is the scale needed for the rst term in Parkers expansion for computing gravity from topography (= 2 * PI * G * (rhom - rhol)).
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), grdedit(1), grdmath(1), grdproject(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDFILTER(1)
GRDFILTER(1)
NAME
grdlter Filter a 2-D grid le in the space (or time) domain
SYNOPSIS
grdlter input_le Ddistance_ag F<ltertype><width>[mode] Goutput_le [ Ixinc[unit][=|+][/yinc[unit][=|+]] ] [ Ni|p|r ] [ Rwest/east/south/north[r] ] [ T ] [ V ] [ f[i|o]colinfo ]
DESCRIPTION
grdlter will lter a .grd le in the time domain using one of the selected convolution or non-convolution isotropic lters and compute distances using Cartesian or Spherical geometries. The output .grd le can optionally be generated as a subOPT(R)egion of the input and/or with a new Increment. In this way, one may have "extra space" in the input data so that the edges will not be used and the output can be within one-half- width of the input edges. If the lter is low-pass, then the output may be less frequently sampled than the input. input_le The grid le of points to be ltered. (See GRID FILE FORMATS below). D Distance ag tells how grid (x,y) relates to lter width as follows: ag = 0: grid (x,y) same units as width, Cartesian distances. ag = 1: grid (x,y) in degrees, width in kilometers, Cartesian distances. ag = 2: grid (x,y) in degrees, width in km, dx scaled by cos(middle y), Cartesian distances. The above options are fastest because they allow weight matrix to be computed only once. The next three options are slower because they recompute weights for each latitude. ag = 3: grid (x,y) in degrees, width in km, dx scaled by cosine(y), Cartesian distance calculation. ag = 4: grid (x,y) in degrees, width in km, Spherical distance calculation. ag = 5: grid (x,y) in Mercator -Jm1 img units, width in km, Spherical distance calculation. F Sets the lter type. Choose among convolution and non-convolution lters. Append the lter code followed by the full diameter width. Available convolution lters are: (b) Boxcar: All weights are equal. (c) Cosine Arch: Weights follow a cosine arch curve. (g) Gaussian: Weights are given by the Gaussian function, where width is 6 times the conventional Gaussian sigma. Non-convolution lters are: (m) Median: Returns median value. (p) Maximum likelihood probability (a mode estimator): Return modal value. If more than one mode is found we return their average value. Append - or + to the lter width if you rather want to return the smallest or largest of the modal values. (l) Lower: Return the minimum of all values. (L) Lower: Return minimum of all positive values only. (u) Upper: Return maximum of all values. (U) Upper: Return maximum or all negative values only. In the case of L|U it is possible that no data passes the initial sign test; in that case the lter will return 0.0. output_le is the output grid le of the lter. (See GRID FILE FORMATS below). x_inc [and optionally y_inc] is the output Increment. Append m to indicate minutes, or c to indicate seconds. If the new x_inc, y_inc are NOT integer multiples of the old ones (in the input data), ltering will be considerably slower. [Default: Same as input.] Determine how NaN-values in the input grid affects the ltered outout: Append i to ignore all NaNs in the calculation of ltered value [Default], r is same as i except if the input node was NaN then the output node will be set to NaN (only applies if both grids are coregistered), and p which
OPTIONS
I
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDFILTER(1)
GRDFILTER(1)
will force the ltered value to be NaN if any grid-nodes with NaN-values are found inside the lter circle. R T V f west, east, south, and north denes the Region of the output points. [Default: Same as input.] Toggle the node registration for the output grid so as to become the opposite of the input grid [Default gives the same registration as the input grid]. Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"]. Special formatting of input and/or output columns (time or geographical data). Specify i or o to make this apply only to input or output [Default applies to both]. Give one or more columns (or column ranges) separated by commas. Append T (absolute calendar time), t (relative time in chosen TIME_UNIT since TIME_EPOCH), x (longitude), y (latitude), or f (oating point) to each column or column range item. Shorthand f[i|o]g means f[i|o]0x,1y (geographic coordinates).
GRID FILE FORMATS


EXAMPLES
Suppose that north_pacic_dbdb5.grd is a le of 5 minute bathymetry from 140E to 260E and 0N to 50N, and you want to nd the medians of values within a 300km radius (600km full width) of the output points, which you choose to be from 150E to 250E and 10N to 40N, and you want the output values every 0.5 degree. Using spherical distance calculations, you need: grdlter north_pacic_dbdb5.grd Gltered_pacic.grd Fm600 D4 R150/250/10/40 I0.5 V
LIMITATIONS
When working with geographic (lat, lon) grids, all three convolution lters (boxcar, cosine arch, and gaussian) will properly normalize the lter weights for the variation in gridbox size with latitude, and correctly determine which nodes are needed for the convolution when the lter "circle" crosses a periodic (0-360) boundary or contains a geographic pole. However, the spatial lters, such as median and mode lters, do not use weights and thus should only be used on Cartesian grids (or at very low latitudes) only. If you want to apply such spatial lters you should project your data to an equal-area projection and run grdlter on the resulting Cartesian grid. To use the D5 option the input Mercator grid must be created by img2mercgrd using the C option so the
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDFILTER(1)
GRDFILTER(1)
origin of the y-values is the Equator (i.e., x = y = 0 correspond to lon = lat = 0).
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), grdfft(1) img2mercgrd(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDGRADIENT(1)
GRDGRADIENT(1)
NAME
grdgradient Compute directional derivative or gradient from 2-D grid le representing z(x,y)
SYNOPSIS
grdgradient in_grdle Gout_grdle [ Aazim[/azim2] ] [ D[c][o][n] ] [ E[s|p]azim/elev[/ambient/diffuse/specular/shine] ] [ Lag ] [ M ] [ N[e][t][amp][/sigma[/offset]] ] [ Sslopele ] [ V ]
DESCRIPTION
grdgradient may be used to compute the directional derivative in a given direction (A), or the direction (S) [and the magnitude (D)] of the vector gradient of the data. Estimated values in the rst/last row/column of output depend on boundary conditions (see L). in_grdle 2-D grid le from which to compute directional derivative. (See GRID FILE FORMATS below). G Name of the output grid le for the directional derivative. (See GRID FILE FORMATS below).
OPTIONS
No space between the option ag and the associated arguments. A Azimuthal direction for a directional derivative; azim is the angle in the x,y plane measured in degrees positive clockwise from north (the +y direction) toward east (the +x direction). The negative of the directional derivative, [dz/dx*sin(azim) + dz/dy*cos(azim)], is found; negation yields positive values when the slope of z(x,y) is downhill in the azim direction, the correct sense for shading the illumination of an image (see grdimage and grdview) by a light source above the x,y plane shining from the azim direction. Optionally, supply two azimuths, Aazim/azim2, in which case the gradients in each of these directions are calculated and the one larger in magnitude is retained; this is useful for illuminating data with two directions of lineated structures, e.g., A0/270 illuminates from the north (top) and west (left). Find the direction of the gradient of the data. By default, the directions are measured clockwise from north, as azim in A above. Append c to use conventional Cartesian angles measured counterclockwise from the positive x (east) direction. Append o to report orientations (0-180) rather than directions (0-360). Append n to add 90 degrees to all angles (e.g., to give orientation of lineated features). Compute Lambertian radiance appropriate to use with grdimage and grdview. The Lambertian Reection assumes an ideal surface that reects all the light that strikes it and the surface appears equally bright from all viewing directions. azim and elev are the azimuth and elevation of light vector. Optionally, supply ambient diffuse specular shine which are parameters that control the reectance properties of the surface. Default values are: 0.55/ 0.6/0.4/10 To leave some of the values untouched, specify = as the new value. For example E60/30/=/0.5 sets the azim elev and diffuse to 60, 30 and 0.5 and leaves the other reectance parameters untouched. Append s to use a simpler Lambertian algorithm. Note that with this form you only have to provide the azimuth and elevation parameters. Append p to use the Peucker piecewise linear approximation (simpler but faster algorithm; in this case the azim and elev are hardwired to 315 and 45 degrees. This means that even if you provide other values they will be ignored.) Boundary condition ag may be x or y or xy indicating data is periodic in range of x or y or both, or ag may be g indicating geographical conditions (x and y are lon and lat). [Default uses "natural" conditions (second partial derivative normal to edge is zero).] By default the units of grdgradient are in units_of_z/ units_of_dx_and_dy. However, the user may choose this option to convert dx,dy in degrees of longitude,latitude into meters, so that the units of grdgradient are in z_units/meter. Normalization. [Default: no normalization.] The actual gradients g are offset and scaled to produce normalized gradients gn with a maximum output magnitude of amp. If amp is not given, default amp = 1. If offset is not given, it is set to the average of g. N yields gn = amp * (g - offset)/max(abs(g - offset)). Ne normalizes using a cumulative Laplace distribution yielding gn = amp * (1.0 -
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDGRADIENT(1)
GRDGRADIENT(1)
exp(sqrt(2) * (g - offset)/ sigma)) where sigma is estimated using the L1 norm of (g - offset) if it is not given. Nt normalizes using a cumulative Cauchy distribution yielding gn = (2 * amp / PI) * atan( (g - offset)/ sigma) where sigma is estimated using the L2 norm of (g - offset) if it is not given. S V Name of output grid le with scalar magnitudes of gradient vectors. Requires D but makes G optional. Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"].
HINTS
If you dont know what OPT(N) options to use to make an intensity le for grdimage or grdview, a good rst try is Ne0.6. If you want to make several illuminated maps of subregions of a large data set, and you need the illumination effects to be consistent across all the maps, use the N option and supply the same value of sigma and offset to grdgradient for each map. A good guess is offset = 0 and sigma found by grdinfo L2 or L1 applied to an unnormalized gradient grd. If you simply need the x- or y-derivatives of the grid, use grdmath.
GRID FILE FORMATS

EXAMPLES
To make a le for illuminating the data in geoid.grd using exp- normalized gradients imitating light sources in the north and west directions: grdgradient geoid.grd A0/270 Ggradients.grd Ne0.6 V To nd the azimuth orientations of seaoor fabric in the le topo.grd: grdgradient topo.grd Dno Gazimuths.grd V
REFERENCES
Horn, B.K.P., Hill-Shading and the Reectance Map, Proceedings of the IEEE, Vol. 69, No. 1, January 1981, pp. 14-47. (http://people.csail.mit.edu/ bkph/papers/Hill-Shading.pdf)
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), gmtdefaults(1), grdhisteq(1), grdimage(1), grdview(1), grdvector(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDHISTEQ(1)
GRDHISTEQ(1)
NAME
grdhisteq Histogram equalization for grid les
SYNOPSIS
grdhisteq in_grdle [ Gout_grdle ] [ Cn_cells ] [ D ] [ N[norm] ] [ Q ] [ V ]
DESCRIPTION
grdhisteq allows the user to nd the data values which divide a given grid le into patches of equal area. One common use of grdhisteq is in a kind of histogram equalization of an image. In this application, the user might have a grid of at topography with a mountain in the middle. Ordinary gray shading of this le (using grdimage/grdview) with a linear mapping from topography to graytone will result in most of the image being very dark gray, with the mountain being almost white. One could use grdhisteq to write to stdout an ASCII list of those data values which divide the range of the data into n_cells segments, each of which has an equal area in the image. Using awk or makecpt one can take this output and build a cpt le; using the cptle with grdimage will result in an image with all levels of gray occurring equally. Alternatively, see grd2cpt. The second common use of grdhisteq is in writing a grid with statistics based on some kind of cumulative distribution function. In this application, the output has relative highs and lows in the same (x,y) locations as the input le, but the values are changed to reect their place in some cumulative distribution. One example would be to nd the lowest 10% of the data: Take a grid, run grdhisteq and make a grid using n_cells = 10, and then contour the result to trace the 1 contour. This will enclose the lowest 10% of the data, regardless of their original values. Another example is in equalizing the output of grdgradient. For shading purposes it is desired that the data have a smooth distribution, such as a gaussian. If you run grdhisteq on output from grdgradient and make a grid le output with the Gaussian option, you will have a grid whose values are distributed according to a gaussian distribution with zero mean and unit variance. The locations of these values will correspond to the locations of the input; that is, the most negative output value will be in the (x,y) location of the most negative input value, and so on. in_grdle 2-D binary grid le to be equalized. (See GRID FILE FORMATS below).
OPTIONS
No space between the option ag and the associated arguments. C D G N Q V Sets how many cells (or divisions) of data range to make. Dump level information to standard output. Name of output 2-D grid le. Used with N only. (See GRID FILE FORMATS below). Gaussian output. Use with G to make an output grid with standard normal scores. Append norm to force the scores to fall in the <-1,+1> range [Default is standard normal scores]. Use quadratic intensity scaling. [Default is linear]. Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"].
GRID FILE FORMATS

By default GMT writes out grid as single precision oats in a COARDS-complaint netCDF le format. However, GMT is able to produce grid les in many other commonly used grid le formats and also facilitates so called "packing" of grids, writing out oating point data as 2- or 4-byte integers. To specify the precision, scale and offset, the user should add the sufx =id[/scale/offset[/nan]], where id is a two-letter identier of the grid type and precision, and scale and offset are optional scale factor and offset to be applied to all grid values, and nan is the value used to indicate missing data. When reading grids, the format is generally automatically recognized. If not, the same sufx can be added to input grid le names. See grdreformat(1) and Section 4.17 of the GMT Technical Reference and Cookbook for more information. When reading a netCDF le that contains multiple grids, GMT will read, by default, the rst 2-dimensional grid that can nd in that le. To coax GMT into reading another multi-dimensional variable in the grid le, append ?varname to the le name, where varname is the name of the variable. Note that you may need to escape the special meaning of ? in your shell program by putting a backslash in front of it, or by placing the
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDHISTEQ(1)
GRDHISTEQ(1)
lename and sufx between quotes or double quotes. The ?varname sufx can also be used for output grids to specify a variable name different from the default: "z". See grdreformat(1) and Section 4.18 of the GMT Technical Reference and Cookbook for more information, particularly on how to read splices of 3-, 4-, or 5-dimensional grids.
EXAMPLES
To nd the height intervals that divide the le heights.grd into 16 divisions of equal area: grdhisteq heights.grd C16 D > levels.d To make the poorly distributed intensities in the le raw_intens.grd suitable for use with grdimage or grdview, run grdhisteq raw_intens.grd Gsmooth_intens.grd N V
RESTRICTIONS
If you use grdhisteq to make a gaussian output for gradient shading in grdimage or grdview, you should be aware of the following: the output will be in the range [-x, x], where x is based on the number of data in the input grid (nx * ny) and the cumulative gaussian distribution function F(x). That is, let N = nx * ny. Then x will be adjusted so that F(x) = (N - 1 + 0.5)/N. Since about 68% of the values from a standard normal distribution fall within +/- 1, this will be true of the output grid. But if N is very large, it is possible for x to be greater than 4. Therefore, with the grdimage program clipping gradients to the range [-1, 1], you will get correct shading of 68% of your data, while 16% of them will be clipped to -1 and 16% of them clipped to +1. If this makes too much of the image too light or too dark, you should take the output of grdhisteq and rescale it using grdmath and multiplying by something less than 1.0, to shrink the range of the values, thus bringing more than 68% of the image into the range [-1, 1]. Alternatively, supply a normalization factor with N.
SEE ALSO
gmtdefaults(1), GMT (1), grd2cpt(1), grdgradient(1), grdimage(1), grdmath(1), grdview(1), makecpt(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDIMAGE(1)
GRDIMAGE(1)
NAME
grdimage Create grayshaded or colored image from a 2-D netCDF grid le
SYNOPSIS
grdimage grd_z | grd_r grd_g grd_b Ccptle [ D[r] ] Jparameters [ B[p|s]parameters ] [ Ei|dpi ] [ G[f|b]color ] [ Iintensle ] [ K ] [ M ] [ N ] [ O ] [ P ] [ Q ] [ Rwest/east/south/north[r] ] [ S[-]b|c|l|n[/threshold] ] [ T ] [ U[just/dx/dy/][c|label] ] [ V ] [ X[a|c|r][x-shift[u]] ] [ Y[a|c|r][yshift[u]] ] [ ccopies ] [ f[i|o]colinfo ] [ r ]
DESCRIPTION
grdimage reads one 2-D grid le and produces a gray-shaded (or colored) map by plotting rectangles centered on each grid node and assigning them a gray-shade (or color) based on the z-value. Alternatively, grdimage reads three 2-D grid les with the red, green, and blue components directly (all must be in the 0-255 range). Optionally, illumination may be added by providing a le with intensities in the (-1,+1) range. Values outside this range will be clipped. Such intensity les can be created from the grid using grdgradient and, optionally, modied by grdmath or grdhisteq. When using map projections, the grid is rst resampled on a new rectangular grid with the same dimensions. Higher resolution images can be obtained by using the E option. To obtain the resampled value (and hence shade or color) of each map pixel, its location is inversely projected back onto the input grid after which a value is interpolated between the surrounding input grid values. By default bi-cubic interpolation is used. Aliasing is avoided by also forward projecting the input grid nodes. If two or more nodes are projected onto the same pixel, their average will dominate in the calculation of the pixel value. Interpolation and aliasing is controlled with the S option. The R option can be used to select a map region larger or smaller than that implied by the extent of the grid. A (color) PostScript le is output. grd_z | grd_r grd_g grd_b 2-D gridded data set (or red, green, blue grids) to be imaged (See GRID FILE FORMATS below.) C J name of the color palette table (for grd_z only). Selects the map projection. Scale is UNIT/degree, 1:xxxxx, or width in UNIT (upper case modier). UNIT is cm, inch, or m, depending on the MEASURE_UNIT setting in .gmtdefaults4, but this can be overridden on the command line by appending c, i, or m to the scale/width value. When central meridian is optional, default is center of longitude range on R option. Default standard parallel is the equator. For map height, max dimension, or min dimension, append h, +, or to the width, respectively. More details can be found in the psbasemap man pages. CYLINDRICAL PROJECTIONS: Jclon0/lat0/scale (Cassini) Jcyl_stere/[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Stereographic) Jj[lon0/]scale (Miller) Jm[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Mercator) Jmlon0/lat0/scale (Mercator - Give meridian and standard parallel) Jo[a]lon0/lat0/azimuth/scale (Oblique Mercator - point and azimuth) Jo[b]lon0/lat0/lon1/lat1/scale (Oblique Mercator - two points) Joclon0/lat0/lonp/latp/scale (Oblique Mercator - point and pole) Jq[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Equidistant) Jtlon0/[lat0/]scale (TM - Transverse Mercator) Juzone/scale (UTM - Universal Transverse Mercator) Jy[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Equal-Area) CONIC PROJECTIONS:
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDIMAGE(1)
GRDIMAGE(1)
Jblon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Albers) Jdlon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Conic Equidistant) Jllon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Lambert Conic Conformal) Jpoly/[lon0/[lat0/]]scale ((American) Polyconic) AZIMUTHAL PROJECTIONS: Jalon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Lambert Azimuthal Equal-Area) Jelon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Azimuthal Equidistant) Jflon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Gnomonic) Jglon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Orthographic) Jglon0/lat0/altitude/azimuth/tilt/twist/Width/Height/scale (General Perspective). Jslon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (General Stereographic) MISCELLANEOUS PROJECTIONS: Jh[lon0/]scale (Hammer) Ji[lon0/]scale (Sinusoidal) Jkf[lon0/]scale (Eckert IV) Jk[s][lon0/]scale (Eckert VI) Jn[lon0/]scale (Robinson) Jr[lon0/]scale (Winkel Tripel) Jv[lon0/]scale (Van der Grinten) Jw[lon0/]scale (Mollweide) NON-GEOGRAPHICAL PROJECTIONS: Jp[a]scale[/origin][r|z] (Polar coordinates (theta,r)) Jxx-scale[d|l|ppow|t|T][/y-scale[d|l|ppow|t|T]] (Linear, log, and power scaling)
OPTIONS
No space between the option ag and the associated arguments. B D Sets map boundary annotation and tickmark intervals; see the psbasemap man page for all the details. Species that the grid supplied is an image le to be read via GDAL. Obviously this option will work only with GMT versions built with GDAL support. The image can be indexed or true color (RGB) and can be an URL of a remotely located le. That is D http://www.somewhere.com/image.jpg is a valid le syntax. Note, however, that to use it this way you must not be blocked by a proxy. If you are, chances are good that it can work by setting the environmental variable http_proxy with the value your_proxy:port Append r to use the region specied by R to apply to the image. For example, if you have used Rd then the image will be assigned the limits of a global domain. The interest of this mode is that you can project a raw image (an image without referencing coordinates). Sets the resolution of the projected grid that will be created if a map projection other than Linear or Mercator was selected. By default, the projected grid will be of the same size (rows and columns) as the input le. Specify i to use the PostScript image operator to interpolate the image at the device resolution. This option only applies when the resulting image otherwise would consist of only two colors: black (0) and white (255). If so, this option will instead use the image as a transparent mask and paint the mask (or its inverse, with Gb) with the given color combination. (See SPECIFYING COLOR below). Gives the name of a grid le with intensities in the (-1,+1) range. [Default is no illumination].
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDIMAGE(1)
GRDIMAGE(1)
K M N O P Q R
More PostScript code will be appended later [Default terminates the plot system]. Force conversion to monochrome image using the (television) YIQ transformation. Cannot be used with Q. Do not clip the image at the map boundary (only relevant for non-rectangular maps). Selects Overlay plot mode [Default initializes a new plot system]. Selects Portrait plotting mode [Default is Landscape, see gmtdefaults to change this]. Make grid nodes with z = NaN transparent, using the colormasking feature in PostScript Level 3 (the PS device must support PS Level 3). xmin, xmax, ymin, and ymax specify the Region of interest. For geographic regions, these limits correspond to west, east, south, and north and you may specify them in decimal degrees or in [+-]dd:mm[:ss.xxx][W|E|S|N] format. Append r if lower left and upper right map coordinates are given instead of w/e/s/n. The two shorthands Rg and Rd stand for global domain (0/360 and -180/+180 in longitude respectively, with -90/+90 in latitude). Alternatively, specify the name of an existing grid le and the R settings (and grid spacing, if applicable) are copied from the grid. For calendar time coordinates you may either give (a) relative time (relative to the selected TIME_EPOCH and in the selected TIME_UNIT; append t to JX|x), or (b) absolute time of the form [date]T[clock] (append T to JX|x). At least one of date and clock must be present; the T is always required. The date string must be of the form [-]yyyy[-mm[-dd]] (Gregorian calendar) or yyyy[-Www[-d]] (ISO week calendar), while the clock string must be of the form hh:mm:ss[.xxx]. The use of delimiters and their type and positions must be exactly as indicated (however, input, output and plot formats are customizable; see gmtdefaults). You may ask for a larger w/e/s/n region to have more room between the image and the axes. A smaller region than specied in the grid le will result in a subset of the grid [Default is the region given by the grid le]. Select the interpolation mode by adding b for B-spline smoothing, c for bicubic interpolation, l for bilinear interpolation, or n for nearest-neighbor value (for example to plot categorical data). Optionally, prepend - to switch off antialiasing. Add /threshold to control how close to nodes with NaNs the interpolation will go. A threshold of 1.0 requires all (4 or 16) nodes involved in interpolation to be non-NaN. 0.5 will interpolate about half way from a non-NaN value; 0.1 will go about 90% of the way, etc. [Default is bicubic interpolation with antialiasing and a threshold of 0.5]. This option has become OBSOLETE. Use grdview T instead. Use Sn to plot near-neighbor values only (use E to increase the resolution). Use Sn Q to obtain something similar to the old option Ts. The option To is no longer supported. Draw Unix System time stamp on plot. By adding just/dx/dy/, the user may specify the justication of the stamp and where the stamp should fall on the page relative to lower left corner of the plot. For example, BL/0/0 will align the lower left corner of the time stamp with the lower left corner of the plot. Optionally, append a label, or c (which will plot the command string.). The GMT parameters UNIX_TIME, UNIX_TIME_POS, and UNIX_TIME_FORMAT can affect the appearance; see the gmtdefaults man page for details. The time string will be in the locale set by the environment variable TZ (generally local time). Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"].
X Y Shift plot origin relative to the current origin by (x-shift,y-shift) and optionally append the length unit (c, i, m, p). You can prepend a to shift the origin back to the original position after plotting, or prepend r [Default] to reset the current origin to the new location. If O is used then the default (x-shift,y-shift) is (0,0), otherwise it is (r1i, r1i) or (r2.5c, r2.5c). Alternatively, give c to align the center coordinate (x or y) of the plot with the center of the page based on current page size. c f Species the number of plot copies. [Default is 1]. Special formatting of input and/or output columns (time or geographical data). Specify i or o to make this apply only to input or output [Default applies to both]. Give one or more columns (or
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDIMAGE(1)
GRDIMAGE(1)
column ranges) separated by commas. Append T (absolute calendar time), t (relative time in chosen TIME_UNIT since TIME_EPOCH), x (longitude), y (latitude), or f (oating point) to each column or column range item. Shorthand f[i|o]g means f[i|o]0x,1y (geographic coordinates).
GRID FILE FORMATS

IMAGING GRIDS WITH NANS

Be aware that if your input grid contains patches of NaNs, these patches can become larger as a consequence of the resampling that must take place with most map projections. Because grdimage uses the PostScript colorimage operator, for most non-linear projections we must resample your grid onto an equidistant rectangular lattice. If you nd that the NaN areas are not treated adequately, consider (a) use a linear projection, or (b) use grdview Ts instead.
EXAMPLES
To gray-shade the le hawaii_grav.grd with shades given in shades.cpt on a Lambert map at 1.5 cm/degree along the standard parallels 18 and 24, and using 1 degree tickmarks: grdimage hawaii_grav.grd Jl18/24/1.5c Cshades.cpt B1 > hawaii_grav_image.ps To create an illuminated color PostScript plot of the gridded data set image.grd, using the intensities provided by the le intens.grd, and color levels in the le colors.cpt, with linear scaling at 10 inch/x-unit, tickmarks every 5 units: grdimage image.grd Jx10i Ccolors.cpt Iintens.grd B5 > image.ps To create an false color PostScript plot from the three grid les red.grd, green.grd, and blue.grd, with linear scaling at 10 inch/x-unit, tickmarks every 5 units: grdimage red.grd green.grd blue.grd Jx10i B5 > rgbimage.ps When GDAL support is built in: To create a sinusoidal projection of a remotely located Jessica Rabbit grdimage -JI15c -Rd -Dr http://larryre.les.wordpress.com/2009/07/untooned_jessicarabbit.jpg -P > jess.ps
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), gmt2rgb(1), grdcontour(1), grdview(1), grdgradient(1), grdhisteq(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDINFO(1)
GRDINFO(1)
NAME
grdinfo Get information about the contents of a 2-D grid le
SYNOPSIS
grdinfo grdles [ C ] [ F ] [ I[dx[/dy]] ][ L[0|1|2] ] [ M ] [ Tdz ] [ V ] [ f[i|o]colinfo ]
DESCRIPTION
grdinfo reads a 2-D binary grid le and reports various statistics for the (x,y,z) data in the grid le(s). The output information contains the minimum/maximum values for x, y, and z, where the min/max of z occur, the x- and y-increments, and the number of x and y nodes, and [optionally] the mean, standard deviation, and/or the median, L1 scale of z, and number of nodes set to NaN. grdle The name of one or several 2-D grid les. (See GRID FILE FORMATS below.)
OPTIONS
No space between the option ag and the associated arguments. C Formats the report using tab-separated elds on a single line. The output is w e s n z0 z1 dx dy nx ny [ x0 y0 x1 y1 ] [ med scale ] [ mean std rms] [n_nan]. The data in brackets are output only if the corresponding options M, L1, L2, and M are used, respectively. If the I option is used, the output format is instead NF w e s n z0 z1, where NF is the total number of grids read and w e s n are rounded off (see I). Report grid domain and x/y-increments in world mapping format [Default is generic]. Does not apply to the C option. Report the min/max of the region to the nearest multiple of dx and dy, and output this in the form Rw/e/s/n (unless C is set). To report the actual grid region, select I-. If no argument is given then we report the grid increment in the form Ixinc/yinc. Report range of z after actually scanning the data, not just reporting what the header says. Report median and L1 scale of z (L1 scale = 1.4826 * Median Absolute Deviation (MAD)). Report mean, standard deviation, and rms of z. Find and report the location of min/max z-values, and count and report the number of nodes set to NaN, if any. Determine min and max z-value, round off to multiples of dz, and report as the text string Tzmin/zmax/dz for use by makecpt. Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"]. Special formatting of input and/or output columns (time or geographical data). Specify i or o to make this apply only to input or output [Default applies to both]. Give one or more columns (or column ranges) separated by commas. Append T (absolute calendar time), t (relative time in chosen TIME_UNIT since TIME_EPOCH), x (longitude), y (latitude), or f (oating point) to each column or column range item. Shorthand f[i|o]g means f[i|o]0x,1y (geographic coordinates).
F I
L0 L1 L2 M T V f
GRID FILE FORMATS

GMT is able to recognize many of the commonly used grid le formats, as well as the precision, scale and offset of the values contained in the grid le. When GMT needs a little help with that, you can add the sufx =id[/scale/offset[/nan]], where id is a two-letter identier of the grid type and precision, and scale and offset are optional scale factor and offset to be applied to all grid values, and nan is the value used to indicate missing data. See grdreformat(1) and Section 4.17 of the GMT Technical Reference and Cookbook for more information. When reading a netCDF le that contains multiple grids, GMT will read, by default, the rst 2-dimensional grid that can nd in that le. To coax GMT into reading another multi-dimensional variable in the grid le, append ?varname to the le name, where varname is the name of the variable. Note that you may need to escape the special meaning of ? in your shell program by putting a backslash in front of it, or by placing the lename and sufx between quotes or double quotes. See grdreformat(1) and Section 4.18 of the GMT Technical Reference and Cookbook for more information, particularly on how to read splices of 3-, 4-, or
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDINFO(1)
GRDINFO(1)
5-dimensional grids.
EXAMPLES
To obtain all the information about the data set in le hawaii_topo.grd: grdinfo L1 L2 M hawaii_topo.grd
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), grd2cpt(1), grd2xyz(1), grdedit(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDLANDMASK(1)
GRDLANDMASK(1)
NAME
grdlandmask Create "wet-dry" mask grid le from shoreline data base.
SYNOPSIS
grdlandmask Gmask_grd_le] Ixinc[unit][=|+][/yinc[unit][=|+]] Rwest/east/south/north[r] [ Amin_area[/min_level/max_level][+r|l][ppercent] ] [ Dresolution[+] ] [ F ] [ Nmaskvalues[o] ] [ V ]
DESCRIPTION
grdlandmask reads the selected shoreline database and uses that information to decide which nodes in the specied grid are over land or over water. The nodes dened by the selected region and lattice spacing will be set according to one of two criteria: (1) land vs water, or (2) the more detailed (hierarchical) ocean vs land vs lake vs island vs pond. The resulting mask may be used in subsequent operations involving grdmath to mask out data from land [or water] areas. G I Name of resulting output mask grid le. (See GRID FILE FORMATS below). x_inc [and optionally y_inc] is the grid spacing. Optionally, append a sufx modier. Geographical (degrees) coordinates: Append m to indicate arc minutes or c to indicate arc seconds. If one of the units e, k, i, or n is appended instead, the increment is assumed to be given in meter, km, miles, or nautical miles, respectively, and will be converted to the equivalent degrees longitude at the middle latitude of the region (the conversion depends on ELLIPSOID). If /y_inc is given but set to 0 it will be reset equal to x_inc; otherwise it will be converted to degrees latitude. All coordinates: If = is appended then the corresponding max x (east) or y (north) may be slightly adjusted to t exactly the given increment [by default the increment may be adjusted slightly to t the given domain]. Finally, instead of giving an increment you may specify the number of nodes desired by appending + to the supplied integer argument; the increment is then recalculated from the number of nodes and the domain. The resulting increment value depends on whether you have selected a gridline-registered or pixel-registered grid; see Appendix B for details. Note: if Rgrdle is used then grid spacing has already been initialized; use I to override the values. west, east, south, and north specify the Region of interest, and you may specify them in decimal degrees or in [+-]dd:mm[:ss.xxx][W|E|S|N] format. Append r if lower left and upper right map coordinates are given instead of w/e/s/n. The two shorthands Rg and Rd stand for global domain (0/360 and -180/+180 in longitude respectively, with -90/+90 in latitude). Alternatively, specify the name of an existing grid le and the R settings (and grid spacing, if applicable) are copied from the grid. Features with an area smaller than min_area in km2 or of hierarchical level that is lower than min_level or higher than max_level will not be plotted [Default is 0/0/4 (all features)]. Level 2 (lakes) contains regular lakes and wide river bodies which we normally include as lakes; append +r to just get river-lakes or +l to just get regular lakes (requires GSHHS 2.0.1 or higher). Finally, append +ppercent to exclude polygons whose percentage area of the corresponding full-resolution feature is less than percent (requires GSHHS 2.0 or higher). See GSHHS INFORMATION below for more details. Selects the resolution of the data set to use ((f)ull, (h)igh, (i)ntermediate, (l)ow, or (c)rude). The resolution drops off by 80% between data sets. [Default is l]. Append + to automatically select a lower resolution should the one requested not be available [abort if not found]. Note that because the coastlines differ in details a node in a mask le using one resolution is not guaranteed to remain inside [or outside] when a different resolution is selected. Force pixel node registration [Default is gridline registration]. (Node registrations are dened in GMT Cookbook Appendix B on grid le formats.) Sets the values that will be assigned to nodes. Values can be any number, including the textstring NaN. Append o to let nodes exactly on feature boundaries be considered outside [Default is inside]. Specify this information using 1 of 2 formats: Nwet/dry. Nocean/land/lake/island/pond.
OPTIONS
A
F N
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDLANDMASK(1)
GRDLANDMASK(1)
[Default is 0/1/0/1/0 (i.e., 0/1)]. V Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"].
GRID FILE FORMATS

EXAMPLES
To set all nodes on land to NaN, and nodes over water to 1, using the high resolution data set, do grdlandmask R-60/-40/-40/-30 Dh i5m N1/NaN Gland_mask.grd V To make a 1x1 degree global grid with the hierarchical levels of the nodes based on the low resolution data: grdlandmask R0/360/-90/90 Dl I1 N0/1/2/3/4 Glevels.grd V
GSHHS INFORMATION
The coastline database is GSHHS which is compiled from two sources: World Vector Shorelines (WVS) and CIA World Data Bank II (WDBII). In particular, all level-1 polygons (ocean-land boundary) are derived from the more accurate WVS while all higher level polygons (level 2-4, representing land/lake, lake/island-in-lake, and island-in-lake/lake-in-island-in-lake boundaries) are taken from WDBII. Much processing has taken place to convert WVS and WDBII data into usable form for GMT: assembling closed polygons from line segments, checking for duplicates, and correcting for crossings between polygons. The area of each polygon has been determined so that the user may choose not to draw features smaller than a minimum area (see A); one may also limit the highest hierarchical level of polygons to be included (4 is the maximum). The 4 lower-resolution databases were derived from the full resolution database using the Douglas-Peucker line-simplication algorithm. The classication of rivers and borders follow that of the WDBII. See the GMT Cookbook and Technical Reference Appendix K for further details.
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), grdmath(1), grdclip(1), psmask(1), psclip(1), pscoast(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDMASK(1)
GRDMASK(1)
NAME
grdmask Create mask grid les from xy paths.
SYNOPSIS
grdmask pathles Gmask_grd_le] Ixinc[unit][=|+][/yinc[unit][=|+]] Rwest/east/south/north[r] [ A[m|p] ] [ F ] [ H[i][nrec] ] [ Nout/edge/in ] [ Ssearch_radius[m|c|k|K] ] [ V ] [ :[i|o] ] [ bi[s|S|d|D[ncol]|c[var1/...]] ] [ fcolinfo ] [ m[ag] ]
DESCRIPTION
grdmask can operate in two different modes. 1. It reads one or more xy-les that each dene a closed polygon. The nodes dened by the specied region and lattice spacing will be set equal to one of three possible values depending on whether the node is outside, on the polygon perimeter, or inside the polygon. The resulting mask may be used in subsequent operations involving grdmath to mask out data from polygonal areas. 2. The xy-les simply represent data point locations and the mask is set to the inside or outside value depending on whether a node is within a maximum distance from the nearest data point. If the distance specied is zero then only the nodes nearest each data point are considered "inside". pathles The name of 1 or more ASCII [or binary, see b] les holding the polygon(s) or data points. G I Name of resulting output mask grid le. (See GRID FILE FORMATS below). x_inc [and optionally y_inc] is the grid spacing. Optionally, append a sufx modier. Geographical (degrees) coordinates: Append m to indicate arc minutes or c to indicate arc seconds. If one of the units e, k, i, or n is appended instead, the increment is assumed to be given in meter, km, miles, or nautical miles, respectively, and will be converted to the equivalent degrees longitude at the middle latitude of the region (the conversion depends on ELLIPSOID). If /y_inc is given but set to 0 it will be reset equal to x_inc; otherwise it will be converted to degrees latitude. All coordinates: If = is appended then the corresponding max x (east) or y (north) may be slightly adjusted to t exactly the given increment [by default the increment may be adjusted slightly to t the given domain]. Finally, instead of giving an increment you may specify the number of nodes desired by appending + to the supplied integer argument; the increment is then recalculated from the number of nodes and the domain. The resulting increment value depends on whether you have selected a gridline-registered or pixel-registered grid; see Appendix B for details. Note: if Rgrdle is used then grid spacing has already been initialized; use I to override the values. xmin, xmax, ymin, and ymax specify the Region of interest. For geographic regions, these limits correspond to west, east, south, and north and you may specify them in decimal degrees or in [+-]dd:mm[:ss.xxx][W|E|S|N] format. Append r if lower left and upper right map coordinates are given instead of w/e/s/n. The two shorthands Rg and Rd stand for global domain (0/360 and -180/+180 in longitude respectively, with -90/+90 in latitude). Alternatively, specify the name of an existing grid le and the R settings (and grid spacing, if applicable) are copied from the grid. For calendar time coordinates you may either give (a) relative time (relative to the selected TIME_EPOCH and in the selected TIME_UNIT; append t to JX|x), or (b) absolute time of the form [date]T[clock] (append T to JX|x). At least one of date and clock must be present; the T is always required. The date string must be of the form [-]yyyy[-mm[-dd]] (Gregorian calendar) or yyyy[-Www[-d]] (ISO week calendar), while the clock string must be of the form hh:mm:ss[.xxx]. The use of delimiters and their type and positions must be exactly as indicated (however, input, output and plot formats are customizable; see gmtdefaults). If the input data are geographic (as indicated by ) then the sides in the polygons will be approximated by great circle arcs. When using the A sides will be regarded as straight lines. Alternatively, append m to have sides rst follow meridians, then parallels. Or append p to rst follow parallels, then meridians. Force pixel node registration [Default is gridline registration]. (Node registrations are dened in GMT Cookbook Appendix B on grid le formats.)
OPTIONS
A
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDMASK(1)
GRDMASK(1)
Input le(s) has header record(s). If used, the default number of header records is N_HEADER_RECS. Use Hi if only input data should have header records [Default will write out header records if the input data have them]. Blank lines and lines starting with # are always skipped. Sets the values that will be assigned to nodes that are outside the polygons, on the edge, or inside. Values can be any number, including the textstring NaN [Default is 0/0/1]. Set nodes depending on their distance from the nearest data point. Nodes within radius [0] from a data point are considered inside. Append m to indicate minutes or c to indicate seconds. Append k to indicate km (implies R and I are in degrees, and we will use a fast at Earth approximation to calculate distance). For more accuracy, use uppercase K if distances should be calculated along geodesics. However, if the current ELLIPSOID is spherical then great circle calculations are used. If S is not set then we consider the input data to dene closed polygon(s) instead. Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"]. Selects binary input. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of columns in your binary input le if it exceeds the columns needed by the program. Or append c if the input le is netCDF. Optionally, append var1/var2/... to specify the variables to be read. [Default is 2 input columns]. Special formatting of input and/or output columns (time or geographical data). Specify i or o to make this apply only to input or output [Default applies to both]. Give one or more columns (or column ranges) separated by commas. Append T (absolute calendar time), t (relative time in chosen TIME_UNIT since TIME_EPOCH), x (longitude), y (latitude), or f (oating point) to each column or column range item. Shorthand f[i|o]g means f[i|o]0x,1y (geographic coordinates). Multiple segment le. Segments are separated by a record whose rst character is ag. [Default is >].
N S
V bi
GRID FILE FORMATS


EXAMPLES
To set all nodes inside and on the polygons coastline_*.xy to 0, and outside points to 1, do
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDMASK(1)
GRDMASK(1)
grdmask coastline_*.xy R-60/-40/-40/-30 I5m N1/0/0 Gland_mask.grd V To set nodes within 50 km of data points to 1 and other nodes to NaN, do grdmask data.xyz R-60/-40/-40/-30 I5m NNaN/1/1 S50k Gdata_mask.grd V
SEE ALSO
GMT(1), grdlandmask(1), grdmath(1), grdclip(1), psmask(1), psclip(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDMATH(1)
GRDMATH(1)
NAME
grdmath Reverse Polish Notation calculator for grid les
SYNOPSIS
grdmath [ F ] [ Ixinc[unit][=|+][/yinc[unit][=|+]] ] [ M ] [ N ] [ Rwest/east/south/north[r] ] [ V ] [ bi[s|S|d|D[ncol]|c[var1/...]] ] [ fcolinfo ] operand [ operand ] OPERATOR [ operand ] OPERATOR ... = outgrdle
DESCRIPTION
grdmath will perform operations like add, subtract, multiply, and divide on one or more grid les or constants using Reverse Polish Notation (RPN) syntax (e.g., Hewlett-Packard calculator-style). Arbitrarily complicated expressions may therefore be evaluated; the nal result is written to an output grid le. When two grids are on the stack, each element in le A is modied by the corresponding element in le B. However, some operators only require one operand (see below). If no grid les are used in the expression then options R, I must be set (and optionally F). The expression = outgrdle can occur as many times as the depth of the stack allows. operand If operand can be opened as a le it will be read as a grid le. If not a le, it is interpreted as a numerical constant or a special symbol (see below). outgrdle The name of a 2-D grid le that will hold the nal result. (See GRID FILE FORMATS below). OPERATORS Choose among the following 145 operators. "args" are the number of input and output arguments. Operator args ABS 11 ACOS ACOSH ACOT ACSC ADD AND ASEC ASIN ASINH ATAN ATAN2 ATANH BEI 11 BER 11 CAZ CBAZ CDIST CEIL CHICRIT CHIDIST CORRCOEFF COS 11 COSD COSH COT COTD CPOISS Returns abs (A). 11 acos (A). 11 acosh (A). 11 acot (A). 11 acsc (A). 21 A + B. 21 NaN if A and B == NaN, B if A == NaN, else A. 11 asec (A). 11 asin (A). 11 asinh (A). 11 atan (A). 21 atan2 (A, B). 11 atanh (A). bei (A). ber (A). 21 Cartesian azimuth from grid nodes to stack x,y. 21 Cartesian backazimuth from grid nodes to stack x,y. 21 Cartesian distance between grid nodes and stack x,y. 11 ceil (A) (smallest integer >= A). 21 Critical value for chi-squared-distribution, with alpha = A and n = B. 21 chi-squared-distribution P(chi2,n), with chi2 = A and n = B. 21 Correlation coefcient r(A, B). cos (A) (A in radians). 11 cos (A) (A in degrees). 11 cosh (A). 11 cot (A) (A in radians). 11 cot (A) (A in degrees). 21 Cumulative Poisson distribution F(x,lambda), with x = A and lambda =
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDMATH(1)
GRDMATH(1)
B. CSC 11 CSCD CURV D2DX2 D2DXY D2DY2 D2R 11 DDX DDY DILOG DIV 21 DUP 12 EQ 21 ERF 11 ERFC ERFINV EXCH EXP 11 EXTREMA elsewhere. FACT FCRIT FDIST FLIPLR FLIPUD FLOOR FMOD GE 21 GT 21 HYPOT I0 11 I1 11 IN 21 INRANGE INSIDE INV 11 ISNAN J0 11 J1 11 JN 21 K0 11 K1 11 KEI 11 KER KN 21 KURT LDIST LE 21 LMSSCL LOG LOG10 LOG1P LOG2
csc (A) (A in radians). 11 csc (A) (A in degrees). 11 Curvature of A (Laplacian). 11 d2(A)/dx2 2nd derivative. 11 d2(A)/dxdy 2nd derivative. 11 d2(A)/dy2 2nd derivative. Converts Degrees to Radians. 11 d(A)/dx Central 1st derivative. 11 d(A)/dy Central 1st derivative. 11 dilog (A). A / B. Places duplicate of A on the stack. 1 if A == B, else 0. Error function erf (A). 11 Complementary Error function erfc (A). 11 Inverse error function of A. 22 Exchanges A and B on the stack. exp (A). 11 Local Extrema: +2/-2 is max/min, +1/-1 is saddle with max/min in x, 0 11 A! (A factorial). 31 Critical value for F-distribution, with alpha = A, n1 = B, and n2 = C. 31 F-distribution Q(F,n1,n2), with F = A, n1 = B, and n2 = C. 11 Reverse order of values in each row. 11 Reverse order of values in each column. 11 oor (A) (greatest integer <= A). 21 A % B (remainder after truncated division). 1 if A >= B, else 0. 1 if A > B, else 0. 21 hypot (A, B) = sqrt (A*A + B*B). Modied Bessel function of A (1st kind, order 0). Modied Bessel function of A (1st kind, order 1). Modied Bessel function of A (1st kind, order B). 31 1 if B <= A <= C, else 0. 11 1 when inside or on polygon(s) in A, else 0. 1 / A. 11 1 if A == NaN, else 0. Bessel function of A (1st kind, order 0). Bessel function of A (1st kind, order 1). Bessel function of A (1st kind, order B). Modied Kelvin function of A (2nd kind, order 0). Modied Bessel function of A (2nd kind, order 1). kei (A). 11 ker (A). Modied Bessel function of A (2nd kind, order B). 11 Kurtosis of A. 11 Compute distance from lines in multi-segment ASCII le A. 1 if A <= B, else 0. 11 LMS scale estimate (LMS STD) of A. 11 log (A) (natural log). 11 log10 (A) (base 10). 11 log (1+A) (accurate for small A). 11 log2 (A) (base 2).
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDMATH(1)
GRDMATH(1)
LOWER 11 The lowest (minimum) value of A. LRAND 21 Laplace random noise with mean A and std. deviation B. LT 21 1 if A < B, else 0. MAD 11 Median Absolute Deviation (L1 STD) of A. MAX 21 Maximum of A and B. MEAN 11 Mean value of A. MED 11 Median value of A. MIN 21 Minimum of A and B. MOD 21 A mod B (remainder after oored division). MODE 11 Mode value (Least Median of Squares) of A. MUL 21 A * B. NAN 21 NaN if A == B, else A. NEG 11 -A. NEQ 21 1 if A != B, else 0. NOT 11 NaN if A == NaN, 1 if A == 0, else 0. NRAND 21 Normal, random values with mean A and std. deviation B. OR 21 NaN if A or B == NaN, else A. PDIST 11 Compute distance from points in ASCII le A. PLM 31 Associated Legendre polynomial P(A) degree B order C. PLMg 3 1 Normalized associated Legendre polynomial P(A) degree B order C (geophysical convention). POP 10 Delete top element from the stack. POW 21 A B. PQUANT 21 The Bth Quantile (0-100%) of A. PSI 11 Psi (or Digamma) of A. PV 31 Legendre function Pv(A) of degree v = real(B) + imag(C). QV 31 Legendre function Qv(A) of degree v = real(B) + imag(C). R2 21 R2 = A2 + B2. R2D 11 Convert Radians to Degrees. RAND 21 Uniform random values between A and B. RINT 11 rint (A) (nearest integer). ROTX 21 Rotate A by the (constant) shift B in x-direction. ROTY 21 Rotate A by the (constant) shift B in y-direction. SAZ 21 Spherical azimuth from grid nodes to stack x,y. SBAZ 21 Spherical backazimuth from grid nodes to stack x,y. SDIST 21 Spherical (Great circle) distance (in degrees) between grid nodes and stack lon,lat (A, B). SEC 11 sec (A) (A in radians). SECD 11 sec (A) (A in degrees). SIGN 11 sign (+1 or -1) of A. SIN 11 sin (A) (A in radians). SINC 11 sinc (A) (sin (pi*A)/(pi*A)). SIND 11 sin (A) (A in degrees). SINH 11 sinh (A). SKEW 11 Skewness of A. SQR 11 A2. SQRT 11 sqrt (A). STD 11 Standard deviation of A. STEP 11 Heaviside step function: H(A). STEPX 11 Heaviside step function in x: H(x-A). STEPY 11 Heaviside step function in y: H(y-A). SUB 21 A - B. TAN 11 tan (A) (A in radians). TAND 11 tan (A) (A in degrees).
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDMATH(1)
GRDMATH(1)
TANH 11 tanh (A). TCRIT 21 Critical value for Students t-distribution, with alpha = A and n = B. TDIST 21 Students t-distribution A(t,n), with t = A, and n = B. TN 21 Chebyshev polynomial Tn(-1<t<+1,n), with t = A, and n = B. UPPER 11 The highest (maximum) value of A. XOR 21 B if A == NaN, else A. Y0 11 Bessel function of A (2nd kind, order 0). Y1 11 Bessel function of A (2nd kind, order 1). YLM 22 Re and Im orthonormalized spherical harmonics degree A order B. YLMg 22 Cos and Sin normalized spherical harmonics degree A order B (geophysical convention). YN 21 Bessel function of A (2nd kind, order B). ZCRIT 11 Critical value for the normal-distribution, with alpha = A. ZDIST 11 Cumulative normal-distribution C(x), with x = A. SYMBOLS The following symbols have special meaning: PI 3.1415926... E 2.7182818... EULER 0.5772156... XMIN Minimum x value XMAX Maximum x value XINC x increment NX The number of x nodes YMIN Minimum y value YMAX Maximum y value YINC y increment NY The number of y nodes X Grid with x-coordinates Y Grid with y-coordinates Xn Grid with normalized [-1 to +1] x-coordinates Yn Grid with normalized [-1 to +1] y-coordinates
OPTIONS
F I Force pixel node registration [Default is gridline registration]. (Node registrations are dened in GMT Cookbook Appendix B on grid le formats.) Only used with R I. x_inc [and optionally y_inc] is the grid spacing. Optionally, append a sufx modier. Geographical (degrees) coordinates: Append m to indicate arc minutes or c to indicate arc seconds. If one of the units e, k, i, or n is appended instead, the increment is assumed to be given in meter, km, miles, or nautical miles, respectively, and will be converted to the equivalent degrees longitude at the middle latitude of the region (the conversion depends on ELLIPSOID). If /y_inc is given but set to 0 it will be reset equal to x_inc; otherwise it will be converted to degrees latitude. All coordinates: If = is appended then the corresponding max x (east) or y (north) may be slightly adjusted to t exactly the given increment [by default the increment may be adjusted slightly to t the given domain]. Finally, instead of giving an increment you may specify the number of nodes desired by appending + to the supplied integer argument; the increment is then recalculated from the number of nodes and the domain. The resulting increment value depends on whether you have selected a gridline-registered or pixel-registered grid; see Appendix B for details. Note: if Rgrdle is used then grid spacing has already been initialized; use I to override the values. By default any derivatives calculated are in z_units/ x(or y)_units. However, the user may choose this option to convert dx,dy in degrees of longitude,latitude into meters using a at Earth approximation, so that gradients are in z_units/meter.
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDMATH(1)
GRDMATH(1)
N R
Turn off strict domain match checking when multiple grids are manipulated [Default will insist that each grid domain is within 1e-4 * grid_spacing of the domain of the rst grid listed]. xmin, xmax, ymin, and ymax specify the Region of interest. For geographic regions, these limits correspond to west, east, south, and north and you may specify them in decimal degrees or in [+-]dd:mm[:ss.xxx][W|E|S|N] format. Append r if lower left and upper right map coordinates are given instead of w/e/s/n. The two shorthands Rg and Rd stand for global domain (0/360 and -180/+180 in longitude respectively, with -90/+90 in latitude). Alternatively, specify the name of an existing grid le and the R settings (and grid spacing, if applicable) are copied from the grid. For calendar time coordinates you may either give (a) relative time (relative to the selected TIME_EPOCH and in the selected TIME_UNIT; append t to JX|x), or (b) absolute time of the form [date]T[clock] (append T to JX|x). At least one of date and clock must be present; the T is always required. The date string must be of the form [-]yyyy[-mm[-dd]] (Gregorian calendar) or yyyy[-Www[-d]] (ISO week calendar), while the clock string must be of the form hh:mm:ss[.xxx]. The use of delimiters and their type and positions must be exactly as indicated (however, input, output and plot formats are customizable; see gmtdefaults). Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"]. Selects binary input. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of columns in your binary input le if it exceeds the columns needed by the program. Or append c if the input le is netCDF. Optionally, append var1/var2/... to specify the variables to be read. The binary input option only applies to the data les needed by operators LDIST, PDIST, and INSIDE. Special formatting of input and/or output columns (time or geographical data). Specify i or o to make this apply only to input or output [Default applies to both]. Give one or more columns (or column ranges) separated by commas. Append T (absolute calendar time), t (relative time in chosen TIME_UNIT since TIME_EPOCH), x (longitude), y (latitude), or f (oating point) to each column or column range item. Shorthand f[i|o]g means f[i|o]0x,1y (geographic coordinates).
V bi
NOTES ON OPERATORS
(1) The operator SDIST calculates spherical distances between the (lon, lat) point on the stack and all node positions in the grid. The grid domain and the (lon, lat) point are expected to be in degrees. Similarly, the SAZ and SBAZ operators calculate spherical azimuth and back-azimuths in degrees, respectively. A few operators (PDIST, LDIST, and INSIDE) expects their argument to be a single le with points, lines, or polygons, respectively. Be aware that LDIST in particular can be slow for large grids and numerous line segments. Note: If the current ELLIPSOID is not spherical then geodesics are used in the calculations. (2) The operator PLM calculates the associated Legendre polynomial of degree L and order M (0 <= M <= L), and its argument is the sine of the latitude. PLM is not normalized and includes the Condon-Shortley phase (-1)M. PLMg is normalized in the way that is most commonly used in geophysics. The C-S phase can be added by using -M as argument. PLM will overow at higher degrees, whereas PLMg is stable until ultra high degrees (at least 3000). (3) The operators YLM and YLMg calculate normalized spherical harmonics for degree L and order M (0 <= M <= L) for all positions in the grid, which is assumed to be in degrees. YLM and YLMg return two grids, the real (cosine) and imaginary (sine) component of the complex spherical harmonic. Use the POP operator (and EXCH) to get rid of one of them, or save both by giving two consecutive = le.grd calls. The orthonormalized complex harmonics YLM are most commonly used in physics and seismology. The square of YLM integrates to 1 over a sphere. In geophysics, YLMg is normalized to produce unit power when averaging the cosine and sine terms (separately!) over a sphere (i.e., their squares each integrate to 4 pi). The Condon-Shortley phase (-1)M is not included in YLM or YLMg, but it can be added by using -M as argument. (4) All the derivatives are based on central nite differences, with natural boundary conditions.
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDMATH(1)
GRDMATH(1)
(5) Files that have the same names as some operators, e.g., ADD, SIGN, =, etc. should be identied by prepending the current directory (i.e., ./LOG). (6) Piping of les is not allowed. (7) The stack depth limit is hard-wired to 100. (8) All functions expecting a positive radius (e.g., LOG, KEI, etc.) are passed the absolute value of their argument.
GRID VALUES PRECISION

Regardless of the precision of the input data, GMT programs that create grid les will internally hold the grids in 4-byte oating point arrays. This is done to conserve memory and furthermore most if not all real data can be stored using 4-byte oating point values. Data with higher precision (i.e., double precision values) will lose that precision once GMT operates on the grid or writes out new grids. To limit loss of precision when processing data you should always consider normalizing the data prior to processing.
GRID FILE FORMATS


EXAMPLES
To take log10 of the average of 2 les, use grdmath le1.grd le2.grd ADD 0.5 MUL LOG10 = le3.grd Given the le ages.grd, which holds seaoor ages in m.y., use the relation depth(in m) = 2500 + 350 * sqrt (age) to estimate normal seaoor depths: grdmath ages.grd SQRT 350 MUL 2500 ADD = depths.grd To nd the angle a (in degrees) of the largest principal stress from the stress tensor given by the three les s_xx.grd s_yy.grd, and s_xy.grd from the relation tan (2*a) = 2 * s_xy / (s_xx - s_yy), use
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDMATH(1)
GRDMATH(1)
grdmath 2 s_xy.grd MUL s_xx.grd s_yy.grd SUB DIV ATAN2 2 DIV = direction.grd To calculate the fully normalized spherical harmonic of degree 8 and order 4 on a 1 by 1 degree world map, using the real amplitude 0.4 and the imaginary amplitude 1.1: grdmath R0/360/-90/90 I1 8 4 YML 1.1 MUL EXCH 0.4 MUL ADD = harm.grd To extract the locations of local maxima that exceed 100 mGal in the le faa.grd: grdmath faa.grd DUP EXTREMA 2 EQ MUL DUP 100 GT MUL 0 NAN = z.grd grd2xyz z.grd S > max.xyz
REFERENCES
Abramowitz, M., and I. A. Stegun, 1964, Handbook of Mathematical Functions, Applied Mathematics Series, vol. 55, Dover, New York. Holmes, S. A., and W. E. Featherstone, 2002, A unied approach to the Clenshaw summation and the recursive computation of very high degree and order normalised associated Legendre functions. Journal of Geodesy, 76, 279-299. Press, W. H., S. A. Teukolsky, W. T. Vetterling, and B. P. Flannery, 1992, Numerical Recipes, 2nd edition, Cambridge Univ., New York. Spanier, J., and K. B. Oldman, 1987, An Atlas of Functions, Hemisphere Publishing Corp.
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), gmtmath(1), grd2xyz(1), grdedit(1), grdinfo(1), xyz2grd(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDPASTE(1)
GRDPASTE(1)
NAME
grdpaste Paste together two .grd les along a common edge.
SYNOPSIS
grdpaste le_a.grd le_b.grd Goutle.grd [ V ] [ f[i|o]colinfo ]
DESCRIPTION
grdpaste will combine le_a.grd and le_b.grd into outle.grd by pasting them together along their common edge. Files le_a.grd and le_b.grd must have the same dx, dy and have one edge in common. If in doubt, check with grdinfo and use grdcut and/or grdsample if necessary to prepare the edge joint. For geographical grids, use f to handle periodic longitudes. le_a.grd One of two les to be pasted together. le_b.grd The other of two les to be pasted together. Goutle.grd The name for the combined output.
OPTIONS
V f Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"]. Special formatting of input and/or output columns (time or geographical data). Specify i or o to make this apply only to input or output [Default applies to both]. Give one or more columns (or column ranges) separated by commas. Append T (absolute calendar time), t (relative time in chosen TIME_UNIT since TIME_EPOCH), x (longitude), y (latitude), or f (oating point) to each column or column range item. Shorthand f[i|o]g means f[i|o]0x,1y (geographic coordinates).
GRID FILE FORMATS

EXAMPLES
Suppose le_a.grd is 150E - 180E and 0 - 30N, and le_b.grd is 150E - 180E, -30S - 0, then you can make outle.grd which will be 150 - 180 and -30S - 30N by: grdpaste le_a.grd le_b.grd Goutle.grd V fg
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), grdcut(1), grdinfo(1), grdsample(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDPROJECT(1)
GRDPROJECT(1)
NAME
grdproject Forward and Inverse map transformation of 2-D grid les
SYNOPSIS
grdproject in_grdle Gout_grdle Jparameters [ A[k|m|n|i|c|p] ] [ C[dx/dy] ] [ Dxinc[unit][=|+][/yinc[unit][=|+]] ] [ Edpi ] [ F ] [ I ] [ Mc|i|m|p ] [ Nnx/ny ] [ Rwest/east/south/north[r] ] [ S[-]b|c|l|n[/threshold] ] [ V ]
DESCRIPTION
grdproject will do one of two things depending whether I has been set. If set, it will transform a gridded data set from a rectangular coordinate system onto a geographical system by resampling the surface at the new nodes. If not set, it will project a geographical gridded data set onto a rectangular grid. To obtain the value at each new node, its location is inversely projected back onto the input grid after which a value is interpolated between the surrounding input grid values. By default bi-cubic interpolation is used. Aliasing is avoided by also forward projecting the input grid nodes. If two or more nodes are projected onto the same new node, their average will dominate in the calculation of the new node value. Interpolation and aliasing is controlled with the S option. The new node spacing may be determined in one of several ways by specifying the grid spacing, number of nodes, or resolution. Nodes not constrained by input data are set to NaN. The R option can be used to select a map region larger or smaller than that implied by the extent of the grid le. in_grdle 2-D binary grid le to be transformed. (See GRID FILE FORMATS below.) G J Specify the name of the output grid le. (See GRID FILE FORMATS below.) Selects the map projection. Scale is UNIT/degree, 1:xxxxx, or width in UNIT (upper case modier). UNIT is cm, inch, or m, depending on the MEASURE_UNIT setting in .gmtdefaults4, but this can be overridden on the command line by appending c, i, or m to the scale/width value. When central meridian is optional, default is center of longitude range on R option. Default standard parallel is the equator. For map height, max dimension, or min dimension, append h, +, or to the width, respectively. More details can be found in the psbasemap man pages. CYLINDRICAL PROJECTIONS: Jclon0/lat0/scale (Cassini) Jcyl_stere/[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Stereographic) Jj[lon0/]scale (Miller) Jm[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Mercator) Jmlon0/lat0/scale (Mercator - Give meridian and standard parallel) Jo[a]lon0/lat0/azimuth/scale (Oblique Mercator - point and azimuth) Jo[b]lon0/lat0/lon1/lat1/scale (Oblique Mercator - two points) Joclon0/lat0/lonp/latp/scale (Oblique Mercator - point and pole) Jq[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Equidistant) Jtlon0/[lat0/]scale (TM - Transverse Mercator) Juzone/scale (UTM - Universal Transverse Mercator) Jy[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Equal-Area) CONIC PROJECTIONS: Jblon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Albers) Jdlon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Conic Equidistant) Jllon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Lambert Conic Conformal) Jpoly/[lon0/[lat0/]]scale ((American) Polyconic)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDPROJECT(1)
GRDPROJECT(1)
AZIMUTHAL PROJECTIONS: Jalon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Lambert Azimuthal Equal-Area) Jelon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Azimuthal Equidistant) Jflon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Gnomonic) Jglon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Orthographic) Jglon0/lat0/altitude/azimuth/tilt/twist/Width/Height/scale (General Perspective). Jslon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (General Stereographic) MISCELLANEOUS PROJECTIONS: Jh[lon0/]scale (Hammer) Ji[lon0/]scale (Sinusoidal) Jkf[lon0/]scale (Eckert IV) Jk[s][lon0/]scale (Eckert VI) Jn[lon0/]scale (Robinson) Jr[lon0/]scale (Winkel Tripel) Jv[lon0/]scale (Van der Grinten) Jw[lon0/]scale (Mollweide) NON-GEOGRAPHICAL PROJECTIONS: Jp[a]scale[/origin][r|z] (Polar coordinates (theta,r)) Jxx-scale[d|l|ppow|t|T][/y-scale[d|l|ppow|t|T]] (Linear, log, and power scaling)
OPTIONS
No space between the option ag and the associated arguments. A Force 1:1 scaling, i.e., output (or input, see I) data are in actual projected meters. To specify other units, append k (km), m (mile),n (nautical mile), i (inch), c (cm), or p (points). Without A, the output (or input, see I) are in the units specied by MEASURE_UNIT (but see M). Let projected coordinates be relative to projection center [Default is relative to lower left corner]. Optionally, add offsets in the projected units to be added (or subtracted when I is set) to (from) the projected coordinates, such as false eastings and northings for particular projection zones [0/0]. x_inc [and optionally y_inc] is the grid spacing. Optionally, append a sufx modier. Geographical (degrees) coordinates: Append m to indicate arc minutes or c to indicate arc seconds. If one of the units e, k, i, or n is appended instead, the increment is assumed to be given in meter, km, miles, or nautical miles, respectively, and will be converted to the equivalent degrees longitude at the middle latitude of the region (the conversion depends on ELLIPSOID). If /y_inc is given but set to 0 it will be reset equal to x_inc; otherwise it will be converted to degrees latitude. All coordinates: If = is appended then the corresponding max x (east) or y (north) may be slightly adjusted to t exactly the given increment [by default the increment may be adjusted slightly to t the given domain]. Finally, instead of giving an increment you may specify the number of nodes desired by appending + to the supplied integer argument; the increment is then recalculated from the number of nodes and the domain. The resulting increment value depends on whether you have selected a gridline-registered or pixel-registered grid; see Appendix B for details. Note: if Rgrdle is used then grid spacing has already been initialized; use D to override the values. Set the resolution for the new grid in dots per inch. Toggle between pixel and gridline node registration [Default is same as input]. Do the Inverse transformation, from rectangular to geographical. Append c, i, or m to indicate that cm, inch, or meter should be the projected measure unit [Default is set by MEASURE_UNIT in .gmtdefaults4]. Cannot be used with A.
E F I M
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDPROJECT(1)
GRDPROJECT(1)
N R
Set the number of grid nodes in the new grid. xmin, xmax, ymin, and ymax specify the Region of interest. For geographic regions, these limits correspond to west, east, south, and north and you may specify them in decimal degrees or in [+-]dd:mm[:ss.xxx][W|E|S|N] format. Append r if lower left and upper right map coordinates are given instead of w/e/s/n. The two shorthands Rg and Rd stand for global domain (0/360 and -180/+180 in longitude respectively, with -90/+90 in latitude). Alternatively, specify the name of an existing grid le and the R settings (and grid spacing, if applicable) are copied from the grid. For calendar time coordinates you may either give (a) relative time (relative to the selected TIME_EPOCH and in the selected TIME_UNIT; append t to JX|x), or (b) absolute time of the form [date]T[clock] (append T to JX|x). At least one of date and clock must be present; the T is always required. The date string must be of the form [-]yyyy[-mm[-dd]] (Gregorian calendar) or yyyy[-Www[-d]] (ISO week calendar), while the clock string must be of the form hh:mm:ss[.xxx]. The use of delimiters and their type and positions must be exactly as indicated (however, input, output and plot formats are customizable; see gmtdefaults). You may ask to project only a subset of the grid by specifying a smaller input w/e/s/n region [Default is the region given by the grid le]. Select the interpolation mode by adding b for B-spline smoothing, c for bicubic interpolation, l for bilinear interpolation, or n for nearest-neighbor value (for example to plot categorical data). Optionally, prepend - to switch off antialiasing. Add /threshold to control how close to nodes with NaNs the interpolation will go. A threshold of 1.0 requires all (4 or 16) nodes involved in interpolation to be non-NaN. 0.5 will interpolate about half way from a non-NaN value; 0.1 will go about 90% of the way, etc. [Default is bicubic interpolation with antialiasing and a threshold of 0.5]. Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"].
GRID FILE FORMATS

EXAMPLES
To transform the geographical grid dbdb5.grd onto a pixel Mercator grid at 300 dpi, run grdproject dbdb5.grd R20/50/12/25 Jm0.25i E300 F Gdbdb5_merc.grd To inversely transform the le topo_tm.grd back onto a geographical grid, use grdproject topo_tm.grd R-80/-70/20/40 Jt-75/1:500000 I D5m V Gtopo.grd This assumes, of course, that the coordinates in topo_tm.grd were created with the same projection parameters. To inversely transform the le topo_utm.grd (which is in UTM meters) back to a geographical grid we
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDPROJECT(1)
GRDPROJECT(1)
specify a one-to-one mapping with meter as the measure unit: grdproject topo_utm.grd R203/205/60/65 Ju5/1:1 I Mm Gtopo.grd V
RESTRICTIONS
The boundaries of a projected (rectangular) data set will not necessarily give rectangular geographical boundaries (Mercator is one exception). In those cases some nodes may be unconstrained (set to NaN). To get a full grid back, your input grid may have to cover a larger area than you are interested in.
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), gmtdefaults(1), mapproject(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDREFORMAT(1)
GRDREFORMAT(1)
NAME
grdreformat Converting between different grid le formats.
SYNOPSIS
grdreformat ingrdle[=id[/scale/offset[/NaNvalue]]] outgrdle[=id[/scale/offset[/NaNvalue]]] [ N ] [ Rwest/east/south/north[r] ] [ f[i|o]colinfo ] [ V ]
DESCRIPTION
grdreformat reads a grid le in one format and writes it out using another format. As an option the user may select a subset of the data to be written and to specify scaling, translation, and NaN-value. ingrdle The grid le to be read. Append format =id code if not a standard COARDS-compliant netCDF grid le. If =id is set (see below), you may optionally append scale and offset. These options will scale the data and then offset them with the specied amounts after reading. If scale and offset are supplied you may also append a value that represents Not-a-Number (for oating-point grids this is unnecessary since the IEEE NaN is used; however integers need a value which means no data available.) outgrdle The grid le to be written. Append format =id code if not a standard COARDS-compliant netCDF grid le. If =id is set (see below), you may optionally append scale and offset. These options are particularly practical when storing the data as integers, rst removing an offset and then scaling down the values. Since the scale and offset are applied in reverse order when reading, this does not affect the data values (except for round-offs). If scale and offset are supplied you may also append a value that represents Not-a-Number (for oating-point grids this is unnecessary since the IEEE NaN is used; however integers need a value which means no data available.)
OPTIONS
N R Suppress the writing of the GMT header structure. This is useful when you want to write a native grid to be used by grdraster. It only applies to native grids and is ignored for netCDF output. xmin, xmax, ymin, and ymax specify the Region of interest. For geographic regions, these limits correspond to west, east, south, and north and you may specify them in decimal degrees or in [+-]dd:mm[:ss.xxx][W|E|S|N] format. Append r if lower left and upper right map coordinates are given instead of w/e/s/n. The two shorthands Rg and Rd stand for global domain (0/360 and -180/+180 in longitude respectively, with -90/+90 in latitude). Alternatively, specify the name of an existing grid le and the R settings (and grid spacing, if applicable) are copied from the grid. For calendar time coordinates you may either give (a) relative time (relative to the selected TIME_EPOCH and in the selected TIME_UNIT; append t to JX|x), or (b) absolute time of the form [date]T[clock] (append T to JX|x). At least one of date and clock must be present; the T is always required. The date string must be of the form [-]yyyy[-mm[-dd]] (Gregorian calendar) or yyyy[-Www[-d]] (ISO week calendar), while the clock string must be of the form hh:mm:ss[.xxx]. The use of delimiters and their type and positions must be exactly as indicated (however, input, output and plot formats are customizable; see gmtdefaults). Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"]. Special formatting of input and/or output columns (time or geographical data). Specify i or o to make this apply only to input or output [Default applies to both]. Give one or more columns (or column ranges) separated by commas. Append T (absolute calendar time), t (relative time in chosen TIME_UNIT since TIME_EPOCH), x (longitude), y (latitude), or f (oating point) to each column or column range item. Shorthand f[i|o]g means f[i|o]0x,1y (geographic coordinates).
V f
FORMAT IDENTIFIER
By default, grids will be written as oating point data stored in binary les using the netCDF format and meta-data structure. This format is conform the COARDS conventions. GMT versions prior to 4.1 produced netCDF les that did not conform to these conventions. Although these les are still supported, their use is deprecated. To write other than oating point COARDS-compliant netCDF les, append the =id
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDREFORMAT(1)
GRDREFORMAT(1)
sufx to the lename outgrdle. When reading les, grdreformat and other GMT programs will automatically recognize any type of netCDF grid le. These can be in either COARDS-compliant or pre-4.1 format, and contain oating-point or integer data. To read other types of grid les, append the =id sufx to the lename ingrdle. id cb cs ci cf cd id bm bb bs bi bf bd id nb ns ni nf nd id rb rf sf sd af gd GMT 3 netCDF legacy formats GMT netCDF format (byte) (deprecated) GMT netCDF format (short) (deprecated) GMT netCDF format (int) (deprecated) GMT netCDF format (oat) (deprecated) GMT netCDF format (double) (deprecated) GMT native binary formats GMT native, C-binary format (bit-mask) GMT native, C-binary format (byte) GMT native, C-binary format (short) GMT native, C-binary format (int) GMT native, C-binary format (oat) GMT native, C-binary format (double) GMT 4 netCDF standard GMT netCDF format (byte) (COARDS-compliant) GMT netCDF format (short) (COARDS-compliant) GMT netCDF format (int) (COARDS-compliant) GMT netCDF format (oat) (COARDS-compliant) [DEFAULT] GMT netCDF format (double) (COARDS-compliant) Misc formats SUN rasterle format (8-bit standard) GEODAS grid format GRD98 (NGDC) Golden Software Surfer format 6 (oat) Golden Software Surfer format 7 (double, read-only) Atlantic Geoscience Center format AGC (oat) Import through GDAL (convert to oat) -- NON-STANDARD
GMT STANDARD NETCDF FILES

The standard format used for grdles is based on netCDF and conforms to the COARDS conventions. Files written in this format can be read by numerous third-party programs and are platform-independent. Some disk-space can be saved by storing the data as bytes or shorts in stead of integers. Use the scale and offset parameters to make this work without loss of data range or signicance. For more details, see Appendix B. Multi-variable grid les By default, GMT programs will read the rst 2-dimensional grid contained in a COARDS-compliant netCDF le. Alternatively, use ingrdle?varname (ahead of any optional sufx =id) to specify the requested variable varname. Since ? has special meaning as a wildcard, escape this meaning by placing the full lename and sufx between quotes. Multi-dimensional grids To extract one layer or level from a 3-dimensional grid stored in a COARDS-compliant netCDF le, append both the name of the variable and the index associated with the layer (starting at zero) in the form: ingrdle?varname[layer]. Alternatively, specify the value associated with that layer using parentheses in stead of brackets: ingridle?varname(level). In a similar way layers can be extracted from 4- or even 5-dimensional grids. For example, if a grid has the dimensions (parameter, time, depth, latitude, longitude), a map can be selected by using: ingridle?varname(parameter,time,depth). Since question marks, brackets and parentheses have special meanings on the command line, escape these
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDREFORMAT(1)
GRDREFORMAT(1)
meanings by placing the full lename and sufx between quotes.
NATIVE BINARY FILES

For binary native GMT les the size of the GMT grdheader block is hsize = 892 bytes, and the total size of the le is hsize + nx * ny * item_size, where item_size is the size in bytes of each element (1, 2, 4). Bit grids are stored using 4-byte integers, each holding 32 bits, so for these les the size equation is modied by using ceil (nx / 32) * 4 instead of nx. Note that these les are platform-dependent. Files written on Little Endian machines (e.g., PCs) can not be read on Big Endian machines (e.g., most workstations). Also note that it is not possible for GMT to determine uniquely if a 4-byte grid is oat or int; in such cases it is best to use the =ID mechanism to specify the le format. In all cases a native grid is considered to be signed (i.e., there are no provision for unsigned short ints or unsigned bytes). For header and grid details, see Appendix B.

EXAMPLES
To extract the second layer from a 3-dimensional grid named temp from a COARDS-compliant netCDF le climate.grd: grdreformat climate.grd?temp[1] temp.grd -V To create a 4-byte native oating point grid from the COARDS-compliant netCDF le data.grd: grdreformat data.grd ras_data.b4=bf V To make a 2-byte short integer le, scale it by 10, subtract 32000, setting NaNs to -9999, do grdreformat values.grd shorts.i2=bs/10/-32000/-9999 V To create a Sun standard 8-bit rasterle for a subset of the data le image.grd, assuming the range in image.grd is 0-1 and we need 0-255, run grdreformat image.grd R-60/-40/-40/-30 image.ras8=rb/255/0 V To convert etopo2.grd to etopo2.i2 that can be used by grdraster, try grdreformat etopo2.grd etopo2.i2=bs N V
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), grdmath(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDSAMPLE(1)
GRDSAMPLE(1)
NAME
grdsample Resample a grid le onto a new grid
SYNOPSIS
grdsample in_grdle Gout_grdle [ F ] [ Ixinc[unit][=|+][/yinc[unit][=|+]] ] [ Lag ] [ Q[b|c|l|n][[/]threshold] ] [ Rwest/east/south/north[r] ] [ T ] [ V ] [ fcolinfo ]
DESCRIPTION
grdsample reads a grid le and interpolates it to create a new grid le with either: a different registration (F or T); or, a new grid-spacing or number of nodes (I), and perhaps also a new sub-region (R). A bicubic [Default], bilinear, B-spline or nearest-neighbor interpolation (Q) is used, requiring boundary conditions (L). Note that using R only is equivalent to grdcut or grdedit S. grdsample safely creates a ne mesh from a coarse one; the converse may suffer aliasing unless the data are ltered using grdfft or grdlter. When R is omitted, the output grid will cover the same region as the input grid. When I is omitted, the grid spacing of the output grid will be the same as the input grid. Either F or T can be used to change the grid registration. When omitted, the output grid will have the same registration as the input grid. in_grdle The name of the input 2-D binary grid le. (See GRID FILE FORMAT below.) G The name of the output grid le. (See GRID FILE FORMAT below.) Force pixel node registration on output grid. [Default is same registration as input grid]. x_inc [and optionally y_inc] is the grid spacing. Optionally, append a sufx modier. Geographical (degrees) coordinates: Append m to indicate arc minutes or c to indicate arc seconds. If one of the units e, k, i, or n is appended instead, the increment is assumed to be given in meter, km, miles, or nautical miles, respectively, and will be converted to the equivalent degrees longitude at the middle latitude of the region (the conversion depends on ELLIPSOID). If /y_inc is given but set to 0 it will be reset equal to x_inc; otherwise it will be converted to degrees latitude. All coordinates: If = is appended then the corresponding max x (east) or y (north) may be slightly adjusted to t exactly the given increment [by default the increment may be adjusted slightly to t the given domain]. Finally, instead of giving an increment you may specify the number of nodes desired by appending + to the supplied integer argument; the increment is then recalculated from the number of nodes and the domain. The resulting increment value depends on whether you have selected a gridline-registered or pixel-registered grid; see Appendix B for details. Note: if Rgrdle is used then grid spacing has already been initialized; use I to override the values. Boundary condition ag may be x or y or xy indicating data is periodic in range of x or y or both set by R, or ag may be g indicating geographical conditions (x and y are lon and lat). [Default uses "natural" conditions (second partial derivative normal to edge is zero) unless the grid is automatically recognised as periodic.] Quick mode, use bilinear rather than bicubic interpolation [Default]. Alternatively, select the interpolation mode by adding b for B-spline smoothing, c for bicubic interpolation, l for bilinear interpolation or n for nearest-neighbor value. Optionally, append threshold in the range [0,1]. This parameter controls how close to nodes with NaN values the interpolation will go. E.g., a threshold of 0.5 will interpolate about half way from a non-NaN to a NaN node, whereas 0.1 will go about 90% of the way, etc. [Default is 1, which means none of the (4 or 16) nearby nodes may be NaN]. Q0 will just return the value of the nearest node instead of interpolating. This is the same as using Qn. xmin, xmax, ymin, and ymax specify the Region of interest. For geographic regions, these limits correspond to west, east, south, and north and you may specify them in decimal degrees or in [+-]dd:mm[:ss.xxx][W|E|S|N] format. Append r if lower left and upper right map coordinates are given instead of w/e/s/n. The two shorthands Rg and Rd stand for global domain (0/360 and -180/+180 in longitude respectively, with -90/+90 in latitude). Alternatively, specify the name of
OPTIONS
F I
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDSAMPLE(1)
GRDSAMPLE(1)
an existing grid le and the R settings (and grid spacing, if applicable) are copied from the grid. For calendar time coordinates you may either give (a) relative time (relative to the selected TIME_EPOCH and in the selected TIME_UNIT; append t to JX|x), or (b) absolute time of the form [date]T[clock] (append T to JX|x). At least one of date and clock must be present; the T is always required. The date string must be of the form [-]yyyy[-mm[-dd]] (Gregorian calendar) or yyyy[-Www[-d]] (ISO week calendar), while the clock string must be of the form hh:mm:ss[.xxx]. The use of delimiters and their type and positions must be exactly as indicated (however, input, output and plot formats are customizable; see gmtdefaults). T V f Translate between grid and pixel registration; if the input is grid-registered, the output will be pixel-registered and vice-versa. Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"]. Special formatting of input and/or output columns (time or geographical data). Specify i or o to make this apply only to input or output [Default applies to both]. Give one or more columns (or column ranges) separated by commas. Append T (absolute calendar time), t (relative time in chosen TIME_UNIT since TIME_EPOCH), x (longitude), y (latitude), or f (oating point) to each column or column range item. Shorthand f[i|o]g means f[i|o]0x,1y (geographic coordinates).

GRID FILE FORMATS

HINTS
If an interpolation point is not on a node of the input grid, then a NaN at any node in the neighborhood surrounding the point will yield an interpolated NaN. Bicubic interpolation [default] yields continuous rst derivatives but requires a neighborhood of 4 nodes by 4 nodes. Bilinear interpolation [Q] uses only a 2 by 2 neighborhood, but yields only zeroth-order continuity. Use bicubic when smoothness is important. Use bilinear to minimize the propagation of NaNs.
EXAMPLES
To resample the 5 x 5 minute grid in hawaii_5by5_topo.grd onto a 1 minute grid: grdsample hawaii_5by5_topo.grd I1m Ghawaii_1by1_topo.grd To translate the gridline-registered le surface.grd to pixel registration while keeping the same region and
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDSAMPLE(1)
GRDSAMPLE(1)
grid interval: grdsample surface.grd T Gpixel.grd
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), grdedit(1), grdfft(1), grdlter(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDTRACK(1)
GRDTRACK(1)
NAME
grdtrack Sampling of a 2-D grid le along 1-D trackline (a sequence of x,y points)
SYNOPSIS
grdtrack xyle Ggrdle [ H[i][nrec] ] [ Lag ] [ Q[b|c|l|n][[/]threshold] ] [ Rwest/east/south/north[r] ] [ S ] [ V ] [ Z ] [ :[i|o] ] [ b[i|o][s|S|d|D[ncol]|c[var1/...]] ] [ f[i|o]colinfo ] [ m[i|o][ag] ]
DESCRIPTION
grdtrack reads a grid le (or a Sandwell/Smith IMG le) and a table (from le or standard input) with (x,y) positions in the rst two columns (more columns may be present). It interpolates the grid at the positions in the table and writes out the table with the interpolated values added as a new column. A bicubic [Default], bilinear, B-spline or nearest-neighbor (see Q) interpolation is used, requiring boundary conditions at the limits of the region (see L). xyle G This is an ASCII (or binary, see b) le where the rst 2 columns hold the (x,y) positions where the user wants to sample the 2-D data set. grdle is a 2-D binary grid le with the function f(x,y). If the specied grid is in Sandwell/Smith Mercator format you must append a comma-separated list of arguments that includes a scale to multiply the data (usually 1 or 0.1), the mode which stand for the following: (0) Img les with no constraint code, returns data at all points, (1) Img le with constraints coded, return data at all points, (2) Img le with constraints coded, return data only at constrained points and NaN elsewhere, and (3) Img le with constraints coded, return 1 at constraints and 0 elsewhere, and optionally the max latitude in the IMG le [80.738]. (See GRID FILE FORMAT below.)
OPTIONS
No space between the option ag and the associated arguments. H Input le(s) has header record(s). If used, the default number of header records is N_HEADER_RECS. Use Hi if only input data should have header records [Default will write out header records if the input data have them]. Blank lines and lines starting with # are always skipped. Boundary condition ag may be x or y or xy indicating data is periodic in range of x or y or both set by R, or ag may be g indicating geographical conditions (x and y are lon and lat). [Default uses "natural" conditions (second partial derivative normal to edge is zero) unless the grid is automatically recognised as periodic.] Quick mode, use bilinear rather than bicubic interpolation [Default]. Alternatively, select the interpolation mode by adding b for B-spline smoothing, c for bicubic interpolation, l for bilinear interpolation or n for nearest-neighbor value. Optionally, append threshold in the range [0,1]. This parameter controls how close to nodes with NaN values the interpolation will go. E.g., a threshold of 0.5 will interpolate about half way from a non-NaN to a NaN node, whereas 0.1 will go about 90% of the way, etc. [Default is 1, which means none of the (4 or 16) nearby nodes may be NaN]. Q0 will just return the value of the nearest node instead of interpolating. This is the same as using Qn. xmin, xmax, ymin, and ymax specify the Region of interest. For geographic regions, these limits correspond to west, east, south, and north and you may specify them in decimal degrees or in [+-]dd:mm[:ss.xxx][W|E|S|N] format. Append r if lower left and upper right map coordinates are given instead of w/e/s/n. The two shorthands Rg and Rd stand for global domain (0/360 and -180/+180 in longitude respectively, with -90/+90 in latitude). Alternatively, specify the name of an existing grid le and the R settings (and grid spacing, if applicable) are copied from the grid. For calendar time coordinates you may either give (a) relative time (relative to the selected TIME_EPOCH and in the selected TIME_UNIT; append t to JX|x), or (b) absolute time of the form [date]T[clock] (append T to JX|x). At least one of date and clock must be present; the T is always required. The date string must be of the form [-]yyyy[-mm[-dd]] (Gregorian calendar) or yyyy[-Www[-d]] (ISO week calendar), while the clock string must be of the form hh:mm:ss[.xxx]. The use of delimiters and their type and positions must be exactly as indicated (however, input,
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDTRACK(1)
GRDTRACK(1)
output and plot formats are customizable; see gmtdefaults). S V Z : bi Suppress the output of interpolated points that result in NaN values. Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"]. Only write out the sampled z-values [Default writes all columns]. Toggles between (longitude,latitude) and (latitude,longitude) input/output. [Default is (longitude,latitude)]. Selects binary input. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of columns in your binary input le if it exceeds the columns needed by the program. Or append c if the input le is netCDF. Optionally, append var1/var2/... to specify the variables to be read. [Default is 2 input columns]. Selects binary output. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of desired columns in your binary output le. [Default is one more than input]. Special formatting of input and/or output columns (time or geographical data). Specify i or o to make this apply only to input or output [Default applies to both]. Give one or more columns (or column ranges) separated by commas. Append T (absolute calendar time), t (relative time in chosen TIME_UNIT since TIME_EPOCH), x (longitude), y (latitude), or f (oating point) to each column or column range item. Shorthand f[i|o]g means f[i|o]0x,1y (geographic coordinates). Multiple segment le(s). Segments are separated by a special record. For ASCII les the rst character must be ag [Default is >]. For binary les all elds must be NaN and b must set the number of output columns explicitly. By default the m setting applies to both input and output. Use mi and mo to give separate settings to input and output.
bo

GRID FILE FORMATS

HINTS
If an interpolation point is not on a node of the input grid, then a NaN at any node in the neighborhood surrounding the point will yield an interpolated NaN. Bicubic interpolation [default] yields continuous rst derivatives but requires a neighborhood of 4 nodes by 4 nodes. Bilinear interpolation [Q] uses only a 2 by 2 neighborhood, but yields only zeroth-order continuity. Use bicubic when smoothness is important. Use bilinear to minimize the propagation of NaNs, or lower threshold.
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDTRACK(1)
GRDTRACK(1)
EXAMPLES
To sample the le hawaii_topo.grd along the SEASAT track track_4.xyg (An ASCII table containing longitude, latitude, and SEASAT-derived gravity, preceded by one header record): grdtrack track_4.xyg Ghawaii_topo.grd H > track_4.xygt To sample the Sandwell/Smith IMG format le topo.8.2.img (2 minute predicted bathymetry on a Mercator grid) along the lon,lat coordinates given in the le cruise_track.xy, try grdtrack cruise_track.xy Gtopo.8.2.img,1,1 > obs_and_predicted.d
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), surface(1), sample1d(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDTREND(1)
GRDTREND(1)
NAME
grdtrend Fit and/or remove a polynomial trend in a grid le
SYNOPSIS
grdtrend grdle Nn_model[r] [ Ddiff.grd ] [ Ttrend.grd ] [ V ] [ Wweight.grd ]
DESCRIPTION
grdtrend reads a 2-D grid le and ts a low-order polynomial trend to these data by [optionally weighted] least-squares. The trend surface is dened by: m1 + m2*x + m3*y + m4*x*y + m5*x*x + m6*y*y + m7*x*x*x + m8*x*x*y + m9*x*y*y + m10*y*y*y. The user must specify Nn_model, the number of model parameters to use; thus, N4 ts a bilinear trend, N6 a quadratic surface, and so on. Optionally, append r to the N option to perform a robust t. In this case, the program will iteratively reweight the data based on a robust scale estimate, in order to converge to a solution insensitive to outliers. This may be handy when separating a "regional" eld from a "residual" which should have non-zero mean, such as a local mountain on a regional surface. If data le has values set to NaN, these will be ignored during tting; if output les are written, these will also have NaN in the same locations. No space between the option ag and the associated arguments. grdle N The name of a 2-D binary grid le. [r]n_model sets the number of model parameters to t. Append r for robust t.
OPTIONS
No space between the option ag and the associated arguments. D T V W Write the difference (input data - trend) to the le diff.grd. Write the tted trend to the le trend.grd. Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"]. If weight.grd exists, it will be read and used to solve a weighted least-squares problem. [Default: Ordinary least-squares t.] If the robust option has been selected, the weights used in the robust t will be written to weight.grd.
REMARKS
The domain of x and y will be shifted and scaled to [-1, 1] and the basis functions are built from Legendre polynomials. These have a numerical advantage in the form of the matrix which must be inverted and allow more accurate solutions. NOTE: The model parameters listed with V are Legendre polynomial coefcients; they are not numerically equivalent to the m#s in the equation described above. The description above is to allow the user to match N with the order of the polynomial surface. See grdmath if you need to evaluate the trend using the reported coefcients.
GRID FILE FORMATS

By default GMT writes out grid as single precision oats in a COARDS-complaint netCDF le format. However, GMT is able to produce grid les in many other commonly used grid le formats and also facilitates so called "packing" of grids, writing out oating point data as 2- or 4-byte integers. To specify the precision, scale and offset, the user should add the sufx =id[/scale/offset[/nan]], where id is a two-letter identier of the grid type and precision, and scale and offset are optional scale factor and offset to be applied to all grid values, and nan is the value used to indicate missing data. When reading grids, the format is generally automatically recognized. If not, the same sufx can be added to input grid le names. See grdreformat(1) and Section 4.17 of the GMT Technical Reference and Cookbook for more information. When reading a netCDF le that contains multiple grids, GMT will read, by default, the rst 2-dimensional grid that can nd in that le. To coax GMT into reading another multi-dimensional variable in the grid le, append ?varname to the le name, where varname is the name of the variable. Note that you may need to escape the special meaning of ? in your shell program by putting a backslash in front of it, or by placing the
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDTREND(1)
GRDTREND(1)
lename and sufx between quotes or double quotes. The ?varname sufx can also be used for output grids to specify a variable name different from the default: "z". See grdreformat(1) and Section 4.18 of the GMT Technical Reference and Cookbook for more information, particularly on how to read splices of 3-, 4-, or 5-dimensional grids.
EXAMPLES
To remove a planar trend from hawaii_topo.grd and write result in hawaii_residual.grd: grdtrend hawaii_topo.grd N3 Dhawaii_residual.grd To do a robust t of a bicubic surface to hawaii_topo.grd, writing the result in hawaii_trend.grd and the weights used in hawaii_weight.grd, and reporting the progress: grdtrend hawaii_topo.grd N10r Thawaii_trend.grd Whawaii_weight.grd V
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), grdfft(1), grdlter(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDVECTOR(1)
GRDVECTOR(1)
NAME
grdvector Plot vector elds from grid les
SYNOPSIS
grdvector compx.grd compy.grd Jparameters [ A ] [ B[p|s]parameters ] [ Ccptle ] [ E ] [ Gll ] [ Ixinc[unit][=|+][/yinc[unit][=|+]] ] [ K ] [ N ] [ O ] [ P ] [ Qparameters ] [ Rwest/east/south/north[r] ] [ S[l]scale ] [ T ] [ U[just/dx/dy/][c|label] ] [ V ] [ Wpen ] [ X[a|c|r][x-shift[u]] ] [ Y[a|c|r][y-shift[u]] ] [ Z ] [ ccopies ] [ f[i|o]colinfo ]
DESCRIPTION
grdvector reads two 2-D grid les which represents the x- and y-components of a vector eld and produces a vector eld plot by drawing vectors with orientation and length according to the information in the les. Alternatively, polar coordinate components may be used (r, theta). grdvector is basically a short-hand for using 2 calls to grd2xyz and pasting the output through psxy SV. compx.grd Contains the x-component of the vector eld. compy.grd Contains the y-component of the vector eld. (See GRID FILE FORMATS below.) J Selects the map projection. Scale is UNIT/degree, 1:xxxxx, or width in UNIT (upper case modier). UNIT is cm, inch, or m, depending on the MEASURE_UNIT setting in .gmtdefaults4, but this can be overridden on the command line by appending c, i, or m to the scale/width value. When central meridian is optional, default is center of longitude range on R option. Default standard parallel is the equator. For map height, max dimension, or min dimension, append h, +, or to the width, respectively. More details can be found in the psbasemap man pages. CYLINDRICAL PROJECTIONS: Jclon0/lat0/scale (Cassini) Jcyl_stere/[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Stereographic) Jj[lon0/]scale (Miller) Jm[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Mercator) Jmlon0/lat0/scale (Mercator - Give meridian and standard parallel) Jo[a]lon0/lat0/azimuth/scale (Oblique Mercator - point and azimuth) Jo[b]lon0/lat0/lon1/lat1/scale (Oblique Mercator - two points) Joclon0/lat0/lonp/latp/scale (Oblique Mercator - point and pole) Jq[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Equidistant) Jtlon0/[lat0/]scale (TM - Transverse Mercator) Juzone/scale (UTM - Universal Transverse Mercator) Jy[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Equal-Area) CONIC PROJECTIONS: Jblon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Albers) Jdlon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Conic Equidistant) Jllon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Lambert Conic Conformal) Jpoly/[lon0/[lat0/]]scale ((American) Polyconic) AZIMUTHAL PROJECTIONS: Jalon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Lambert Azimuthal Equal-Area) Jelon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Azimuthal Equidistant) Jflon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Gnomonic) Jglon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Orthographic)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDVECTOR(1)
GRDVECTOR(1)
Jglon0/lat0/altitude/azimuth/tilt/twist/Width/Height/scale (General Perspective). Jslon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (General Stereographic) MISCELLANEOUS PROJECTIONS: Jh[lon0/]scale (Hammer) Ji[lon0/]scale (Sinusoidal) Jkf[lon0/]scale (Eckert IV) Jk[s][lon0/]scale (Eckert VI) Jn[lon0/]scale (Robinson) Jr[lon0/]scale (Winkel Tripel) Jv[lon0/]scale (Van der Grinten) Jw[lon0/]scale (Mollweide) NON-GEOGRAPHICAL PROJECTIONS: Jp[a]scale[/origin][r|z] (Polar coordinates (theta,r)) Jxx-scale[d|l|ppow|t|T][/y-scale[d|l|ppow|t|T]] (Linear, log, and power scaling)
OPTIONS
No space between the option ag and the associated arguments. A B C E G I K N O P Q Means grid les have polar (r, theta) components instead of Cartesian (x, y). Sets map boundary annotation and tickmark intervals; see the psbasemap man page for all the details. Use cptle to assign colors based on vector length. Center vectors on grid nodes [Default draws from grid node]. Sets color or shade for vector interiors [Default is no ll]. (See SPECIFYING FILL below). Only plot vectors at nodes every x_inc, y_inc apart (must be multiples of original grid spacing). Append m for minutes or c for seconds. [Default plots every node]. More PostScript code will be appended later [Default terminates the plot system]. Do NOT clip vectors at map boundaries [Default will clip]. Selects Overlay plot mode [Default initializes a new plot system]. Selects Portrait plotting mode [Default is Landscape, see gmtdefaults to change this]. Select vector plot [Default is stick-plot]. Optionally, specify parameters which are arrowwidth/headlength/headwidth [Default is 0.075c/0.3c/0.25c (or 0.03i/0.12i/0.1i)]. Append nsize which will cause vectors shorter than size to have their appearance scaled by length/size. xmin, xmax, ymin, and ymax specify the Region of interest. For geographic regions, these limits correspond to west, east, south, and north and you may specify them in decimal degrees or in [+-]dd:mm[:ss.xxx][W|E|S|N] format. Append r if lower left and upper right map coordinates are given instead of w/e/s/n. The two shorthands Rg and Rd stand for global domain (0/360 and -180/+180 in longitude respectively, with -90/+90 in latitude). Alternatively, specify the name of an existing grid le and the R settings (and grid spacing, if applicable) are copied from the grid. For calendar time coordinates you may either give (a) relative time (relative to the selected TIME_EPOCH and in the selected TIME_UNIT; append t to JX|x), or (b) absolute time of the form [date]T[clock] (append T to JX|x). At least one of date and clock must be present; the T is always required. The date string must be of the form [-]yyyy[-mm[-dd]] (Gregorian calendar) or yyyy[-Www[-d]] (ISO week calendar), while the clock string must be of the form hh:mm:ss[.xxx]. The use of delimiters and their type and positions must be exactly as indicated (however, input, output and plot formats are customizable; see gmtdefaults). Specify a subset of the grid.
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDVECTOR(1)
GRDVECTOR(1)
Sets scale for vector length in data units per distance measurement unit [1]. Append c, i, m, p to indicate the measurement unit (cm, inch, m, point). Prepend l to indicate a xed length for all vectors. Means azimuth should be converted to angles based on the selected map projection. Draw Unix System time stamp on plot. By adding just/dx/dy/, the user may specify the justication of the stamp and where the stamp should fall on the page relative to lower left corner of the plot. For example, BL/0/0 will align the lower left corner of the time stamp with the lower left corner of the plot. Optionally, append a label, or c (which will plot the command string.). The GMT parameters UNIX_TIME, UNIX_TIME_POS, and UNIX_TIME_FORMAT can affect the appearance; see the gmtdefaults man page for details. The time string will be in the locale set by the environment variable TZ (generally local time). Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"]. Set pen attributes used for vector outlines [Default: width = 0.25p, color = black, texture = solid]. (See SPECIFYING PENS below).
T U
V W
X Y Shift plot origin relative to the current origin by (x-shift,y-shift) and optionally append the length unit (c, i, m, p). You can prepend a to shift the origin back to the original position after plotting, or prepend r [Default] to reset the current origin to the new location. If O is used then the default (x-shift,y-shift) is (0,0), otherwise it is (r1i, r1i) or (r2.5c, r2.5c). Alternatively, give c to align the center coordinate (x or y) of the plot with the center of the page based on current page size. Z c f Means the angles provided are azimuths rather than direction (requires A). Species the number of plot copies. [Default is 1]. Special formatting of input and/or output columns (time or geographical data). Specify i or o to make this apply only to input or output [Default applies to both]. Give one or more columns (or column ranges) separated by commas. Append T (absolute calendar time), t (relative time in chosen TIME_UNIT since TIME_EPOCH), x (longitude), y (latitude), or f (oating point) to each column or column range item. Shorthand f[i|o]g means f[i|o]0x,1y (geographic coordinates).
GRID FILE FORMATS

GMT is able to recognize many of the commonly used grid le formats, as well as the precision, scale and offset of the values contained in the grid le. When GMT needs a little help with that, you can add the sufx =id[/scale/offset[/nan]], where id is a two-letter identier of the grid type and precision, and scale and offset are optional scale factor and offset to be applied to all grid values, and nan is the value used to
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDVECTOR(1)
GRDVECTOR(1)
indicate missing data. See grdreformat(1) and Section 4.17 of the GMT Technical Reference and Cookbook for more information. When reading a netCDF le that contains multiple grids, GMT will read, by default, the rst 2-dimensional grid that can nd in that le. To coax GMT into reading another multi-dimensional variable in the grid le, append ?varname to the le name, where varname is the name of the variable. Note that you may need to escape the special meaning of ? in your shell program by putting a backslash in front of it, or by placing the lename and sufx between quotes or double quotes. See grdreformat(1) and Section 4.18 of the GMT Technical Reference and Cookbook for more information, particularly on how to read splices of 3-, 4-, or 5-dimensional grids.
EXAMPLES
To draw the vector eld given by the les r.grd and theta.grd on a linear plot with scale 5 cm per data unit, using vector rather than stick plot, and scale vector magnitudes so that 10 units equal 1 inch, run grdvector r.grd theta.grd Jx5c A Q S10i > gradient.ps
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), gmtcolors(5), grdcontour(1), psxy(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDVIEW(1)
GRDVIEW(1)
NAME
grdview Create 3-D perspective grayshaded/colored image or mesh from a 2-D grid le
SYNOPSIS
grdview relief_le Jparameters [ B[p|s]parameters ] [ Ccptle ] [ Eazim/elev[+wlon/lat[/z]][+vx0/y0] ] [ Gdrapele | Ggrd_r,grd_g,grd_b ] [ Iintensle ] [ Jz|Zparameters ] [ K ] [ L[ags] ] [ Nlevel[/color] ] [ O ] [ P ] [ Qtype[g] ] [ Rwest/east/south/north[/zmin/zmax][r] ] [ Ssmooth ] [ T[s][o[pen]] ] [ U[just/dx/dy/][c|label] ] [ V ] [ Wtype/pen ] [ X[a|c|r][x-shift[u]] ] [ Y[a|c|r][yshift[u]] ] [ Zzlevel ] [ ccopies ]
DESCRIPTION
grdview reads a 2-D grid le and produces a 3-D perspective plot by drawing a mesh, painting a colored/grayshaded surface made up of polygons, or by scanline conversion of these polygons to a rasterimage. Options include draping a data set on top of a surface, plotting of contours on top of the surface, and apply articial illumination based on intensities provided in a separate grid le. relief_le 2-D gridded data set to be imaged (the relief of the surface). (See GRID FILE FORMAT below.) J Selects the map projection. Scale is UNIT/degree, 1:xxxxx, or width in UNIT (upper case modier). UNIT is cm, inch, or m, depending on the MEASURE_UNIT setting in .gmtdefaults4, but this can be overridden on the command line by appending c, i, or m to the scale/width value. When central meridian is optional, default is center of longitude range on R option. Default standard parallel is the equator. For map height, max dimension, or min dimension, append h, +, or to the width, respectively. More details can be found in the psbasemap man pages. CYLINDRICAL PROJECTIONS: Jclon0/lat0/scale (Cassini) Jcyl_stere/[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Stereographic) Jj[lon0/]scale (Miller) Jm[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Mercator) Jmlon0/lat0/scale (Mercator - Give meridian and standard parallel) Jo[a]lon0/lat0/azimuth/scale (Oblique Mercator - point and azimuth) Jo[b]lon0/lat0/lon1/lat1/scale (Oblique Mercator - two points) Joclon0/lat0/lonp/latp/scale (Oblique Mercator - point and pole) Jq[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Equidistant) Jtlon0/[lat0/]scale (TM - Transverse Mercator) Juzone/scale (UTM - Universal Transverse Mercator) Jy[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Equal-Area) CONIC PROJECTIONS: Jblon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Albers) Jdlon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Conic Equidistant) Jllon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Lambert Conic Conformal) Jpoly/[lon0/[lat0/]]scale ((American) Polyconic) AZIMUTHAL PROJECTIONS: Jalon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Lambert Azimuthal Equal-Area) Jelon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Azimuthal Equidistant) Jflon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Gnomonic) Jglon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Orthographic) Jglon0/lat0/altitude/azimuth/tilt/twist/Width/Height/scale (General Perspective). Jslon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (General Stereographic)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDVIEW(1)
GRDVIEW(1)
MISCELLANEOUS PROJECTIONS: Jh[lon0/]scale (Hammer) Ji[lon0/]scale (Sinusoidal) Jkf[lon0/]scale (Eckert IV) Jk[s][lon0/]scale (Eckert VI) Jn[lon0/]scale (Robinson) Jr[lon0/]scale (Winkel Tripel) Jv[lon0/]scale (Van der Grinten) Jw[lon0/]scale (Mollweide) NON-GEOGRAPHICAL PROJECTIONS: Jp[a]scale[/origin][r|z] (Polar coordinates (theta,r)) Jxx-scale[d|l|ppow|t|T][/y-scale[d|l|ppow|t|T]] (Linear, log, and power scaling) Jz Sets the vertical scaling (for 3-D maps). Same syntax as Jx.
OPTIONS
No space between the option ag and the associated arguments. B C Sets map boundary annotation and tickmark intervals; see the psbasemap man page for all the details. name of the color palette le. Must be present if you want (1) mesh plot with contours (Qm), or (2) shaded/colored perspective image (Qs or Qi). For Qs: You can specify that you want to skip a z-slice by setting red = -; to use a pattern give red = P|pdpi/pattern[:Fr/g/b[Br/g/b]]. Sets the viewpoints azimuth and elevation (for perspective view) [180/90]. For frames used for animation, you may want to append + to x the center of your data domain (or specify a particular world coordinate point with +wlon0/lat[/z]) which will project to the center of your page size (or specify the coordinates of the projected view point with +vx0/y0). Drape the image in drapele on top of the relief provided by relief_le. [Default is relief_le]. Note that Jz and N always refers to the relief_le. The drapele only provides the information pertaining to colors, which is looked-up via the cpt le (see C). Alternatively, give three grid les separated by commas. These les must contain the red, green, and blue colors directly (in 0-255 range) and no cpt le is needed. The drapele may be of higher resolution than the relief_le. Gives the name of a grid le with intensities in the (-1,+1) range. [Default is no illumination]. More PostScript code will be appended later [Default terminates the plot system]. Boundary condition ags may be x or y or xy indicating data is periodic in range of x or y or both, or ags may be g indicating geographical conditions (x and y are lon and lat). [Default uses "natural" conditions (second partial derivative normal to edge is zero).] If no ags are set, use bilinear rather than the default bicubic resampling when draping is required. Draws a plane at this z-level. If the optional color is provided, the frontal facade between the plane and the data perimeter is colored. See Wf for setting the pen used for the outline. (See SPECIFYING COLOR below). Selects Overlay plot mode [Default initializes a new plot system]. Selects Portrait plotting mode [Default is Landscape, see gmtdefaults to change this]. Select one of four settings: 1. Specify m for mesh plot [Default], and optionally append /color for a different mesh paint [white]. 2. Specify s for surface plot, and optionally append m to have mesh lines drawn on top of surface. 3. Specify i for image plot, and optionally append the effective dpi resolution for the rasterization [100]. 4. Specify c. Same as Qi but will make nodes with z = NaN transparent, using the colormasking feature in PostScript Level 3 (the PS device must
I K L
O P Q
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDVIEW(1)
GRDVIEW(1)
support PS Level 3). For any of these choices, you may force a monochrome image by appending g. Colors are then converted to shades of gray using the (television) YIQ transformation. R xmin, xmax, ymin, and ymax specify the Region of interest. For geographic regions, these limits correspond to west, east, south, and north and you may specify them in decimal degrees or in [+-]dd:mm[:ss.xxx][W|E|S|N] format. Append r if lower left and upper right map coordinates are given instead of w/e/s/n. The two shorthands Rg and Rd stand for global domain (0/360 and -180/+180 in longitude respectively, with -90/+90 in latitude). Alternatively, specify the name of an existing grid le and the R settings (and grid spacing, if applicable) are copied from the grid. For calendar time coordinates you may either give (a) relative time (relative to the selected TIME_EPOCH and in the selected TIME_UNIT; append t to JX|x), or (b) absolute time of the form [date]T[clock] (append T to JX|x). At least one of date and clock must be present; the T is always required. The date string must be of the form [-]yyyy[-mm[-dd]] (Gregorian calendar) or yyyy[-Www[-d]] (ISO week calendar), while the clock string must be of the form hh:mm:ss[.xxx]. The use of delimiters and their type and positions must be exactly as indicated (however, input, output and plot formats are customizable; see gmtdefaults). This option may be used to indicate the range used for the 3-D axes [Default is region given by the relief_le]. You may ask for a larger w/e/s/n region to have more room between the image and the axes. A smaller region than specied in the relief_le will result in a subset of the grid. Smooth the contours before plotting (see grdcontour) [Default is no smoothing]. Plot image without any interpolation. This involves converting each node-centered bin into a polygon which is then painted separately. Append s to skip nodes with z = NaN. This option is useful for categorical data where interpolating between values is meaningless. Optionally, append o to draw the tile outlines, and specify a custom pen if the default pen is not to your liking. As this option produces a at surface it cannot be combined with JZ or Jz. (See SPECIFYING PENS below). Draw Unix System time stamp on plot. By adding just/dx/dy/, the user may specify the justication of the stamp and where the stamp should fall on the page relative to lower left corner of the plot. For example, BL/0/0 will align the lower left corner of the time stamp with the lower left corner of the plot. Optionally, append a label, or c (which will plot the command string.). The GMT parameters UNIX_TIME, UNIX_TIME_POS, and UNIX_TIME_FORMAT can affect the appearance; see the gmtdefaults man page for details. The time string will be in the locale set by the environment variable TZ (generally local time). Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"]. Draw contour lines on top of surface or mesh (not image). Append pen attributes used for the contours. [Default: width = 0.75p, color = black, texture = solid]. (See SPECIFYING PENS below). Sets the pen attributes used for the mesh. [Default: width = 0.25p, color = black, texture = solid]. You must also select Qm or Qsm for meshlines to be drawn. Sets the pen attributes used for the facade. [Default: width = 0.25p, color = black, texture = solid]. You must also select N for the facade outline to be drawn. (See SPECIFYING PENS below).
S T
V Wc Wm Wf
X Y Shift plot origin relative to the current origin by (x-shift,y-shift) and optionally append the length unit (c, i, m, p). You can prepend a to shift the origin back to the original position after plotting, or prepend r [Default] to reset the current origin to the new location. If O is used then the default (x-shift,y-shift) is (0,0), otherwise it is (r1i, r1i) or (r2.5c, r2.5c). Alternatively, give c to align the center coordinate (x or y) of the plot with the center of the page based on current page size. Z c Sets the z-level of the basemap [Default is the bottom of the z-axis]. Species the number of plot copies. [Default is 1].
SPECIFYING PENS pen The attributes of lines and symbol outlines as dened by pen is a comma delimetered list of width, color and texture, each of which is optional. width can be indicated as a measure (points,
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDVIEW(1)
GRDVIEW(1)
centimeters, inches) or as faint, thin[ner|nest], thick[er|est], fat[ter|test], or obese. color species a gray shade or color (see SPECIFYING COLOR below). texture is a combination of dashes - and dots .. SPECIFYING COLOR color The color of lines, areas and patterns can be specied by a valid color name; by a gray shade (in the range 0255); by a decimal color code (r/g/b, each in range 0255; h-s-v, ranges 0360, 01, 01; or c/m/y/k, each in range 01); or by a hexadecimal color code (#rrggbb, as used in HTML). See the gmtcolors manpage for more information and a full list of color names.
GRID FILE FORMATS

EXAMPLES
To make a mesh plot from the le hawaii_grav.grd and drawing the contours given in the color palette le hawaii.cpt on a Lambert map at 1.5 cm/degree along the standard parallels 18 and 24, with vertical scale 20 mgal/cm, and looking at the surface from SW at 30 degree elevation, run grdview hawaii_grav.grd Jl18/24/1.5c Chawaii.cpt Jz0.05c Qm N-100 E225/30 Wc > hawaii_grav_image.ps To create a illuminated color perspective plot of the gridded data set image.grd, using the color palette le color.rgb, with linear scaling at 10 cm/x-unit and tickmarks every 5 units, with intensities provided by the le intens.grd, and looking from the SE, use grdview image.grd Jx10.0c Ccolor.rgb Qs E135/30 Iintens.grd > image3D.ps To make the same plot using the rastering option with dpi = 50, use grdview image.grd Jx10.0c Ccolor.rgb Qi50 E135/30 Iintens.grd > image3D.ps To create a color PostScript perspective plot of the gridded data set magnetics.grd, using the color palette le mag_intens.cpt, draped over the relief given by the le topography.grd, with Mercator map width of 6 inch and tickmarks every 1 degree, with intensities provided by the le topo_intens.grd, and looking from the SE, run grdview topography.grd JM6i Gmagnetics.grd Cmag_intens.cpt Qs E140/30 Itopo_intens.grd > draped3D.ps Given topo.grd and the Landsat image veggies.ras, rst run gmt2rgb to get the red, green, and blue grids, and then drape this image over the topography and shade the result for good measure. The commands are gmt2rgb veggies.ras Glayer_%c.grd grdview topo.grd JM6i Qi E140/30 Itopo_intens.grd Glayer_r.grd,layer_g.grd,layer_b.grd >
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDVIEW(1)
GRDVIEW(1)
image.ps
REMARKS
For the Qs option: PostScript provides no way of smoothly varying colors within a polygon, so colors can only vary from polygon to polygon. To obtain smooth images this way you may resample the grid le(s) using grdsample or use a ner grid size when running gridding programs like surface or nearneighbor. Unfortunately, this produces huge PostScript les. The alternative is to use the Qi option, which computes bilinear or bicubic continuous color variations within polygons by using scanline conversion to image the polygons.
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), gmt2rgb(1), gmtcolors(5), grdcontour(1), grdimage(1), nearneighbor(1), psbasemap(1), pscontour(1), pstext(1), surface(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDVOLUME(1)
GRDVOLUME(1)
NAME
grdvolume Calculating volume under a surface within a contour
SYNOPSIS
grdvolume grdle [ Ccval or Clow/high/delta ] [ Lbase ] [ Rwest/east/south/north[r] ] [ S[k] ] [ T ] [ V[l] ] [ Zfact[/delta] ] [ fcolinfo ]
DESCRIPTION
grdvolume reads a 2-D binary grid le and calculates the volume contained between the surface and the plane specied by the given contour (or zero if not given) and reports the area, volume, and maximum mean height (volume/area). Alternatively, specify a range of contours to be tried and grdvolume will determine the volume and area inside the contour for all contour values. The contour that produced the maximum mean height is reported as well. This feature may be used with grdlter in designing an Optimal Robust Separator [Wessel, 1998]. grdle The name of the input 2-D binary grid le. (See GRID FILE FORMAT below.)
OPTIONS
No space between the option ag and the associated arguments. C nd area and volume inside the cval contour. Alternatively, search using all contours from low to high in steps of delta. [Default returns entire area and volume of grid]. The area is measured in the plane of the contour. Also add in the volume from the level of the contour down to base [Default base is contour]. Convert degrees to meters, append k for km [Default is Cartesian]. Use curvature minimum rather than maximum height to nd best contour value (when contour search is selected with C). xmin, xmax, ymin, and ymax specify the Region of interest. For geographic regions, these limits correspond to west, east, south, and north and you may specify them in decimal degrees or in [+-]dd:mm[:ss.xxx][W|E|S|N] format. Append r if lower left and upper right map coordinates are given instead of w/e/s/n. The two shorthands Rg and Rd stand for global domain (0/360 and -180/+180 in longitude respectively, with -90/+90 in latitude). Alternatively, specify the name of an existing grid le and the R settings (and grid spacing, if applicable) are copied from the grid. For calendar time coordinates you may either give (a) relative time (relative to the selected TIME_EPOCH and in the selected TIME_UNIT; append t to JX|x), or (b) absolute time of the form [date]T[clock] (append T to JX|x). At least one of date and clock must be present; the T is always required. The date string must be of the form [-]yyyy[-mm[-dd]] (Gregorian calendar) or yyyy[-Www[-d]] (ISO week calendar), while the clock string must be of the form hh:mm:ss[.xxx]. The use of delimiters and their type and positions must be exactly as indicated (however, input, output and plot formats are customizable; see gmtdefaults). Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"]. Append l to see all the results for each contour level tested (when contour search has been selected). Optionally subtract shift before scaling data by fact. [Default is no scaling]. (Numbers in C, L refer to values after this scaling has occurred). Special formatting of input and/or output columns (time or geographical data). Specify i or o to make this apply only to input or output [Default applies to both]. Give one or more columns (or column ranges) separated by commas. Append T (absolute calendar time), t (relative time in chosen TIME_UNIT since TIME_EPOCH), x (longitude), y (latitude), or f (oating point) to each column or column range item. Shorthand f[i|o]g means f[i|o]0x,1y (geographic coordinates).
L S T R
V Z f
GRID FILE FORMATS

GMT is able to recognize many of the commonly used grid le formats, as well as the precision, scale and offset of the values contained in the grid le. When GMT needs a little help with that, you can add the sufx =id[/scale/offset[/nan]], where id is a two-letter identier of the grid type and precision, and scale and offset are optional scale factor and offset to be applied to all grid values, and nan is the value used to
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GRDVOLUME(1)
GRDVOLUME(1)
indicate missing data. See grdreformat(1) and Section 4.17 of the GMT Technical Reference and Cookbook for more information. When reading a netCDF le that contains multiple grids, GMT will read, by default, the rst 2-dimensional grid that can nd in that le. To coax GMT into reading another multi-dimensional variable in the grid le, append ?varname to the le name, where varname is the name of the variable. Note that you may need to escape the special meaning of ? in your shell program by putting a backslash in front of it, or by placing the lename and sufx between quotes or double quotes. See grdreformat(1) and Section 4.18 of the GMT Technical Reference and Cookbook for more information, particularly on how to read splices of 3-, 4-, or 5-dimensional grids.
EXAMPLES
To determine the volume in km3 under the surface hawaii_topo.grd (height in km), use grdvolume hawaii_topo.grd Sk To nd the volume between the surface peaks.grd and the contour z = 250, use grdvolume peaks.grd Sk C250 To search for the contour, between 100 and 300 in steps of 10, that maximizes the ratio of volume to surface area for the le peaks.grd, use grdvolume peaks.grd Sk C100/300/10 > results.d To see the areas and volumes for all the contours in the previous example, use grdvolume peaks.grd Sk Vl C100/300/10 > results.d
NOTES
grdvolume distinguishes between gridline and gridcell oriented grids. In both cases the area and volume are computed up to the grid boundaries. That means that in the rst case the gridcells on the boundary only contribute half their area (and volume), whereas in the second case all gridcells are fully used. The exception is when the C ag is used: since contours do not extend beyond the outermost gridpoint, both grid types are treated the same. That means the outer rim in gridcell oriented grids is ignored when using the C ag.
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), grdlter(1)
REFERENCES
Wessel, P., 1998, An empirical method for optimal robust regional-residual separation of geophysical data, Math. Geol., 30(4), 391408.
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GREENSPLINE(1)
GREENSPLINE(1)
NAME
greenspline Interpolate 1-D, 2-D, 3-D Cartesian or spherical surface data using Greens function splines.
SYNOPSIS
greenspline [ datale(s) ] [ A[1|2|3|4|5,]gradle ] [ Ccut[/le] ] [ Dmode ] [ F ] [ Ggrdle ] [ H[i][nrec] ] [ Ixinc[yinc[zinc]] ] [ L ] [ Nnodele ] [ Qaz|x/y/z ] [ Rxmin/xmax[/ymin/ymax[/zminzmax]] ] [ Sc|t|g|p|q[pars] ] [ Tmaskgrid ] [ V ] [ :[i|o] ] [ bi[s|S|d|D[ncol]|c[var1/...]] ] [ bo[s|S|d|D[ncol]|c[var1/...]] ]
DESCRIPTION
greenspline uses the Greens function G(x; x) for the chosen spline and geometry to interpolate data at regular [or arbitrary] output locations. Mathematically, the solution is composed as w(x) = sum {c(i) G(x; x(i))}, for i = 1, n, the number of data points {x(i), w(i)}. Once the n coefcients c(i) have been found then the sum can be evaluated at any output point x. Choose between ten minimum curvature, regularized, or continuous curvature splines in tension for either 1-D, 2-D, or 3-D Cartesian coordinates or spherical surface coordinates. After rst removing a linear or planar trend (Cartesian geometries) or mean value (spherical surface) and normalizing these residuals, the least-squares matrix solution for the spline coefcients c(i) is found by solving the n by n linear system w(j) = sum-over-i {c(i) G(x(j); x(i))}, for j = 1, n; this solution yields an exact interpolation of the supplied data points. Alternatively, you may choose to perform a singular value decomposition (SVD) and eliminate the contribution from the smallest eigenvalues; this approach yields an approximate solution. Trends and scales are restored when evaluating the output.
OPTIONS
datale(s) The name of one or more ASCII [or binary, see bi] les holding the x, w data points. If no le is given then we read standard input instead. A The solution will partly be constrained by surface gradients v = v*n, where v is the gradient magnitude and n its unit vector direction. The gradient direction may be specied either by Cartesian components (either unit vector n and magnitude v separately or gradient components v directly) or angles w.r.t. the coordinate axes. Specify one of ve input formats: 0: For 1-D data there is no direction, just gradient magnitude (slope) so the input format is x, gradient. Options 1-2 are for 2-D data sets: 1: records contain x, y, azimuth, gradient (azimuth in degrees is measured clockwise from the vertical (north) [Default]). 2: records contain x, y, gradient, azimuth (azimuth in degrees is measured clockwise from the vertical (north)). Options 3-5 are for either 2-D or 3-D data: 3: records contain x, direction(s), v (direction(s) in degrees are measured counter-clockwise from the horizontal (and for 3-D the vertical axis). 4: records contain x, v. 5: records contain x, n, v. Append name of ASCII le with the surface gradients (following a comma if a format is specied). Find an approximate surface t: Solve the linear system for the spline coefcients by SVD and eliminate the contribution from all eigenvalues whose ratio to the largest eigenvalue is less than cut [Default uses Gauss-Jordan elimination to solve the linear system and t the data exactly]. Optionally, append /le to save the eigenvalue ratios to the specied le for further analysis. Finally, if a negative cut is given then /le is required and execution will stop after saving the eigenvalues, i.e., no surface output is produced. Sets the distance ag that determines how we calculate distances between data points. Select mode 0 for Cartesian 1-D spline interpolation: D0 means (x) in user units, Cartesian distances, Select mode 1-3 for Cartesian 2-D surface spline interpolation: D1 means (x,y) in user units, Cartesian distances, D2 for (x,y) in degrees, at Earth distances, and D3 for (x,y) in degrees, spherical distances in km. Then, if ELLIPSOID is spherical, we compute great circle arcs, otherwise geodesics. Option mode = 4 applies to spherical surface spline interpolation only: D4 for (x,y) in degrees, use cosine of great circle (or geodesic) arcs. Select mode 5 for Cartesian 3-D surface spline interpolation: D5 means (x,y,z) in user units, Cartesian distances. Force pixel registration. [Default is gridline registration].
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GREENSPLINE(1)
GREENSPLINE(1)
Name of resulting output le. (1) If options R, I, and possibly F are set we produce an equidistant output table. This will be written to stdout unless G is specied. Note: for 2-D grids the G option is required. (2) If option T is selected then G is required and the output le is a 2-D binary grid le. Applies to 2-D interpolation only. (3) If N is selected then the output is an ASCII (or binary; see bo) table; if G is not given then this table is written to standard output. Ignored if C or C0 is given. Input le(s) has header record(s). If used, the default number of header records is N_HEADER_RECS. Use Hi if only input data should have header records [Default will write out header records if the input data have them]. Blank lines and lines starting with # are always skipped. Specify equidistant sampling intervals, on for each dimension, separated by slashes. Do not remove a linear (1-D) or planer (2-D) trend when D selects mode 0-3 [For those Cartesian cases a least-squares line or plane is modeled and removed, then restored after tting a spline to the residuals]. However, in mixed cases with both data values and gradients, or for spherical surface data, only the mean data value is removed (and later and restored). ASCII le with coordinates of desired output locations x in the rst column(s). The resulting w values are appended to each record and written to the le given in G [or stdout if not specied]; see bo for binary output instead. This option eliminates the need to specify options R, I, and F. Rather than evaluate the surface, take the directional derivative in the az azimuth and return the magnitude of this derivative instead. For 3-D interpolation, specify the three components of the desired vector direction (the vector will be normalized before use). Specify the domain for an equidistant lattice where output predictions are required. Requires I and optionally F. 1-D: Give xmin/xmax, the minimum and maximum x coordinates. 2-D: Give xmin/xmax/ymin/ymax, the minimum and maximum x and y coordinates. These may be Cartesian or geographical. If geographical, then west, east, south, and north specify the Region of interest, and you may specify them in decimal degrees or in [+-]dd:mm[:ss.xxx][W|E|S|N] format. The two shorthands Rg and Rd stand for global domain (0/360 and -180/+180 in longitude respectively, with -90/+90 in latitude). 3-D: Give xmin/xmax/ymin/ymax/zmin/zmax, the minimum and maximum x, y and z coordinates. See the 2-D section if your horizontal coordinates are geographical; note the shorthands Rg and Rd cannot be used if a 3-D domain is specied. Select one of ve different splines. The rst two are used for 1-D, 2-D, or 3-D Cartesian splines (see D for discussion). Note that all tension values are expected to be normalized tension in the range 0 < t < 1: (c) Minimum curvature spline [Sandwell, 1987], (t) Continuous curvature spline in tension [Wessel and Bercovici, 1998]; append tension[/scale] with tension in the 01 range and optionally supply a length scale [Default is the average grid spacing]. The next is a 2-D or 3-D spline: (r) Regularized spline in tension [Mitasova and Mitas, 1993]; again, append tension and optional scale. The last two are spherical surface splines and both imply D4 fg: (p) Minimum curvature spline [Parker, 1994], (q) Continuous curvature spline in tension [Wessel and Becker, 2008]; append tension. The G(x; x) for the last method is slower to compute; by specifying OPT(SQ) you can speed up calculations by rst pre-calculating G(x; x) for a dense set of x values (e.g., 100,001 nodes between -1 to +1) and store them in look-up tables. Optionally append /N (an odd integer) to specify how many points in the spline to set [100001] For 2-D interpolation only. Only evaluate the solution at the nodes in the maskgrid that are not equal to NaN. This option eliminates the need to specify options R, I, and F. Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"]. Selects binary input. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of columns in your binary input le if
I L
T V bi
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GREENSPLINE(1)
GREENSPLINE(1)
it exceeds the columns needed by the program. Or append c if the input le is netCDF. Optionally, append var1/var2/... to specify the variables to be read. [Default is 2-4 input columns (x,w); the number depends on the chosen dimension]. bo Selects binary output. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of desired columns in your binary output le.
1-D EXAMPLES
To resample the x,y Gaussian random data created by gmtmath and stored in 1D.txt, requesting output every 0.1 step from 0 to 10, and using a minimum cubic spline, try gmtmath T0/10/1 0 1 NRAND = 1D.txt psxy R0/10/-5/5 JX6i/3i B2f1/1 Sc0.1 Gblack 1D.txt K > 1D.ps greenspline 1D.txt R0/10 I0.1 Sc V | psxy R J O Wthin >> 1D.ps To apply a spline in tension instead, using a tension of 0.7, try psxy R0/10/-5/5 JX6i/3i B2f1/1 Sc0.1 Gblack 1D.txt K > 1Dt.ps greenspline 1D.txt R0/10 I0.1 St0.7 V | psxy R J O Wthin >> 1Dt.ps
2-D EXAMPLES
To make a uniform grid using the minimum curvature spline for the same Cartesian data set from Davis (1986) that is used in the GMT Cookbook example 16, try greenspline table_5.11 R0/6.5/-0.2/6.5 I0.1 Sc V D1 GS1987.grd psxy R0/6.5/-0.2/6.5 JX6i B2f1 Sc0.1 Gblack table_5.11 K > 2D.ps grdcontour JX6i B2f1 O C25 A50 S1987.grd >> 2D.ps To use Cartesian splines in tension but only evaluate the solution where the input mask grid is not NaN, try greenspline table_5.11 Tmask.grd St0.5 V D1 GWB1998.grd To use Cartesian generalized splines in tension and return the magnitude of the surface slope in the NW direction, try greenspline table_5.11 R0/6.5/-0.2/6.5 I0.1 Sr0.95 V D1 Q-45 Gslopes.grd Finally, to use Cartesian minimum curvature splines in recovering a surface where the input data is a single surface value (pt.d) and the remaining constraints specify only the surface slope and direction (slopes.d), use greenspline pt.d R-3.2/3.2/-3.2/3.2 I0.1 Sc V D1 A1,slopes.d Gslopes.grd
3-D EXAMPLES
To create a uniform 3-D Cartesian grid table based on the data in table_5.23 in Davis (1986) that contains x,y,z locations and a measure of uranium oxide concentrations (in percent), try greenspline table_5.23 R5/40/-5/10/5/16 I0.25 Sr0.85 V D5 G3D_UO2.txt
2-D SPHERICAL SURFACE EXAMPLES

To recreate Parkers [1994] example on a global 1x1 degree grid, assuming the data are in le mag_obs_1990.d, try greenspline V Rg fg Sp D3 I1 GP1994.grd mag_obs_1990.d To do the same problem but applying tension and use pre-calculated Green functions, use greenspline V Rg fg SQ0.85 D3 I1 GWB2008.grd mag_obs_1990.d
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
GREENSPLINE(1)
GREENSPLINE(1)
CONSIDERATIONS
(1) For the Cartesian cases we use the free-space Green functions, hence no boundary conditions are applied at the edges of the specied domain. For most applications this is ne as the region typically is arbitrarily set to reect the extent of your data. However, if your application requires particular boundary conditions then you may consider using surface instead. (2) In all cases, the solution is obtained by inverting a n x n double precision matrix for the Green function coefcients, where n is the number of data constraints. Hence, your computers memory may place restrictions on how large data sets you can process with greenspline. Pre-processing your data with blockmean, blockmedian, or blockmode is recommended to avoid aliasing and may also control the size of n. For information, if n = 1024 then only 8 Mb memory is needed, but for n = 10240 we need 800 Mb. Note that greenspline is fully 64-bit compliant if compiled as such. (3) The inversion for coefcients can become numerically unstable when data neighbors are very close compared to the overall span of the data. You can remedy this by pre-processing the data, e.g., by averaging closely spaced neighbors. Alternatively, you can improve stability by using the SVD solution and discard information associated with the smallest eigenvalues (see C).
TENSION
Tension is generally used to suppress spurious oscillations caused by the minimum curvature requirement, in particular when rapid gradient changes are present in the data. The proper amount of tension can only be determined by experimentation. Generally, very smooth data (such as potential elds) do not require much, if any tension, while rougher data (such as topography) will typically interpolate better with moderate tension. Make sure you try a range of values before choosing your nal result. Note: the regularized spline in tension is only stable for a nite range of scale values; you must experiment to nd the valid range and a useful setting. For more information on tension see the references below.
REFERENCES
Davis, J. C., 1986, Statistics and Data Analysis in Geology, 2nd Edition, 646 pp., Wiley, New York, Mitasova, H., and L. Mitas, 1993, Interpolation by regularized spline with tension: I. Theory and implementation, Math. Geol., 25, 641655. Parker, R. L., 1994, Geophysical Inverse Theory, 386 pp., Princeton Univ. Press, Princeton, N.J. Sandwell, D. T., 1987, Biharmonic spline interpolation of Geos-3 and Seasat altimeter data, Geophys. Res. Lett., 14, 139142. Wessel, P., and D. Bercovici, 1998, Interpolation with splines in tension: a Greens function approach, Math. Geol., 30, 7793. Wessel, P., and J. M. Becker, 2008, Interpolation using a generalized Greens function for a spherical surface spline in tension, Geophys. J. Int, 174, 2128. Wessel, P., 2009, A general-purpose Greens function interpolator, Computers & Geosciences, 35, 12471254, doi:10.1016/j.cageo.2008.08.012.
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), gmtmath(1), nearneighbor(1), psxy(1), surface(1), triangulate(1), xyz2grd(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
ISOGMT(1)
ISOGMT(1)
NAME
isogmt Run GMT command or script in isolation mode
SYNOPSIS
isogmt command
DESCRIPTION
isogmt runs a single GMT command or shell script in isolation mode. This means that the les .gmtcommands4 and .gmtdefaults4 will be read from the usual locations (current directory, /.gmt, or home directory), but changes will only be written in a temporary directory, which will be removed after execution. The name of the temporary directory will be available to the command or script as the environment variable GMT_TMPDIR.
EXAMPLES
Run the shell script script.gmt in isolation mode isogmt sh script.gmt
SEE ALSO
GMT (1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
MAKECPT(1)
MAKECPT(1)
NAME
makecpt Make GMT color palette tables
SYNOPSIS
makecpt [ Ctable ] [ D ] [ I ] [ M ] [ N ] [ Q[i|o] ] [ Tz0/z1/dz | Tztable ] [ V ] [ Z ]
DESCRIPTION
makecpt is a utility that will help you make color palette tables (cpt les). You dene an equidistant set of contour intervals or pass your own z-table, and create a new cpt le based on an existing master cpt le. The resulting cpt le can be reversed relative to the master cpt, and can be made continuous or discrete. The color palette includes three additional colors beyond the range of z-values. These are the background color (B) assigned to values lower than the lowest z-value, the foreground color (F) assigned to values higher than the highest z-value, and the NaN color (N) painted whereever values are undened. If the master cpt le includes B, F, and N entries, these will be copied into the new master le. If not, the parameters COLOR_BACKGROUND, COLOR_FOREGROUND, and COLOR_NAN from the .gmtdefaults4 le or the command line will be used. This default behavior can be overruled using the options D, M or N. The color model (RGB, HSV or CMYK) of the palette created by makecpt will be the same as specied in the header of the master cpt le. When there is no COLOR_MODEL entry in the master cpt le, the COLOR_MODEL specied in the .gmtdefaults4 le or on the command line will be used.
OPTIONS
C Selects the master color table table to use in the interpolation. Choose among the built-in tables (type makecpt to see the list) or give the name of an existing cpt le [Default gives a rainbow cpt le]. Select the colors for lowest and highest z-values in the output cpt le as the back- and foreground colors that will be written to the cpt le [Default uses the colors specied in the master le, or those dened by the parameters COLOR_BACKGROUND, COLOR_FOREGROUND, and COLOR_NAN]. Reverses the sense of color progression in the master cpt le. Also exchanges the foreground and background colors, including those specied by the parameters COLOR_BACKGROUND and COLOR_FOREGROUND. Overrule background, foreground, and NaN colors specied in the master cpt le with the values of the parameters COLOR_BACKGROUND, COLOR_FOREGROUND, and COLOR_NAN specied in the .gmtdefaults4 le or on the command line. When combined with D, only COLOR_NAN is considered. Do not write out the background, foreground, and NaN-color elds [Default will write them]. Selects a logarithmic interpolation scheme [Default is linear]. Qi expects input z-values to be log10(z), assigns colors, and writes out z [Default]. Qo takes log10(z) rst, assigns colors, and writes out z. Denes the range of the new cpt le by giving the lowest and highest z-value and the interval. Alternatively, give the name of a ASCII le that has one z-value per record. If not given, the existing range in the master cpt le will be used intact. Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"]. Creates a continuous cpt le [Default is discontinuous, i.e., constant colors for each interval].
N Q
V Z
EXAMPLES
To make a cpt le with z-values from -200 to 200, with discrete color changes every 25, and using a polar blue-white-red colortable: makecpt Cpolar T-200/200/25 > colors.cpt To make an equidistant cpt le from z = -2 to 6, in steps of 1, using continuous default rainbow colors:
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
MAKECPT(1)
MAKECPT(1)
makecpt T-2/6/1 Z > rainbow.cpt To make a GEBCO look-alike cpt le for bathymetry, run makecpt Cgebco > my_gebco.cpt
BUGS
Since makecpt will also interpolate from any existing .cpt le you may have in your directory, you cannot use one of the listed cpt names as an output lename; hence the my_gebco.cpt in the example.
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), grd2cpt(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
MAPPROJECT(1)
MAPPROJECT(1)
NAME
mapproject Forward and Inverse map transformation of 2-D coordinates
SYNOPSIS
mapproject inles Jparameters Rwest/east/south/north[r] [ Ab|B|f|F[lon0/lat0] ] [ C[dx/dy] ] [ Dc|i|m|p ] [ E[datum] ] [ F[k|m|n|i|c|p] ] [ G[x0/y0][+|-][/unit] ] [ H[i][nrec] ] [ I ] [ Lline.xy[/unit][+] ] [ Q[d|e ] [ S ] [ T[h]from[/to] ] [ V ] [ :[i|o] ] [ b[i|o][s|S|d|D[ncol]|c[var1/...]] ] [ f[i|o]colinfo ] [ g[a]x|y|d|X|Y|D|[col]z[+|-]gap[u] ] [ m[i|o][ag] ]
DESCRIPTION
mapproject reads (longitude, latitude) positions from inles [or standard input] and computes (x,y) coordinates using the specied map projection and scales. Optionally, it can read (x,y) positions and compute (longitude, latitude) values doing the inverse transformation. This can be used to transform linear (x,y) points obtained by digitizing a map of known projection to geographical coordinates. May also calculate distances along track, to a xed point, or closest approach to a line. Finally, can be used to perform various datum conversions. Additional data elds are permitted after the rst 2 columns which must have (longitude,latitude) or (x,y). See option : on how to read (latitude,longitude) les. inles J Data le(s) to be transformed. If not given, standard input is read. Selects the map projection. The following character determines the projection. If the character is upper case then the argument(s) supplied as scale(s) is interpreted to be the map width (or axis lengths), else the scale argument(s) is the map scale (see its denition for each projection). UNIT is cm, inch, or m, depending on the MEASURE_UNIT setting in .gmtdefaults4, but this can be overridden on the command line by appending c, i, or m to the scale or width values. Append h, +, or - to the given width if you instead want to set map height, the maximum dimension, or the minimum dimension, respectively [Default is w for width]. In case the central meridian is an optional parameter and it is being omitted, then the center of the longitude range given by the R option is used. The default standard parallel is the equator. The ellipsoid used in the map projections is user-denable by editing the .gmtdefaults4 le in your home directory. 73 commonly used ellipsoids and spheroids are currently supported, and users may also specify their own custum ellipsoid parameters [Default is WGS-84]. Several GMT parameters can affect the projection: ELLIPSOID, INTERPOLANT, MAP_SCALE_FACTOR, and MEASURE_UNIT; see the gmtdefaults man page for details. Choose one of the following projections (The E or C after projection names stands for Equal-Area and Conformal, respectively): CYLINDRICAL PROJECTIONS: Jclon0/lat0/scale or JClon0/lat0/width (Cassini). Give projection center lon0/lat0 and scale (1:xxxx or UNIT/degree). Jcyl_stere/[lon0/[lat0/]]scale or JCyl_stere/[lon0/[lat0/]]width (Cylindrical Stereographic). Give central meridian lon0 (optional), standard parallel lat0 (optional), and scale along parallel (1:xxxx or UNIT/degree). The standard parallel is typically one of these (but can be any value): 66.159467 - Millers modied Gall 55 - Kamenetskiys First 45 - Galls Stereographic 30 - Bolshoi Sovietskii Atlas Mira or Kamenetskiys Second 0 - Brauns Cylindrical Jj[lon0/]scale or JJ[lon0/]width (Miller Cylindrical Projection). Give the central meridian lon0 (optional) and scale (1:xxxx or UNIT/degree). Jm[lon0/[lat0/]]scale or JM[lon0/[lat0/]]width Give central meridian lon0 (optional), standard parallel lat0 (optional), and scale along parallel (1:xxxx or UNIT/degree).
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
MAPPROJECT(1)
MAPPROJECT(1)
Joparameters (Oblique Mercator [C]). Specify one of: Jo[a]lon0/lat0/azimuth/scale or JO[a]lon0/lat0/azimuth/width Set projection center lon0/lat0, azimuth of oblique equator, and scale. Jo[b]lon0/lat0/lon1/lat1/scale or JO[b]lon0/lat0/lon1/lat1/scale Set projection center lon0/lat0, another point on the oblique equator lon1/lat1, and scale. Joclon0/lat0/lonp/latp/scale or JOclon0/lat0/lonp/latp/scale Set projection center lon0/lat0, pole of oblique projection lonp/latp, and scale. Give scale along oblique equator (1:xxxx or UNIT/degree). Jq[lon0/[lat0/]]scale or JQ[lon0/[lat0/]]width (Cylindrical Equidistant). Give the central meridian lon0 (optional), standard parallel lat0 (optional), and scale (1:xxxx or UNIT/degree). The standard parallel is typically one of these (but can be any value): 61.7 - Grafarend and Niermann, minimum linear distortion 50.5 - Ronald Miller Equirectangular 43.5 - Ronald Miller, minimum continental distortion 42 - Grafarend and Niermann 37.5 - Ronald Miller, minimum overall distortion 0 - Plate Carree, Simple Cylindrical, Plain/Plane Chart Jtlon0/[lat0/]scale or JTlon0/[lat0/]width Give the central meridian lon0, central parallel lat0 (optional), and scale (1:xxxx or UNIT/degree). Juzone/scale or JUzone/width (UTM - Universal Transverse Mercator [C]). Give the UTM zone (A,B,1-60[C-X],Y,Z)) and scale (1:xxxx or UNIT/degree). Zones: If C-X not given, prepend - or + to enforce southern or northern hemisphere conventions [northern if south > 0]. Jy[lon0/[lat0/]]scale or JY[lon0/[lat0/]]width (Cylindrical Equal-Area [E]). Give the central meridian lon0 (optional), standard parallel lat0 (optional), and scale (1:xxxx or UNIT/degree). The standard parallel is typically one of these (but can be any value): 50 - Balthasart 45 - Gall-Peters 37.0666 - Caster 37.4 - Trystan Edwards 37.5 - Hobo-Dyer 30 - Behrman 0 - Lambert (default) CONIC PROJECTIONS: Jblon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale or JBlon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/width (Albers [E]). Give projection center lon0/lat0, two standard parallels lat1/lat2, and scale (1:xxxx or UNIT/degree). Jdlon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale or JDlon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/width (Conic Equidistant) Give projection center lon0/lat0, two standard parallels lat1/lat2, and scale (1:xxxx or UNIT/degree). Jllon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale or JLlon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/width (Lambert [C]) Give origin lon0/lat0, two standard parallels lat1/lat2, and scale along these (1:xxxx or UNIT/degree).
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
MAPPROJECT(1)
MAPPROJECT(1)
Jpoly/[lon0/[lat0/]]scale or JPoly/[lon0/[lat0/]]width ((American) Polyconic). Give the central meridian lon0 (optional), reference parallel lat0 (optional, default = equator), and scale along central meridian (1:xxxx or UNIT/degree). AZIMUTHAL PROJECTIONS: Except for polar aspects, Rw/e/s/n will be reset to Rg. Use R<...>r for smaller regions. Jalon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale or JAlon0/lat0[/horizon]/width (Lambert [E]). lon0/lat0 species the projection center. horizon species the max distance from projection center (in degrees, <= 180, default 90). Give scale as 1:xxxx or radius/lat, where radius is distance in UNIT from origin to the oblique latitude lat. Jelon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale or JElon0/lat0[/horizon]/width (Azimuthal Equidistant). lon0/lat0 species the projection center. horizon species the max distance from projection center (in degrees, <= 180, default 180). Give scale as 1:xxxx or radius/lat, where radius is distance in UNIT from origin to the oblique latitude lat. Jflon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale or JFlon0/lat0[/horizon]/width (Gnomonic). lon0/lat0 species the projection center. horizon species the max distance from projection center (in degrees, < 90, default 60). Give scale as 1:xxxx or radius/lat, where radius is distance in UNIT from origin to the oblique latitude lat. Jglon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale or JGlon0/lat0[/horizon]/width (Orthographic). lon0/lat0 species the projection center. horizon species the max distance from projection center (in degrees, <= 90, default 90). Give scale as 1:xxxx or radius/lat, where radius is distance in UNIT from origin to the oblique latitude lat. Jglon0/lat0/altitude/azimuth/tilt/twist/Width/Height/scale or JGlon0/lat0/altitude/azimuth/tilt/twist/Width/Height/width (General Perspective). lon0/lat0 species the projection center. altitude is the height (in km) of the viewpoint above local sea level. If altitude is less than 10, then it is the distance from the center of the earth to the viewpoint in earth radii. If altitude has a sufx r then it is the radius from the center of the earth in kilometers. azimuth is measured to the east of north of view. tilt is the upward tilt of the plane of projection. If tilt is negative, then the viewpoint is centered on the horizon. Further, specify the clockwise twist, Width, and Height of the viewpoint in degrees. Give scale as 1:xxxx or radius/lat, where radius is distance in UNIT from origin to the oblique latitude lat. Jslon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale or JSlon0/lat0[/horizon]/width (General Stereographic [C]). lon0/lat0 species the projection center. horizon species the max distance from projection center (in degrees, < 180, default 90). Give scale as 1:xxxx (true at pole) or lat0/1:xxxx (true at standard parallel lat0) or radius/lat (radius in UNIT from origin to the oblique latitude lat). Note if 1:xxxx is used then to specify horizon you must also specify the lat0 as +-90 to avoid ambiguity. MISCELLANEOUS PROJECTIONS: Jh[lon0/]scale or JH[lon0/]width (Hammer [E]). Give the central meridian lon0 (optional) and scale along equator (1:xxxx or UNIT/degree). Ji[lon0/]scale or JI[lon0/]width (Sinusoidal [E]). Give the central meridian lon0 (optional) and scale along equator (1:xxxx or UNIT/degree). Jkf[lon0/]scale or JKf[lon0/]width (Eckert IV) [E]). Give the central meridian lon0 (optional) and scale along equator (1:xxxx or UNIT/degree).
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
MAPPROJECT(1)
MAPPROJECT(1)
Jk[s][lon0/]scale or JK[s][lon0/]width (Eckert VI) [E]). Give the central meridian lon0 (optional) and scale along equator (1:xxxx or UNIT/degree). Jn[lon0/]scale or JN[lon0/]width (Robinson). Give the central meridian lon0 (optional) and scale along equator (1:xxxx or UNIT/degree). Jr[lon0/]scale JR[lon0/]width (Winkel Tripel). Give the central meridian lon0 (optional) and scale along equator (1:xxxx or UNIT/degree). Jv[lon0/]scale or JV[lon0/]width (Van der Grinten). Give the central meridian lon0 (optional) and scale along equator (1:xxxx or UNIT/degree). Jw[lon0/]scale or JW[lon0/]width (Mollweide [E]). Give the central meridian lon0 (optional) and scale along equator (1:xxxx or UNIT/degree). NON-GEOGRAPHICAL PROJECTIONS: Jp[a]scale[/origin][r|z] or JP[a]width[/origin][r|z] (Polar coordinates (theta,r)) Optionally insert a after Jp [ or JP] for azimuths CW from North instead of directions CCW from East [Default]. Optionally append /origin in degrees to indicate an angular offset [0]). Finally, append r if r is elevations in degrees (requires s >= 0 and n <= 90) or z if you want to annotate depth rather than radius [Default]. Give scale in UNIT/r-unit. Jxx-scale[/y-scale] or JXwidth[/height] (Linear, log, and power scaling) Give x-scale (1:xxxx or UNIT/x-unit) and/or y-scale (1:xxxx or UNIT/y-unit); or specify width and/or height in UNIT. y-scale=x-scale if not specied separately and using 1:xxxx implies that x-unit and y-unit are in meters. Use negative scale(s) to reverse the direction of an axis (e.g., to have y be positive down). Set height or width to 0 to have it recomputed based on the implied scale of the other axis. Optionally, append to x-scale, y-scale, width or height one of the following: d l t T Data are geographical coordinates (in degrees). Take log10 of values before scaling. Input coordinates are time relative to TIME_EPOCH. Input coordinates are absolute time.
ppower Raise values to power before scaling.
Default axis lengths (see gmtdefaults) can be invoked using JXh (for landscape); JXv (for portrait) will swap the x- and y-axis lengths. The default unit for this installation is either cm or inch, as dened in the le share/gmt.conf. However, you may change this by editing your .gmtdefaults4 le(s). R xmin, xmax, ymin, and ymax specify the Region of interest. For geographic regions, these limits correspond to west, east, south, and north and you may specify them in decimal degrees or in [+-]dd:mm[:ss.xxx][W|E|S|N] format. Append r if lower left and upper right map coordinates are given instead of w/e/s/n. The two shorthands Rg and Rd stand for global domain (0/360 and -180/+180 in longitude respectively, with -90/+90 in latitude). Alternatively, specify the name of an existing grid le and the R settings (and grid spacing, if applicable) are copied from the grid. For calendar time coordinates you may either give (a) relative time (relative to the selected TIME_EPOCH and in the selected TIME_UNIT; append t to JX|x), or (b) absolute time of the form [date]T[clock] (append T to JX|x). At least one of date and clock must be present; the T is always required. The date string must be of the form [-]yyyy[-mm[-dd]] (Gregorian calendar) or yyyy[-Www[-d]] (ISO week calendar), while the clock string must be of the form hh:mm:ss[.xxx]. The use of delimiters and their type and positions must be exactly as indicated (however, input,
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
MAPPROJECT(1)
MAPPROJECT(1)
output and plot formats are customizable; see gmtdefaults). Special case for the UTM projection: If C is used and R is not given then the region is set to coincide with the given UTM zone so as to preserve the full ellipsoidal solution (See RESTRICTIONS for more information).
OPTIONS
No space between the option ag and the associated arguments. inle(s) input le(s) with 2 or more columns. If no le(s) is given, mapproject will read the standard input. A[f|b] A calculates the (forward) azimuth from xed point lon/lat to each data point. Use Ab to get back-azimuth from data points to xed point. Upper case F or B will convert from geodetic to geocentric latitudes and estimate azimuth of geodesics (assuming the current ellipsoid is not a sphere). If no xed point is given then we compute the azimuth (or back-azimuth) from the previous point. C Set center of projected coordinates to be at map projection center [Default is lower left corner]. Optionally, add offsets in the projected units to be added (or subtracted when I is set) to (from) the projected coordinates, such as false eastings and northings for particular projection zones [0/0]. The unit used for the offsets is the plot distance unit in effect (see MEASURE_UNIT) unless F is used, in which case the offsets are always in meters. Temporarily override MEASURE_UNIT and use c (cm), i (inch), m (meter), or p (points) instead. Cannot be used with F. Convert from geodetic (lon, lat, height) to Earth Centered Earth Fixed (ECEF) (x,y,z) coordinates (add I for the inverse conversion). Append datum ID (see Qd) or give ellipsoid:dx,dy,dz where ellipsoid may be an ellipsoid ID (see Qe) or given as a[,inv_f], where a is the semi-major axis and inv_f is the inverse attening (0 if omitted). If datum is - or not given we assume WGS-84. Force 1:1 scaling, i.e., output (or input, see I) data are in actual projected meters. To specify other units, append k (km), m (mile), n (nautical mile), i (inch), c (cm), or p (points). Without F, the output (or input, see I) are in the units specied by MEASURE_UNIT (but see D). Calculate distances along track OR to the optional point set with Gx0/y0. Append IT(unit), the distance unit; choose among e (m), k (km), m (mile), n (nautical mile), d (spherical degree), c (Cartesian distance using input coordinates) or C (Cartesian distance using projected coordinates). The last unit requires R and J to be set. Upper case E, K, M, N, or D will use exact methods for geodesic distances (Rudoes method for distances in length units and employing geocentric latitudes in degree calculations, assuming the current ellipsoid is not spherical). With no xed point we calculate cumulate distances along track. To obtain incremental distance between successive points, use G-. To specify the 2nd point via two extra columns in the input le, choose G+. Input le(s) has header record(s). If used, the default number of header records is N_HEADER_RECS. Use Hi if only input data should have header records [Default will write out header records if the input data have them]. Blank lines and lines starting with # are always skipped. Do the Inverse transformation, i.e., get (longitude,latitude) from (x,y) data. Determine the shortest distance from the input data points to the line(s) given in the ASCII multisegment le line.xy. The distance and the coordinates of the nearest point will be appended to the output as three new columns. Append the distance unit; choose among e (m), k (km), m (mile), n (nautical mile), d (spherical degree), c (Cartesian distance using input coordinates) or C (Cartesian distance using projected coordinates). The last unit requires R and J to be set. A spherical approximation is used for geographic data. Finally, append + to report the line segment id and the fractional point number instead of lon/lat of the nearest point. List all projection parameters. To only list datums, use Qd. To only list ellipsoids, use Qe. Suppress points that fall outside the region.
D E
I L
Q S
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
MAPPROJECT(1)
MAPPROJECT(1)
Coordinate conversions between datums from and to using the standard Molodensky transformation. Use Th if 3rd input column has height above ellipsoid [Default assumes height = 0, i.e., on the ellipsoid]. Specify datums using the datum ID (see Qd) or give ellipsoid:dx,dy,dz where ellipsoid may be an ellipsoid ID (see Qe) or given as a[,inv_f], where a is the semi-major axis and inv_f is the inverse attening (0 if omitted). If datum is - or not given we assume WGS-84. T may be used in conjunction with R J to change the datum before coordinate projection (add I to apply the datum conversion after the inverse projection). Make sure that the ELLIPSOID setting is correct for your case. Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"]. Toggles between (longitude,latitude) and (latitude,longitude) input and/or output. [Default is (longitude,latitude)]. Append i to select input only or o to select output only. [Default affects both]. Selects binary input. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of columns in your binary input le if it exceeds the columns needed by the program. Or append c if the input le is netCDF. Optionally, append var1/var2/... to specify the variables to be read. [Default is 2 input columns]. Selects binary output. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of desired columns in your binary output le. [Default is same as input]. Special formatting of input and/or output columns (time or geographical data). Specify i or o to make this apply only to input or output [Default applies to both]. Give one or more columns (or column ranges) separated by commas. Append T (absolute calendar time), t (relative time in chosen TIME_UNIT since TIME_EPOCH), x (longitude), y (latitude), or f (oating point) to each column or column range item. Shorthand f[i|o]g means f[i|o]0x,1y (geographic coordinates). Examine the spacing between consecutive data points in order to impose breaks in the line. Append x|X or y|Y to dene a gap when there is a large enough change in the x or y coordinates, respectively, or d|D for distance gaps; use upper case to calculate gaps from projected coordinates. For gap-testing on other columns use [col]z; if col is not prepended the it defaults to 2 (i.e., 3rd column). Append [+|-]gap and optionally a unit u. Regarding optional signs: -ve means previous minus current column value must exceed |gap to be a gap, +ve means current minus previous column value must exceed gap, and no sign means the absolute value of the difference must exceed gap. For geographic data (x|y|d), the unit u may be meter [Default], kilometer, miles, or nautical miles. For projected data (X|Y|D), choose from inch, centimeter, meter, or points [Default unit set by MEASURE_UNIT]. Note: For x|y|z with time data the unit is instead controlled by TIME_UNIT. Repeat the option to specify multiple criteria, of which any can be met to produce a line break. Issue an additional ga to indicate that all criteria must be met instead. Multiple segment le(s). Segments are separated by a special record. For ASCII les the rst character must be ag [Default is >]. For binary les all elds must be NaN and b must set the number of output columns explicitly. By default the m setting applies to both input and output. Use mi and mo to give separate settings to input and output.
V : bi
bo

EXAMPLES
To transform a le with (longitude,latitude) into (x,y) positions in cm on a Mercator grid for a given scale of 0.5 cm per degree, run mapproject lonlatle R20/50/12/25 Jm0.5c > xyle
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
MAPPROJECT(1)
MAPPROJECT(1)
To transform several 2-column, binary, double precision les with (latitude,longitude) into (x,y) positions in inch on a Transverse Mercator grid (central longitude 75W) for scale = 1:500000 and suppress those points that would fall outside the map area, run mapproject tracks.* R-80/-70/20/40 Jt-75/1:500000 : S Di bo bi2 > tmle.b To convert the geodetic coordinates (lon, lat, height) in the le old.dat from the NAD27 CONUS datum (Datum ID 131 which uses the Clarke-1866 ellipsoid) to WGS 84, run mapproject old.dat Th131 > new.dat To compute the closest distance (in km) between each point in the input le quakes.dat and the line segments given in the multi-segment ASCII le coastline.xy, run mapproject quakes.dat Lcoastline.xy/k > quake_dist.dat
RESTRICTIONS
The rectangular input region set with R will in general be mapped into a non-rectangular grid. Unless C is set, the leftmost point on this grid has xvalue = 0.0, and the lowermost point will have yvalue = 0.0. Thus, before you digitize a map, run the extreme map coordinates through mapproject using the appropriate scale and see what (x,y) values they are mapped onto. Use these values when setting up for digitizing in order to have the inverse transformation work correctly, or alternatively, use awk to scale and shift the (x,y) values before transforming. For some projection, a spherical solution may be used despite the user having selected an ellipsoid. This occurs when the users R setting implies a region that exceeds the domain in which the ellipsoidal series expansions are valid. These are the conditions: (1) Lambert Conformal Conic (JL)and Albers Equal-Area (JB) will use the spherical solution when the map scale exceeds 1.0E7. (2) Transverse Mercator (JT) and UTM (JU) will will use the spherical solution when either the west or east boundary given in R is more than 10 degrees from the central meridian, and (3) same for Cassini (JC) but with a limit of only 4 degrees.
ELLIPSOIDS AND SPHEROIDS

GMT will use ellipsoidal formulae if they are implemented and the user have selected an ellipsoid as the reference shape (see ELLIPSOID in gmtdefaults). The user needs to be aware of a few potential pitfalls: (1) For some projections, such as Transverse Mercator, Albers, and Lamberts conformal conic we use the ellipsoidal expressions when the areas mapped are small, and switch to the spherical expressions (and substituting the appropriate auxiliary latitudes) for larger maps. The ellipsoidal formulae are used as follows: (a) Transverse Mercator: When all points are within 10 degrees of central meridian, (b) Conic projections when longitudinal range is less than 90 degrees, (c) Cassini projection when all points are within 4 degrees of central meridian. (2) When you are trying to match some historical data (e.g., coordinates obtained with a certain projection and a certain reference ellipsoid) you may nd that GMT gives results that are slightly different. One likely source of this mismatch is that older calculations often used less signicant digits. For instance, Snyders examples often use the Clarke 1866 ellipsoid (dened by him as having a attening f = 1/294.98). From f we get the eccentricity squared to be 0.00676862818 (this is what GMT uses), while Snyder rounds off and uses 0.00676866. This difference can give discrepancies of several tens of cm. If you need to reproduce coordinates projected with this slightly different eccentricity, you should specify your own ellipsoid with the same parameters as Clarke 1866, but with f = 1/294.97861076. Also, be aware that older data may be referenced to different datums, and unless you know which datum was used and convert all data to a common datum you may experience mismatches of tens to hundreds of meters. (3) Finally, be aware that MAP_SCALE_FACTOR have certain default values for some projections so you may have to override the setting in order to match results produced with other settings.
SEE ALSO
gmtdefaults(1), GMT (1), project(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
MAPPROJECT(1)
MAPPROJECT(1)
REFERENCES
Bomford, G., 1952, Geodesy, Oxford U. Press. Snyder, J. P., 1987, Map Projections A Working Manual, U.S. Geological Survey Prof. Paper 1395. Vanicek, P. and Krakiwsky, E, 1982, Geodesy The Concepts, North-Holland Publ., ISBN: 0 444 86149 1.
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
MINMAX(1)
MINMAX(1)
NAME
minmax Find extreme values in data tables
SYNOPSIS
minmax [ les] [ C ] [ EL|l|H|hcol ] [ H[i][nrec] ] [ I[p]dx[/dy[/dz...] ] [ S[x][y] ] [ Tdz[/col] ] [ :[i|o] ] [ bi[s|S|d|D[ncol]|c[var1/...]] ] [ f[i|o]colinfo ] [ m[i|o][ag] ]
DESCRIPTION
minmax reads its standard input [or from les] and nds the extreme values in each of the columns. It recognizes NaNs and will print warnings if the number of columns vary from record to record. As an option, minmax will nd the extent of the rst n columns rounded up and down to the nearest multiple of the supplied increments. By default, this output will be in the form Rw/e/s/n which can be used directly in the command line for other programs (hence only dx and dy are needed), or the output will be in column form for as many columns as there are increments provided. A similar option (T) will provide a Tzmin/zmax/dz string for makecpt. xyzle ASCII [or binary, see b] le(s) holding a xed number of data columns. Report the min/max values per column in separate columns [Default uses <min/max> format]. Returns the record whose column col contains the minimum (l) or maximum (h) value. Upper case (L|H) works on absolute value of the data. In case of multiple matches, only the rst record is returned. Input le(s) has header record(s). If used, the default number of header records is N_HEADER_RECS. Use Hi if only input data should have header records [Default will write out header records if the input data have them]. Blank lines and lines starting with # are always skipped. Report the min/max of the rst n columns to the nearest multiple of the provided increments (separate the n increments by slashes), and output results in the form Rw/e/s/n (unless C is set). If only one increment is given we also use it for the second column (for backwards compatibility). To override this behaviour, use Ipdx. Add extra space for error bars. Useful together with I option and when later plotting with psxy E. Sx leaves space for horizontal error bars using the values in third (2) column. Sy leaves space for vertical error bars using the values in third (2) column. S or Sxy leaves space for both error bars using the values in third and fourth (2 and 3) columns. Report the min/max of the rst (0th) column to the nearest multiple of dz and output this in the form Tzmin/zmax/dz. To use another column, append /col. Toggles between (longitude,latitude) and (latitude,longitude) input and/or output. [Default is (longitude,latitude)]. Append i to select input only or o to select output only. [Default affects both]. Only works when I is selected. Selects binary input. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of columns in your binary input le if it exceeds the columns needed by the program. Or append c if the input le is netCDF. Optionally, append var1/var2/... to specify the variables to be read. [Default is 2 input columns]. Special formatting of input and/or output columns (time or geographical data). Specify i or o to make this apply only to input or output [Default applies to both]. Give one or more columns (or column ranges) separated by commas. Append T (absolute calendar time), t (relative time in chosen TIME_UNIT since TIME_EPOCH), x (longitude), y (latitude), or f (oating point) to each column or column range item. Shorthand f[i|o]g means f[i|o]0x,1y (geographic coordinates). Multiple segment le(s). Segments are separated by a special record. For ASCII les the rst character must be ag [Default is >]. For binary les all elds must be NaN and b must set the number of output columns explicitly. By default the m setting applies to both input and output. Use mi and mo to give separate settings to input and output.
OPTIONS
C E
T :
bi
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
MINMAX(1)
MINMAX(1)

EXAMPLES
To nd the extreme values in the le ship_gravity.xygd: minmax ship_gravity.xygd Output should look like ship_gravity.xygd: N = 6992 <326.125/334.684> <-28.0711/-8.6837> <-47.7/177.6> <0.6/3544.9> To nd the extreme values in the le track.xy to the nearest 5 units and use this region to draw a line using psxy, run psxy minmax I5 track.xy track.xy Jx1 B5 P > track.ps To nd the min and max values for each of the rst 4 columns, but rounded to integers, use minmax junkle C I1/1/1/1
BUGS
The I option does not yet work properly with time series data (e.g., f0T). Thus, such variable intervals as months and years are not calculated. Instead, specify your interval in the same units as the current setting of TIME_UNIT.
SEE ALSO
GMT (1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
NEARNEIGHBOR(1)
NEARNEIGHBOR(1)
NAME
nearneighbor A "Nearest neighbor" gridding algorithm
SYNOPSIS
nearneighbor [ xyzle(s) ] Gout_grdle Ixinc[unit][=|+][/yinc[unit][=|+]] Nsectors[/min_sectors] Rwest/east/south/north[r] Ssearch_radius[m|c|k|K] [ Eempty ] [ F ] [ H[i][nrec] ] [ Lag ] [ V ] [ W ] [ :[i|o] ] [ bi[s|S|d|D[ncol]|c[var1/...]] ] [ fcolinfo ]
DESCRIPTION
nearneighbor reads arbitrarily located (x,y,z[,w]) triples [quadruplets] from standard input [or xyzle(s)] and uses a nearest neighbor algorithm to assign an average value to each node that have one or more points within a radius centered on the node. The average value is computed as a weighted mean of the nearest point from each sector inside the search radius. The weighting function used is w(r) = 1 / (1 + d 2), where d = 3 * r / search_radius and r is distance from the node. This weight is modulated by the observation points weights [if supplied]. xyzle(s) 3 [or 4, see W] column ASCII le(s) [or binary, see b] holding (x,y,z[,w]) data values. If no le is specied, nearneighbor will read from standard input. G I Give the name of the output grid le. x_inc [and optionally y_inc] is the grid spacing. Optionally, append a sufx modier. Geographical (degrees) coordinates: Append m to indicate arc minutes or c to indicate arc seconds. If one of the units e, k, i, or n is appended instead, the increment is assumed to be given in meter, km, miles, or nautical miles, respectively, and will be converted to the equivalent degrees longitude at the middle latitude of the region (the conversion depends on ELLIPSOID). If /y_inc is given but set to 0 it will be reset equal to x_inc; otherwise it will be converted to degrees latitude. All coordinates: If = is appended then the corresponding max x (east) or y (north) may be slightly adjusted to t exactly the given increment [by default the increment may be adjusted slightly to t the given domain]. Finally, instead of giving an increment you may specify the number of nodes desired by appending + to the supplied integer argument; the increment is then recalculated from the number of nodes and the domain. The resulting increment value depends on whether you have selected a gridline-registered or pixel-registered grid; see Appendix B for details. Note: if Rgrdle is used then grid spacing has already been initialized; use I to override the values. The circular area centered on each node is divided into sectors sectors. Average values will only be computed if there is at least one value inside at least min_sectors of the sectors for a given node. Nodes that fail this test are assigned the value NaN (but see E). If min_sectors is omitted, each sector needs to have at least one value inside it. [Default is quadrant search with at least 50% coverage, i.e., sectors = 4 and min_sectors = 2]. Note that only the nearest value per sector enters into the averaging, not all values inside the circle. xmin, xmax, ymin, and ymax specify the Region of interest. For geographic regions, these limits correspond to west, east, south, and north and you may specify them in decimal degrees or in [+-]dd:mm[:ss.xxx][W|E|S|N] format. Append r if lower left and upper right map coordinates are given instead of w/e/s/n. The two shorthands Rg and Rd stand for global domain (0/360 and -180/+180 in longitude respectively, with -90/+90 in latitude). Alternatively, specify the name of an existing grid le and the R settings (and grid spacing, if applicable) are copied from the grid. For calendar time coordinates you may either give (a) relative time (relative to the selected TIME_EPOCH and in the selected TIME_UNIT; append t to JX|x), or (b) absolute time of the form [date]T[clock] (append T to JX|x). At least one of date and clock must be present; the T is always required. The date string must be of the form [-]yyyy[-mm[-dd]] (Gregorian calendar) or yyyy[-Www[-d]] (ISO week calendar), while the clock string must be of the form hh:mm:ss[.xxx]. The use of delimiters and their type and positions must be exactly as indicated (however, input, output and plot formats are customizable; see gmtdefaults). Sets the search_radius in same units as the grid spacing; append m to indicate minutes or c to indicate seconds. Append k to indicate km (implies R and I are in degrees, and we will use a fast
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
NEARNEIGHBOR(1)
NEARNEIGHBOR(1)
at Earth approximation to calculate distance). For more accuracy, use uppercase K if distances should be calculated along geodesics. However, if the current ELLIPSOID is spherical then great circle calculations are used.
OPTIONS
E F H Set the value assigned to empty nodes [NaN]. Force pixel node registration [Default is gridline registration]. (Node registrations are dened in GMT Cookbook Appendix B on grid le formats.) Input le(s) has header record(s). If used, the default number of header records is N_HEADER_RECS. Use Hi if only input data should have header records [Default will write out header records if the input data have them]. Blank lines and lines starting with # are always skipped. Not used with binary data. Boundary condition ag may be x or y or xy indicating data is periodic in range of x or y or both set by R, or ag may be g indicating geographical conditions (x and y are lon and lat). [Default is no boundary conditions]. Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"]. Toggles between (longitude,latitude) and (latitude,longitude) input and/or output. [Default is (longitude,latitude)]. Append i to select input only or o to select output only. [Default affects both]. Input data have a 4th column containing observation point weights. These are multiplied with the geometrical weight factor to determine the actual weights used in the calculations. Selects binary input. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of columns in your binary input le if it exceeds the columns needed by the program. Or append c if the input le is netCDF. Optionally, append var1/var2/... to specify the variables to be read. [Default is 3 (or 4 if W is set) columns]. Special formatting of input and/or output columns (time or geographical data). Specify i or o to make this apply only to input or output [Default applies to both]. Give one or more columns (or column ranges) separated by commas. Append T (absolute calendar time), t (relative time in chosen TIME_UNIT since TIME_EPOCH), x (longitude), y (latitude), or f (oating point) to each column or column range item. Shorthand f[i|o]g means f[i|o]0x,1y (geographic coordinates).
V : W bi

EXAMPLES
To create a gridded data set from the le seaMARCII_bathy.lon_lat_z using a 0.5 min grid, a 5 km search radius, using an octant search, and set empty nodes to -9999: nearneighbor seaMARCII_bathy.lon_lat_z R242/244/-22/-20 I0.5m E-9999 Gbathymetry.grd S5k N8 To make a global grid le from the data in geoid.xyz using a 1 degree grid, a 200 km search radius, spherical distances, using an quadrant search, and set nodes to NaN only when fewer than two quadrants contain at least one value: nearneighbor geoid.xyz R0/360/-90/90 I1 Lg Ggeoid.grd S200K N4/2
SEE ALSO
blockmean(1), blockmedian(1), blockmode(1), GMT (1), surface(1), triangulate(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PROJECT(1)
PROJECT(1)
NAME
project project data along a line or great circle, generate a prole track, or translate coordinates.
SYNOPSIS
project [ inle ] Ccx/cy [ Aazimuth ] [ Dd|g ] [ Ebx/by ] [ Fags ] [ Gdist ] [ H[i][nrec] ] [ L[w][l_min/l_max] ] [ N ] [ Q ] [ S ] [ Tpx/py ] [ V ] [ Ww_min/w_max ] [ :[i|o] ] [ b[i|o][s|S|d|D[ncol]|c[var1/...]] ] [ f[i|o]colinfo ] [ m[i|o][ag] ]
DESCRIPTION
project reads arbitrary (x, y[, z]) data from standard input [or inle ] and writes to standard output any combination of (x, y, z, p, q, r, s), where (p, q) are the coordinates in the projection, (r, s) is the position in the (x, y) coordinate system of the point on the prole (q = 0 path) closest to (x, y), and z is all remaining columns in the input (beyond the required x and y columns). Alternatively, project may be used to generate (r, s, p) triples at equal increments dist along a prole. In this case ( G option), no input is read. Projections are dened in any (but only) one of three ways: (Denition 1) By a Center C and an Azimuth A in degrees clockwise from North. (Denition 2) By a Center C and end point E of the projection path E. (Denition 3) By a Center C and a roTation pole position T. To spherically project data along a great circle path, an oblique coordinate system is created which has its equator along that path, and the zero meridian through the Center. Then the oblique longitude (p) corresponds to the distance from the Center along the great circle, and the oblique latitude (q) corresponds to the distance perpendicular to the great circle path. When moving in the increasing (p) direction, (toward B or in the azimuth direction), the positive (q) direction is to your left. If a Pole has been specied, then the positive (q) direction is toward the pole. To specify an oblique projection, use the T option to set the Pole. Then the equator of the projection is already determined and the C option is used to locate the p = 0 meridian. The Center cx/cy will be taken as a point through which the p = 0 meridian passes. If you do not care to choose a particular point, use the South pole (ox = 0, oy = -90). Data can be selectively windowed by using the L and W options. If W is used, the projection Width is set to use only points with w_min < q < w_max. If L is set, then the Length is set to use only those points with l_min < p < l_max. If the E option has been used to dene the projection, then Lw may be selected to window the length of the projection to exactly the span from O to B. Flat Earth (Cartesian) coordinate transformations can also be made. Set N and remember that azimuth is clockwise from North (the y axis), NOT the usual cartesian theta, which is counterclockwise from the x axis. azimuth = 90 - theta. No assumptions are made regarding the units for x, y, r, s, p, q, dist, l_min, l_max, w_min, w_max. If Q is selected, map units are assumed and x, y, r, s must be in degrees and p, q, dist, l_min, l_max, w_min, w_max will be in km. Calculations of specic great-circle and geodesic distances or for back-azimuths or azimuths are better done using mapproject. project is CASE SENSITIVE. Use UPPER CASE for all one-letter designators which begin optional arguments. Use lower case for the xyzpqrs letters in ags. C cx/cy sets the origin of the projection, in Denition 1 or 2. If Denition 3 is used (T), then cx/cy are the coordinates of a point through which the oblique zero meridian (p = 0) should pass. name of ASCII (or binary, see bi) le(s) with 2 or more columns holding (x,y,[z]) data values. If no lenames are given, project will read from standard input. If the G option is selected, no input data are read. Specify your desired output using any combination of xyzpqrs, in any order. Do not space between the letters. Use lower case. The output will be ASCII (or binary, see bo) columns of values corresponding to xyzpqrs [Default]. If both input and output are using ASCII format then the z data are treated as textstring(s). If the G option is selected, the output will be rsp. azimuth denes the azimuth of the projection (Denition 1). Set the location of the Discontinuity in longitude (r coordinate). Dd will place the discontinuity at the Dateline, (-180 < r < 180); Dg will place it at Greenwich, (0 < r < 360). Default usually
OPTIONS
inle
A D
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PROJECT(1)
PROJECT(1)
falls at dateline due to atan2 calls. E G H bx/by denes the end point of the projection path (Denition 2). dist Generate mode. No input is read. Create (r, s, p) output points every dist units of p. See Q option. Input le(s) has header record(s). If used, the default number of header records is N_HEADER_RECS. Use Hi if only input data should have header records [Default will write out header records if the input data have them]. Blank lines and lines starting with # are always skipped. Length controls. Project only those points whose p coordinate is within l_min < p < l_max. If E has been set, then you may use Lw to stay within the distance from C to E. Flat Earth. Make a Cartesian coordinate transformation in the plane. [Default uses spherical trigonometry.] Map type units, i.e., project assumes x, y, r, s are in degrees while p, q, dist, l_min, l_max, w_min, w_max are in km. If Q is not set, then all these are assumed to be in the same units. Sort the output into increasing p order. Useful when projecting random data into a sequential prole. px/py sets the position of the roTation pole of the projection. (Denition 3). Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"]. Width controls. Project only those points whose q coordinate is within w_min < q < w_max. Toggles between (longitude,latitude) and (latitude,longitude) input and/or output. [Default is (longitude,latitude)]. Append i to select input only or o to select output only. [Default affects both]. Selects binary input. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of columns in your binary input le if it exceeds the columns needed by the program. Or append c if the input le is netCDF. Optionally, append var1/var2/... to specify the variables to be read. [Default is 2 input columns]. Selects binary output. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of desired columns in your binary output le. [Default is given by F or G]. Special formatting of input and/or output columns (time or geographical data). Specify i or o to make this apply only to input or output [Default applies to both]. Give one or more columns (or column ranges) separated by commas. Append T (absolute calendar time), t (relative time in chosen TIME_UNIT since TIME_EPOCH), x (longitude), y (latitude), or f (oating point) to each column or column range item. Shorthand f[i|o]g means f[i|o]0x,1y (geographic coordinates). Multiple segment le(s). Segments are separated by a special record. For ASCII les the rst character must be ag [Default is >]. For binary les all elds must be NaN and b must set the number of output columns explicitly. By default the m setting applies to both input and output. Use mi and mo to give separate settings to input and output.
L N Q S T V W : bi
bo

EXAMPLES
To generate points every 10km along a great circle from 10N,50W to 30N,10W: project C-50/10 E-10/30 G10 Q > great_circle_points.xyp
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PROJECT(1)
PROJECT(1)
(Note that great_circle_points.xyp could now be used as input for grdtrack, etc. ). To project the shiptrack gravity, magnetics, and bathymetry in c2610.xygmb along a great circle through an origin at 30S, 30W, the great circle having an azimuth of N20W at the origin, keeping only the data from NE of the prole and within +/- 500 km of the origin, run: project c2610.xygmb C-30/-30 A-20 W-10000/0 L-500/500 Fpz Q > c2610_projected.pgmb (Note in this example that W-10000/0 is used to admit any value with a large negative q coordinate. This will take those points which are on our right as we walk along the great circle path, or to the NE in this example.) To make a Cartesian coordinate transformation of mydata.xy so that the new origin is at 5,3 and the new x axis (p) makes an angle of 20 degrees with the old x axis, use: project mydata.xy C5/3 A70 Fpq > mydata.pq To take data in the le pacic.lonlat and transform it into oblique coordinates using a pole from the hotspot reference frame and placing the oblique zero meridian (p = 0 line) through Tahiti, run: project pacic.lonlat T-75/68 C-149:26/-17:37 Fpq > pacic.pq Suppose that pacic_topo.grd is a grid le of bathymetry, and you want to make a le of owlines in the hotspot reference frame. If you run: grd2xyz pacic_topo.grd | project T-75/68 C0/-90 Fxyq | xyz2grd Retc Ietc Cow.grd then ow.grd is a le in the same area as pacic_topo.grd, but ow contains the latitudes about the pole of the projection. You now can use grdcontour on ow.grd to draw lines of constant oblique latitude, which are ow lines in the hotspot frame. If you have an arbitrarily rotation pole px/py and you would like to draw an oblique small circle on a map, you will rst need to make a le with the oblique coordinates for the small circle (i.e., lon = 0360, lat is constant), then create a le with two records: the north pole (0/90) and the origin (0/0), and nd what their oblique coordinates are using your rotation pole. Now, use the projected North pole and origin coordinates as the rotation pole and center, respectively, and project your le as in the pacic example above. This gives coordinates for an oblique small circle.
SEE ALSO
tcircle(1), GMT (1), mapproject(1), grdproject(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PS2RASTER(1)
PS2RASTER(1)
NAME
ps2raster Converts one or several PostScript le(s) to other formats using GhostScript
SYNOPSIS
ps2raster psle(s) [ A[u|-] ] [ Cgs_option ] [ Doutdir ] [ Eresolution ] [ Gghost_path ] [ Llistle ] [ P ] [ Q[g|t][1|2|4] ] [ S ] [ Tb|e|f|j|g|G|m|t ] [ V ] [ W[+g][+tdocname][+nlayername][+aaltmode[alt]][+lminLOD/maxLOD][+fminfade/maxfade][+uURL] ]
DESCRIPTION
ps2raster converts one or more PostScript les to other formats (BMP, EPS, JPEG, PDF, PNG, PPM, TIFF) using GhostScript. Input le names are read from the command line or from a le that lists them. The size of the resulting images is determined by the BoundingBox (or HiResBoundingBox, if present). As an option, a tight (HiRes)BoundingBox may be computed rst. As another option, it can compute ESRI type world les used to reference, for instance, tif les and make them be recognized as geotiff. psles Names of PostScript les to be converted. The output les will have the same name (unless F is used) but with the conventional extension name associated to the raster format (e.g., .jpg for the jpeg format). Use D to redirect the output to a different directory. Adjust the BoundingBox and HiResBoundingBox to the minimum required by the image content. Append u to rst remove any GMT-produced time-stamps. Use A- to override any automatic setting of A by W. Specify a single, custom option that will be passed on to GhostScript as is. Repeat to add several options [none]. Sets an alternative output directory (which must exist) [Default is the same directory as the PS les]. Use D. to place the output in the current directory instead. Set raster resolution in dpi [default = 720 for PDF, 300 for others]. Force the output le name. By default output names are constructed using the input names as base, which are appended with an appropriate extension. Use this option to provide a different name, but without extension. Extension is still determined automatically. Full path to your GhostScript executable. NOTE: For Unix systems this is generally not necessary. Under Windows, ghostscript path is now fetch from the registry. If this fails you can still add the GS path to systems path or give the full path here. (e.g., Gc:\programs\gs\gs9.02\bin\gswin32c). WARNING: because of the poor decision of embedding the bits on the gs exe name we cannot satisfy both the 32 and 64 bits ghostscript executable names. So in case of get from registry failure the default name (when no G is used) is the one of the 64 bits version, or gswin32c The listle is an ASCII le with the names of the PostScript les to be converted. This option is obsolete. Use S to print the GhostScript command, if applicable. Use Te to save the intermediate EPS le. Force Portrait mode. All Landscape mode plots will be rotated back so that they show unrotated in Portrait mode. This is practical when converting to image formats or preparing EPS or PDF plots for inclusion in documents. Set the anti-aliasing options for graphics or text. Append the size of the subsample box (1, 2, or 4) [4]. Default is no anti-aliasing (same as bits = 1). Print to standard output the GhostScript command after it has been executed. Sets the output format, where b means BMP, e means EPS, f means PDF, j means JPEG, g means PNG, G means transparent PNG (untouched regions are transparent), m means PPM, and t means TIFF [default is JPEG]. For bjgt you can append - to get a grayscale image only. The EPS format can be combined with any of the other formats. For example, Tef creates both an EPS and a PDF le.
OPTIONS
A
C D E F
L N P
Q S T
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PS2RASTER(1)
PS2RASTER(1)
V W
Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"]. Write a ESRI type world le suitable to make (e.g) .tif les be recognized as geotiff by softwares that know how to do it. Be aware, however, that different results are obtained depending on the image contents and if the B option has been used or not. The trouble with the B option is that it creates a frame and very likely its annotations. That introduces pixels outside the map data extent, and therefore the map extents estimation will be wrong. To avoid this problem use --BASEMAP_TYPE=inside option which plots all annotations and ticks inside the image and therefore does not compromise the coordinate computations. Pay attention also to the cases when the plot has any of the sides with whites only because than the algorithm will fail miserably as those whites will be eaten by the GhostScript. In that case you really must use B or use a slightly off-white color. Together with V it prints on screen the gdal_translate (gdal_translate is a command line tool from the GDAL package) command that reads the raster + world le and creates a true geotiff le. Use W+g to do a system call to gdal_translate and create a geoTIFF image right away. The output le will have a .tiff extension. The world le naming follows the convention of jamming a w in the le extension. So, if output is tif Tt the world le is a .tfw, for jpeg we have a .jgw and so on. This option automatically sets A P. Use W+k to create a minimalist KML le that allows loading the image in GoogleEarth. Note that for this option the image must be in geographical coordinates. If not, a warning is issued but the KML le is created anyway. Several modier options are available to customize the KML le in the form of +opt strings. Append +ttitle to set the document title [GMT KML Document], +nlayername to set the layer name, and +a/altmode[altitude] to select one of 5 altitude modes recognized by Google Earth that determines the altitude (in m) of the image: G clamped to the ground, g append altitude relative to ground, a append absolute altitude, s append altitude relative to seaoor, and S clamp it to the seaoor. Control visibility of the layer with the +lminLOD/maxLOD and +fminfade/maxfade options. FInally, if you plan to leave the image itself on a server and only distribute the KML, use +uURL to prepend the URL to the image reference. See the KML documentation for further explanation (http://code.google.com/apis/kml/documentation/). Further notes on the creation of georeferenced rasters. ps2raster can create a georeferenced raster image with a world le OR uses GDAL to convert the GMT PostScript le to geotiff. GDAL uses Proj.4 for its projection library. To provide with the information it needs to do the georeferencing, GMT 4.5 embeds a comment near the start of the PostScript le dening the projection using Proj.4 syntax. Users with pre-GMT v4.5 PostScript les, or even non-GMT ps les, can provide the information ps2raster requires by manually editing a line into the PostScript le, prexed with %%PROJ. For example the command pscoast JM0/12c R-10/-4/37/43 W1 Di Bg30m --BASEMAP_TYPE=inside > cara.ps adds this comment line %%PROJ: merc -10.0 -4.0 37.0 43.0 -1113194.908 -445277.963 4413389.889 5282821.824 +proj=merc +lon_0=0 +k=-1 +x_0=0 +y_0=0 +a=6378137.0 +b=6356752.314245 where merc is the keyword for the coordinate conversion; the 2 to 5th elements contain the map limits, 6 to 9th the map limits in projected coordinates and the rest of the line has the regular proj4 string for this projection.
NOTES
The conversion to raster images (BMP, JPEG, PNG, PPM or TIFF) inherently results in loss of details that are available in the original PostScript le. Choose a resolution that is large enough for the application that the image will be used for. For web pages, smaller dpi values sufce, for Word documents and PowerPoint presentations a higher dpi value is recommended. ps2raster uses the loss-less Flate compression technique when creating JPEG, PNG and TIFF images. EPS is a vector, not a raster format. Therefore, the -E option has no effect on the creation of EPS les. Using the option Te will remove PageSize commands from the PostScript le and will adjust the
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PS2RASTER(1)
PS2RASTER(1)
BoundingBox when the A option is used. Note the original and required BoundingBox is limited to integer points, hence Adobe added the optional HiResBoundingBox to add more precision in sizing. The A option calculates both and writes both to the EPS le used in the rasterization (and output if Te is set). Although PDF is also a vector format, the E option has an effect on the resolution of pattern lls and fonts that are stored as bitmaps in the document. ps2raster therefore uses a larger default resolution when creating PDF les. In order to obtain high-quality PDF les, the /prepress options are in effect, allowing only loss-less Flate compression of raster images embedded in the PostScript le. Although ps2raster was developed as part of the GMT, it can be used to convert PostScript les created by nearly any graphics program. However, Au is GMT-specic. See Appendix C of the GMT Technical Reference and Cookbook for more information on how ps2raster is used to produce graphics that can be inserted into other documents (articles, presentations, posters, etc.).
EXAMPLES
To convert the le psle.ps to PNG using a tight BoundingBox and rotating it back to normal orientation in case it was in Landscape mode: ps2raster psle.ps A P Tg To create a simple linear map with pscoast and convert it to tif with a .tfw the tight BoundingBox computation. pscoast JX12cd R-10/-4/37/43 W1 Di Bg30m P G200 --BASEMAP_TYPE=inside > cara.ps ps2raster cara Tt W To create a Mercator version of the above example and use GDAL to produce a true geotiff le. pscoast JM0/12c R-10/-4/37/43 W1 Di Bg30m P G200 --BASEMAP_TYPE=inside > cara.ps gdalwarp -s_srs +proj=merc cara.tif carageo.tiff To create a Polar Stereographic geotiff le of Patagonia pscoast -JS-55/-60/15c -R-77/-55/-57.5/-48r -Di -Gred -P -Bg2 --BASEMAP_TYPE=inside > patagonia.ps ps2raster patagonia.ps -Tt -W+g -V To create a simple KMZ le for use in Google Earth, try grdimage lonlatgrid.nc -Jx1 -Ccolors.cpt -P -B0g2 --BASEMAP_TYPE=inside > tile.ps ps2raster tile.ps -Tg -W+k+t"my title"+l256/-1 -V (These commands assume that GhostScript can be found in your systems path.)
BINARY DATA
GMT programs can produce binary PostScript image data and this is determined by the default setting PS_IMAGE_FORMAT. Because ps2raster needs to process the input les on a line-by-line basis you need to make sure the image format is set to ascii and not bin.
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PS2RASTER(1)
PS2RASTER(1)
GHOSTSCRIPT OPTIONS
Most of the conversions done in ps2raster are handled by GhostScript. On most Unixes this program is available as gs; for Windows there is a version called gswin32c. GhostScript accepts a rich selection of command-line options that modify its behavior. Many of these are set indirectly by the options available above. However, hard-core usage may require some users to add additional options to ne-tune the result. Use S to examine the actual command used, and add custom options via one or more instances of the C option. For instance, to turn on image interpolation for all images, improving image quality for scaled images at the expense of speed, use C-dDOINTERPOLATE. See www.ghostscript.com for complete documentation.
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), gs(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSBASEMAP(1)
PSBASEMAP(1)
NAME
psbasemap To plot PostScript basemaps
SYNOPSIS
psbasemap B[p|s]parameters Jparameters Rwest/east/south/north[/zmin/zmax][r] [ Eazim/elev[+wlon/lat[/z]][+vx0/y0] ] [ Gll ] [ Jz|Zparameters ] [ K ] [ L[f][x]lon0/lat0[/slon]/slat/length[m|n|k][+llabel][+jjust][+ppen][+fll][+u] ] ] [ O ] [ P ] [ U[just/dx/dy/][c|label] ] [ T[f|m][x]lon0/lat0/size[/info][:w,e,s,n:][+gint[/mint]] ] [ V ] [ X[a|c|r][xshift[u]] ] [ Y[a|c|r][y-shift[u]] ] [ Zzlevel ] [ ccopies ]
DESCRIPTION
psbasemap creates PostScript code that will produce a basemap. Several map projections are available, and the user may specify separate tickmark intervals for boundary annotation, ticking, and [optionally] gridlines. A simple map scale or directional rose may also be plotted. B Sets map boundary annotation and tickmark intervals. The format of tickinfo is [p|s]xinfo[/yinfo[/zinfo]][:."Title":][W|w][E|e][S|s][N|n][Z|z[+]]. The leading p [Default] or s selects the primary or secondary annotation information. Each of the ?info segments are textstrings of the form info[:"Axis label":][:="prex":][:,"unit label":]. The info string is made up of one or more concatenated substrings of the form [a|f|g]stride[+-phase][unit]. The leading a is used to specify the annotation and major tick spacing [Default], f for minor tick spacing, and g for gridline spacing. stride is the desired stride interval. The optional phase shifts the annotation interval by that amount (positive or negative). The optional unit indicates the unit of the stride and can be any of Y (year, plot with 4 digits), y (year, plot with 2 digits), O (month, plot using PLOT_DATE_FORMAT), o (month, plot with 2 digits), U (ISO week, plot using PLOT_DATE_FORMAT), u (ISO week, plot using 2 digits), r (Gregorian week, 7-day stride from start of week TIME_WEEK_START), K (ISO weekday, plot name of day), D (date, plot using PLOT_DATE_FORMAT), d (day, plot day of month 0-31 or year 1-366, via PLOT_DATE_FORMAT), R (day, same as d, aligned with TIME_WEEK_START), H (hour, plot using PLOT_CLOCK_FORMAT), h (hour, plot with 2 digits), M (minute, plot using PLOT_CLOCK_FORMAT), m (minute, plot with 2 digits), C (second, plot using PLOT_CLOCK_FORMAT), c (second, plot with 2 digits). Note for geographic axes m and c instead mean arc minutes and arc seconds. All entities that are language-specic are under control by TIME_LANGUAGE. To specify separate x and y ticks, separate the substrings that apply to the x and y axes with a slash [/] (If a 3-D basemap is selected with E and Jz, a third substring pertaining to the vertical axis may be appended.) For linear/log/power projections (Jx|X): Labels for each axis can be added by surrounding them with colons (:). If the rst character in the label is a period, then the label is used as plot title; if it is a comma (,) then the label is appended to each annotation; if it is an equal sign (=) the the prex is prepended to each annotation (start label/prex with - to avoid space between annotation and item); else it is the axis label. If the label consists of more than one word, enclose the entire label in double quotes (e.g., :"my label":). If you need to use a colon (:) as part of your label you must specify it using its octal code (\072). By default, all 4 boundaries are plotted (referred to as W, E, S, N). To change the default, append the code for only those axes you want (e.g., WS for standard lower-left x- and y-axis system). Upper case (e.g., W) means draw axis/tickmarks AND annotate it, whereas lower case (e.g., w) will only draw axis/tickmarks. (If a 3-D basemap is selected with E and Jz, append Z or z to control the appearance of the vertical axis. Append + to draw the outline of the cube dened by R. Note that for 3-D views the title, if given, will be suppressed.) For non-geographical projections: Give negative scale (in Jx) or axis length (in JX) to change the direction of increasing coordinates (i.e., to make the y-axis positive down). For log10 axes: Annotations can be specied in one of three ways: (1) stride can be 1, 2, 3, or -n. Annotations will then occur at 1, 125, or 1234...9, respectively; for -n we annotate every nt magnitude. This option can also be used for the frame and grid intervals. (2) An l is appended to the tickinfo string. Then, log10 of the tick value is plotted at every integer log10 value. (3) A p is appended to the tickinfo string. Then, annotations appear as 10 raised to log10 of the tick value. For power axes: Annotations can be specied in one of two ways: (1) stride sets the regular
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSBASEMAP(1)
PSBASEMAP(1)
annotation interval. (2) A p is appended to the tickinfo string. Then, the annotation interval is expected to be in transformed units, but the annotation value will be plotted as untransformed units. E.g., if stride = 1 and power = 0.5 (i.e., sqrt), then equidistant annotations labeled 149... will appear. These GMT parameters can affect the appearance of the map boundary: ANNOT_MIN_ANGLE, ANNOT_MIN_SPACING, ANNOT_FONT_PRIMARY, ANNOT_FONT_SECONDARY, ANNOT_FONT_SIZE_PRIMARY, ANNOT_FONT_SIZE_SECONDARY, ANNOT_OFFSET_PRIMARY, ANNOT_OFFSET_SECONDARY, BASEMAP_AXES, BASEMAP_FRAME_RGB, BASEMAP_TYPE, PLOT_DEGREE_FORMAT, FRAME_PEN, FRAME_WIDTH, GRID_CROSS_SIZE_PRIMARY, GRID_PEN_PRIMARY, GRID_CROSS_SIZE_SECONDARY, GRID_PEN_SECONDARY, HEADER_FONT, HEADER_FONT_SIZE, LABEL_FONT, LABEL_FONT_SIZE, LINE_STEP, OBLIQUE_ANNOTATION, PLOT_CLOCK_FORMAT, PLOT_DATE_FORMAT, TIME_FORMAT_PRIMARY, TIME_FORMAT_SECONDARY, TIME_LANGUAGE, TIME_WEEK_START, TICK_LENGTH, TICK_PEN, and Y_AXIS_TYPE; see the gmtdefaults man page for details. J Selects the map projection. The following character determines the projection. If the character is upper case then the argument(s) supplied as scale(s) is interpreted to be the map width (or axis lengths), else the scale argument(s) is the map scale (see its denition for each projection). UNIT is cm, inch, or m, depending on the MEASURE_UNIT setting in .gmtdefaults4, but this can be overridden on the command line by appending c, i, or m to the scale or width values. Append h, +, or - to the given width if you instead want to set map height, the maximum dimension, or the minimum dimension, respectively [Default is w for width]. In case the central meridian is an optional parameter and it is being omitted, then the center of the longitude range given by the R option is used. The default standard parallel is the equator. The ellipsoid used in the map projections is user-denable by editing the .gmtdefaults4 le in your home directory. 73 commonly used ellipsoids and spheroids are currently supported, and users may also specify their own custum ellipsoid parameters [Default is WGS-84]. Several GMT parameters can affect the projection: ELLIPSOID, INTERPOLANT, MAP_SCALE_FACTOR, and MEASURE_UNIT; see the gmtdefaults man page for details. Choose one of the following projections (The E or C after projection names stands for Equal-Area and Conformal, respectively): CYLINDRICAL PROJECTIONS: Jclon0/lat0/scale or JClon0/lat0/width (Cassini). Give projection center lon0/lat0 and scale (1:xxxx or UNIT/degree). Jcyl_stere/[lon0/[lat0/]]scale or JCyl_stere/[lon0/[lat0/]]width (Cylindrical Stereographic). Give central meridian lon0 (optional), standard parallel lat0 (optional), and scale along parallel (1:xxxx or UNIT/degree). The standard parallel is typically one of these (but can be any value): 66.159467 - Millers modied Gall 55 - Kamenetskiys First 45 - Galls Stereographic 30 - Bolshoi Sovietskii Atlas Mira or Kamenetskiys Second 0 - Brauns Cylindrical Jj[lon0/]scale or JJ[lon0/]width (Miller Cylindrical Projection). Give the central meridian lon0 (optional) and scale (1:xxxx or UNIT/degree). Jm[lon0/[lat0/]]scale or JM[lon0/[lat0/]]width Give central meridian lon0 (optional), standard parallel lat0 (optional), and scale along parallel (1:xxxx or UNIT/degree). Joparameters (Oblique Mercator [C]). Specify one of:
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSBASEMAP(1)
PSBASEMAP(1)
Jo[a]lon0/lat0/azimuth/scale or JO[a]lon0/lat0/azimuth/width Set projection center lon0/lat0, azimuth of oblique equator, and scale. Jo[b]lon0/lat0/lon1/lat1/scale or JO[b]lon0/lat0/lon1/lat1/scale Set projection center lon0/lat0, another point on the oblique equator lon1/lat1, and scale. Joclon0/lat0/lonp/latp/scale or JOclon0/lat0/lonp/latp/scale Set projection center lon0/lat0, pole of oblique projection lonp/latp, and scale. Give scale along oblique equator (1:xxxx or UNIT/degree). Jq[lon0/[lat0/]]scale or JQ[lon0/[lat0/]]width (Cylindrical Equidistant). Give the central meridian lon0 (optional), standard parallel lat0 (optional), and scale (1:xxxx or UNIT/degree). The standard parallel is typically one of these (but can be any value): 61.7 - Grafarend and Niermann, minimum linear distortion 50.5 - Ronald Miller Equirectangular 43.5 - Ronald Miller, minimum continental distortion 42 - Grafarend and Niermann 37.5 - Ronald Miller, minimum overall distortion 0 - Plate Carree, Simple Cylindrical, Plain/Plane Chart Jtlon0/[lat0/]scale or JTlon0/[lat0/]width Give the central meridian lon0, central parallel lat0 (optional), and scale (1:xxxx or UNIT/degree). Juzone/scale or JUzone/width (UTM - Universal Transverse Mercator [C]). Give the UTM zone (A,B,1-60[C-X],Y,Z)) and scale (1:xxxx or UNIT/degree). Zones: If C-X not given, prepend - or + to enforce southern or northern hemisphere conventions [northern if south > 0]. Jy[lon0/[lat0/]]scale or JY[lon0/[lat0/]]width (Cylindrical Equal-Area [E]). Give the central meridian lon0 (optional), standard parallel lat0 (optional), and scale (1:xxxx or UNIT/degree). The standard parallel is typically one of these (but can be any value): 50 - Balthasart 45 - Gall-Peters 37.0666 - Caster 37.4 - Trystan Edwards 37.5 - Hobo-Dyer 30 - Behrman 0 - Lambert (default) CONIC PROJECTIONS: Jblon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale or JBlon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/width (Albers [E]). Give projection center lon0/lat0, two standard parallels lat1/lat2, and scale (1:xxxx or UNIT/degree). Jdlon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale or JDlon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/width (Conic Equidistant) Give projection center lon0/lat0, two standard parallels lat1/lat2, and scale (1:xxxx or UNIT/degree). Jllon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale or JLlon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/width (Lambert [C]) Give origin lon0/lat0, two standard parallels lat1/lat2, and scale along these (1:xxxx or UNIT/degree). Jpoly/[lon0/[lat0/]]scale or JPoly/[lon0/[lat0/]]width ((American) Polyconic). Give the central meridian lon0 (optional), reference parallel lat0 (optional, default = equator), and scale along central meridian (1:xxxx or UNIT/degree).
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSBASEMAP(1)
PSBASEMAP(1)
AZIMUTHAL PROJECTIONS: Except for polar aspects, Rw/e/s/n will be reset to Rg. Use R<...>r for smaller regions. Jalon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale or JAlon0/lat0[/horizon]/width (Lambert [E]). lon0/lat0 species the projection center. horizon species the max distance from projection center (in degrees, <= 180, default 90). Give scale as 1:xxxx or radius/lat, where radius is distance in UNIT from origin to the oblique latitude lat. Jelon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale or JElon0/lat0[/horizon]/width (Azimuthal Equidistant). lon0/lat0 species the projection center. horizon species the max distance from projection center (in degrees, <= 180, default 180). Give scale as 1:xxxx or radius/lat, where radius is distance in UNIT from origin to the oblique latitude lat. Jflon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale or JFlon0/lat0[/horizon]/width (Gnomonic). lon0/lat0 species the projection center. horizon species the max distance from projection center (in degrees, < 90, default 60). Give scale as 1:xxxx or radius/lat, where radius is distance in UNIT from origin to the oblique latitude lat. Jglon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale or JGlon0/lat0[/horizon]/width (Orthographic). lon0/lat0 species the projection center. horizon species the max distance from projection center (in degrees, <= 90, default 90). Give scale as 1:xxxx or radius/lat, where radius is distance in UNIT from origin to the oblique latitude lat. Jglon0/lat0/altitude/azimuth/tilt/twist/Width/Height/scale or JGlon0/lat0/altitude/azimuth/tilt/twist/Width/Height/width (General Perspective). lon0/lat0 species the projection center. altitude is the height (in km) of the viewpoint above local sea level. If altitude is less than 10, then it is the distance from the center of the earth to the viewpoint in earth radii. If altitude has a sufx r then it is the radius from the center of the earth in kilometers. azimuth is measured to the east of north of view. tilt is the upward tilt of the plane of projection. If tilt is negative, then the viewpoint is centered on the horizon. Further, specify the clockwise twist, Width, and Height of the viewpoint in degrees. Give scale as 1:xxxx or radius/lat, where radius is distance in UNIT from origin to the oblique latitude lat. Jslon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale or JSlon0/lat0[/horizon]/width (General Stereographic [C]). lon0/lat0 species the projection center. horizon species the max distance from projection center (in degrees, < 180, default 90). Give scale as 1:xxxx (true at pole) or lat0/1:xxxx (true at standard parallel lat0) or radius/lat (radius in UNIT from origin to the oblique latitude lat). Note if 1:xxxx is used then to specify horizon you must also specify the lat0 as +-90 to avoid ambiguity. MISCELLANEOUS PROJECTIONS: Jh[lon0/]scale or JH[lon0/]width (Hammer [E]). Give the central meridian lon0 (optional) and scale along equator (1:xxxx or UNIT/degree). Ji[lon0/]scale or JI[lon0/]width (Sinusoidal [E]). Give the central meridian lon0 (optional) and scale along equator (1:xxxx or UNIT/degree). Jkf[lon0/]scale or JKf[lon0/]width (Eckert IV) [E]). Give the central meridian lon0 (optional) and scale along equator (1:xxxx or UNIT/degree). Jk[s][lon0/]scale or JK[s][lon0/]width (Eckert VI) [E]). Give the central meridian lon0 (optional) and scale along equator (1:xxxx or UNIT/degree).
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSBASEMAP(1)
PSBASEMAP(1)
Jn[lon0/]scale or JN[lon0/]width (Robinson). Give the central meridian lon0 (optional) and scale along equator (1:xxxx or UNIT/degree). Jr[lon0/]scale JR[lon0/]width (Winkel Tripel). Give the central meridian lon0 (optional) and scale along equator (1:xxxx or UNIT/degree). Jv[lon0/]scale or JV[lon0/]width (Van der Grinten). Give the central meridian lon0 (optional) and scale along equator (1:xxxx or UNIT/degree). Jw[lon0/]scale or JW[lon0/]width (Mollweide [E]). Give the central meridian lon0 (optional) and scale along equator (1:xxxx or UNIT/degree). NON-GEOGRAPHICAL PROJECTIONS: Jp[a]scale[/origin][r|z] or JP[a]width[/origin][r|z] (Polar coordinates (theta,r)) Optionally insert a after Jp [ or JP] for azimuths CW from North instead of directions CCW from East [Default]. Optionally append /origin in degrees to indicate an angular offset [0]). Finally, append r if r is elevations in degrees (requires s >= 0 and n <= 90) or z if you want to annotate depth rather than radius [Default]. Give scale in UNIT/r-unit. Jxx-scale[/y-scale] or JXwidth[/height] (Linear, log, and power scaling) Give x-scale (1:xxxx or UNIT/x-unit) and/or y-scale (1:xxxx or UNIT/y-unit); or specify width and/or height in UNIT. y-scale=x-scale if not specied separately and using 1:xxxx implies that x-unit and y-unit are in meters. Use negative scale(s) to reverse the direction of an axis (e.g., to have y be positive down). Set height or width to 0 to have it recomputed based on the implied scale of the other axis. Optionally, append to x-scale, y-scale, width or height one of the following: d l t T Data are geographical coordinates (in degrees). Take log10 of values before scaling. Input coordinates are time relative to TIME_EPOCH. Input coordinates are absolute time.
ppower Raise values to power before scaling.
Default axis lengths (see gmtdefaults) can be invoked using JXh (for landscape); JXv (for portrait) will swap the x- and y-axis lengths. The default unit for this installation is either cm or inch, as dened in the le share/gmt.conf. However, you may change this by editing your .gmtdefaults4 le(s). R xmin, xmax, ymin, and ymax specify the Region of interest. For geographic regions, these limits correspond to west, east, south, and north and you may specify them in decimal degrees or in [+-]dd:mm[:ss.xxx][W|E|S|N] format. Append r if lower left and upper right map coordinates are given instead of w/e/s/n. The two shorthands Rg and Rd stand for global domain (0/360 and -180/+180 in longitude respectively, with -90/+90 in latitude). Alternatively, specify the name of an existing grid le and the R settings (and grid spacing, if applicable) are copied from the grid. For calendar time coordinates you may either give (a) relative time (relative to the selected TIME_EPOCH and in the selected TIME_UNIT; append t to JX|x), or (b) absolute time of the form [date]T[clock] (append T to JX|x). At least one of date and clock must be present; the T is always required. The date string must be of the form [-]yyyy[-mm[-dd]] (Gregorian calendar) or yyyy[-Www[-d]] (ISO week calendar), while the clock string must be of the form hh:mm:ss[.xxx]. The use of delimiters and their type and positions must be exactly as indicated (however, input, output and plot formats are customizable; see gmtdefaults).
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSBASEMAP(1)
PSBASEMAP(1)
OPTIONS
No space between the option ag and the associated arguments. E Sets the viewpoints azimuth and elevation (for perspective view) [180/90]. For frames used for animation, you may want to append + to x the center of your data domain (or specify a particular world coordinate point with +wlon0/lat[/z]) which will project to the center of your page size (or specify the coordinates of the projected view point with +vx0/y0). Select ll shade, color or pattern for the inside of the basemap [Default is no ll color]. (See SPECIFYING FILL below). Sets the vertical scaling (for 3-D maps). Same syntax as Jx. More PostScript code will be appended later [Default terminates the plot system]. Draws a simple map scale centered on lon0/lat0. Use Lx to specify x/y position instead. Scale is calculated at latitude slat (optionally supply longitude slon for oblique projections [Default is central meridian]), length is in km [miles if m is appended; nautical miles if n is appended]. Use Lf to get a "fancy" scale [Default is plain]. Append +l to select the default label which equals the distance unit (km, miles, nautical miles) and is justied on top of the scale [t]. Change this by giving your own label (append +llabel). Change label justication with +jjustication (choose among l(eft), r(ight), t(op), and b(ottom)). Apply +u to append the unit to all distance annotations along the scale. If you want to place a rectangle behind the scale, specify suitable +ppen and/or +fll parameters. (See SPECIFYING PENS and SPECIFYING FILL below). Selects Overlay plot mode [Default initializes a new plot system]. Selects Portrait plotting mode [Default is Landscape, see gmtdefaults to change this]. Draws a simple map directional rose centered on lon0/lat0. Use Tx to specify x/y position instead. The size is the diameter of the rose, and optional label information can be specied to override the default values of W, E, S, and N (Give :: to suppress all labels). The default [plain] map rose only labels north. Use Tf to get a "fancy" rose, and specify in info what you want drawn. The default [1] draws the two principal E-W, N-S orientations, 2 adds the two intermediate NW-SE and NE-SW orientations, while 3 adds the eight minor orientations WNW-ESE, NNWSSE, NNE-SSW, and ENE-WSW. For a magnetic compass rose, specify Tm. If given, info must be the two parameters dec/dlabel, where dec is the magnetic declination and dlabel is a label for the magnetic compass needle (specify - to format a label from dec). Then, both directions to geographic and magnetic north are plotted [Default is geographic only]. If the north label is * then a north star is plotted instead of the north label. Annotation and two levels of tick intervals for geographic and magnetic directions are 10/5/1 and 30/5/1 degrees, respectively; override these settings by appending +gints[/mints]. Color and pen attributes are taken from COLOR_BACKGROUND and TICK_PEN, respectively, while label fonts and sizes follow the usual annotation, label, and header font settings. Draw Unix System time stamp on plot. By adding just/dx/dy/, the user may specify the justication of the stamp and where the stamp should fall on the page relative to lower left corner of the plot. For example, BL/0/0 will align the lower left corner of the time stamp with the lower left corner of the plot. Optionally, append a label, or c (which will plot the command string.). The GMT parameters UNIX_TIME, UNIX_TIME_POS, and UNIX_TIME_FORMAT can affect the appearance; see the gmtdefaults man page for details. The time string will be in the locale set by the environment variable TZ (generally local time). Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"].
G Jz K L
O P T
X Y Shift plot origin relative to the current origin by (x-shift,y-shift) and optionally append the length unit (c, i, m, p). You can prepend a to shift the origin back to the original position after plotting, or prepend r [Default] to reset the current origin to the new location. If O is used then the default (x-shift,y-shift) is (0,0), otherwise it is (r1i, r1i) or (r2.5c, r2.5c). Alternatively, give c to align the center coordinate (x or y) of the plot with the center of the page based on current page size.
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSBASEMAP(1)
PSBASEMAP(1)
Z c
For 3-D projections: Sets the z-level of the basemap [Default is at the bottom end of the z-axis]. Species the number of plot copies. [Default is 1].
EXAMPLES
The following section illustrates the use of the options by giving some examples for the available map projections. Note how scales may be given in several different ways depending on the projection. Also note the use of upper case letters to specify map width instead of map scale.
NON-GEOGRAPHICAL PROJECTIONS
Linear x-y plot To make a linear x/y frame with all axes, but with only left and bottom axes annotated, using xscale = yscale = 1.0, ticking every 1 unit and annotating every 2, and using xlabel = "Distance" and ylabel = "No of samples", use psbasemap R0/9/0/5 Jx1 Bf1a2:Distance:/:"No of samples":WeSn > linear.ps Log-log plot To make a log-log frame with only the left and bottom axes, where the x-axis is 25 cm and annotated every 1-2-5 and the y-axis is 15 cm and annotated every power of 10 but has tickmarks every 0.1, run psbasemap R1/10000/1e20/1e25 JX25cl/15cl B2:Wavelength:/a1pf3:Power:WS > loglog.ps Power axes To design an axis system to be used for a depthsqrt(age) plot with depth positive down, ticked and annotated every 500m, and ages annotated at 1 my, 4 my, 9 my etc, use psbasemap R0/100/0/5000 Jx1p0.5/-0.001 B1p:"Crustal age":/500:Depth: > power.ps Polar (theta,r) plot For a base map for use with polar coordinates, where the radius from 0 to 1000 should correspond to 3 inch and with gridlines and ticks every 30 degrees and 100 units, use psbasemap R0/360/0/1000 JP6i B30p/100 > polar.ps
CYLINDRICAL MAP PROJECTIONS

Cassini A 10-cm-wide basemap using the Cassini projection may be obtained by
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSBASEMAP(1)
PSBASEMAP(1)
psbasemap R20/50/20/35 JC35/28/10c P OPR(B)5g5:.Cassini: > cassini.ps Mercator [conformal] A Mercator map with scale 0.025 inch/degree along equator, and showing the length of 5000 km along the equator (centered on 1/1 inch), may be plotted as psbasemap R90/180/-50/50 Jm0.025i B30g30:.Mercator: Lx1i/1i/0/5000 > mercator.ps Miller A global Miller cylindrical map with scale 1:200,000,000 may be plotted as psbasemap Rg Jj180/1:200000000 B30g30:.Miller: > miller.ps Oblique Mercator [conformal] To create a page-size global oblique Mercator basemap for a pole at (90,30) with gridlines every 30 degrees, run psbasemap R0/360/-70/70 Joc0/0/90/30/0.064cd B30g30:."Oblique Mercator": > oblmerc.ps Transverse Mercator [conformal] A regular Transverse Mercator basemap for some region may look like psbasemap R69:30/71:45/-17/-15:15 Jt70/1:1000000 B15m:."Survey area": P > transmerc.ps Equidistant Cylindrical Projection This projection only needs the central meridian and scale. A 25 cm wide global basemap centered on the 130E meridian is made by psbasemap R-50/310/-90/90 JQ130/25c B30g30:."Equidistant Cylindrical": > cyl_eqdist.ps Universal Transverse Mercator [conformal] To use this projection you must know the UTM zone number, which denes the central meridian. A UTM basemap for Indo-China can be plotted as psbasemap R95/5/108/20r Ju46/1:10000000 B3g3:.UTM: > utm.ps Cylindrical Equal-Area First select which of the cylindrical equal-area projections you want by deciding on the standard parallel. Here we will use 45 degrees which gives the Gall-Peters projection. A 9 inch wide global basemap centered on the Pacic is made by psbasemap Rg JY180/45/9i B30g30:.Gall-Peters: > gall-peters.ps
CONIC MAP PROJECTIONS

Albers [equal-area] A basemap for middle Europe may be created by psbasemap R0/90/25/55 Jb45/20/32/45/0.25c B10g10:."Albers Equal-area": > albers.ps Lambert [conformal] Another basemap for middle Europe may be created by psbasemap R0/90/25/55 Jl45/20/32/45/0.1i B10g10:."Lambert Conformal Conic": > lambertc.ps Equidistant Yet another basemap of width 6 inch for middle Europe may be created by psbasemap R0/90/25/55 JD45/20/32/45/6i B10g10:."Equidistant conic": > econic.ps
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSBASEMAP(1)
PSBASEMAP(1)
Polyconic A basemap for north America may be created by psbasemap R-180/-20/0/90 JPoly/4i B30g10/10g10:."Polyconic": > polyconic.ps
AZIMUTHAL MAP PROJECTIONS

Lambert [equal-area] A 15-cm-wide global view of the world from the vantage point -80/-30 will give the following basemap: psbasemap Rg JA-80/-30/15c B30g30/15g15:."Lambert Azimuthal": > lamberta.ps Follow the instructions for stereographic projection if you want to impose rectangular boundaries on the azimuthal equal-area map but substitute Ja for Js. Equidistant A 15-cm-wide global map in which distances from the center (here 125/10) to any point is true can be obtained by: psbasemap Rg JE125/10/15c B30g30/15g15:.Equidistant: > equi.ps Gnomonic A view of the world from the vantage point -100/40 out to a horizon of 60 degrees from the center can be made using the Gnomonic projection: psbasemap Rg JF-100/40/60/6i B30g30/15g15:.Gnomonic: > gnomonic.ps Orthographic A global perspective (from innite distance) view of the world from the vantage point 125/10 will give the following 6-inch-wide basemap: psbasemap Rg JG125/10/6i B30g30/15g15:.Orthographic: > ortho.ps General Perspective The JG option can be used in a more generalized form, specifying altitude above the surface, width and height of the view point, and twist and tilt. A view from 160 km above -74/41.5 with a tilt of 55 and azimuth of 210 degrees, and limiting the viewpoint to 30 degrees width and height will product a 6-inchwide basemap: psbasemap Rg JG-74/41.5/160/210/55/30/30/6i B5g1/5g1:."General Perspective": > genper.ps Stereographic [conformal] To make a polar stereographic projection basemap with radius = 12 cm to 60 degree latitude, with plot title "Salinity measurements", using 5 degrees annotation/tick interval and 1 degree gridlines, run psbasemap R-45/45/-90/-60 Js0/-90/12c/-60 B5g5:."Salinity measurements": > stereo1.ps To make a 12-cm-wide stereographic basemap for Australia from an arbitrary view point (not the poles), and use a rectangular boundary, we must give the pole for the new projection and use the R option to indicate the lower left and upper right corners (in lon/lat) that will dene our rectangle. We choose a pole at 130/-30 and use 100/-45 and 160/-5 as our corners. The command becomes psbasemap R100/-45/160/-5r JS130/-30/12c B30g30/15g15:."General Stereographic View": > stereo2.ps
MISCELLANEOUS MAP PROJECTIONS

Hammer [equal-area] The Hammer projection is mostly used for global maps and thus the spherical form is used. To get a world map centered on Greenwich at a scale of 1:200000000, use
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSBASEMAP(1)
PSBASEMAP(1)
psbasemap Rd Jh0/1:200000000 B30g30/15g15:.Hammer: > hammer.ps Sinusoidal [equal-area] To make a sinusoidal world map centered on Greenwich, with a scale along the equator of 0.02 inch/degree, use psbasemap Rd Ji0/0.02i B30g30/15g15:.Sinusoidal: > sinus1.ps To make an interrupted sinusoidal world map with breaks at 160W, 20W, and 60E, with a scale along the equator of 0.02 inch/degree, run the following sequence of commands: psbasemap R-160/-20/-90/90 Ji-90/0.02i B30g30/15g15Wesn K > sinus_i.ps psbasemap R-20/60/-90/90 Ji20/0.02i B30g30/15g15wesn O K X2.8i >> sinus_i.ps psbasemap R60/200/-90/90 Ji130/0.02i B30g30/15g15wEsn O X1.6i >> sinus_i.ps Eckert IV [equal-area] Pseudo-cylindrical projection typically used for global maps only. Set the central longitude and scale, e.g., psbasemap Rg Jkf180/0.064c B30g30/15g15:."Eckert IV": > eckert4.ps Eckert VI [equal-area] Another pseudo-cylindrical projection typically used for global maps only. Set the central longitude and scale, e.g., psbasemap Rg Jks180/0.064c B30g30/15g15:."Eckert VI": > eckert6.ps Robinson Projection designed to make global maps "look right". Set the central longitude and width, e.g., psbasemap Rd JN0/8i B30g30/15g15:.Robinson: > robinson.ps Winkel Tripel Yet another projection typically used for global maps only. You can set the central longitude, e.g., psbasemap R90/450/-90/90 JR270/25c B30g30/15g15:."Winkel Tripel": > winkel.ps Mollweide [equal-area] The Mollweide projection is also mostly used for global maps and thus the spherical form is used. To get a 25-cm-wide world map centered on the Dateline: psbasemap Rg JW180/25c B30g30/15g15:.Mollweide: > mollweide.ps Van der Grinten The Van der Grinten projection is also mostly used for global maps and thus the spherical form is used. To get a 7-inch-wide world map centered on the Dateline: psbasemap Rg JV180/7i B30g30/15g15:."Van der Grinten": > grinten.ps
RESTRICTIONS
For some projections, a spherical earth is implicitly assumed. A warning will notify the user if V is set. Also note that plot titles are not plotted if E is given.
BUGS
The B option is somewhat complicated to explain and comprehend. However, it is fairly simple for most applications (see examples).
SEE ALSO
gmtcolors(5), gmtdefaults(1), GMT (1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
10
PSBBOX.SH(1)
PSBBOX.SH(1)
NAME
psbbox.sh Replace BoundingBox line in PostScript les by "real" BoundingBox
SYNOPSIS
psbbox.sh le ...
DESCRIPTION
This program replaces the BoundingBox line in all PostScript les specied on the command line by a BoundingBox determined by the bbox modules of Ghostscript.
KNOWN LIMITATIONS
Works only for single-page PostScript les. Other limitations are the limitations of the Ghostscript bbox module. EPS Ghostscript 7.07 occasionally produces no BoundingBox at all. Try using AFPL Ghostscript 8.00 or later instead.
OBSOLETE
With the production of ps2raster, this script became obsolete.
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), ps2raster(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSCLIP(1)
PSCLIP(1)
NAME
psclip To set up polygonal clip paths
SYNOPSIS
psclip xyles Jparameters Rwest/east/south/north[r] [ B[p|s]parameters ] [ Eazim/elev ] [ K ] [ N ] [ O ] [ P ] [ T ] [ U[just/dx/dy/][c|label] ] [ V ] [ X[a|c|r][x-shift[u]] ] [ Y[a|c|r][y-shift[u]] ] [ Zzlevel ] [ ccopies] [ :[i|o] ] [ bi[s|S|d|D[ncol]|c[var1/...]] ] [ fcolinfo ] [ m[ag] ] psclip C [ K ] [ O ]
DESCRIPTION
psclip reads (x,y) le(s) [or standard input] and draws polygons that are activated as clipping paths. Several les may be read to create complex paths consisting of several non-connecting segments. Only marks that are subsequently drawn inside the clipping path will be shown. To determine what is inside or outside the clipping path, psclip uses the even-odd rule. When a ray drawn from any point, regardless of direction, crosses the clipping path segments an odd number of times, the point is inside the clipping path. If the number is even, the point is outside. The N option, reverses the sense of what is the inside and outside of the paths by plotting a clipping path along the map boundary. After subsequent plotting, which will be clipped against these paths, the clipping may be deactivated by running psclip a second time with the C option only. xyles C J ASCII [or binary, see b] le(s) with (x,y) values for clip polygons. If no les are given, the standard input is read. Mark end of existing clip path. No input le or projection information are needed. However, you must supply Xa and Ya settings if you are using absolute positioning. Selects the map projection. Scale is UNIT/degree, 1:xxxxx, or width in UNIT (upper case modier). UNIT is cm, inch, or m, depending on the MEASURE_UNIT setting in .gmtdefaults4, but this can be overridden on the command line by appending c, i, or m to the scale/width value. When central meridian is optional, default is center of longitude range on R option. Default standard parallel is the equator. For map height, max dimension, or min dimension, append h, +, or to the width, respectively. More details can be found in the psbasemap man pages. CYLINDRICAL PROJECTIONS: Jclon0/lat0/scale (Cassini) Jcyl_stere/[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Stereographic) Jj[lon0/]scale (Miller) Jm[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Mercator) Jmlon0/lat0/scale (Mercator - Give meridian and standard parallel) Jo[a]lon0/lat0/azimuth/scale (Oblique Mercator - point and azimuth) Jo[b]lon0/lat0/lon1/lat1/scale (Oblique Mercator - two points) Joclon0/lat0/lonp/latp/scale (Oblique Mercator - point and pole) Jq[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Equidistant) Jtlon0/[lat0/]scale (TM - Transverse Mercator) Juzone/scale (UTM - Universal Transverse Mercator) Jy[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Equal-Area) CONIC PROJECTIONS: Jblon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Albers) Jdlon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Conic Equidistant) Jllon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Lambert Conic Conformal) Jpoly/[lon0/[lat0/]]scale ((American) Polyconic)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSCLIP(1)
PSCLIP(1)
AZIMUTHAL PROJECTIONS: Jalon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Lambert Azimuthal Equal-Area) Jelon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Azimuthal Equidistant) Jflon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Gnomonic) Jglon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Orthographic) Jglon0/lat0/altitude/azimuth/tilt/twist/Width/Height/scale (General Perspective). Jslon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (General Stereographic) MISCELLANEOUS PROJECTIONS: Jh[lon0/]scale (Hammer) Ji[lon0/]scale (Sinusoidal) Jkf[lon0/]scale (Eckert IV) Jk[s][lon0/]scale (Eckert VI) Jn[lon0/]scale (Robinson) Jr[lon0/]scale (Winkel Tripel) Jv[lon0/]scale (Van der Grinten) Jw[lon0/]scale (Mollweide) NON-GEOGRAPHICAL PROJECTIONS: Jp[a]scale[/origin][r|z] (Polar coordinates (theta,r)) Jxx-scale[d|l|ppow|t|T][/y-scale[d|l|ppow|t|T]] (Linear, log, and power scaling) R xmin, xmax, ymin, and ymax specify the Region of interest. For geographic regions, these limits correspond to west, east, south, and north and you may specify them in decimal degrees or in [+-]dd:mm[:ss.xxx][W|E|S|N] format. Append r if lower left and upper right map coordinates are given instead of w/e/s/n. The two shorthands Rg and Rd stand for global domain (0/360 and -180/+180 in longitude respectively, with -90/+90 in latitude). Alternatively, specify the name of an existing grid le and the R settings (and grid spacing, if applicable) are copied from the grid. For calendar time coordinates you may either give (a) relative time (relative to the selected TIME_EPOCH and in the selected TIME_UNIT; append t to JX|x), or (b) absolute time of the form [date]T[clock] (append T to JX|x). At least one of date and clock must be present; the T is always required. The date string must be of the form [-]yyyy[-mm[-dd]] (Gregorian calendar) or yyyy[-Www[-d]] (ISO week calendar), while the clock string must be of the form hh:mm:ss[.xxx]. The use of delimiters and their type and positions must be exactly as indicated (however, input, output and plot formats are customizable; see gmtdefaults).
OPTIONS
No space between the option ag and the associated arguments. B E H Sets map boundary annotation and tickmark intervals; see the psbasemap man page for all the details. Sets the viewpoints azimuth and elevation [180/90]. Input le(s) has header record(s). If used, the default number of header records is N_HEADER_RECS. Use Hi if only input data should have header records [Default will write out header records if the input data have them]. Blank lines and lines starting with # are always skipped. More PostScript code will be appended later [Default terminates the plot system]. Invert the sense of what is inside and outside. For example, when using a single path, this means that only points outside that path will be shown. Cannot be used together with B.
K N
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSCLIP(1)
PSCLIP(1)
O P T
Selects Overlay plot mode [Default initializes a new plot system]. Selects Portrait plotting mode [Default is Landscape, see gmtdefaults to change this]. Rather than read any input les, simply turn on clipping for the current map region. Basically, T is a convenient way to run psclip with the arguments N /dev/null (or, under Windows, N NUL). Cannot be used together with B. Draw Unix System time stamp on plot. By adding just/dx/dy/, the user may specify the justication of the stamp and where the stamp should fall on the page relative to lower left corner of the plot. For example, BL/0/0 will align the lower left corner of the time stamp with the lower left corner of the plot. Optionally, append a label, or c (which will plot the command string.). The GMT parameters UNIX_TIME, UNIX_TIME_POS, and UNIX_TIME_FORMAT can affect the appearance; see the gmtdefaults man page for details. The time string will be in the locale set by the environment variable TZ (generally local time). Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"].
X Y Shift plot origin relative to the current origin by (x-shift,y-shift) and optionally append the length unit (c, i, m, p). You can prepend a to shift the origin back to the original position after plotting, or prepend r [Default] to reset the current origin to the new location. If O is used then the default (x-shift,y-shift) is (0,0), otherwise it is (r1i, r1i) or (r2.5c, r2.5c). Alternatively, give c to align the center coordinate (x or y) of the plot with the center of the page based on current page size. Z : bi For 3-D projections: Sets the z-level of the polygons [Default is the bottom of the z-axis]. Toggles between (longitude,latitude) and (latitude,longitude) input and/or output. [Default is (longitude,latitude)]. Append i to select input only or o to select output only. [Default affects both]. Selects binary input. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of columns in your binary input le if it exceeds the columns needed by the program. Or append c if the input le is netCDF. Optionally, append var1/var2/... to specify the variables to be read. [Default is 2 input columns]. Species the number of plot copies. [Default is 1]. Special formatting of input and/or output columns (time or geographical data). Specify i or o to make this apply only to input or output [Default applies to both]. Give one or more columns (or column ranges) separated by commas. Append T (absolute calendar time), t (relative time in chosen TIME_UNIT since TIME_EPOCH), x (longitude), y (latitude), or f (oating point) to each column or column range item. Shorthand f[i|o]g means f[i|o]0x,1y (geographic coordinates). Multiple segment le(s). Segments are separated by a special record. For ASCII les the rst character must be ag [Default is >]. For binary les all elds must be NaN and b must set the number of output columns explicitly. By default the m setting applies to both input and output. Use mi and mo to give separate settings to input and output.
c f
EXAMPLES
To make an overlay PostScript le that will set up a complex clip area to which subsequent plotting will be conned, run: psclip my_region.xy R0/40/0/40 Jm0.3i O K > clip_mask_on.ps To deactivate the clipping in an existing plotle, run: psclip C O >> complex_plot.ps
BUGS
psclip cannot handle polygons that contain the south or north pole. For such polygons, you should split them into two and make each explicitly contain the polar point. The two clip polygons will combine to give the desired effect.
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSCLIP(1)
PSCLIP(1)
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), grdmask(1), psbasemap(1), psmask(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSCOAST(1)
PSCOAST(1)
NAME
pscoast To plot land-masses, water-masses, coastlines, borders, and rivers
SYNOPSIS
pscoast Jparameters Rwest/east/south/north[r] [ Amin_area[/min_level/max_level][+r|l][ppercent] ] [ B[p|s]parameters ] [ C[l|r/]ll ] [ Dresolution[+] ] [ Eazim/elev[+wlon/lat[/z]][+vx0/y0] ] [ Gll|c ] [ Iriver[/pen] ] [ Jz|Zparameters ] [ K ] [ L[f][x]lon0/lat0[/slon]/slat/length[m|n|k][+llabel][+jjust][+ppen][+fll][+u] ] ] [ O ] [ Nborder[/pen] ] [ O ] [ P ] [ Q ] [ Sll|c ] [ T[f|m][x]lon0/lat0/size[/info][:w,e,s,n:][+gint[/mint]] ] [ U[just/dx/dy/][c|label] ] [ V ] [ W[level/]pen ] [ X[a|c|r][x-shift[u]] ] [ Y[a|c|r][y-shift[u]] ] [ Zzlevel ] [ ccopies ] [ bo[s|S|d|D[ncol]|c[var1/...]] ] [ m[ag] ]
DESCRIPTION
pscoast plots grayshaded, colored, or textured land-masses [or water-masses] on maps and [optionally] draws coastlines, rivers, and political boundaries. Alternatively, it can (1) issue clip paths that will contain all land or all water areas, or (2) dump the data to an ASCII table. The data les come in 5 different resolutions: (f)ull, (h)igh, (i)ntermediate, (l)ow, and (c)rude. The full resolution les amount to more than 55 Mb of data and provide great detail; for maps of larger geographical extent it is more economical to use one of the other resolutions. If the user selects to paint the land-areas and does not specify ll of water-areas then the latter will be transparent (i.e., earlier graphics drawn in those areas will not be overwritten). Likewise, if the water-areas are painted and no land ll is set then the land-areas will be transparent. A map projection must be supplied. The PostScript code is written to standard output. J Selects the map projection. Scale is UNIT/degree, 1:xxxxx, or width in UNIT (upper case modier). UNIT is cm, inch, or m, depending on the MEASURE_UNIT setting in .gmtdefaults4, but this can be overridden on the command line by appending c, i, or m to the scale/width value. When central meridian is optional, default is center of longitude range on R option. Default standard parallel is the equator. For map height, max dimension, or min dimension, append h, +, or to the width, respectively. More details can be found in the psbasemap man pages. CYLINDRICAL PROJECTIONS: Jclon0/lat0/scale (Cassini) Jcyl_stere/[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Stereographic) Jj[lon0/]scale (Miller) Jm[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Mercator) Jmlon0/lat0/scale (Mercator - Give meridian and standard parallel) Jo[a]lon0/lat0/azimuth/scale (Oblique Mercator - point and azimuth) Jo[b]lon0/lat0/lon1/lat1/scale (Oblique Mercator - two points) Joclon0/lat0/lonp/latp/scale (Oblique Mercator - point and pole) Jq[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Equidistant) Jtlon0/[lat0/]scale (TM - Transverse Mercator) Juzone/scale (UTM - Universal Transverse Mercator) Jy[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Equal-Area) CONIC PROJECTIONS: Jblon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Albers) Jdlon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Conic Equidistant) Jllon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Lambert Conic Conformal) Jpoly/[lon0/[lat0/]]scale ((American) Polyconic) AZIMUTHAL PROJECTIONS: Jalon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Lambert Azimuthal Equal-Area)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSCOAST(1)
PSCOAST(1)
Jelon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Azimuthal Equidistant) Jflon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Gnomonic) Jglon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Orthographic) Jglon0/lat0/altitude/azimuth/tilt/twist/Width/Height/scale (General Perspective). Jslon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (General Stereographic) MISCELLANEOUS PROJECTIONS: Jh[lon0/]scale (Hammer) Ji[lon0/]scale (Sinusoidal) Jkf[lon0/]scale (Eckert IV) Jk[s][lon0/]scale (Eckert VI) Jn[lon0/]scale (Robinson) Jr[lon0/]scale (Winkel Tripel) Jv[lon0/]scale (Van der Grinten) Jw[lon0/]scale (Mollweide) NON-GEOGRAPHICAL PROJECTIONS: Jp[a]scale[/origin][r|z] (Polar coordinates (theta,r)) Jxx-scale[d|l|ppow|t|T][/y-scale[d|l|ppow|t|T]] (Linear, log, and power scaling) R west, east, south, and north specify the Region of interest, and you may specify them in decimal degrees or in [+-]dd:mm[:ss.xxx][W|E|S|N] format. Append r if lower left and upper right map coordinates are given instead of w/e/s/n. The two shorthands Rg and Rd stand for global domain (0/360 and -180/+180 in longitude respectively, with -90/+90 in latitude). Alternatively, specify the name of an existing grid le and the R settings (and grid spacing, if applicable) are copied from the grid.
OPTIONS
No space between the option ag and the associated arguments. A Features with an area smaller than min_area in km2 or of hierarchical level that is lower than min_level or higher than max_level will not be plotted [Default is 0/0/4 (all features)]. Level 2 (lakes) contains regular lakes and wide river bodies which we normally include as lakes; append +r to just get river-lakes or +l to just get regular lakes (requires GSHHS 2.0.1 or higher). Finally, append +ppercent to exclude polygons whose percentage area of the corresponding full-resolution feature is less than percent (requires GSHHS 2.0 or higher). See GSHHS INFORMATION below for more details. Sets map boundary annotation and tickmark intervals; see the psbasemap man page for all the details. Set the shade, color, or pattern for lakes and river-lakes [Default is the ll chosen for "wet" areas (S)]. Optionally, specify separate lls by prepending l/ for lakes and r/ for river-lakes, repeating the C option as needed. (See SPECIFYING FILL below). Selects the resolution of the data set to use ((f)ull, (h)igh, (i)ntermediate, (l)ow, and (c)rude). The resolution drops off by 80% between data sets [Default is l]. Append + to automatically select a lower resolution should the one requested not be available [abort if not found]. Sets the viewpoints azimuth and elevation (for perspective view) [180/90]. For frames used for animation, you may want to append + to x the center of your data domain (or specify a particular world coordinate point with +wlon0/lat[/z]) which will project to the center of your page size (or specify the coordinates of the projected view point with +vx0/y0). Select lling or clipping of "dry" areas. Append the shade, color, or pattern (see SPECIFYING FILL below); or use Gc for clipping [Default is no ll].
B C
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSCOAST(1)
PSCOAST(1)
Draw rivers. Specify the type of rivers and [optionally] append pen attributes [Default pen: width = 0.25p, color = black, texture = solid]. (See SPECIFYING PENS below). Choose from the list of river types below. Repeat option I as often as necessary. 1 = Permanent major rivers 2 = Additional major rivers 3 = Additional rivers 4 = Minor rivers 5 = Intermittent rivers - major 6 = Intermittent rivers - additional 7 = Intermittent rivers - minor 8 = Major canals 9 = Minor canals 10 = Irrigation canals a = All rivers and canals (1-10) r = All permanent rivers (1-4) i = All intermittent rivers (5-7) c = All canals (8-10) Sets the vertical scaling (for 3-D maps). Same syntax as Jx. More PostScript code will be appended later [Default terminates the plot system]. Draws a simple map scale centered on lon0/lat0. Use Lx to specify x/y position instead. Scale is calculated at latitude slat (optionally supply longitude slon for oblique projections [Default is central meridian]), length is in km [miles if m is appended; nautical miles if n is appended]. Use Lf to get a "fancy" scale [Default is plain]. Append +l to select the default label which equals the distance unit (km, miles, nautical miles) and is justied on top of the scale [t]. Change this by giving your own label (append +llabel). Change label justication with +jjustication (choose among l(eft), r(ight), t(op), and b(ottom)). Apply +u to append the unit to all distance annotations along the scale. If you want to place a rectangle behind the scale, specify suitable +ppen and/or +fll parameters. (See SPECIFYING PENS and SPECIFYING FILL below). Draw political boundaries. Specify the type of boundary and [optionally] append pen attributes [Default pen: width = 0.25p, color = black, texture = solid]. (See SPECIFYING PENS below). (See SPECIFYING PENS below). Choose from the list of boundaries below. Repeat option N as often as necessary. 1 = National boundaries 2 = State boundaries within the Americas 3 = Marine boundaries a = All boundaries (1-3) Selects Overlay plot mode [Default initializes a new plot system]. Selects Portrait plotting mode [Default is Landscape, see gmtdefaults to change this]. Mark end of existing clip path. No projection information is needed. However, you must supply Xa and Ya settings if you are using absolute positioning. Select lling or clipping of "wet" areas. Append the shade, color, or pattern (see SPECIFYING FILL below); or use Sc for clipping [Default is no ll]. Draws a simple map directional rose centered on lon0/lat0. Use Tx to specify x/y position instead. The size is the diameter of the rose, and optional label information can be specied to override the default values of W, E, S, and N (Give :: to suppress all labels). The default [plain] map rose only labels north. Use Tf to get a "fancy" rose, and specify in info what you want drawn. The default [1] draws the two principal E-W, N-S orientations, 2 adds the two intermediate NW-SE and NE-SW orientations, while 3 adds the eight minor orientations WNW-ESE, NNWSSE, NNE-SSW, and ENE-WSW. For a magnetic compass rose, specify Tm. If given, info must be the two parameters dec/dlabel, where dec is the magnetic declination and dlabel is a label for the magnetic compass needle (specify - to format a label from dec). Then, both directions to
Jz K L
O P Q S T
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSCOAST(1)
PSCOAST(1)
geographic and magnetic north are plotted [Default is geographic only]. If the north label is * then a north star is plotted instead of the north label. Annotation and two levels of tick intervals for geographic and magnetic directions are 10/5/1 and 30/5/1 degrees, respectively; override these settings by appending +gints[/mints]. Color and pen attributes are taken from COLOR_BACKGROUND and TICK_PEN, respectively, while label fonts and sizes follow the usual annotation, label, and header font settings. U Draw Unix System time stamp on plot. By adding just/dx/dy/, the user may specify the justication of the stamp and where the stamp should fall on the page relative to lower left corner of the plot. For example, BL/0/0 will align the lower left corner of the time stamp with the lower left corner of the plot. Optionally, append a label, or c (which will plot the command string.). The GMT parameters UNIX_TIME, UNIX_TIME_POS, and UNIX_TIME_FORMAT can affect the appearance; see the gmtdefaults man page for details. The time string will be in the locale set by the environment variable TZ (generally local time). Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"]. Draw shorelines [Default is no shorelines]. Append pen attributes [Defaults: width = 0.25p, color = black, texture = solid] which apply to all four levels. To set the pen for each level differently, prepend level/, where level is 1-4 and represent coastline, lakeshore, island-in-lake shore, and lakein-island-in-lake shore. Repeat W as needed. When specic level pens are set, those not listed will not be drawn [Default draws all levels; but see A]. (See SPECIFYING PENS below).
V W
X Y Shift plot origin relative to the current origin by (x-shift,y-shift) and optionally append the length unit (c, i, m, p). You can prepend a to shift the origin back to the original position after plotting, or prepend r [Default] to reset the current origin to the new location. If O is used then the default (x-shift,y-shift) is (0,0), otherwise it is (r1i, r1i) or (r2.5c, r2.5c). Alternatively, give c to align the center coordinate (x or y) of the plot with the center of the page based on current page size. Z bo For 3-D projections: Sets the z-level of the coastlines [Default is the bottom of the z-axis]. Selects binary output. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of desired columns in your binary output le. Species the number of plot copies. [Default is 1]. Dumps a single multisegment ASCII (or binary, see bo) le to standard output. No plotting occurs. Specify any combination of W, I, N. Optionally, you may append the ag character that is written at the start of each segment header [>].
c m
SPECIFYING PENS pen The attributes of lines and symbol outlines as dened by pen is a comma delimetered list of width, color and texture, each of which is optional. width can be indicated as a measure (points, centimeters, inches) or as faint, thin[ner|nest], thick[er|est], fat[ter|test], or obese. color species a gray shade or color (see SPECIFYING COLOR below). texture is a combination of dashes - and dots .. SPECIFYING FILL ll The attribute ll species the solid shade or solid color (see SPECIFYING COLOR below) or the pattern used for lling polygons. Patterns are specied as pdpi/pattern, where pattern gives the number of the built-in pattern (1-90) or the name of a Sun 1-, 8-, or 24-bit raster le. The dpi sets the resolution of the image. For 1-bit rasters: use Pdpi/pattern for inverse video, or append :Fcolor[B[color]] to specify fore- and background colors (use color = - for transparency). See GMT Cookbook & Technical Reference Appendix E for information on individual patterns. SPECIFYING COLOR color The color of lines, areas and patterns can be specied by a valid color name; by a gray shade (in the range 0255); by a decimal color code (r/g/b, each in range 0255; h-s-v, ranges 0360, 01, 01; or c/m/y/k, each in range 01); or by a hexadecimal color code (#rrggbb, as used in HTML).
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSCOAST(1)
PSCOAST(1)
See the gmtcolors manpage for more information and a full list of color names.
EXAMPLES
To plot a green Africa with white outline on blue background, with permanent major rivers in thick blue pen, additional major rivers in thin blue pen, and national borders as dashed lines on a Mercator map at scale 0.1 inch/degree, use pscoast R-30/30/-40/40 Jm0.1i B5 I1/1p,blue I2/0.25p,blue N1/0.25p,- W0.25p,white Ggreen Sblue P > africa.ps To plot Iceland using the lava pattern (# 28) at 100 dots per inch, on a Mercator map at scale 1 cm/degree, run pscoast R-30/-10/60/65 Jm1c B5 Gp100/28 > iceland.ps To initiate a clip path for Africa so that the subsequent colorimage of gridded topography is only seen over land, using a Mercator map at scale 0.1 inch/degree, use pscoast R-30/30/-40/40 Jm0.1i B5 Gc P K > africa.ps grdimage Jm0.1i etopo5.grd Ccolors.cpt O K >> africa.ps pscoast Q O >> africa.ps pscoast will rst look for coastline les in directory $GMT_SHAREDIR/coast If the desired le is not found, it will look for the le $GMT_SHAREDIR/coastline.conf. This le may contain any number of records that each holds the full pathname of an alternative directory. Comment lines (#) and blank lines are allowed. The desired le is then sought for in the alternate directories.
GSHHS INFORMATION
The coastline database is GSHHS which is compiled from two sources: World Vector Shorelines (WVS) and CIA World Data Bank II (WDBII). In particular, all level-1 polygons (ocean-land boundary) are derived from the more accurate WVS while all higher level polygons (level 2-4, representing land/lake, lake/island-in-lake, and island-in-lake/lake-in-island-in-lake boundaries) are taken from WDBII. Much processing has taken place to convert WVS and WDBII data into usable form for GMT: assembling closed polygons from line segments, checking for duplicates, and correcting for crossings between polygons. The area of each polygon has been determined so that the user may choose not to draw features smaller than a minimum area (see A); one may also limit the highest hierarchical level of polygons to be included (4 is the maximum). The 4 lower-resolution databases were derived from the full resolution database using the Douglas-Peucker line-simplication algorithm. The classication of rivers and borders follow that of the WDBII. See the GMT Cookbook and Technical Reference Appendix K for further details.
BUGS
The options to ll (C G S) may not always work if the Azimuthal equidistant projection is chosen (Je|E). If the antipole of the projection is in the oceans it will most likely work. If not, try to avoid using projection center coordinates that are even multiples of the coastline bin size (1, 2, 5, 10, and 20 degrees for f, h, i, l, c, respectively). This projection is not supported for clipping. The political borders are for the most part 1970s-style but have been updated to reect more recent border rearrangements in Europe and elsewhere. Let us know if you nd something out of date. Some users of pscoast will not be satised with what they nd for the Antarctic shoreline. In Antarctica, the boundary between ice and ocean varies seasonally and inter-annually. There are some areas of permanent sea ice. In addition to these time-varying ice-ocean boundaries, there are also ice grounding lines where ice goes from oating on the sea to sitting on land, and lines delimiting areas of rock outcrop. For consistencys sake, we have used the World Vector Shoreline throughout the world in pscoast, as described in the GMT Cookbook Appendix K. Users who need specic boundaries in Antarctica should get the Antarctic Digital Database, prepared by the British Antarctic Survey, Scott Polar Research Institute, World Conservation Monitoring Centre, under the auspices of the Scientic Committee on Antarctic Research. This data base contains various kinds of limiting lines for Antarctica and is available on CD-ROM. It is
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSCOAST(1)
PSCOAST(1)
published by the Scientic Committee on Antarctic Research, Scott Polar Research Institute, Lenseld Road, Cambridge CB2 1ER, United Kingdom.
SEE ALSO
gmtcolors(5), gmtdefaults(1), GMT (1), grdlandmask(1), psbasemap(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSCONTOUR(1)
PSCONTOUR(1)
NAME
pscontour Contour xyz-data by direct triangulation [method]
SYNOPSIS
pscontour xyzle Ccptle Jparameters Rwest/east/south/north[r] [ A[-][labelinfo] ] [ B[p|s]parameters ] [ D[dumple] ] [ Eazim/elev[+wlon/lat[/z]][+vx0/y0] ] [ G[d|f|n|l|L|x|X]params ] [ H[i][nrec] ] [ I ] [ K ] [ Lpen ] [ N ] [ O ] [ P ] [ S ] [ Tindexle ] [ U[just/dx/dy/][c|label] ] [ V ] [ W[+]pen ] [ X[a|c|r][x-shift[u]] ] [ Y[a|c|r][y-shift[u]] ] [ ccopies ] [ :[i|o] ] [ b[i|o][s|S|d|D[ncol]|c[var1/...]] ] [ m[ag] ]
DESCRIPTION
pscontour reads an ASCII [or binary] xyz-le and produces a raw contour plot by triangulation. By default, the optimal Delaunay triangulation is performed (using either Shewchuks [1996] or Watsons [1982] method as selected during GMT installation; type pscontour to see which method is selected), but the user may optionally provide a second le with network information, such as a triangular mesh used for nite element modeling. In addition to contours, the area between contours may be painted according to the color palette le. xyzle C J Raw ASCII (or binary, see b) xyz data to be contoured. name of the color palette le. Must have discrete colors if you want to paint the surface (I). Only contours that have annotation ags set will be annotated. Selects the map projection. Scale is UNIT/degree, 1:xxxxx, or width in UNIT (upper case modier). UNIT is cm, inch, or m, depending on the MEASURE_UNIT setting in .gmtdefaults4, but this can be overridden on the command line by appending c, i, or m to the scale/width value. When central meridian is optional, default is center of longitude range on R option. Default standard parallel is the equator. For map height, max dimension, or min dimension, append h, +, or to the width, respectively. More details can be found in the psbasemap man pages. CYLINDRICAL PROJECTIONS: Jclon0/lat0/scale (Cassini) Jcyl_stere/[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Stereographic) Jj[lon0/]scale (Miller) Jm[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Mercator) Jmlon0/lat0/scale (Mercator - Give meridian and standard parallel) Jo[a]lon0/lat0/azimuth/scale (Oblique Mercator - point and azimuth) Jo[b]lon0/lat0/lon1/lat1/scale (Oblique Mercator - two points) Joclon0/lat0/lonp/latp/scale (Oblique Mercator - point and pole) Jq[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Equidistant) Jtlon0/[lat0/]scale (TM - Transverse Mercator) Juzone/scale (UTM - Universal Transverse Mercator) Jy[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Equal-Area) CONIC PROJECTIONS: Jblon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Albers) Jdlon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Conic Equidistant) Jllon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Lambert Conic Conformal) Jpoly/[lon0/[lat0/]]scale ((American) Polyconic) AZIMUTHAL PROJECTIONS: Jalon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Lambert Azimuthal Equal-Area) Jelon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Azimuthal Equidistant)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSCONTOUR(1)
PSCONTOUR(1)
Jflon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Gnomonic) Jglon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Orthographic) Jglon0/lat0/altitude/azimuth/tilt/twist/Width/Height/scale (General Perspective). Jslon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (General Stereographic) MISCELLANEOUS PROJECTIONS: Jh[lon0/]scale (Hammer) Ji[lon0/]scale (Sinusoidal) Jkf[lon0/]scale (Eckert IV) Jk[s][lon0/]scale (Eckert VI) Jn[lon0/]scale (Robinson) Jr[lon0/]scale (Winkel Tripel) Jv[lon0/]scale (Van der Grinten) Jw[lon0/]scale (Mollweide) NON-GEOGRAPHICAL PROJECTIONS: Jp[a]scale[/origin][r|z] (Polar coordinates (theta,r)) Jxx-scale[d|l|ppow|t|T][/y-scale[d|l|ppow|t|T]] (Linear, log, and power scaling) R xmin, xmax, ymin, and ymax specify the Region of interest. For geographic regions, these limits correspond to west, east, south, and north and you may specify them in decimal degrees or in [+-]dd:mm[:ss.xxx][W|E|S|N] format. Append r if lower left and upper right map coordinates are given instead of w/e/s/n. The two shorthands Rg and Rd stand for global domain (0/360 and -180/+180 in longitude respectively, with -90/+90 in latitude). Alternatively, specify the name of an existing grid le and the R settings (and grid spacing, if applicable) are copied from the grid. For calendar time coordinates you may either give (a) relative time (relative to the selected TIME_EPOCH and in the selected TIME_UNIT; append t to JX|x), or (b) absolute time of the form [date]T[clock] (append T to JX|x). At least one of date and clock must be present; the T is always required. The date string must be of the form [-]yyyy[-mm[-dd]] (Gregorian calendar) or yyyy[-Www[-d]] (ISO week calendar), while the clock string must be of the form hh:mm:ss[.xxx]. The use of delimiters and their type and positions must be exactly as indicated (however, input, output and plot formats are customizable; see gmtdefaults).
OPTIONS
No space between the option ag and the associated arguments. A Give - to disable all annotations. The optional labelinfo controls the specics of the label formatting and consists of a concatenated string made up of any of the following control arguments: +aangle For annotations at a xed angle, +an for line-normal, or +ap for line-parallel [Default]. +cdx[/dy] Sets the clearance between label and optional text box. Append c|i|m|p to specify the unit or % to indicate a percentage of the label font size [15%]. +d +ffont Turns on debug which will draw helper points and lines to illustrate the workings of the quoted line setup. Sets the desired font [Default ANNOT_FONT_PRIMARY].
+g[color] Selects opaque text boxes [Default is transparent]; optionally specify the color [Default is PAGE_COLOR]. (See SPECIFYING COLOR below). +jjust Sets label justication [Default is MC]. Ignored when -SqN|n+|-1 is used.
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSCONTOUR(1)
PSCONTOUR(1)
+kcolor Sets color of text labels [Default is COLOR_BACKGROUND]. (See SPECIFYING COLOR below). +llabel Sets the constant label text. +Lag Sets the label text according to the specied ag: +Lh Take the label from the current multisegment header (rst scan for an embedded Llabel option, if not use the rst word following the segment ag). For multiple-word labels, enclose entire label in double quotes. Take the Cartesian plot distances along the line as the label; append c|i|m|p as the unit [Default is MEASURE_UNIT]. Calculate actual map distances; append d|e|k|m|n as the unit [Default is d(egrees), unless label placement was based on map distances along the lines in which case we use the same unit specied for that algorithm]. Requires a map projection to be used. Use text after the 2nd column in the xed label location le as the label. Requires the xed label location setting. As +Lh but use the headers in the xle.d instead. Requires the crossing le option.
+Ld +LD
+Lf +Lx
+ndx[/dy] Nudges the placement of labels by the specied amount (append c|i|m|p to specify the units). Increments are considered in the coordinate system dened by the orientation of the line; use +N to force increments in the plot x/y coordinates system [no nudging]. +o +p[pen] Draws the outline of text boxsets [Default is no outline]; optionally specify pen for outline [Default is width = 0.25p, color = black, texture = solid]. (See SPECIFYING PENS below). +rmin_rad Will not place labels where the lines radius of curvature is less than min_rad [Default is 0]. +ssize Sets the desired font size in points [Default is 9]. +uunit Appends unit to all line labels. If unit starts with a leading hyphen (-) then there will be no space between label value and the unit. [Default is no unit]. +v +w +=prex Prepends prex to all line labels. If prex starts with a leading hyphen (-) then there will be no space between label value and the prex. [Default is no prex]. B D Sets map boundary annotation and tickmark intervals; see the psbasemap man page for all the details. Dump the (x,y,z) coordinates of each contour to separate les, one for each contour segment. The les will be named dumple_cont_segment[_i].xyz, where cont is the contour value and segment is a running segment number for each contour interval (for closed contours we append _i.) However, when m is used in conjunction with D a single multisegment le is created instead. Sets the viewpoints azimuth and elevation (for perspective view) [180/90]. For frames used for animation, you may want to append + to x the center of your data domain (or specify a particular Species curved labels following the path [Default is straight labels]. Species how many (x, y) points will be used to estimate label angles [Default is 10]. Selects rounded rectangular text box [Default is rectangular]. Not applicable for curved text (+v) and only makes sense for opaque text boxes.
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSCONTOUR(1)
PSCONTOUR(1)
world coordinate point with +wlon0/lat[/z]) which will project to the center of your page size (or specify the coordinates of the projected view point with +vx0/y0). G Controls the placement of labels along the contours. Choose among ve controlling algorithms: Gddist[c|i|m|p] or GDdist[d|e|k|m|n] For lower case d, give distances between labels on the plot in your preferred measurement unit c (cm), i (inch), m (meter), or p (points), while for upper case D, specify distances in map units and append the unit; choose among e (m), k (km), m (mile), n (nautical mile), or d (spherical degree). [Default is 10c or 4i]. Gffle.d Reads the ascii le fle.d and places labels at locations in the le that matches locations along the contours. Inexact matches and points outside the region are skipped. Gl|Lline1[,line2,...] Give start and stop coordinates for one or more comma-separated straight line segments. Labels will be placed where these lines intersect the contours. The format of each line specication is start/stop, where start and stop are either a specied point lon/lat or a 2-character XY key that uses the justication format employed in pstext to indicate a point on the map, given as [LCR][BMT]. GL will interpret the point pairs as dening great circles [Default is straight line]. Gnn_label Species the number of equidistant labels for contours line [1]. Upper case GN starts labeling exactly at the start of the line [Default centers them along the line]. GN-1 places one justied label at start, while GN+1 places one justied label at the end of contours. Optionally, append /min_dist[c|i|m|p] to enforce that a minimum distance separation between successive labels is enforced. Gx|Xxle.d Reads the multi-segment le xle.d and places labels at the intersections between the contours and the lines inxle.d. GX will resample the lines rst along great-circle arcs. In addition, you may optionally append +rradius[c|i|m|p] to set a minimum label separation in the x-y plane [no limitation]. H Input le(s) has header record(s). If used, the default number of header records is N_HEADER_RECS. Use Hi if only input data should have header records [Default will write out header records if the input data have them]. Blank lines and lines starting with # are always skipped. Color the triangles using the color palette table. Sets the vertical scaling (for 3-D maps). Same syntax as Jx. More PostScript code will be appended later [Default terminates the plot system]. Draw the underlying triangular mesh using the specied pen attributes [Default is no mesh]. (See SPECIFYING PENS below). Do NOT clip contours or image at the boundaries [Default will clip to t inside region R]. Selects Overlay plot mode [Default initializes a new plot system]. Selects Portrait plotting mode [Default is Landscape, see gmtdefaults to change this]. Skip all input xyz points that fall outside the region [Default uses all the data in the triangulation]. Give name of le with network information. Each record must contain triplets of node numbers for a triangle [Default computes these using Delaunay triangulation (see triangulate)]. Draw Unix System time stamp on plot. By adding just/dx/dy/, the user may specify the justication of the stamp and where the stamp should fall on the page relative to lower left corner of the plot. For example, BL/0/0 will align the lower left corner of the time stamp with the lower left
I Jz K L N O P S T U
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSCONTOUR(1)
PSCONTOUR(1)
corner of the plot. Optionally, append a label, or c (which will plot the command string.). The GMT parameters UNIX_TIME, UNIX_TIME_POS, and UNIX_TIME_FORMAT can affect the appearance; see the gmtdefaults man page for details. The time string will be in the locale set by the environment variable TZ (generally local time). V W Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"]. Select contouring and set contour pen attributes. If the + ag is set then the contour lines are colored according to the cpt le (see C). (See SPECIFYING PENS below).
X Y Shift plot origin relative to the current origin by (x-shift,y-shift) and optionally append the length unit (c, i, m, p). You can prepend a to shift the origin back to the original position after plotting, or prepend r [Default] to reset the current origin to the new location. If O is used then the default (x-shift,y-shift) is (0,0), otherwise it is (r1i, r1i) or (r2.5c, r2.5c). Alternatively, give c to align the center coordinate (x or y) of the plot with the center of the page based on current page size. : bi Toggles between (longitude,latitude) and (latitude,longitude) input and/or output. [Default is (longitude,latitude)]. Append i to select input only or o to select output only. [Default affects both]. Selects binary input. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of columns in your binary input le if it exceeds the columns needed by the program. Or append c if the input le is netCDF. Optionally, append var1/var2/... to specify the variables to be read. [Default is 3 input columns]. Use 4-byte integer triplets for node ids (T). Selects binary output. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of desired columns in your binary output le. [Default is 3 output columns]. Species the number of plot copies. [Default is 1]. When used in conjunction with D a single multisegment le is created, and each contour section is preceded by a header record whose rst column is ag followed by the contour level.
bo
c m
EXAMPLES
To make a raw contour plot from the le topo.xyz and drawing the contours (pen = 0.5p) given in the color palette le topo.cpt on a Lambert map at 0.5 inch/degree along the standard parallels 18 and 24, use pscontour topo.xyz R320/330/20/30 Jl18/24/0.5i Ctopo.cpt W0.5p > topo.ps To create a color PostScript plot of the numerical temperature solution obtained on a triangular mesh whose node coordinates and temperatures are stored in temp.xyz and mesh arrangement is given by the le mesh.ijk, using the colors in temp.cpt, run pscontour temp.xyz R0/150/0/100 Jx0.1 Ctemp.cpt G W0.25p > temp.ps
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSCONTOUR(1)
PSCONTOUR(1)
BUGS
Sometimes there will appear to be thin lines of the wrong color in the image. This is a round-off problem which may be remedied by using a higher value of DOTS_PR_INCH in the .gmtdefaults4 le.
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), gmtcolors(5), grdcontour(1), grdimage(1), nearneighbor(1), psbasemap(1), psscale(1), surface(1), triangulate(1)
REFERENCES
Watson, D. F., 1982, Acord: Automatic contouring of raw data, Comp. & Geosci., 8, 97101. Shewchuk, J. R., 1996, Triangle: Engineering a 2D Quality Mesh Generator and Delaunay Triangulator, First Workshop on Applied Computational Geometry (Philadelphia, PA), 124-133, ACM, May 1996. www.cs.cmu.edu/quake/triangle.html
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSHISTOGRAM(1)
PSHISTOGRAM(1)
NAME
pshistogram Bin data and plot histograms
SYNOPSIS
pshistogram le Jx|Xparameters Wbin_width [ A ] [ B[p|s]parameters ] [ Ccptle ] [ Eazimuth/elevation ] [ F ] [ Gll ] [ H[i][nrec] ] [ Jz|Zparameters ] [ I[o|O] ] [ K ] [ Lpen ] [ O ] [ P ] [ Q ] [ Rxmin/xmax/ymin/ymax[r] ] [ S ] [ Tcol ] [ U[just/dx/dy/][c|label] ] [ V ] [ X[a|c|r][xshift[u]] ] [ Y[a|c|r][y-shift[u]] ] [ Ztype ] [ ccopies ] [ bi[s|S|d|D[ncol]|c[var1/...]] ] [ f[i|o]colinfo ]
DESCRIPTION
pshistogram reads le [or standard input] and examines data column col to calculate histogram parameters based on the bin-width provided. Using these parameters, scaling, and optional range parameters it will generate PostScript code that plots a histogram. A cumulative histogram may also be specied. le Jx W ASCII [or binary, see b] datale. If no le is given, pshistogram will read standard input. xscale[/yscale] (Linear scale(s) in distance unit/data unit). Sets the bin width used for histogram calculations.
OPTIONS
No space between the option ag and the associated arguments. A B C E F G H Plot the histogram horizontally from x = 0 [Default is vertically from y = 0]. Sets map boundary annotation and tickmark intervals; see the psbasemap man page for all the details. Give a color palette le. The mid x-value for each bar is used to look-up the bar color. Sets the viewpoints azimuth and elevation (for perspective view) [180/90]. Center bin on each value. [Default is left edge]. Select lling of bars [Default is no ll]. (See SPECIFYING FILL below). Input le(s) has header record(s). If used, the default number of header records is N_HEADER_RECS. Use Hi if only input data should have header records [Default will write out header records if the input data have them]. Blank lines and lines starting with # are always skipped. Inquire about min/max x and y after binning. No plotting is done. Append o to output an ASCII table of the resulting x,y data to stdout. Alternatively, append O to output all x,y bin data even when y == 0. More PostScript code will be appended later [Default terminates the plot system]. Draw bar outline using the specied pen thickness. [Default is no outline]. (See SPECIFYING PENS below). Selects Overlay plot mode [Default initializes a new plot system]. Selects Portrait plotting mode [Default is Landscape, see gmtdefaults to change this]. Draw a cumulative histogram. xmin, xmax, ymin, and ymax specify the Region of interest. For geographic regions, these limits correspond to west, east, south, and north and you may specify them in decimal degrees or in [+-]dd:mm[:ss.xxx][W|E|S|N] format. Append r if lower left and upper right map coordinates are given instead of w/e/s/n. The two shorthands Rg and Rd stand for global domain (0/360 and -180/+180 in longitude respectively, with -90/+90 in latitude). Alternatively, specify the name of an existing grid le and the R settings (and grid spacing, if applicable) are copied from the grid. For calendar time coordinates you may either give (a) relative time (relative to the selected TIME_EPOCH and in the selected TIME_UNIT; append t to JX|x), or (b) absolute time of the form [date]T[clock] (append T to JX|x). At least one of date and clock must be present; the T is always required. The date string must be of the form [-]yyyy[-mm[-dd]] (Gregorian calendar) or
K L O P Q R
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSHISTOGRAM(1)
PSHISTOGRAM(1)
yyyy[-Www[-d]] (ISO week calendar), while the clock string must be of the form hh:mm:ss[.xxx]. The use of delimiters and their type and positions must be exactly as indicated (however, input, output and plot formats are customizable; see gmtdefaults). If not given, pshistogram will automatically nd reasonable values for the region. S T U Draws a stairs-step diagram which does not include the internal bars of the default histogram. Specify which column to use for the histogram data. First column is 0 [0]. Draw Unix System time stamp on plot. By adding just/dx/dy/, the user may specify the justication of the stamp and where the stamp should fall on the page relative to lower left corner of the plot. For example, BL/0/0 will align the lower left corner of the time stamp with the lower left corner of the plot. Optionally, append a label, or c (which will plot the command string.). The GMT parameters UNIX_TIME, UNIX_TIME_POS, and UNIX_TIME_FORMAT can affect the appearance; see the gmtdefaults man page for details. The time string will be in the locale set by the environment variable TZ (generally local time). Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"].
X Y Shift plot origin relative to the current origin by (x-shift,y-shift) and optionally append the length unit (c, i, m, p). You can prepend a to shift the origin back to the original position after plotting, or prepend r [Default] to reset the current origin to the new location. If O is used then the default (x-shift,y-shift) is (0,0), otherwise it is (r1i, r1i) or (r2.5c, r2.5c). Alternatively, give c to align the center coordinate (x or y) of the plot with the center of the page based on current page size. Z Choose between 6 types of histograms: 0 = counts [Default], 1 = frequency_percent, 2 = log (1.0 + count), 3 = log (1.0 + frequency_percent), 4 = log10 (1.0 + count), 5 = log10 (1.0 + frequency_percent). Selects binary input. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of columns in your binary input le if it exceeds the columns needed by the program. Or append c if the input le is netCDF. Optionally, append var1/var2/... to specify the variables to be read. [Default is 2 input columns]. Species the number of plot copies. [Default is 1]. Special formatting of input and/or output columns (time or geographical data). Specify i or o to make this apply only to input or output [Default applies to both]. Give one or more columns (or column ranges) separated by commas. Append T (absolute calendar time), t (relative time in chosen TIME_UNIT since TIME_EPOCH), x (longitude), y (latitude), or f (oating point) to each column or column range item. Shorthand f[i|o]g means f[i|o]0x,1y (geographic coordinates).
bi
c f
SPECIFYING PENS pen The attributes of lines and symbol outlines as dened by pen is a comma delimetered list of width, color and texture, each of which is optional. width can be indicated as a measure (points, centimeters, inches) or as faint, thin[ner|nest], thick[er|est], fat[ter|test], or obese. color species a gray shade or color (see SPECIFYING COLOR below). texture is a combination of dashes - and dots .. SPECIFYING FILL ll The attribute ll species the solid shade or solid color (see SPECIFYING COLOR below) or the pattern used for lling polygons. Patterns are specied as pdpi/pattern, where pattern gives the number of the built-in pattern (1-90) or the name of a Sun 1-, 8-, or 24-bit raster le. The dpi sets the resolution of the image. For 1-bit rasters: use Pdpi/pattern for inverse video, or append :Fcolor[B[color]] to specify fore- and background colors (use color = - for transparency). See GMT Cookbook & Technical Reference Appendix E for information on individual patterns. SPECIFYING COLOR color The color of lines, areas and patterns can be specied by a valid color name; by a gray shade (in the range 0255); by a decimal color code (r/g/b, each in range 0255; h-s-v, ranges 0360, 01, 01; or c/m/y/k, each in range 01); or by a hexadecimal color code (#rrggbb, as used in HTML).
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSHISTOGRAM(1)
PSHISTOGRAM(1)
See the gmtcolors manpage for more information and a full list of color names.
EXAMPLES
To draw a histogram of the data v3206.t containing seaoor depths, using a 250 meter bin width, center bars, and draw bar outline, use: pshistogram v3206.t JXh W250 F LP0.5p V > plot.ps If you know the distribution of your data, you may explicitly specify range and scales. E.g., to plot a histogram of the y-values (2nd column) in the le errors.xy using a 1 meter bin width, plot from -10 to +10 meters @ 0.75 cm/m, annotate every 2 m and 100 counts, and use black bars, run: pshistogram errors.xy W1 R-10/10/0/0 Jx0.75c/0.01c B2:Error:/100:Counts: Gblack T1 V > plot.ps Since no y-range was specied, pshistogram will calculate ymax in even increments of 100.
BUGS
The W option does not yet work properly with time series data (e.g., f0T). Thus, such variable intervals as months and years are not calculated. Instead, specify your interval in the same units as the current setting of TIME_UNIT.
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), gmtcolors(5), psbasemap(1), psrose(1), psxy(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSIMAGE(1)
PSIMAGE(1)
NAME
psimage To plot images (EPS les or Sun raster les) on maps
SYNOPSIS
psimage imagele [ W[-]width[/height] | Edpi ] [ Cxpos/ypos[/justify] ] [ Fpen ] [ G[b|f|t]color ] [ I ] [ K ] [ M ] [ Nnx[/ny] ] [ O ] [ P ] [ U[just/dx/dy/][c|label] ] [ V ] [ X[a|c|r][x-shift[u]] ] [ Y[a|c|r][y-shift[u]] ] [ ccopies ]
DESCRIPTION
psimage reads an Encapsulated PostScript le or a 1, 8, 24, or 32-bit Sun raster le and plots it on a map. The image can be scaled arbitrarily, and 1-bit raster images can be (1) inverted, i.e., black pixels (on) becomes white (off) and vice versa, or (2) colorized, by assigning different foreground and background colors, and (3) made transparent where one of back- or foreground is painted only. As an option, the user may choose to convert colored raster images to grayscale using TVs YIQ-transformation. In case of 8-, 24- or 32-bit Sun raster les, the user can select which color to be made transparent. The user may also choose to replicate the image which, when preceded by appropriate clip paths, may allow larger custom-designed ll patterns to be implemented (the Gp mechanism offered in most GMT programs is limited to rasters smaller than 146 by 146). imagele This must be an Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) le or a Sun raster le. An EPS le must contain an appropriate BoundingBox. A raster le can have a depth of 1, 8, 24, or 32 bits. Old-style, Standard, Run-length-encoded, and RGB Sun raster les are supported. Other raster formats can be converted to Sun format via a variety of public-domain software (e.g., convert, xv). E W Sets the dpi of the image in dots per inch, or use W. Sets the width (and height) of the image in plot coordinates (inches, cm, etc.). If height is not given, the original aspect ratio of the image is maintained. If width is negative we use the absolute value and interpolate image to the device resolution using the PostScript image operator. Alternatively, use E.
OPTIONS
No space between the option ag and the associated arguments. C Sets position of the image in plot coordinates (inches, cm, etc.) from the current origin of the plot. By default, this denes the position of the lower left corner of the image, but this can be changed by specifying justication [0/0/BL]. Draws a rectangular frame around the image with the given pen [no frame]. (See SPECIFYING PENS below). More PostScript code will be appended later [Default terminates the plot system]. Convert color image to monochrome grayshades using the (television) YIQ-transformation. Replicate the image nx times horizontally and ny times vertically. If ny is omitted, it will be identical to nx [Default is 1/1]. Selects Overlay plot mode [Default initializes a new plot system]. Selects Portrait plotting mode [Default is Landscape, see gmtdefaults to change this]. Draw Unix System time stamp on plot. By adding just/dx/dy/, the user may specify the justication of the stamp and where the stamp should fall on the page relative to lower left corner of the plot. For example, BL/0/0 will align the lower left corner of the time stamp with the lower left corner of the plot. Optionally, append a label, or c (which will plot the command string.). The GMT parameters UNIX_TIME, UNIX_TIME_POS, and UNIX_TIME_FORMAT can affect the appearance; see the gmtdefaults man page for details. The time string will be in the locale set by the environment variable TZ (generally local time). Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"].
F K M N O P U
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSIMAGE(1)
PSIMAGE(1)
X Y Shift plot origin relative to the current origin by (x-shift,y-shift) and optionally append the length unit (c, i, m, p). You can prepend a to shift the origin back to the original position after plotting, or prepend r [Default] to reset the current origin to the new location. If O is used then the default (x-shift,y-shift) is (0,0), otherwise it is (r1i, r1i) or (r2.5c, r2.5c). Alternatively, give c to align the center coordinate (x or y) of the plot with the center of the page based on current page size. c Species the number of plot copies. [Default is 1]. These options are for 1-bit Sun raster images only. They have no effect when plotting other images or PostScript les. Gb Gf I Sets background color (replace white pixel) of 1-bit images. Use - for transparency (and set Gf to the desired color). (See SPECIFYING COLOR below). Sets foreground color (replace black pixel) of 1-bit images. Use - for transparency (and set Gb to the desired color). (See SPECIFYING COLOR below). Invert 1-bit image before plotting. This is what is done when you use GP in other GMT programs.
These options are for 8-, 24-, and 32-bit Sun raster images only. They have no effect when plotting 1-bit images or PostScript les. Gt Assigns the color that is to be made transparent. Sun Raster les do not support transparency, so indicate here which color to be made transparent. (See SPECIFYING COLOR below).
EXAMPLES
To plot the image contained in the 8-bit raster le scanned_face.ras, scaling it to 8 by 10 cm (thereby possibly changing the aspect ratio), and making the white color transparent, use psimage scanned_face.ras W8c/10c -Gtwhite > image.ps To include an Encapsulated PostScript le tiger.eps with its upper right corner 2 inch to the right and 1 inch up from the current location, and have its width scaled to 3 inches, while keeping the aspect ratio, use psimage tiger.eps C2i/1i/TR W3i > image.ps To replicate the 1-bit raster image template 1_bit.ras, colorize it (brown background and red foreground), and setting each of 5 by 5 tiles to be 1 cm wide, use psimage 1_bit.ras Gbbrown Gfred N5 W1c > image.ps
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), gmtcolors(5), psxy(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSLEGEND(1)
PSLEGEND(1)
NAME
pslegend To plot a map legend
SYNOPSIS
pslegend textle D[x]lon/lat/width/height/just Jparameters Rwest/east/south/north[r] [ B[p|s]parameters ] [ Cdx/dy ] [ F ] [ Gll ] [ K ] [ Lspacing ] [ O ] [ P ] [ S[script] ] [ U[just/dx/dy/][c|label] ] [ V ] [ X[a|c|r][x-shift[u]] ] [ ccopies ] [ Y[a|c|r][y-shift[u]] ]
DESCRIPTION
pslegend will make legends that can be overlaid on maps. It reads specic legend-related information from an input le [or stdin]. Because all the elements of the legend can already be created with other tools (psxy, pstext) we use those tools by creating a batch job of commands that are executed to make the nal PostScript overlay. Because of this process, the option exists to just output the script which can then be ne-tuned manually. Unless otherwise noted, annotations will be made using the annotation font and size in effect. textle This le contains instruction for the layout of items in the legend. Each legend item is described by a unique record. All records begin with a unique character that is common to all records of the same kind. The order of the legend items is implied by the order of the records. Ten different record types are recognized, and the syntax for each of these records are presented below: # comment Records starting with # and blank lines are skipped. B cptname offset height [ optional arguments ] The B record will plot a horizontal color bar, psscale-style in the middle, starting at offset from the left edge, and of the given height. You may add any additional psscale options from the list: A B E I L M N S and Z. C textcolor The C record species the color with which the remaining text is to be printed. textcolor can be in the form r/g/b, c/m/y/k, or a named color. D offset pen The D record results in a horizontal line with specied pen across the legend with one quarter of the line spacing left blank above and below the line. Two gaps of offset units are left blank between the horizontal line and the left and right frame sides. (See SPECIFYING PENS below). G gap The G record species a vertical gap of the given length. In addition to the standard units (i, c, p) you may use l for lines.
H fontsize|- font|- header The H record plots a centered text string using the specied font parameters. Use - to default to HEADER_FONT_SIZE and HEADER_FONT. I imagele width justication Place an EPS or Sun raster image in the legend justied relative to the current point. The image width determines the size of the image on the page. L fontsize|- font|- justication label The L record plots a (L)eft, (C)entered, or (R)ight-justied text string within a column using the specied font parameters. Use - to default to LABEL_FONT_SIZE and LABEL_FONT. M slon|- slat length f|p [ Rw/e/s/n Jparam ] Place a map scale in the legend. Specify slon slat, the point on the map where the scale applies (slon is only meaningful for certain oblique projections. If not needed, you must specify - instead), length, the length of the scale in km (append m or n for miles or nautical miles), and f or p for fancy or plain scale. If the R J supplied to pslegend is different than the projection needed for the scale, supply the optional R J settings as well. Append +l to the length to select the default label which equals the distance unit (km,
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSLEGEND(1)
PSLEGEND(1)
miles, nautical miles) and is justied on top of the scale [t]. Change this by giving your own label (append +llabel). Change label justication with +jjustication (choose among l(eft), r(ight), t(op), and b(ottom)). Apply +u to append the unit to all distance annotations along the scale. If you want to place a rectangle behind the scale, specify suitable +ppen and/or +fll parameters. All these +modiers are appended to length to make a single string. (See SPECIFYING PENS and SPECIFYING FILL below). N ncolumns Change the number of columns in the legend [1]. This only affects the printing of symbols (S) and labels (L). S dx1 symbol size ll pen [ dx2 text ] Plots the selected symbol with specied size, ll, and outline (see psxy). The symbol is centered at dx1 from the left margin of the column, with the optional explanatory text starting dx2 from the margin, printed with fontsize ANNOT_FONT_SIZE_PRIMARY and font ANNOT_FONT_PRIMARY. Use - if no ll or outline (pen) is required. When plotting just a symbol, without text, dx2 and text can be omitted. Two psxy symbols require special attention: front (f) and vector (v). You must prepend the length of the desired item to the rest of the symbol argument; this will be used internally to set the correct fault or vector length and will be stripped before passing the arguments to psxy. T paragraph-text One or more of these T records with paragraph-text printed with fontsize ANNOT_FONT_SIZE_PRIMARY and font ANNOT_FONT_PRIMARY (aligned and wrapped). To specify special positioning and typesetting arrangements, or to enter a paragraph break, use the optional > record. V offset pen The V record draws a vertical line between columns (if more than one) using the selected pen (See SPECIFYING PENS below). offset is analogous to the offset for the D records but in the vertical direction. > paragraph-mode-header-for-pstext Start a new text paragraph by specifying all the parameters needed (see pstext m description). Note that pslegend knows what all those values should be, so normally you can leave the entire record (after >) blank or leave it out all together. If you need to set at least one of the parameters directly, you must specify all and set the ones you want to leave at their default value to -. D Positions the legend and species its size. The just is a 2-char justication string (see pstext) that relates the given position to a point on the rectangular legend box. If you want to specify the position in map plot units (i.e., inches or cm), use Dx. Selects the map projection. Scale is UNIT/degree, 1:xxxxx, or width in UNIT (upper case modier). UNIT is cm, inch, or m, depending on the MEASURE_UNIT setting in .gmtdefaults4, but this can be overridden on the command line by appending c, i, or m to the scale/width value. When central meridian is optional, default is center of longitude range on R option. Default standard parallel is the equator. For map height, max dimension, or min dimension, append h, +, or to the width, respectively. More details can be found in the psbasemap man pages. CYLINDRICAL PROJECTIONS: Jclon0/lat0/scale (Cassini) Jcyl_stere/[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Stereographic) Jj[lon0/]scale (Miller) Jm[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Mercator) Jmlon0/lat0/scale (Mercator - Give meridian and standard parallel) Jo[a]lon0/lat0/azimuth/scale (Oblique Mercator - point and azimuth)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSLEGEND(1)
PSLEGEND(1)
Jo[b]lon0/lat0/lon1/lat1/scale (Oblique Mercator - two points) Joclon0/lat0/lonp/latp/scale (Oblique Mercator - point and pole) Jq[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Equidistant) Jtlon0/[lat0/]scale (TM - Transverse Mercator) Juzone/scale (UTM - Universal Transverse Mercator) Jy[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Equal-Area) CONIC PROJECTIONS: Jblon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Albers) Jdlon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Conic Equidistant) Jllon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Lambert Conic Conformal) Jpoly/[lon0/[lat0/]]scale ((American) Polyconic) AZIMUTHAL PROJECTIONS: Jalon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Lambert Azimuthal Equal-Area) Jelon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Azimuthal Equidistant) Jflon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Gnomonic) Jglon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Orthographic) Jglon0/lat0/altitude/azimuth/tilt/twist/Width/Height/scale (General Perspective). Jslon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (General Stereographic) MISCELLANEOUS PROJECTIONS: Jh[lon0/]scale (Hammer) Ji[lon0/]scale (Sinusoidal) Jkf[lon0/]scale (Eckert IV) Jk[s][lon0/]scale (Eckert VI) Jn[lon0/]scale (Robinson) Jr[lon0/]scale (Winkel Tripel) Jv[lon0/]scale (Van der Grinten) Jw[lon0/]scale (Mollweide) NON-GEOGRAPHICAL PROJECTIONS: Jp[a]scale[/origin][r|z] (Polar coordinates (theta,r)) Jxx-scale[d|l|ppow|t|T][/y-scale[d|l|ppow|t|T]] (Linear, log, and power scaling) R xmin, xmax, ymin, and ymax specify the Region of interest. For geographic regions, these limits correspond to west, east, south, and north and you may specify them in decimal degrees or in [+-]dd:mm[:ss.xxx][W|E|S|N] format. Append r if lower left and upper right map coordinates are given instead of w/e/s/n. The two shorthands Rg and Rd stand for global domain (0/360 and -180/+180 in longitude respectively, with -90/+90 in latitude). Alternatively, specify the name of an existing grid le and the R settings (and grid spacing, if applicable) are copied from the grid. For calendar time coordinates you may either give (a) relative time (relative to the selected TIME_EPOCH and in the selected TIME_UNIT; append t to JX|x), or (b) absolute time of the form [date]T[clock] (append T to JX|x). At least one of date and clock must be present; the T is always required. The date string must be of the form [-]yyyy[-mm[-dd]] (Gregorian calendar) or yyyy[-Www[-d]] (ISO week calendar), while the clock string must be of the form hh:mm:ss[.xxx]. The use of delimiters and their type and positions must be exactly as indicated (however, input, output and plot formats are customizable; see gmtdefaults).
OPTIONS
No space between the option ag and the associated arguments.
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSLEGEND(1)
PSLEGEND(1)
B C F G K L O P S U
Sets map boundary annotation and tickmark intervals; see the psbasemap man page for all the details. Sets the clearance between the legend frame and the internal items [0.15c/0.15c (or 0.05i/0.05i)]. Draws a border around the legend using FRAME_PEN. Select ll shade, color or pattern of the legend box [Default is no ll]. (See SPECIFYING FILL below). More PostScript code will be appended later [Default terminates the plot system]. Sets the linespacing factor in units of the current annotation font size [1.1]. Selects Overlay plot mode [Default initializes a new plot system]. Selects Portrait plotting mode [Default is Landscape, see gmtdefaults to change this]. Instead of writing the PostScript plot [Default], output the GMT script used to make the legend to standard output, or optionally to the le script. Draw Unix System time stamp on plot. By adding just/dx/dy/, the user may specify the justication of the stamp and where the stamp should fall on the page relative to lower left corner of the plot. For example, BL/0/0 will align the lower left corner of the time stamp with the lower left corner of the plot. Optionally, append a label, or c (which will plot the command string.). The GMT parameters UNIX_TIME, UNIX_TIME_POS, and UNIX_TIME_FORMAT can affect the appearance; see the gmtdefaults man page for details. The time string will be in the locale set by the environment variable TZ (generally local time). Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"].
X Y Shift plot origin relative to the current origin by (x-shift,y-shift) and optionally append the length unit (c, i, m, p). You can prepend a to shift the origin back to the original position after plotting, or prepend r [Default] to reset the current origin to the new location. If O is used then the default (x-shift,y-shift) is (0,0), otherwise it is (r1i, r1i) or (r2.5c, r2.5c). Alternatively, give c to align the center coordinate (x or y) of the plot with the center of the page based on current page size. c Species the number of plot copies. [Default is 1]. SPECIFYING PENS pen The attributes of lines and symbol outlines as dened by pen is a comma delimetered list of width, color and texture, each of which is optional. width can be indicated as a measure (points, centimeters, inches) or as faint, thin[ner|nest], thick[er|est], fat[ter|test], or obese. color species a gray shade or color (see SPECIFYING COLOR below). texture is a combination of dashes - and dots .. SPECIFYING FILL ll The attribute ll species the solid shade or solid color (see SPECIFYING COLOR below) or the pattern used for lling polygons. Patterns are specied as pdpi/pattern, where pattern gives the number of the built-in pattern (1-90) or the name of a Sun 1-, 8-, or 24-bit raster le. The dpi sets the resolution of the image. For 1-bit rasters: use Pdpi/pattern for inverse video, or append :Fcolor[B[color]] to specify fore- and background colors (use color = - for transparency). See GMT Cookbook & Technical Reference Appendix E for information on individual patterns. SPECIFYING COLOR color The color of lines, areas and patterns can be specied by a valid color name; by a gray shade (in the range 0255); by a decimal color code (r/g/b, each in range 0255; h-s-v, ranges 0360, 01, 01; or c/m/y/k, each in range 01); or by a hexadecimal color code (#rrggbb, as used in HTML). See the gmtcolors manpage for more information and a full list of color names.
EXAMPLES
To add an example of a legend to a Mercator plot (map.ps) with the given specications, use
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSLEGEND(1)
PSLEGEND(1)
pslegend R-10/10/-10/10 JM6i Gazure1 Dx0.5i/0.5i/5i/3.3i/BL C0.1i/0.1i L1.2 F B5f1 << EOF >> map.ps G -0.1i H 24 Times-Roman My Map Legend D 0.2i 1p N2 V 0 1p S 0.1i c 0.15i p300/12 0.25p 0.3i This circle is hachured S 0.1i e 0.15i 255/255/0 0.25p 0.3i This ellipse is yellow S 0.1i w 0.15i 0/255/0 0.25p 0.3i This wedge is green S 0.1i f 0.25i/-1/0.075ilb 0/0/255 0.25p 0.3i This is a fault S 0.1i - 0.15i - 0.25tap 0.3i A contour S 0.1i v 0.25i/0.02i/0.06i/0.05i 255/0/255 0.25p 0.3i This is a vector S 0.1i i 0.15i 0/255/255 0.25p 0.3i This triangle is boring V 0 1p D 0.2i 1p N1 M 5 5 600+u f G 0.05i I SOEST_logo.ras 3i CT G 0.05i B colors.cpt 0.2i 0.2i G 0.05i L 9 4 R Smith et al., @%5%J. Geophys. Res., 99@%%, 2000 G 0.1i T Let us just try some simple text that can go on a few lines. T There is no easy way to predetermine how many lines will be required, T so we may have to adjust the box height to get the right size box. EOF
WINDOWS REMARKS
Note that under Windows, the percent sign (%) is a variable indicator (like $ under Unix). To indicate a plain percentage sign in a batch script you need to repeat it (%%); hence the font switching mechanism (@%font% and @%%) may require twice the number of percent signs. This only applies to text inside a script or that otherwise is processed by DOS. Data les that are opened and read by pslegend do not need such duplication.
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), gmtcolors(5), gmtdefaults(1), psbasemap(1), pstext(1), psxy(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSLIB(3)
PSLIB(3)
NAME
pslib 4.3 A PostScript based plotting library
DESCRIPTION
pslib was created to make the generation of PostScript page description code easier. It is a library that contains a series of tools that can be used to create plots. The resulting PostScript code is ASCII text and can be edited using any text editor. Thus, it is fairly easy to modify a plot le even after it has been created, e.g., to change text strings, set new gray shades or colors, experiment with various pen widths, etc. pslib is written in C but now includes FORTRAN bindings (thanks to John Goff, WHOI) and can therefore be called from both C and FORTRAN programs. To use this library, you must link your plotting program with pslib.a. pslib is the core of the GMT graphics programs. pslib output conforms to the Adobe Encapsulated PostScript File Specication Version 3.0 (EPSL), and may be used as EPS les and inserted into, say, a Word document on a Mac. See Appendix F in the Technical Reference for detailed instructions. Before any pslib calls can be issued, the plotting system must be initialized. This is done by calling ps_plotinit (or ps_plotinit_hires), which denes macros, sets up the plot-coordinate system, scales, and [optionally] opens a le where all the PostScript code will be written. Normally, the plot code is written to stdout. The measure unit for sizes and positions can be set to be centimeter (c), inch (i), or meter (m). When all plotting is done, you must terminate the plotting system by calling ps_plotend. pslib uses the direct color model where red, green, and blue are given separately, each must be in the range from 0-255. If red < 0 then no ll operation takes place. Most plot-items can be plotted with or without outlines. If outline is desired (i.e., set to 1), it will be drawn using the current linewidth and pattern. pslib uses highly optimized macro substitutions and scales the coordinates depending on the resolution of the hardcopy device so that the output le is kept as compact as possible. A wide variety of output devices that support PostScript exist, including laserwriters (color or monochrome) and workstations running PostScript based window systems like Suns OpenWindows. xnews (part of OpenWindows) or ghostscript (public domain) can be used to create rasterles at a user-dened resolution (DPI), making it possible to render PostScript on a Versatec and other non-PostScript raster devices. Regular Sun rasterles created under NeWS from PostScript les can be sent to a variety of color hardcopy units. Check the devices available on your network. The pslib is now fully 64-bit compliant. However, only a few function parameters are affected by this (such as the number of point in an array which can now be a 64-bit integer). These few parameters are here given the type long to distinguish them from int. Note that under standard 32-bit compilation they are equivalent. Users of this library under 64-bit mode must make sure they pass proper long variables (under Unix avors) or __int64 under Windows 64.
FUNCTION CALLS
The following is a list of available functions and a short description of what they do and what parameters they expect. All oating point variables are expected to be double (i.e., 8 bytes), whereas all integers are assumed to be 4 bytes long. All plotting functions are declared as functions returning an int. Currently, the return value is undened. void ps_arc (x, y, radius, angle1, angle2, status) double x, y, radius, angle1, angle2; int status; Draws a circular arc centered on (x,y) from angle angle1 to angle2. Angles must be given in decimal degrees. If angle1 > angle2, a negative arc is drawn. status is a value from 0 through 3. 1 means set new anchor point, 2 means stroke the circle, 3 means both, 0 means none of the above. void ps_axis (xpos, ypos, length, startval, stopval, tickval, label, annotpointsize, side) double xpos, ypos, length, startval, stopval, tickval; double annotpointsize, side; char *label; Plots an axis with tickmarks, annotation, and label. xpos, ypos, and length are in inches (or cm or meters), annotpointsize in points (72 points = 1 inch), else data units are used. side can be 0,
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSLIB(3)
PSLIB(3)
1, 2, or 3, which selects lower x-axis, right y-axis, upper x-axis, or left y-axis, respectively. labelpointsize = 1.5 * annotpointsize. A negative tickval will reverse the sense of positive direction, e.g., to have the y-axis be positive down. void ps_bitimage (xpos, ypos, xlength, ylength, buffer, nx, ny, invert, f_rgb, b_rgb) double xpos, ypos, xlength, ylength; unsigned char buffer[]; int nx, ny, invert, f_rgb[3], b_rgb[3]; Plots a 1-bit image using the given foreground color f_rgb and background color b_rgb. Specify position of lower left corner and size (in inches) of image. buffer is an unsigned character array with 8 pixels per byte. nx,ny refers to the number of pixels in image. The rowlength of buffer must be an integral number of 8. buffer[0] is upper left corner. buffer values are stored as columns, starting at the lower left corner and ending at the upper right corner. If invert is 0 then the bits that are 1 are painted with the foreground color, while bits that are 0 are painted with the backgound color. If invert is 1, foreground and background are switched. To get a partly transparent image, set the rst index of the foreground or background color to -1, i.e., f_rgb[0]=-1 or b_rgb[0]=1. See the Adobe Systems PostScript Reference Manual for more details. void ps_circle (xcenter, ycenter, diameter, rgb, outline) double xcenter, ycenter, diameter; int rgb[3], outline; Plots a circle and lls it with the specied color. If outline == 1, the outline will be drawn using current pen-width and -pattern. void ps_clipoff () Resets the clip path to what it was before the last call to ps_clipon. void ps_clipon (xarray, yarray, npoints, rgb, ag) double xarray[], yarray[]; long npoints; int rgb[3], ag; Sets up a user-denable clip path. Plotting outside this polygon will be clipped until ps_clipoff is called. If red >= 0 the inside of the path is lled with the specied color. ag is used to create complex clip paths consisting of several disconnected regions, and takes on values 0-3. ag = 1 means this is the rst path in a multi-segment clip path. ag = 2 means this is the last segment. Thus, for a single path, ag = 3. void ps_colorimage (xpos, ypos, xlength, ylength, buffer, nx, ny, depth) double xpos, ypos, xlength, ylength; unsigned char buffer[]; int nx, ny, depth; Plots a 1-, 2-, 4-, 8-, or 24-bit deep image. This functions sets up a call to the PostScript colorimage or image operators. xpos, ypos, xlength, ylength specify the position of lower left corner and size (in inches) of image. The pixel values are stored in buffer, an unsigned character array in scanline orientation with gray shade or r/g/b values (0 - 255) where 0 is black, 255 is white. buffer[0] is upper left corner. depth is number of bits per pixel (24, 8, 4, 2, or 1). nx,ny refers to the number of pixels in image. The rowlength of buffer must be an integral number of 8/depth. E.g. if depth = 4, then buffer[j]/16 gives shade for pixel[2j-1] and buffer[j]%16 (mod 16) gives shade for pixel[2j]. When -depth is passed instead then "hardware" interpolation of the image is requested. If -nx is passed with 8- or 24-bit images then the rst one or three bytes of buffer holds the gray or r/g/b color for pixels that are to be masked out using the PostScript Level 3 Color Mask method. See the Adobe Systems PostScript Reference Manual for more details. void ps_colortiles (x0, y0, xlength, ylength, buffer, nx, ny) double x0, y0, xlength, ylength; int nx, ny;
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSLIB(3)
PSLIB(3)
unsigned char buffer[]; Plots a true color image based on individual color tiles. x0, y0 is the location of the lower left corner of the image in inches. xlength, ylength is the image size in inches. buffer contains rgb triplets stored as rgbrgbrgb... nx, ny is the image size in pixels. void ps_command (text) char *text; Writes a raw PostScript command to the PostScript output le, e.g., "1 setlinejoin". void ps_comment (text) char *text; Writes a comment (text) to the PostScript output le, e.g., "Start of graph 2". void ps_cross (xcenter, ycenter, diameter) double xcenter, ycenter, diameter; Plots a cross (x) at the specied point using current pen-width and -pattern that ts inside a circle of given diameter. No ll possible. void ps_diamond (xcenter, ycenter, diameter, rgb, outline) double xcenter, ycenter, diameter; int rgb[3], outline; Plots a diamond and lls it with the specied color. If outline == 1, the outline will be drawn using current pen-width and -pattern. The symbol will t inside a circle of given diameter. void ps_ellipse (xcenter, ycenter, angle, major, minor, rgb, outline) double xcenter, ycenter, angle, major, minor; int rgb[3], outline; Plots a ellipse with its major axis rotated by angle degrees and lls it with the specied color. If outline == 1, the outline will be drawn using current pen-width and -pattern. void ps_encode_font (font_no) int font_no; Will reencode this font using the current encoding vector if it is not StandardEncoding. void ps_epsimage (xpos, ypos, xlength, ylength, buffer, size, nx, ny, ox, oy) double xpos, ypos, xlength, ylength; unsigned char buffer[]; int size, nx, ny, ox, oy; Plots an Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) image. The EPS le is stored in buffer and has size bytes. This functions simply includes the image in the PostScript output stream within an appropriate wrapper. Specify position of lower left corner and size (in inches) of image. nx,ny,ox,oy refers to the width, height and origin (lower left corner) of the BoundingBox. void ps_ush () Flushes the output buffer. void ps_hexagon (xcenter, ycenter, diameter, rgb, outline) double xcenter, ycenter, diameter; int rgb[3], outline; Plots a hexagon and lls it with the specied color. If outline == 1, the outline will be drawn using current pen-width and -pattern. The symbol will t inside a circle of given diameter. void ps_image (xpos, ypos, xlength, ylength, buffer, nx, ny, bits) double xpos, ypos, xlength, ylength; unsigned char buffer[]; int nx, ny, bits; Obsolete, simply passes arguments to ps_colorimage. void ps_imagell (x, y, n, image, imagele, invert, dpi, outline, f_rgb, b_rgb) double x[], y[], x0, y0; int n, image, invert, dpi, outline, f_rgb[3], b_rgb[3];
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSLIB(3)
PSLIB(3)
char imagele; Similar to ps_polygon, but lls the area with an image pattern rather than a color or grayshade. x and y hold the arrays of n points. 90 predened patterns are available (See GMT Appendix E). image gives the image number (1-90). If set to 0, imagele must be the name to the users image, which must be stored as a Sun 1-, 8-, or 24-bit rasterle. 1-bit images only: (i) The set pixels (1) are colored using the RGB combination in f_rgb, while the unset pixels (0) are painted with b_rgb. Set the f_rgb[0] to -1 to make set pixels transparent. Set b_rgb[0] to -1 to make the unset pixels transparent. (ii) If invert is TRUE (1), the set and unset pixels are interchanged before plotting. The unit size of the image is controlled by dpi (in dots-per-inch). If set to zero, the image is plotted at the device resolution. If outline is TRUE, the current penwidth is used to draw the polygon outline. void ps_itriangle (xcenter, ycenter, diameter, rgb, outline) double xcenter, ycenter, diameter; int rgb[3], outline; Plots an inverted and lls it with the specied color. If outline == 1, the outline will be drawn using current pen-width and -pattern. The symbol will t inside a circle of given diameter. long ps_line (xarray, yarray, npoints, type, close, dummy) double xarray[], yarray[]; long npoints; int type, close, dummy; Draw a continuous line from the positions in the x-y arrays. If close == 1, the rst and last point will automatically be closed by the PostScript driver. If this is the rst segment in a multi-segment path, set type == 1. To end the segments and have the line(s) drawn, set type == 2. Thus, for a single segment, type must be 3. The line is drawn using the current penwidth. The dummy is an obsolete parameter no longer used internally. unsigned char *ps_load_image (fp, header) FILE *fp; struct imageinfo *header; Reads the image contents of the EPS le or Sun rasterle pointed to by the open lepointer fp. The routine can handle Encapsulated PostScript les or 1-, 8-, 24-, or 32-bit rasterles in old, standard, run-length encoded, or RGB-style Sun format. void ps_octagon (xcenter, ycenter, diameter, rgb, outline) double xcenter, ycenter, diameter; int rgb[3], outline; Plots a octagon and lls it with the specied color. If outline == 1, the outline will be drawn using current pen-width and -pattern. The symbol will t inside a circle of given diameter. void ps_patch (xarray, yarray, npoints, rgb, outline) double xarray[], yarray[]; long npoints; int rgb[3], outline; Identical to ps_polygon except polygon must be < 20 points long and there will be no attempt to shorten the path by discarding unnecessary intermediate points along straight segments. Primarily used when painting large number of small polygons and not waste output space. If more than 20 points are given we pass the buck to ps_polygon. void ps_pentagon (xcenter, ycenter, diameter, rgb, outline) double xcenter, ycenter, diameter; int rgb[3], outline; Plots a pentagon and lls it with the specied color. If outline == 1, the outline will be drawn using current pen-width and -pattern. The symbol will t inside a circle of given diameter. void ps_pie (xcenter, ycenter, radius, azimuth1, azimuth2, rgb, outline) double xcenter, ycenter, radius, azimuth1, azimuth2;
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSLIB(3)
PSLIB(3)
int rgb[3], outline; Plots a sector of a circle and paints it with the specied RGB combination. If outline == 1, the outline will be drawn using current pen-width and -pattern. void ps_plot (xabs, yabs, kpen) double xabs, yabs; int kpen; Absolute move (kpen=3) or draw (kpen=2), using current linewidth. Use (kpen=-2) to make sure the line is stroked. void ps_plotend (last_page) int last_page; Terminates the plotting sequence and closes plot le (if other than stdout). If last_page == 1, then a PostScript showpage command is issued, which initiates the printing process on hardcopy devices. void ps_plotinit (plotle, overlay, mode, xoff, yoff, xscl, yscl, ncopies, dpi, unit, pagesize, rgb, encoding, eps) char *plotle, *encoding; int overlay, mode, ncopies, dpi, unit; double xoff, yoff, xscl, yscl; int pagesize[2], rgb[3]; struct EPS * eps; Initializes the plotting. If plotle == NULL (or ""), then output is sent to stdout, else output is sent to plotle. overlay should be 1 only if you plan to append it to some existing PostScript le. mode contains three ags in the three lowest bits. The lowest bit controls the plot orientation and can be 0 (Landscape) or 1 (Portrait). The next bit, if set to 1, will re-encode the fonts to include European accented characters using the now-obsolete GMT 3.4 encoding. To use the ISOLatin1 encoding set the 5th bit to 1. The third bit controls the format used to write PostScript images: 0 means binary, 1 means hexadecimal. Most printers needs the latter while some can handle binary which are 50% smaller and therefore execute faster. xoff,yoff are used to move the origin from the default position in the lower left corner. xscl,yscl are used to scale the entire plot (Usually set to 1.0, 1.0). Set ncopies to get more than 1 copy. dpi sets the hardcopy resolution in dots pr units. For optimum plot quality and processing speed, choose dpi to match the intended plotter resolution. Examples are 300 for most laserwriters, 2540 for Linotype-300, and 85 for Sun screens. When in doubt, use 300. unit can be any of 0 (cm), 1 (inch), or 2 (m), telling the plot system what units are used for distance and sizes. Note that, regardless of choice of unit, dpi is still in dots-pr-inch. pagesize means the physical width and height of the plotting media in points, (typically 612 by 792 for Letter or 595 by 842 for A4 laserwriter plotters. The rgb array holds the color of the page (usually white = 255,255,255). The encoding is the name of a character encoding scheme to be used, e.g., Standard, ISOLatin1, ISO-8859-2, etc. The EPS structure is dened in the pslib.h include le and contains information that will make up the comments header of a EPS le. Programmers who plan to call pslib routines should read the comments in pslib.h rst. Note that the FORTRAN binding does not expect this last argument. void ps_plotinit_hires (plotle, overlay, mode, xoff, yoff, xscl, yscl, ncopies, dpi, unit, pagesize, rgb, encoding, eps) char *plotle, *encoding; int overlay, mode, ncopies, dpi, unit, rgb[3]; double xoff, yoff, xscl, yscl; double pagesize[2]; struct EPS * eps; Same as ps_plotinit but expects the page size to be given in double precision points. void ps_plotr (xrel, yrel, kpen) double xrel, yrel; int kpen; Move (kpen = 3) or draw (kpen = 2) relative to current point (see ps_plot). Use (kpen=-2) to
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSLIB(3)
PSLIB(3)
make sure the line is stroked. void ps_plus (xcenter, ycenter, diameter) double xcenter, ycenter, diameter; Plots a plus (+) at the specied point using current pen-width and -pattern that ts inside a circle of given diameter. No ll possible. void ps_point (xcenter, ycenter, diameter) double xcenter, ycenter, diameter; Plots a point (dot) using current pen with given diameter. Note the linecap setting must rst be set to 1 for this function to work. void ps_polygon (xarray, yarray, npoints, rgb, outline) double xarray[], yarray[]; long npoints; int rgb[3], outline; Creates a colored polygon from the positions in the x-y arrays. Polygon will automatically be closed by the PostScript driver. If outline == 0, no outline is drawn. If outline == 1, the outline is drawn using current penwidth. void ps_rect (x1, y1, x2, y2, rgb, outline) double x1, y1, x2, y2; int rgb[3], outline; Plots a colored rectangle. (x1,y1) and (x2,y2) are any two corners on a diagonal. If outline == 1, the outline will be drawn using current pen-width and -pattern. void ps_rotaterect (x, y, angle, xsize, ysize, rgb, outline) double x, y, angle, xsize, ysize; int rgb[3], outline; Plots a colored rectangle rotated angle degrees from baseline. (x,y) is the center and (xsize,ysize) are the dimensions. If outline == 1, the outline will be drawn using current penwidth and -pattern. void ps_rotatetrans (x, y, angle) double x, y, angle; Rotates the coordinate system by angle degrees, then translates origin to (x,y). void ps_segment (x0, y0, x1, y1) double x0, y0, x1, y1; Draws a line segment between the two points using current pen attributes. void ps_setdash (pattern, offset) char *pattern; int offset; Changes the current dashpattern. The character string pattern is set to the desired pattern. E.g., "4 2" and offset = 1 will plot like: x ---- ---- ---etc, where x is starting point (The x is not plotted). That is, the line is made up of a repeating pattern of a 4 units long line and a 2 unit long gap, starting 1 unit after the x. To reset to solid line, specify pattern = NULL ("") and offset = 0. Units are in dpi units. void ps_setll (rgb, outline) int rgb[3], outline; Sets the current ll color and whether or not outline is needed for symbols. void ps_setfont (fontnr) int fontnr; Changes the current font number to fontnr. The fonts available are: 0 = Helvetica, 1 = H. Bold, 2 = H. Oblique, 3 = H. Bold-Oblique, 4 = Times, 5 = T. Bold, 6 = T. Italic, 7 = T. Bold Italic, 8 = Courier, 9 = C. Bold, 10 = C Oblique, 11 = C Bold Oblique, 12 = Symbol, 13 =
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSLIB(3)
PSLIB(3)
AvantGarde-Book, 14 = A.-BookOblique, 15 = A.-Demi, 16 = A.-DemiOblique, 17 = Bookman-Demi, 18 = B.-DemiItalic, 19 = B.-Light, 20 = B.-LightItalic, 21 = Helvetica-Narrow, 22 = H-N-Bold, 23 = H-N-Oblique, 24 = H-N-BoldOblique, 25 = NewCenturySchlbk-Roman, 26 = N.-Italic, 27 = N.-Bold, 28 = N.-BoldItalic, 29 = Palatino-Roman, 30 = P.-Italic, 31 = P.-Bold, 32 = P.-BoldItalic, 33 = ZapfChancery-MediumItalic, 34 = ZapfDingbats, 35 = Ryumin-Light-EUC-H, 36 = Ryumin-Light-EUC-V, 37 = GothicBBB-Medium-EUC-H, and 38 = GothicBBB-Medium-EUC-V. If fontnr is outside this range, it is set to 0. void ps_setformat (n_decimals) int n_decimals; Sets number of decimals to be used when writing color or gray values. The default setting of 3 gives 1000 choices per red, green, and blue value, which is more than the 255 choices offered by most 24-bit platforms. Choosing a lower value will make the output le smaller at the expense of less color resolution. Still, a value of 2 gives 100 x 100 x 100 = 1 million colors, more than most eyes can distinguish. For a setting of 1, you will have 10 nuances per primary color and a total of 1000 unique combinations. void ps_setline (linewidth) int linewidth; Changes the current linewidth in DPI units. 0 gives thinnest line, but the use of 0 is implementation-dependent (Works ne on most laserwriters). void ps_setlinecap (cap) int cap; Changes the current linecap. 0 gives butt cap [Default], 1 gives round, and 2 gives square. void ps_setlinejoin (join) int join; Changes the current linejoin. 0 gives mitered [Default], 1 gives round, and 2 gives bevel joins. void ps_setmiterlimit (limit) int limit; Changes the current miter limit. 0 gives default miter, other values are the cutoff-, acute- angle when mitering takes place. void ps_setpaint (rgb) int rgb[3]; Changes the current RGB setting for pens and text. void ps_square (xcenter, ycenter, diameter, rgb, outline) double xcenter, ycenter, diameter; int rgb[3], outline; Plots a square and lls it with the specied color. If outline == 1, the outline will be drawn using current pen-width and -pattern. The symbol will t inside a circle of given diameter. void ps_star (xcenter, ycenter, diameter, rgb, outline) double xcenter, ycenter, diameter; int rgb[3], outline; Plots a star and lls it with the specied color. If outline == 1, the outline will be drawn using current pen-width and -pattern. The symbol will t inside a circle of given diameter. void ps_text (x, y, pointsize, text, angle, justify, form) double x, y, pointsize, angle; char *text; int justify, form; The text is plotted starting at (x,y), and will make an angle with the horizontal. The point (x,y) maps onto different points of the textstring by giving various values for justify. It is used as follows: 9------------10----------- 11
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSLIB(3)
PSLIB(3)
| | 5 6 7 | | 1------------ 2------------ 3 The box represents the textstring. E.g., to plot a textstring with its center of gravity at (x,y), you must use justify == 6. If justify is negative, then all leading and trailing blanks are stripped before plotting. Certain character sequences (ags) have special meaning to ps_text. @ toggles between current font and the Mathematical Symbols font. @%no% sets font to no; @%% resets to starting font. @- turns subscript on/off, @+ turns superscript on/off, @# turns small caps on/off, and @\ will make a composite character of the following two character. @;r/g/b; changes the font color (@;; resets it), @:size: changes the font size (@:: resets it), and @_ toggles underline on/off. Give fontsize in points (72 points = 1 inch). Normally, the text is typed using solid characters. To draw outline characters, set form == 1. If pointsize is negative it means that the current point has already been set before ps_text was called and that (x,y) should be ignored. void ps_textbox (x, y, pointsize, text, angle, justify, outline, dx, dy, rgb) double x, y, angle, pointsize, dx, dy; char *text; int justify, outline, rgb[3]; This function is used in conjugation with ps_text when a box surrounding the text string is desired. Taking most of the arguments of ps_text, the user must also specify the color of the resulting rectangle, and whether its outline should be drawn. More room between text and rectangle can be obtained by setting dx and dy accordingly. void ps_transrotate (x, y, angle) double x, y, angle; Translates the origin to (x,y), then rotates the coordinate system by angle degrees. void ps_triangle (xcenter, ycenter, diameter, rgb, outline) double xcenter, ycenter, diameter; int rgb[3], outline; Plots a triangle and paints it with the specied RGB combination. If outline == 1, the outline will be drawn using current pen-width and -pattern. The symbol will t inside a circle of given diameter. void ps_vector (xtail, ytail, xtip, ytip, tailwidth, headlength, headwidth, headshape, rgb, outline) double xtail, ytail, xtip, ytip, tailwidth, headlength, headwidth, headshape; int rgb[3], outline; Draws a vector of size and appearance as specied by the various parameters. headshape can take on values from 0-1 and species how far the intersection point between the base of a straight vector head and the vector line is moved toward the tip. 0 gives a triangular head, 1.0 gives an arrow shaped head. If outline == 1, the outline will be drawn using current penwidth. Add 8 to outline for a double-headed vector. void ps_words (x, y, text, n_words, line_space, par_width, par_just, font, font_size, angle, rgb, justify, draw_box, x_off, y_off, x_gap, y_gap, boxpen_width, boxpen_texture, boxpen_offset, boxpen_rgb, vecpen_width, vecpen_texture, vecpen_offset, vecpen_rgb, boxll_rgb) double x, y, line_space, par_width, angle, x_off, y_off, x_gap, y_gap; long n_words; int font, font_size, justify, draw_box, boxpen_width, boxpen_offset; int boxpen_rgb[3], vecpen_width, vecpen_offset, vecpen_rgb[3], boxll_rgb[3]; char **text, *boxpen_texture, *vecpen_texture; Typesets paragraphs of text. text is an array of the words to typeset, using the given line-spacing and paragraph width. The whole text block is positioned at x, y which is the anchor point on the box as indicated by justify (see ps_text). The whole block is then shifted by x_off, y_off. Inside the box, text is justied left, centered, right, or justied as governed by par_just (lcrj).
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSLIB(3)
PSLIB(3)
draw_box contains 4 bit ags pertaining to the surrounding outline box. If on, the rst (lowest) bit draws the box outline. The second bit lls the box interior. The third bit makes the outline box have rounded corners (unless x_gap, y_gap, which species the padding between the text and the box, are zero), while the forth bit draws a line from the original x, y point to the shifted position. The escape sequences described for ps_text applies as well.
AUTHOR
Paul Wessel, School of Ocean and Earth Science and Technology, 1680 East-West Road, Honolulu, Hawaii 96822, (808) 956-4778, Internet address: [email protected].
BUGS
Caveat Emptor: The author is not responsible for any disasters, suicide attempts, or ulcers caused by correct or incorrect use of pslib. If you nd bugs, please report them to the author by electronic mail. Be sure to provide enough detail so that I can recreate the problem.
REFERENCES
Adobe Systems Inc., 1990, PostScript language reference manual, 2nd edition, Addison-Wesley, (ISBN 0-201-18127-4).
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSMASK(1)
PSMASK(1)
NAME
psmask To clip or mask areas of no data on a map
SYNOPSIS
psmask [xyzle] Ixinc[unit][=|+][/yinc[unit][=|+]] Jparameters Rwest/east/south/north[r] [ B[p|s]parameters ] [ Ddumple ] [ Eazim/elev[+wlon/lat[/z]][+vx0/y0] ] [ F ] [ Gll ] [ H[i][nrec] ] [ K ] [ N ] [ O ] [ P ] [ Ssearch_radius[m|c|k|K] ] [ T ] [ U[just/dx/dy/][c|label] ] [ V ] [ X[a|c|r][x-shift[u]] ] [ Y[a|c|r][y-shift[u]] ] [ ccopies ] [ :[i|o] ] [ bi[s|S|d|D[ncol]|c[var1/...]] ] [ m[ag] ] psmask C [ K ] [ O ]
DESCRIPTION
psmask reads a (x,y,z) le [or standard input] and uses this information to nd out which grid cells are reliable. Only gridcells which have one or more data points are considered reliable. As an option, you may specify a radius of inuence. Then, all gridcells that are within radius of a data point are considered reliable. Furthermore, an option is provided to reverse the sense of the test. Having found the reliable/not reliable points, psmask will either paint tiles to mask these nodes (with the T switch), or use contouring to create polygons that will clip out regions of no interest. When clipping is initiated, it will stay in effect until turned off by a second call to psmask using the C option. xyzle I File with (x,y,z) values (e.g., that was used to run surface). If no le is given, standard input is read. For binary les, see b. x_inc [and optionally y_inc] is the grid spacing. Optionally, append a sufx modier. Geographical (degrees) coordinates: Append m to indicate arc minutes or c to indicate arc seconds. If one of the units e, k, i, or n is appended instead, the increment is assumed to be given in meter, km, miles, or nautical miles, respectively, and will be converted to the equivalent degrees longitude at the middle latitude of the region (the conversion depends on ELLIPSOID). If /y_inc is given but set to 0 it will be reset equal to x_inc; otherwise it will be converted to degrees latitude. All coordinates: If = is appended then the corresponding max x (east) or y (north) may be slightly adjusted to t exactly the given increment [by default the increment may be adjusted slightly to t the given domain]. Finally, instead of giving an increment you may specify the number of nodes desired by appending + to the supplied integer argument; the increment is then recalculated from the number of nodes and the domain. The resulting increment value depends on whether you have selected a gridline-registered or pixel-registered grid; see Appendix B for details. Note: if Rgrdle is used then grid spacing has already been initialized; use I to override the values. Selects the map projection. Scale is UNIT/degree, 1:xxxxx, or width in UNIT (upper case modier). UNIT is cm, inch, or m, depending on the MEASURE_UNIT setting in .gmtdefaults4, but this can be overridden on the command line by appending c, i, or m to the scale/width value. When central meridian is optional, default is center of longitude range on R option. Default standard parallel is the equator. For map height, max dimension, or min dimension, append h, +, or to the width, respectively. More details can be found in the psbasemap man pages. CYLINDRICAL PROJECTIONS: Jclon0/lat0/scale (Cassini) Jcyl_stere/[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Stereographic) Jj[lon0/]scale (Miller) Jm[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Mercator) Jmlon0/lat0/scale (Mercator - Give meridian and standard parallel) Jo[a]lon0/lat0/azimuth/scale (Oblique Mercator - point and azimuth) Jo[b]lon0/lat0/lon1/lat1/scale (Oblique Mercator - two points) Joclon0/lat0/lonp/latp/scale (Oblique Mercator - point and pole) Jq[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Equidistant)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSMASK(1)
PSMASK(1)
Jtlon0/[lat0/]scale (TM - Transverse Mercator) Juzone/scale (UTM - Universal Transverse Mercator) Jy[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Equal-Area) CONIC PROJECTIONS: Jblon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Albers) Jdlon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Conic Equidistant) Jllon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Lambert Conic Conformal) Jpoly/[lon0/[lat0/]]scale ((American) Polyconic) AZIMUTHAL PROJECTIONS: Jalon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Lambert Azimuthal Equal-Area) Jelon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Azimuthal Equidistant) Jflon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Gnomonic) Jglon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Orthographic) Jglon0/lat0/altitude/azimuth/tilt/twist/Width/Height/scale (General Perspective). Jslon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (General Stereographic) MISCELLANEOUS PROJECTIONS: Jh[lon0/]scale (Hammer) Ji[lon0/]scale (Sinusoidal) Jkf[lon0/]scale (Eckert IV) Jk[s][lon0/]scale (Eckert VI) Jn[lon0/]scale (Robinson) Jr[lon0/]scale (Winkel Tripel) Jv[lon0/]scale (Van der Grinten) Jw[lon0/]scale (Mollweide) NON-GEOGRAPHICAL PROJECTIONS: Jp[a]scale[/origin][r|z] (Polar coordinates (theta,r)) Jxx-scale[d|l|ppow|t|T][/y-scale[d|l|ppow|t|T]] (Linear, log, and power scaling) R xmin, xmax, ymin, and ymax specify the Region of interest. For geographic regions, these limits correspond to west, east, south, and north and you may specify them in decimal degrees or in [+-]dd:mm[:ss.xxx][W|E|S|N] format. Append r if lower left and upper right map coordinates are given instead of w/e/s/n. The two shorthands Rg and Rd stand for global domain (0/360 and -180/+180 in longitude respectively, with -90/+90 in latitude). Alternatively, specify the name of an existing grid le and the R settings (and grid spacing, if applicable) are copied from the grid. For calendar time coordinates you may either give (a) relative time (relative to the selected TIME_EPOCH and in the selected TIME_UNIT; append t to JX|x), or (b) absolute time of the form [date]T[clock] (append T to JX|x). At least one of date and clock must be present; the T is always required. The date string must be of the form [-]yyyy[-mm[-dd]] (Gregorian calendar) or yyyy[-Www[-d]] (ISO week calendar), while the clock string must be of the form hh:mm:ss[.xxx]. The use of delimiters and their type and positions must be exactly as indicated (however, input, output and plot formats are customizable; see gmtdefaults).
OPTIONS
No space between the option ag and the associated arguments. B Sets map boundary annotation and tickmark intervals; see the psbasemap man page for all the details.
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSMASK(1)
PSMASK(1)
C D
Mark end of existing clip path. No input le is needed. Implicitly sets O. However, you must supply Xa and Ya settings if you are using absolute positioning. Dumps out the resulting clipping polygons to disk. Ignored if T is set. If no dumpprex is given we use mask (Files will be called mask_*.d). Append +n<n_pts> to limit the number of points in les to a minimum of n_pts. That is, do not write individual polygon les if they do not have at least n_pts vertices. Often, when one uses the D option it is not wished to output any ps code to stdout. In such cases redirect the output to > /dev/null on *nix systems or to > nul on Windows. Sets the viewpoints azimuth and elevation (for perspective view) [180/90]. For frames used for animation, you may want to append + to x the center of your data domain (or specify a particular world coordinate point with +wlon0/lat[/z]) which will project to the center of your page size (or specify the coordinates of the projected view point with +vx0/y0). Force pixel node registration [Default is gridline registration]. (Node registrations are dened in GMT Cookbook Appendix B on grid le formats.) Paint the clip polygons (or tiles) with a selected ll [Default is no ll]. (See SPECIFYING FILL below). Input le(s) has header record(s). If used, the default number of header records is N_HEADER_RECS. Use Hi if only input data should have header records [Default will write out header records if the input data have them]. Blank lines and lines starting with # are always skipped. Not used with binary data. More PostScript code will be appended later [Default terminates the plot system]. Invert the sense of the test, i.e., clip regions where there is data coverage. Selects Overlay plot mode [Default initializes a new plot system]. Selects Portrait plotting mode [Default is Landscape, see gmtdefaults to change this]. Sets radius of inuence. Grid nodes within radius of a data point are considered reliable. [Default is 0, which means that only grid cells with data in them are reliable]. Append m to indicate minutes or c to indicate seconds. Append k to indicate km (implies R and I are in degrees, and we will use a fast at Earth approximation to calculate distance). For more accuracy, use uppercase K if distances should be calculated along geodesics. However, if the current ELLIPSOID is spherical then great circle calculations are used. Plot tiles instead of clip polygons. Use G to set tile color or pattern. Draw Unix System time stamp on plot. By adding just/dx/dy/, the user may specify the justication of the stamp and where the stamp should fall on the page relative to lower left corner of the plot. For example, BL/0/0 will align the lower left corner of the time stamp with the lower left corner of the plot. Optionally, append a label, or c (which will plot the command string.). The GMT parameters UNIX_TIME, UNIX_TIME_POS, and UNIX_TIME_FORMAT can affect the appearance; see the gmtdefaults man page for details. The time string will be in the locale set by the environment variable TZ (generally local time). Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"].
F G H
K N O P S
T U
X Y Shift plot origin relative to the current origin by (x-shift,y-shift) and optionally append the length unit (c, i, m, p). You can prepend a to shift the origin back to the original position after plotting, or prepend r [Default] to reset the current origin to the new location. If O is used then the default (x-shift,y-shift) is (0,0), otherwise it is (r1i, r1i) or (r2.5c, r2.5c). Alternatively, give c to align the center coordinate (x or y) of the plot with the center of the page based on current page size. : bi Toggles between (longitude,latitude) and (latitude,longitude) input and/or output. [Default is (longitude,latitude)]. Append i to select input only or o to select output only. [Default affects both]. Selects binary input. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of columns in your binary input le if
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSMASK(1)
PSMASK(1)
it exceeds the columns needed by the program. Or append c if the input le is netCDF. Optionally, append var1/var2/... to specify the variables to be read. [Default is 2 input columns]. c m Species the number of plot copies. [Default is 1]. Multiple segment le(s). Segments are separated by a special record. For ASCII les the rst character must be ag [Default is >]. For binary les all elds must be NaN and b must set the number of output columns explicitly. By default the m setting applies to both input and output. Use mi and mo to give separate settings to input and output.
SPECIFYING FILL ll The attribute ll species the solid shade or solid color (see SPECIFYING COLOR below) or the pattern used for lling polygons. Patterns are specied as pdpi/pattern, where pattern gives the number of the built-in pattern (1-90) or the name of a Sun 1-, 8-, or 24-bit raster le. The dpi sets the resolution of the image. For 1-bit rasters: use Pdpi/pattern for inverse video, or append :Fcolor[B[color]] to specify fore- and background colors (use color = - for transparency). See GMT Cookbook & Technical Reference Appendix E for information on individual patterns. SPECIFYING COLOR color The color of lines, areas and patterns can be specied by a valid color name; by a gray shade (in the range 0255); by a decimal color code (r/g/b, each in range 0255; h-s-v, ranges 0360, 01, 01; or c/m/y/k, each in range 01); or by a hexadecimal color code (#rrggbb, as used in HTML). See the gmtcolors manpage for more information and a full list of color names.
EXAMPLES
To make an overlay PostScript le that will mask out the regions of a contour map where there is no control data using clip polygons, use: psmask africa_grav.xyg R20/40/20/40 I5m JM10i O K > mask.ps The same example but this time we use white tiling: psmask africa_grav.xyg R20/40/20/40 I5m JM10i T O K Gwhite > mask.ps
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), gmtcolors(5), grdmask(1), surface(1), psbasemap(1), psclip(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSROSE(1)
PSROSE(1)
NAME
psrose Plot (length, azimuth) as windrose diagram or polar histogram (sector or rose diagram).
SYNOPSIS
psrose le [ Asector_width[r] ] [ B[p|s]parameters ] [ C[mode_le] ] [ D ] [ Eazimuth/elevation ] [ I ] [ Gll ] [ H[i][nrec] ] [ I ] [ K ] [ L[wlabel/elabel/slabel/nlabel] ] [ M[parameters ] [ O ] [ P ] [ Rr0/r1/az_0/az_1 ] [ Sradial_scale[n] ] [ T ] [ U[just/dx/dy/][c|label] ] [ V ] [ Wpen ] [ X[a|c|r][x-shift[u]] ] [ Y[a|c|r][y-shift[u]] ] [ Zscale ] [ ccopies ] [ :[i|o] ] [ bi[s|S|d|D[ncol]|c[var1/...]] ]
DESCRIPTION
psrose reads (length,azimuth) pairs from le [or standard input] and generates PostScript code that will plot a windrose diagram. Optionally (with A), polar histograms may be drawn (sector diagram or rose diagram). Options include full circle and half circle plots. The PostScript code is written to standard output. le Name of ASCII [or binary, see b] data le. If no le is given, psrose will read standard input.
OPTIONS
No space between the option ag and the associated arguments. A B Gives the sector width in degrees for sector and rose diagram. [Default 0 means windrose diagram]. Append r to draw rose diagram instead of sector diagram. Sets map boundary annotation and tickmark intervals; see the psbasemap man page for all the details. Remember that "x" here is radial distance and "y" is azimuth. The ylabel may be used to plot a gure caption. Plot vectors showing the principal directions given in the modes le. If no le is given, compute and plot mean direction. Shift sectors so that they are centered on the bin interval (e.g., rst sector is centered on 0 degrees). Sets the viewpoints azimuth and elevation [180/90] Do not draw the scale length bar [Default plots scale in lower right corner] Selects shade, color or pattern for lling the sectors [Default is no ll]. (See SPECIFYING FILL below). Input le(s) has header record(s). If used, the default number of header records is N_HEADER_RECS. Use Hi if only input data should have header records [Default will write out header records if the input data have them]. Blank lines and lines starting with # are always skipped. Inquire. Computes statistics needed to specify useful R. No plot is generated. More PostScript code will be appended later [Default terminates the plot system]. Specify labels for the 0, 90, 180, and 270 degree marks. For full-circle plot the default is WEST/EAST/SOUTH/NORTH and for half-circle the default is 90W/90E/-/0. A - in any entry disables that label. Use L with no argument to disable all four labels Specify new arrow attributes tailwidth/headlength/headwidth/r/g/b to change the appearance of arrows (Only if C is set). [Default is 0.075c/0.3c/0.25c/0/0/0 (or 0.03i/0.12i/0.1i/0/0/0)]. Selects Overlay plot mode [Default initializes a new plot system]. Selects Portrait plotting mode [Default is Landscape, see gmtdefaults to change this]. Species the region of interest in (r,azimuth) space. r0 is 0, r1 is max length in units. For azimuth, specify -90/90 for half circle plot or 0/360 for full circle. Species radius of circle. Append n to normalize input radii to go from 0 to 1. Species that the input data is orientation data (has a 180 degree ambiguity) instead of true 0-360 degree directions [Default].
C D E F G H
I K L
M O P R S T
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSROSE(1)
PSROSE(1)
Draw Unix System time stamp on plot. By adding just/dx/dy/, the user may specify the justication of the stamp and where the stamp should fall on the page relative to lower left corner of the plot. For example, BL/0/0 will align the lower left corner of the time stamp with the lower left corner of the plot. Optionally, append a label, or c (which will plot the command string.). The GMT parameters UNIX_TIME, UNIX_TIME_POS, and UNIX_TIME_FORMAT can affect the appearance; see the gmtdefaults man page for details. The time string will be in the locale set by the environment variable TZ (generally local time). Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"]. Set pen attributes for sector outline or rose plot. [Default is no outline]. (See SPECIFYING PENS below).
V W
X Y Shift plot origin relative to the current origin by (x-shift,y-shift) and optionally append the length unit (c, i, m, p). You can prepend a to shift the origin back to the original position after plotting, or prepend r [Default] to reset the current origin to the new location. If O is used then the default (x-shift,y-shift) is (0,0), otherwise it is (r1i, r1i) or (r2.5c, r2.5c). Alternatively, give c to align the center coordinate (x or y) of the plot with the center of the page based on current page size. Z : bi Multiply the data radii by scale. E.g., use Z0.001 to convert your data from m to km [Default is no scaling]. Input le has (azimuth,radius) pairs rather than the expected (radius,azimuth). Selects binary input. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of columns in your binary input le if it exceeds the columns needed by the program. Or append c if the input le is netCDF. Optionally, append var1/var2/... to specify the variables to be read. [Default is 2 input columns]. Species the number of plot copies. [Default is 1].
EXAMPLES
To plot a half circle rose diagram of the data in the le fault_segments.az_r (containing pairs of (azimuth, length in meters), using a 10 degree bin sector width, on a circle of radius = 3 inch, grid going out to radius = 150 km in steps of 25 km with a 30 degree sector interval, radial direction annotated every 50 km, using a light blue shading outlined by a solid red pen (width = 0.75 points), draw the mean azimuth, and shown in Portrait orientation, use: psrose fault_segments.az_r R0/150/-90/90 B50g25:"Fault length":/g30:."Rose diagram": S3i A10r
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSROSE(1)
PSROSE(1)
Glightblue W0.75p,red Z0.001 C P T : | lpr To plot a full circle wind rose diagram of the data in the le lines.r_az, on a circle of radius = 5 cm, grid going out to radius = 500 units in steps of 100 with a 45 degree sector interval, using a solid pen (width = 0.5 point), and shown in landscape [Default] orientation with UNIX timestamp and command line plotted, use: psrose lines.az_r R0/500/0/360 S5c Bg100/g45:."Windrose diagram": W0.5p Uc | lpr
BUGS
No default radial scale and grid settings for polar histograms. User must run psrose I to nd max length in binned data set.
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), gmtcolors(5), gmtdefaults(1), pshistogram(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSSCALE(1)
PSSCALE(1)
NAME
psscale Plot gray scale or color scale on maps
SYNOPSIS
psscale Dxpos/ypos/length/width[h] [ A[a|l|c] ] [ B[p|s]parameters ] [ Ccpt_le ] [ E[b|f][length] ] [ I[max_intens|low_i/high_i] ] [ K ] [ L[i][gap] ] [ M ] [ Ndpi ] [ O ] [ P ] [ Q ] [ U[just/dx/dy/][c|label] ] [ V ] [ X[a|c|r][x-shift[u]] ] [ Y[a|c|r][y-shift[u]] ] [ Zzle ] [ ccopies ]
DESCRIPTION
psscale plots gray scales or color scales on maps. Both horizontal and vertical scales are supported. For cpt_les with gradational colors (i.e., the lower and upper boundary of an interval have different r/g/b values) psscale will interpolate to give a continuous scale. Variations in intensity due to shading/illumination may be displayed by setting the option I. Colors may be spaced according to a linear scale, all be equal size, or by providing a le with individual tile widths. D Denes the position of the center/top (for horizontal scale) or center/left (for vertical scale) and the dimensions of the scale. Give a negative length to reverse the scalebar. Append h to get a horizontal scale [Default is vertical].
OPTIONS
No space between the option ag and the associated arguments. A Place annotations and labels above (instead of below) horizontal scalebars and to the left (instead of the right) of vertical scalebars. Append a or l to move only the annotations or the label to the other side. Append c if you want to print a vertical label as a column of characters (does not work with special characters). Set annotation, tick, and gridline interval for the colorbar. The x-axis label will plot beneath a horizontal bar (or vertically to the right of a vertical bar), except when using A. As an option, use the y-axis label to plot the data unit to the right of a horizontal bar (and above a vertical bar). If B is omitted, or no annotation intervals are provided, the default is to annotate every color level based on the numerical entries in the cpt le (which may be overridden by ULB ags in the cpt le). To specify custom text annotations for intervals, you must append ;annotation to each z-slice in the cpt le. cpt_le is the color palette le to be used. By default all color changes are annotated. To use a subset, add an extra column to the cpt-le with a L, U, or B to annotate Lower, Upper, or Both color segment boundaries (but see B). If not given, psscale will read stdin. Like grdview, psscale can understand pattern specications in the cpt le. Add sidebar triangles for back- and/or foreground colors. Add f or b for only one sidebar triangle [Default gives both]. Optionally, append triangle height [Default is half the barwidth]. Add illumination effects. Optionally, set the range of intensities from - to + max_intens. If not specied, 1 is used. Alternatively, append low/high intensities to specify an asymmetric range [Default is no illumination]. More PostScript code will be appended later [Default terminates the plot system]. Gives equal-sized color rectangles. Default scales rectangles according to the z-range in the cptle (Also see Z). If set, any equal interval annotation set with B will be ignored. If gap is appended and the cpt table is discrete we will center each annotation on each rectangle, using the lower boundary z-value for the annotation. If i is prepended we annotate the interval range instead. If I is used then each rectangle will have its constant color modied by the specied intensity. Force a monochrome graybar using the (television) YIQ transformation. Effective dots-per-inch for the rectangular image making up the color scale [300]. Selects Overlay plot mode [Default initializes a new plot system].
E I
K L
M N O
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSSCALE(1)
PSSCALE(1)
P Q
Selects Portrait plotting mode [Default is Landscape, see gmtdefaults to change this]. Select logarithmic scale and power of ten annotations. All z-values in the cpt le will be converted to p = log10(z) and only integer p values will be annotated using the 10p format [Default is linear scale]. Do not separate different colour intervals with black lines. Draw Unix System time stamp on plot. By adding just/dx/dy/, the user may specify the justication of the stamp and where the stamp should fall on the page relative to lower left corner of the plot. For example, BL/0/0 will align the lower left corner of the time stamp with the lower left corner of the plot. Optionally, append a label, or c (which will plot the command string.). The GMT parameters UNIX_TIME, UNIX_TIME_POS, and UNIX_TIME_FORMAT can affect the appearance; see the gmtdefaults man page for details. The time string will be in the locale set by the environment variable TZ (generally local time). Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"].
S U
X Y Shift plot origin relative to the current origin by (x-shift,y-shift) and optionally append the length unit (c, i, m, p). You can prepend a to shift the origin back to the original position after plotting, or prepend r [Default] to reset the current origin to the new location. If O is used then the default (x-shift,y-shift) is (0,0), otherwise it is (r1i, r1i) or (r2.5c, r2.5c). Alternatively, give c to align the center coordinate (x or y) of the plot with the center of the page based on current page size. Z c File with colorbar-width per color entry. By default, width of entry is scaled to color range, i.e., z = 0-100 gives twice the width as z = 100-150 (Also see L). Species the number of plot copies. [Default is 1].
EXAMPLES
To append a vertical color scale (7.5 cm long; 1.25 cm wide) to the right of a plot that is 6 inch wide and 4 inch high, using illumination, and show back- and foreground colors, and annotating every 5 units, use psscale D6.5i/2i/7.5c/1.25c O Ccolors.cpt I E B5:BATHYMETRY:/:m: >> map.ps
NOTES
When the cpt le is discrete and no illumination is specied, the color bar will be painted using polygons. For all other cases we must paint with an image. Some color printers may give slightly different colors for the two methods given identical RGB values.
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), makecpt(1), grd2cpt(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSTEXT(1)
PSTEXT(1)
NAME
pstext To plot text strings on maps
SYNOPSIS
pstext textle Jparameters Rwest/east/south/north[r] [ A ] [ B[p|s]parameters ] [ Cdx/dy ] [ D[j]dx[/dy][v[pen] ] [ Eazim/elev[+wlon/lat[/z]][+vx0/y0] ] [ Gcolor ] [ H[i][nrec] ] [ Jz|Zparameters ] [ K ] [ L ] [ N ] [ O ] [ P ] [ Spen ] [ U[just/dx/dy/][c|label] ] [ V ] [ W[color,][o|O|c|C[pen]] ] [ X[a|c|r][x-shift[u]] ] [ Y[a|c|r][y-shift[u]] ] [ Z[zlevel|+] ] [ :[i|o] ] [ ccopies ] [ f[i|o]colinfo ] [ m[ag] ]
DESCRIPTION
pstext plots text strings of variable size, font type, and orientation. Various map projections are provided, with the option to draw and annotate the map boundaries. PostScript code is written to standard output. Greek characters, subscript, superscript, and small caps are supported as follows: The sequence @ toggles between the selected font and Greek (Symbol). @%no% sets the font to no; @%% resets the font to the starting font, @- toggles subscripts on/off, @+ toggles superscript on/off, @# toggles small caps on/off, @;color; changes the font color (@;; resets it), @:size: changes the font size (@:: resets it), and @_ toggles underline on/off. @@ prints the @ sign. @e, @o, @a, @E, @O, @A give the accented Scandinavian characters. Composite characters (overstrike) may be indicated with the @!<char1><char2> sequence, which will print the two characters on top of each other. To learn the octal codes for symbols not available on the keyboard and some accented European characters, see Section 4.16 and Appendix F in the GMT Technical Reference and Cookbook. Note that CHAR_ENCODING must be set to an extended character set in your .gmtdefaults4 le in order to use the accented characters. Using the W option, a colored rectangle underlying the text may be plotted (Does not work for strings with sub/super scripts, symbols, or composite characters, except in paragraph mode (m)). textle This le contains 1 or more records with (x, y, size, angle, fontno, justify, text). If no le is given, pstext will read standard input. size is text size in points, angle is measured in degrees counterclockwise from horizontal, fontno sets the font type, justify sets the alignment. If fontno is not an integer, then it is taken to be a text string with the desired fontname. See the gmtdefaults man page for names and numbers of available fonts (or run pstext L). The alignment refers to the part of the text string that will be mapped onto the (x,y) point. Choose a 2 character combination of L, C, R (for left, center, or right) and T, M, B for top, middle, or bottom. e.g., BL for lower left. J Selects the map projection. Scale is UNIT/degree, 1:xxxxx, or width in UNIT (upper case modier). UNIT is cm, inch, or m, depending on the MEASURE_UNIT setting in .gmtdefaults4, but this can be overridden on the command line by appending c, i, or m to the scale/width value. When central meridian is optional, default is center of longitude range on R option. Default standard parallel is the equator. For map height, max dimension, or min dimension, append h, +, or to the width, respectively. More details can be found in the psbasemap man pages. CYLINDRICAL PROJECTIONS: Jclon0/lat0/scale (Cassini) Jcyl_stere/[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Stereographic) Jj[lon0/]scale (Miller) Jm[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Mercator) Jmlon0/lat0/scale (Mercator - Give meridian and standard parallel) Jo[a]lon0/lat0/azimuth/scale (Oblique Mercator - point and azimuth) Jo[b]lon0/lat0/lon1/lat1/scale (Oblique Mercator - two points) Joclon0/lat0/lonp/latp/scale (Oblique Mercator - point and pole) Jq[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Equidistant) Jtlon0/[lat0/]scale (TM - Transverse Mercator) Juzone/scale (UTM - Universal Transverse Mercator) Jy[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Equal-Area)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSTEXT(1)
PSTEXT(1)
CONIC PROJECTIONS: Jblon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Albers) Jdlon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Conic Equidistant) Jllon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Lambert Conic Conformal) Jpoly/[lon0/[lat0/]]scale ((American) Polyconic) AZIMUTHAL PROJECTIONS: Jalon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Lambert Azimuthal Equal-Area) Jelon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Azimuthal Equidistant) Jflon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Gnomonic) Jglon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Orthographic) Jglon0/lat0/altitude/azimuth/tilt/twist/Width/Height/scale (General Perspective). Jslon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (General Stereographic) MISCELLANEOUS PROJECTIONS: Jh[lon0/]scale (Hammer) Ji[lon0/]scale (Sinusoidal) Jkf[lon0/]scale (Eckert IV) Jk[s][lon0/]scale (Eckert VI) Jn[lon0/]scale (Robinson) Jr[lon0/]scale (Winkel Tripel) Jv[lon0/]scale (Van der Grinten) Jw[lon0/]scale (Mollweide) NON-GEOGRAPHICAL PROJECTIONS: Jp[a]scale[/origin][r|z] (Polar coordinates (theta,r)) Jxx-scale[d|l|ppow|t|T][/y-scale[d|l|ppow|t|T]] (Linear, log, and power scaling) Jz R Sets the vertical scaling (for 3-D maps). Same syntax as Jx. xmin, xmax, ymin, and ymax specify the Region of interest. For geographic regions, these limits correspond to west, east, south, and north and you may specify them in decimal degrees or in [+-]dd:mm[:ss.xxx][W|E|S|N] format. Append r if lower left and upper right map coordinates are given instead of w/e/s/n. The two shorthands Rg and Rd stand for global domain (0/360 and -180/+180 in longitude respectively, with -90/+90 in latitude). Alternatively, specify the name of an existing grid le and the R settings (and grid spacing, if applicable) are copied from the grid. For calendar time coordinates you may either give (a) relative time (relative to the selected TIME_EPOCH and in the selected TIME_UNIT; append t to JX|x), or (b) absolute time of the form [date]T[clock] (append T to JX|x). At least one of date and clock must be present; the T is always required. The date string must be of the form [-]yyyy[-mm[-dd]] (Gregorian calendar) or yyyy[-Www[-d]] (ISO week calendar), while the clock string must be of the form hh:mm:ss[.xxx]. The use of delimiters and their type and positions must be exactly as indicated (however, input, output and plot formats are customizable; see gmtdefaults).
OPTIONS
No space between the option ag and the associated arguments. A B C Angles are given as azimuths; convert them to directions using the current projection. Sets map boundary annotation and tickmark intervals; see the psbasemap man page for all the details. Sets the clearance between the text and the surrounding box [15%]. Only used if W is specied. Append the unit you want (cm, inch, meter. or point; if not given we consult MEASURE_UNIT)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSTEXT(1)
PSTEXT(1)
or % for a percentage of the font size. D Offsets the text from the projected (x,y) point by dx,dy [0/0]. If dy is not specied then it is set equal to dx. Use -Dj to offset the text away from the point instead (i.e., the texts justication will determine the direction of the shift). Optionally, append v which will draw a line from the original point to the shifted point; append a pen to change the attributes for this line. (See SPECIFYING PENS below). Sets the viewpoints azimuth and elevation (for perspective view) [180/90]. For frames used for animation, you may want to append + to x the center of your data domain (or specify a particular world coordinate point with +wlon0/lat[/z]) which will project to the center of your page size (or specify the coordinates of the projected view point with +vx0/y0). (Not implemented for paragraph mode). Sets the shade or color used for drawing the text [Default is BASEMAP_FRAME_RGB, the current frame color (by default black)] (See SPECIFYING COLOR below). Input le(s) has header record(s). If used, the default number of header records is N_HEADER_RECS. Use Hi if only input data should have header records [Default will write out header records if the input data have them]. Blank lines and lines starting with # are always skipped. More PostScript code will be appended later [Default terminates the plot system]. Lists the font-numbers and font-names available, then exits. Do NOT clip text at map boundaries [Default will clip]. Selects Overlay plot mode [Default initializes a new plot system]. Selects Portrait plotting mode [Default is Landscape, see gmtdefaults to change this]. Draw text outline. Append pen attributes. (Not implemented for paragraph mode). Draw Unix System time stamp on plot. By adding just/dx/dy/, the user may specify the justication of the stamp and where the stamp should fall on the page relative to lower left corner of the plot. For example, BL/0/0 will align the lower left corner of the time stamp with the lower left corner of the plot. Optionally, append a label, or c (which will plot the command string.). The GMT parameters UNIX_TIME, UNIX_TIME_POS, and UNIX_TIME_FORMAT can affect the appearance; see the gmtdefaults man page for details. The time string will be in the locale set by the environment variable TZ (generally local time). Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"]. Paint a rectangle beneath the text string. Set color [Default is no ll]. Append o to draw rectangle outline, add a pen to specify pen attributes [width = 1, color = black, texture = solid]. use a comma to separate the ll information from the outline information if both are present. Choose upper case O to get a rounded rectangle. Choose lower case c to get a concave rectangle (only in paragraph mode). Choose upper case C to get a convex rectangle (only in paragraph mode). (See also SPECIFYING PENS and SPECIFYING COLOR below).
G H
K L N O P S U
V W
X Y Shift plot origin relative to the current origin by (x-shift,y-shift) and optionally append the length unit (c, i, m, p). You can prepend a to shift the origin back to the original position after plotting, or prepend r [Default] to reset the current origin to the new location. If O is used then the default (x-shift,y-shift) is (0,0), otherwise it is (r1i, r1i) or (r2.5c, r2.5c). Alternatively, give c to align the center coordinate (x or y) of the plot with the center of the page based on current page size. Z For 3-D projections: Sets the z-level of the basemap [Default is the bottom of the z-axis]. If Z+ is given we expect each item to have its own level given in the 3rd column, and N is implicitly set. (Not implemented for paragraph mode). Toggles between (longitude,latitude) and (latitude,longitude) input and/or output. [Default is (longitude,latitude)]. Append i to select input only or o to select output only. [Default affects both].
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSTEXT(1)
PSTEXT(1)
c f
Species the number of plot copies. [Default is 1]. Special formatting of input and/or output columns (time or geographical data). Specify i or o to make this apply only to input or output [Default applies to both]. Give one or more columns (or column ranges) separated by commas. Append T (absolute calendar time), t (relative time in chosen TIME_UNIT since TIME_EPOCH), x (longitude), y (latitude), or f (oating point) to each column or column range item. Shorthand f[i|o]g means f[i|o]0x,1y (geographic coordinates). Paragraph mode. Files must be multiple segment les. Segments are separated by a special record whose rst character must be ag [Default is >]. Starting in the 3rd column, we expect to nd information pertaining to the typesetting of a text paragraph (the remaining lines until next segment header). The information expected is (x y size angle fontno justify linespace parwidth parjust), where x y size angle fontno justify are dened above, while linespace and parwidth are the linespacing and paragraph width, respectively. The justication of the text paragraph is governed by parjust which may be l(eft), c(enter), r(ight), or j(ustied). The segment header is followed by one or more lines with paragraph text. Text may contain the escape sequences discussed above. Separate paragraphs with a blank line.
EXAMPLES
To plot the outlines of the text strings stored in the le text.d on a Mercator plot with the given specications, use pstext text.d R-30/30/-10/20 Jm0.1i P B5 S0.5p > plot.ps To add a typeset gure caption for a 3-inch wide illustration, use pstext R0/3/0/5 JX3i O H m N << EOF >> gure.ps This is an optional header record > 0 -0.5 12 0 4 LT 13p 3i j @%5%Figure 1.@%% This illustration shows nothing useful, but it still needs a gure caption. Highlighted in @;255/0/0;red@;; you can see the locations of cities where it is @_impossible@_ to get any good Thai food; these are to be avoided. EOF
WINDOWS REMARKS
Note that under Windows, the percent sign (%) is a variable indicator (like $ under Unix). To indicate a plain percentage sign in a batch script you need to repeat it (%%); hence the font switching mechanism (@%font% and @%%) may require twice the number of percent signs. This only applies to text inside a script or that otherwise is processed by DOS. Data les that are opened and read by pstext do not need such duplication.
BUGS
In paragraph mode, the presence of composite characters and other escape sequences may lead to unfortunate word splitting. The N option does not adjust the BoundingBox information so you may have to post-process the PostScript output with epstool or ps2epsi to obtain a correct BoundingBox.
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSTEXT(1)
PSTEXT(1)
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), gmtcolors(5), psbasemap(1), pslegend(1), psxy(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSWIGGLE(1)
PSWIGGLE(1)
NAME
pswiggle Plot anomaly along track on a map
SYNOPSIS
pswiggle xyz_les Jparameters Rwest/east/south/north[r] Zscale [ Aazimuth ] [ B[p|s]parameters ] [ Ccenter ] [ D[x]gap ] [ Eazim/elev[+wlon/lat[/z]][+vx0/y0] ] [ Gll ] [ H[i][nrec] ] [ Jz|Zparameters ] [ Ix_az ] [ K ] [ N ] [ O ] [ P ] [ S[x]lon0/lat0/length[/units] ] [ Tpen ] [ U[just/dx/dy/][c|label] ] [ V ] [ Wpen ] [ X[a|c|r][x-shift[u]] ] [ Y[a|c|r][y-shift[u]] ] [ ccopies ] [ :[i|o] ] [ bi[s|S|d|D[ncol]|c[var1/...]] ] [ fcolinfo ] [ m[i|o][ag] ]
DESCRIPTION
pswiggle reads (x,y,z) triplets from les [or standard input] and plots z as a function of distance along track. This means that two consecutive (x,y) points dene the local distance axis, and the local z axis is then perpendicular to the distance axis. The user may set a preferred positive anomaly plot direction, and if the positive normal is outside the plus/minus 90 degree window around the preferred direction, then 180 degrees are added to the direction. Either the positive or the negative wiggle may be shaded. The resulting PostScript code is written to standard output. les J List one or more le-names. If no les are given, pswiggle will read standard input. Selects the map projection. Scale is UNIT/degree, 1:xxxxx, or width in UNIT (upper case modier). UNIT is cm, inch, or m, depending on the MEASURE_UNIT setting in .gmtdefaults4, but this can be overridden on the command line by appending c, i, or m to the scale/width value. When central meridian is optional, default is center of longitude range on R option. Default standard parallel is the equator. For map height, max dimension, or min dimension, append h, +, or to the width, respectively. More details can be found in the psbasemap man pages. CYLINDRICAL PROJECTIONS: Jclon0/lat0/scale (Cassini) Jcyl_stere/[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Stereographic) Jj[lon0/]scale (Miller) Jm[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Mercator) Jmlon0/lat0/scale (Mercator - Give meridian and standard parallel) Jo[a]lon0/lat0/azimuth/scale (Oblique Mercator - point and azimuth) Jo[b]lon0/lat0/lon1/lat1/scale (Oblique Mercator - two points) Joclon0/lat0/lonp/latp/scale (Oblique Mercator - point and pole) Jq[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Equidistant) Jtlon0/[lat0/]scale (TM - Transverse Mercator) Juzone/scale (UTM - Universal Transverse Mercator) Jy[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Equal-Area) CONIC PROJECTIONS: Jblon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Albers) Jdlon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Conic Equidistant) Jllon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Lambert Conic Conformal) Jpoly/[lon0/[lat0/]]scale ((American) Polyconic) AZIMUTHAL PROJECTIONS: Jalon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Lambert Azimuthal Equal-Area) Jelon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Azimuthal Equidistant) Jflon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Gnomonic) Jglon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Orthographic) Jglon0/lat0/altitude/azimuth/tilt/twist/Width/Height/scale (General Perspective).
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSWIGGLE(1)
PSWIGGLE(1)
Jslon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (General Stereographic) MISCELLANEOUS PROJECTIONS: Jh[lon0/]scale (Hammer) Ji[lon0/]scale (Sinusoidal) Jkf[lon0/]scale (Eckert IV) Jk[s][lon0/]scale (Eckert VI) Jn[lon0/]scale (Robinson) Jr[lon0/]scale (Winkel Tripel) Jv[lon0/]scale (Van der Grinten) Jw[lon0/]scale (Mollweide) NON-GEOGRAPHICAL PROJECTIONS: Jp[a]scale[/origin][r|z] (Polar coordinates (theta,r)) Jxx-scale[d|l|ppow|t|T][/y-scale[d|l|ppow|t|T]] (Linear, log, and power scaling) R xmin, xmax, ymin, and ymax specify the Region of interest. For geographic regions, these limits correspond to west, east, south, and north and you may specify them in decimal degrees or in [+-]dd:mm[:ss.xxx][W|E|S|N] format. Append r if lower left and upper right map coordinates are given instead of w/e/s/n. The two shorthands Rg and Rd stand for global domain (0/360 and -180/+180 in longitude respectively, with -90/+90 in latitude). Alternatively, specify the name of an existing grid le and the R settings (and grid spacing, if applicable) are copied from the grid. For calendar time coordinates you may either give (a) relative time (relative to the selected TIME_EPOCH and in the selected TIME_UNIT; append t to JX|x), or (b) absolute time of the form [date]T[clock] (append T to JX|x). At least one of date and clock must be present; the T is always required. The date string must be of the form [-]yyyy[-mm[-dd]] (Gregorian calendar) or yyyy[-Www[-d]] (ISO week calendar), while the clock string must be of the form hh:mm:ss[.xxx]. The use of delimiters and their type and positions must be exactly as indicated (however, input, output and plot formats are customizable; see gmtdefaults). Gives anomaly scale in data-units/distance-unit.
OPTIONS
No space between the option ag and the associated arguments. A B C D E Sets the preferred positive azimuth. Positive wiggles will "gravitate" towards that direction. Sets map boundary annotation and tickmark intervals; see the psbasemap man page for all the details. Subtract center from the data set before plotting [0]. Means there is a data gap if 2 consecutive points are more than gap distance units apart. For geographic map projections the gap is assumed to be in km, else it is in the users units. Sets the viewpoints azimuth and elevation (for perspective view) [180/90]. For frames used for animation, you may want to append + to x the center of your data domain (or specify a particular world coordinate point with +wlon0/lat[/z]) which will project to the center of your page size (or specify the coordinates of the projected view point with +vx0/y0). Set ll shade, color or pattern of positive wiggles [Default is black] (See SPECIFYING FILL below). Input le(s) has header record(s). If used, the default number of header records is N_HEADER_RECS. Use Hi if only input data should have header records [Default will write out header records if the input data have them]. Blank lines and lines starting with # are always skipped.
G H
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSWIGGLE(1)
PSWIGGLE(1)
I K N O P S T U
Set a xed azimuth projection for wiggles [Default uses track azimuth, but see A]. More PostScript code will be appended later [Default terminates the plot system]. Paint negative wiggles instead of positive [Default]. Selects Overlay plot mode [Default initializes a new plot system]. Selects Portrait plotting mode [Default is Landscape, see gmtdefaults to change this]. Draws a simple vertical scale centered on lon0/lat0. Use Sx to specify cartesian coordinates instead. length is in z units, append unit name for labeling Draw track [Default is no track]. Append pen attributes to use [Defaults: width = 0.25p, color = black, texture = solid]. (See SPECIFYING PENS below). Draw Unix System time stamp on plot. By adding just/dx/dy/, the user may specify the justication of the stamp and where the stamp should fall on the page relative to lower left corner of the plot. For example, BL/0/0 will align the lower left corner of the time stamp with the lower left corner of the plot. Optionally, append a label, or c (which will plot the command string.). The GMT parameters UNIX_TIME, UNIX_TIME_POS, and UNIX_TIME_FORMAT can affect the appearance; see the gmtdefaults man page for details. The time string will be in the locale set by the environment variable TZ (generally local time). Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"]. Draw wiggle outline [Default is no outline]. Append pen attributes to use [Defaults: width = 0.25p, color = black, texture = solid]. (See SPECIFYING PENS below).
V W
X Y Shift plot origin relative to the current origin by (x-shift,y-shift) and optionally append the length unit (c, i, m, p). You can prepend a to shift the origin back to the original position after plotting, or prepend r [Default] to reset the current origin to the new location. If O is used then the default (x-shift,y-shift) is (0,0), otherwise it is (r1i, r1i) or (r2.5c, r2.5c). Alternatively, give c to align the center coordinate (x or y) of the plot with the center of the page based on current page size. : bi Toggles between (longitude,latitude) and (latitude,longitude) input and/or output. [Default is (longitude,latitude)]. Append i to select input only or o to select output only. [Default affects both]. Selects binary input. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of columns in your binary input le if it exceeds the columns needed by the program. Or append c if the input le is netCDF. Optionally, append var1/var2/... to specify the variables to be read. [Default is 3 input columns]. Species the number of plot copies. [Default is 1]. Special formatting of input and/or output columns (time or geographical data). Specify i or o to make this apply only to input or output [Default applies to both]. Give one or more columns (or column ranges) separated by commas. Append T (absolute calendar time), t (relative time in chosen TIME_UNIT since TIME_EPOCH), x (longitude), y (latitude), or f (oating point) to each column or column range item. Shorthand f[i|o]g means f[i|o]0x,1y (geographic coordinates). Multiple segment le(s). Segments are separated by a special record. For ASCII les the rst character must be ag [Default is >]. For binary les all elds must be NaN and b must set the number of output columns explicitly. By default the m setting applies to both input and output. Use mi and mo to give separate settings to input and output.
c f
SPECIFYING PENS pen The attributes of lines and symbol outlines as dened by pen is a comma delimetered list of width, color and texture, each of which is optional. width can be indicated as a measure (points, centimeters, inches) or as faint, thin[ner|nest], thick[er|est], fat[ter|test], or obese. color species a gray shade or color (see SPECIFYING COLOR below). texture is a combination of dashes - and dots ..
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSWIGGLE(1)
PSWIGGLE(1)
EXAMPLES
To plot the magnetic anomaly stored in the le track.xym along track @ 1000 nTesla/cm (after removing a mean value of 32000 nTesla), using a 15-cm-wide Polar Stereographic map ticked every 5 degrees in Portrait mode, with positive anomalies in red on a blue track of width 0.25 points, use pswiggle track.xym R-20/10/-80/-60 JS0/90/15c Z1000 B5 C32000 P Gred T0.25p,blue S1000 V > track_xym.ps
BUGS
Sometimes the (x,y) coordinates are not printed with enough signicant digits, so the local perpendicular to the track swings around a lot. To see if this is the problem, you should do this: awk { if (NR > 1) print atan2(y-$1, x-$2); y=$1; x=$2; } yourdata.xyz | more (note that output is in radians; on some machines you need "nawk" to do this). Then if these numbers jump around a lot, you may do this: awk { print NR, $0 } yourdata.xyz | lter1d Fb5 N4/0 D_FORMAT=value > smoothed.xyz and plot this data set instead.
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), gmtcolors(5), lter1d(1), psbasemap(1), splitxyz(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSXY(1)
PSXY(1)
NAME
psxy Plot lines, polygons, and symbols on maps
SYNOPSIS
psxy les Jparameters Rwest/east/south/north[r] [ A[m|p] ] [ B[p|s]parameters ] [ Ccptle ] [ Ddx/dy ] [ E[x|y|X|Y][n][cap][/[-|+]pen] ] [ Gll ] [ H[i][nrec] ] [ Iintens ] [ K ] [ L ] [ N ] [ O ] [ P ] [ S[symbol][size] ] [ U[just/dx/dy/][c|label] ] [ V ] [ W[-|+][pen] ] [ X[a|c|r][x-shift[u]] ] [ Y[a|c|r][y-shift[u]] ] [ :[i|o] ] [ bi[s|S|d|D[ncol]|c[var1/...]] ] [ ccopies ] [ fcolinfo ] [ g[a]x|y|d|X|Y|D|[col]z[+|-]gap[u] ] [ m[ag] ]
DESCRIPTION
psxy reads (x,y) pairs from les [or standard input] and generates PostScript code that will plot lines, polygons, or symbols at those locations on a map. If a symbol is selected and no symbol size given, then psxy will interpret the third column of the input data as symbol size. Symbols whose size is <= 0 are skipped. If no symbols are specied then the symbol code (see S below) must be present as last column in the input. Multiple segment les may be plotted using the m option. If S is not used, a line connecting the data points will be drawn instead. To explicitly close polygons, use L. Select a ll with G. If G is set, W will control whether the polygon outline is drawn or not. If a symbol is selected, G and W determines the ll and outline/no outline, respectively. The PostScript code is written to standard output. les J List one or more le-names. If no les are given, psxy will read standard input. Use T to ignore all input les, including standard input (see below). Selects the map projection. Scale is UNIT/degree, 1:xxxxx, or width in UNIT (upper case modier). UNIT is cm, inch, or m, depending on the MEASURE_UNIT setting in .gmtdefaults4, but this can be overridden on the command line by appending c, i, or m to the scale/width value. When central meridian is optional, default is center of longitude range on R option. Default standard parallel is the equator. For map height, max dimension, or min dimension, append h, +, or to the width, respectively. More details can be found in the psbasemap man pages. CYLINDRICAL PROJECTIONS: Jclon0/lat0/scale (Cassini) Jcyl_stere/[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Stereographic) Jj[lon0/]scale (Miller) Jm[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Mercator) Jmlon0/lat0/scale (Mercator - Give meridian and standard parallel) Jo[a]lon0/lat0/azimuth/scale (Oblique Mercator - point and azimuth) Jo[b]lon0/lat0/lon1/lat1/scale (Oblique Mercator - two points) Joclon0/lat0/lonp/latp/scale (Oblique Mercator - point and pole) Jq[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Equidistant) Jtlon0/[lat0/]scale (TM - Transverse Mercator) Juzone/scale (UTM - Universal Transverse Mercator) Jy[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Equal-Area) CONIC PROJECTIONS: Jblon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Albers) Jdlon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Conic Equidistant) Jllon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Lambert Conic Conformal) Jpoly/[lon0/[lat0/]]scale ((American) Polyconic) AZIMUTHAL PROJECTIONS: Jalon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Lambert Azimuthal Equal-Area) Jelon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Azimuthal Equidistant)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSXY(1)
PSXY(1)
Jflon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Gnomonic) Jglon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Orthographic) Jglon0/lat0/altitude/azimuth/tilt/twist/Width/Height/scale (General Perspective). Jslon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (General Stereographic) MISCELLANEOUS PROJECTIONS: Jh[lon0/]scale (Hammer) Ji[lon0/]scale (Sinusoidal) Jkf[lon0/]scale (Eckert IV) Jk[s][lon0/]scale (Eckert VI) Jn[lon0/]scale (Robinson) Jr[lon0/]scale (Winkel Tripel) Jv[lon0/]scale (Van der Grinten) Jw[lon0/]scale (Mollweide) NON-GEOGRAPHICAL PROJECTIONS: Jp[a]scale[/origin][r|z] (Polar coordinates (theta,r)) Jxx-scale[d|l|ppow|t|T][/y-scale[d|l|ppow|t|T]] (Linear, log, and power scaling) R xmin, xmax, ymin, and ymax specify the Region of interest. For geographic regions, these limits correspond to west, east, south, and north and you may specify them in decimal degrees or in [+-]dd:mm[:ss.xxx][W|E|S|N] format. Append r if lower left and upper right map coordinates are given instead of w/e/s/n. The two shorthands Rg and Rd stand for global domain (0/360 and -180/+180 in longitude respectively, with -90/+90 in latitude). Alternatively, specify the name of an existing grid le and the R settings (and grid spacing, if applicable) are copied from the grid. For calendar time coordinates you may either give (a) relative time (relative to the selected TIME_EPOCH and in the selected TIME_UNIT; append t to JX|x), or (b) absolute time of the form [date]T[clock] (append T to JX|x). At least one of date and clock must be present; the T is always required. The date string must be of the form [-]yyyy[-mm[-dd]] (Gregorian calendar) or yyyy[-Www[-d]] (ISO week calendar), while the clock string must be of the form hh:mm:ss[.xxx]. The use of delimiters and their type and positions must be exactly as indicated (however, input, output and plot formats are customizable; see gmtdefaults).
OPTIONS
No space between the option ag and the associated arguments. A By default line segments are drawn as great circle arcs. To draw them as straight lines, use the A ag. Alternatively, add m to draw the line by rst following a meridian, then a parallel. Or append p to start following a parallel, then a meridian. (This can be practical to draw a lines along parallels, for example). Sets map boundary annotation and tickmark intervals; see the psbasemap man page for all the details. Give a color palette le. If S is set, let symbol ll color be determined by the z-value in the third column. Additional elds are shifted over by one column (optional size would be 4th rather than 3rd eld, etc.). If S is not set, then psxy expects the user to supply a multisegment line or polygon le (requires m) where each segment header contains a Zval string. The val will control the color of the line or polygon (if L is set) via the cpt le. Offset the plot symbol or line locations by the given amounts dx/dy [Default is no offset]. If dy is not given it is set equal to dx. Draw error bars. Append x and/or y to indicate which bars you want to draw (Default is both x and y). The x and/or y errors must be stored in the columns after the (x,y) pair [or (x,y,size) triplet]. The cap parameter indicates the length of the end-cap on the error bars [0.25c (or 0.1i)]. Pen attributes for error bars may also be set (see SPECIFYING PENS below) [Defaults: width =
B C
D E
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSXY(1)
PSXY(1)
0.25p, color = black, texture = solid]. A leading + will use the lookup color (via C) for both symbol ll and error pen color, while a leading - will set error pen color and turn off symbol ll. If upper case X and/or Y is used we will instead draw "box-and-whisker" (or "stem-and-leaf") symbols. The x (or y) coordinate is then taken as the median value, and 4 more columns are expected to contain the minimum (0% quantile), the 25% quantile, the 75% quantile, and the maximum (100% quantile) values. The 25-75% box may be lled by using G. If n is appended to X (or Y) we draw a notched "box-and-whisker" symbol where the notch width reects the uncertainty in the median. Then a 5th extra data column is expected to contain the number of points in the distribution. G Select color or pattern for lling of symbols or polygons [Default is no ll]. (See SPECIFYING FILL below). Note when m is chosen, psxy will search for G and W strings in all the subheaders and let any values thus found over-ride the command line settings (see m below). Input le(s) has header record(s). If used, the default number of header records is N_HEADER_RECS. Use Hi if only input data should have header records [Default will write out header records if the input data have them]. Blank lines and lines starting with # are always skipped. Use the supplied intens value (nominally in the -1 to + 1 range) to modulate the ll color by simulating illumination [none]. More PostScript code will be appended later [Default terminates the plot system]. Force closed polygons: connect the endpoints of the line-segment(s) and draw polygons. Also, in concert with C, m, and Z settings in the headers will use the implied color for polygon ll [Default is polygon pen color]. Do NOT skip symbols that fall outside map border [Default plots points inside border only]. The option does not apply to lines and polygons which are always clipped to the map region. Selects Overlay plot mode [Default initializes a new plot system]. Selects Portrait plotting mode [Default is Landscape, see gmtdefaults to change this]. Plot symbols. If present, size is symbol size in the unit set in .gmtdefaults4 (unless c, i, m, or p is appended). If size is not given it is expected in the third (or 4th if C is used) column. Any additional elds are shifted over by one column. If the symbol code (see below) is not given it will be read from the last column in the input data; this cannot be used in conjunction with b. Optionally, append c, i, m, p to indicate that the size information in the input data is in units of cm, inch, meter, or point, respectively [Default is MEASURE_UNIT]. Note: if you give both size and symbol via the input le you must use MEASURE_UNIT to indicate the units used for the symbol size. The uppercase symbols A, C, D, G, H, I, N, S, T are normalized to have the same area as a circle with diameter size, while the size of the corresponding lowercase symbols refers to the diameter of a circumscribed circle. Choose between these symbol codes: x-dash (-). size is the length of a short horizontal line segment. plus (+). size is diameter of circumscribing circle. star. size is diameter of circumscribing circle. Vertical bar extending from base to y. size is bar width. Append u if size is in x-units [Default is plot-distance units]. By default, base = ymin. Append bbase to change this value. Horizontal bar extending from base to x. size is bar width. Append u if size is in y-units [Default is plot-distance units]. By default, base = xmin. Append bbase to change this value. circle. size is diameter of circle. diamond. size is diameter of circumscribing circle.
I K L
N O P S
SS+ Sa Sb SB Sc Sd
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSXY(1)
PSXY(1)
Se SE
ellipse. Direction (in degrees counter-clockwise from horizontal), major_axis, and minor_axis must be found in columns 3, 4, and 5. Same as Se, except azimuth (in degrees east of north) should be given instead of direction. The azimuth will be mapped into an angle based on the chosen map projection (Se leaves the directions unchanged.) Furthermore, the axes lengths must be given in km instead of plot-distance units. An exception occurs for a linear projection in which we assume the ellipse axes are given in the same units as R. front. Sfgap/size[dir][type][:offset]. Supply distance gap between symbols and symbol size. If gap is negative, it is interpreted to mean the number of symbols along the front instead. Append dir to plot symbols on the left or right side of the front [Default is centered]. Append type to specify which symbol to plot: box, circle, fault, slip, or triangle. [Default is fault]. Slip means left-lateral or right-lateral strike-slip arrows (centered is not an option). Append :offset to offset the rst symbol from the beginning of the front by that amount [Default is 0]. octagon. size is diameter of circumscribing circle. hexagon. size is diameter of circumscribing circle. inverted triangle. size is diameter of circumscribing circle. Rotated rectangle. Direction (in degrees counter-clockwise from horizontal), x-dimension, and ydimension must be found in columns 3, 4, and 5. Same as Sj, except azimuth (in degrees east of north) should be given instead of direction. The azimuth will be mapped into an angle based on the chosen map projection (Sj leaves the directions unchanged.) Furthermore, the dimensions must be given in km instead of plot-distance units. An exception occurs for a linear projection in which we assume the dimensions are given in the same units as R. kustom symbol. Append <name>/size, and we will look for a denition le called <name>.def in (1) the current directory or (2) in /.gmt or (3) in $GMT_SHAREDIR/custom. The symbol as dened in that le is of size 1.0 by default; the appended size will scale symbol accordingly. Users may add their own custom *.def les; see CUSTOM SYMBOLS below. letter or text string (less than 64 characters). Give size, and append /string after the size. Note that the size is only approximate; no individual scaling is done for different characters. Remember to escape special characters like *. Optionally, you may append %font to select a particular font [Default is ANNOT_FONT_PRIMARY]. math angle arc, optionally with one or two arrow heads. The size is the radius of the arc. Start and stop directions (in degrees counter-clockwise from horizontal) for arc must be found in columns 3 and 4. Use Smf to add arrow head at rst angle, Sml for arrow head at last angle, and Smb for both [Default is no arrow heads]. pentagon. size is diameter of circumscribing circle. point. No size needs to be specied (1 pixel is used). quoted line, i.e., lines with annotations such as contours. Append [d|D|f|l|L|n|x|X]info[:labelinfo]. The required argument controls the placement of labels along the quoted lines. Choose among ve controlling algorithms: ddist[c|i|m|p] or Ddist[d|e|k|m|n] For lower case d, give distances between labels on the plot in your preferred measurement unit c (cm), i (inch), m (meter), or p (points), while for upper case D, specify distances in map units and append the unit; choose among e (m), k (km), m (mile), n (nautical mile), or d (spherical degree). [Default is 10c or 4i]. ffle.d Reads the ascii le fle.d and places labels at locations in the le that matches locations along the quoted lines. Inexact matches and points outside the region are skipped.
Sf
Sg Sh Si Sj SJ
Sk
Sl
Sm
Sn Sp Sq
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSXY(1)
PSXY(1)
l|Lline1[,line2,...] Give start and stop coordinates for one or more comma-separated straight line segments. Labels will be placed where these lines intersect the quoted lines. The format of each line specication is start/stop, where start and stop are either a specied point lon/lat or a 2-character XY key that uses the justication format employed in pstext to indicate a point on the map, given as [LCR][BMT]. L will interpret the point pairs as dening great circles [Default is straight line]. nn_label Species the number of equidistant labels for quoted lines line [1]. Upper case N starts labeling exactly at the start of the line [Default centers them along the line]. N-1 places one justied label at start, while N+1 places one justied label at the end of quoted lines. Optionally, append /min_dist[c|i|m|p] to enforce that a minimum distance separation between successive labels is enforced. x|Xxle.d Reads the multi-segment le xle.d and places labels at the intersections between the quoted lines and the lines inxle.d. X will resample the lines rst along great-circle arcs. In addition, you may optionally append +rradius[c|i|m|p] to set a minimum label separation in the x-y plane [no limitation]. The optional labelinfo controls the specics of the label formatting and consists of a concatenated string made up of any of the following control arguments: +aangle For annotations at a xed angle, +an for line-normal, or +ap for line-parallel [Default]. +cdx[/dy] Sets the clearance between label and optional text box. Append c|i|m|p to specify the unit or % to indicate a percentage of the label font size [15%]. +d +ffont Turns on debug which will draw helper points and lines to illustrate the workings of the quoted line setup. Sets the desired font [Default ANNOT_FONT_PRIMARY].
+g[color] Selects opaque text boxes [Default is transparent]; optionally specify the color [Default is PAGE_COLOR]. (See SPECIFYING COLOR below). +jjust +kcolor Sets color of text labels [Default is COLOR_BACKGROUND]. (See SPECIFYING COLOR below). +llabel Sets the constant label text. +Lag Sets the label text according to the specied ag: +Lh Take the label from the current multisegment header (rst scan for an embedded Llabel option, if not use the rst word following the segment ag). For multiple-word labels, enclose entire label in double quotes. Take the Cartesian plot distances along the line as the label; append c|i|m|p as the unit [Default is MEASURE_UNIT]. Calculate actual map distances; append d|e|k|m|n as the unit [Default is d(egrees), unless label placement was based on map distances along the lines in which case we use the same unit specied for that algorithm]. Requires a map projection to be used. Sets label justication [Default is MC]. Ignored when -SqN|n+|-1 is used.
+Ld +LD
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSXY(1)
PSXY(1)
+Lf +Lx
Use text after the 2nd column in the xed label location le as the label. Requires the xed label location setting. As +Lh but use the headers in the xle.d instead. Requires the crossing le option.
+ndx[/dy] Nudges the placement of labels by the specied amount (append c|i|m|p to specify the units). Increments are considered in the coordinate system dened by the orientation of the line; use +N to force increments in the plot x/y coordinates system [no nudging]. +o +p[pen] Draws the outline of text boxsets [Default is no outline]; optionally specify pen for outline [Default is width = 0.25p, color = black, texture = solid]. (See SPECIFYING PENS below). +rmin_rad Will not place labels where the lines radius of curvature is less than min_rad [Default is 0]. +ssize Sets the desired font size in points [Default is 9]. +uunit Appends unit to all line labels. If unit starts with a leading hyphen (-) then there will be no space between label value and the unit. [Default is no unit]. +v +w +=prex Prepends prex to all line labels. If prex starts with a leading hyphen (-) then there will be no space between label value and the prex. [Default is no prex]. Sr Ss St Sv rectangle. No size needs to be specied, but the x- and y-dimensions must be found in columns 3 and 4. square. size is diameter of circumscribing circle. triangle. size is diameter of circumscribing circle. vector. Direction (in degrees counter-clockwise from horizontal) and length must be found in columns 3 and 4. size, if present, will be interpreted as arrowwidth/headlength/headwidth [Default unit is 0.075c/0.3c/0.25c (or 0.03i/0.12i/0.1i)]. By default arrow attributes remains invariant to the length of the arrow. To have the size of the vector scale down with decreasing size, append nnorm, where vectors shorter than norm will have their attributes scaled by length/norm. To center vector on balance point, use Svb; to align point with the vector head, use Svh; to align point with the vector tail, use Svt [Default]. To give the head points coordinates instead of direction and length, use Svs. Upper case B, H, T, S will draw a double-headed vector [Default is single head]. Same as Sv, except azimuth (in degrees east of north) should be given instead of direction. The azimuth will be mapped into an angle based on the chosen map projection (Sv leaves the directions unchanged.) pie wedge. Start and stop directions (in degrees counter-clockwise from horizontal) for pie slice must be found in columns 3 and 4. Same as Sw, except azimuths (in degrees east of north) should be given instead of the two directions. The azimuths will be mapped into angles based on the chosen map projection (Sw leaves the directions unchanged.) Species curved labels following the path [Default is straight labels]. Species how many (x, y) points will be used to estimate label angles [Default is 10]. Selects rounded rectangular text box [Default is rectangular]. Not applicable for curved text (+v) and only makes sense for opaque text boxes.
SV
Sw SW
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSXY(1)
PSXY(1)
Sx Sy T
cross (x). size is diameter of circumscribing circle. y-dash (|). size is the length of a short vertical line segment. Ignore all input les, including standard input. This is the same as specifying /dev/null (or NUL for Windows users) as input le. Use this to activate only the options that are not related to plotting of lines or symbols, such as psxy R J O T to terminate a sequence of GMT plotting commands without producing any plotting output. Draw Unix System time stamp on plot. By adding just/dx/dy/, the user may specify the justication of the stamp and where the stamp should fall on the page relative to lower left corner of the plot. For example, BL/0/0 will align the lower left corner of the time stamp with the lower left corner of the plot. Optionally, append a label, or c (which will plot the command string.). The GMT parameters UNIX_TIME, UNIX_TIME_POS, and UNIX_TIME_FORMAT can affect the appearance; see the gmtdefaults man page for details. The time string will be in the locale set by the environment variable TZ (generally local time). Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"]. Set pen attributes for lines or the outline of symbols [Defaults: width = 0.25p, color = black, texture = solid]. A leading + will use the lookup color (via C) for both symbol ll and outline pen color, while a leading - will set outline pen color and turn off symbol ll. (See SPECIFYING PENS below).
V W
X Y Shift plot origin relative to the current origin by (x-shift,y-shift) and optionally append the length unit (c, i, m, p). You can prepend a to shift the origin back to the original position after plotting, or prepend r [Default] to reset the current origin to the new location. If O is used then the default (x-shift,y-shift) is (0,0), otherwise it is (r1i, r1i) or (r2.5c, r2.5c). Alternatively, give c to align the center coordinate (x or y) of the plot with the center of the page based on current page size. : bi Toggles between (longitude,latitude) and (latitude,longitude) input and/or output. [Default is (longitude,latitude)]. Append i to select input only or o to select output only. [Default affects both]. Selects binary input. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of columns in your binary input le if it exceeds the columns needed by the program. Or append c if the input le is netCDF. Optionally, append var1/var2/... to specify the variables to be read. [Default is the required number of columns given the chosen settings]. Species the number of plot copies. [Default is 1]. Special formatting of input and/or output columns (time or geographical data). Specify i or o to make this apply only to input or output [Default applies to both]. Give one or more columns (or column ranges) separated by commas. Append T (absolute calendar time), t (relative time in chosen TIME_UNIT since TIME_EPOCH), x (longitude), y (latitude), or f (oating point) to each column or column range item. Shorthand f[i|o]g means f[i|o]0x,1y (geographic coordinates). Examine the spacing between consecutive data points in order to impose breaks in the line. Append x|X or y|Y to dene a gap when there is a large enough change in the x or y coordinates, respectively, or d|D for distance gaps; use upper case to calculate gaps from projected coordinates. For gap-testing on other columns use [col]z; if col is not prepended the it defaults to 2 (i.e., 3rd column). Append [+|-]gap and optionally a unit u. Regarding optional signs: -ve means previous minus current column value must exceed |gap to be a gap, +ve means current minus previous column value must exceed gap, and no sign means the absolute value of the difference must exceed gap. For geographic data (x|y|d), the unit u may be meter [Default], kilometer, miles, or nautical miles. For projected data (X|Y|D), choose from inch, centimeter, meter, or points [Default unit set by MEASURE_UNIT]. Note: For x|y|z with time data the unit is instead controlled by TIME_UNIT. Repeat the option to specify multiple criteria, of which any can be met to produce a line break. Issue an additional ga to indicate that all criteria must be met instead. The g option is ignored if S is set.
c f
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSXY(1)
PSXY(1)
Multiple segment le. Segments are separated by a record whose rst character is ag [Default is >]. On these segment header records one or more of the following options can be added: Gll Use the new ll and turn lling on G- Turn lling off G+ Revert to default ll (none if not set on command line) Wpen Use the new pen and turn outline on W- Turn outline off W+ Revert to default pen (none if not set on command line) Zzval Obtain ll via cpt lookup using z-value zval ZNaN Get the NaN color from the cpt le
EXAMPLES
To plot solid red circles (diameter = 0.25 cm) at the positions listed in the le DSDP.xy on a Mercator map at 5 cm/degree of the area 150E to 154E, 18N to 23N, with tickmarks every 1 degree and gridlines every 15 minutes, use psxy DSDP.xy R150/154/18/23 Jm5c Sc0.25c Gred B1g15m | lpr To plot the xyz values in the le quakes.xyzm as circles with size given by the magnitude in the 4th column and color based on the depth in the third using the color palette cpt on a linear map, use psxy quakes.xyzm R0/1000/0/1000 JX6i Sc Ccpt B200 > map.ps To plot the le trench.xy on a Mercator map, with white triangles with sides 0.25 inch on the left side of the line, spaced every 0.8 inch, use psxy trench.xy R150/200/20/50 Jm0.15i Sf0.8i/0.1ilt Gwhite W B10 | lpr br To plot the data in the le misc.d as symbols determined by the code in the last column, and with size given by the magnitude in the 4th column, and color based on the third column via the color palette cpt on a linear map, use psxy misc.d R0/100/-50/100 JX6i S Ccpt B20 > t.ps
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSXY(1)
PSXY(1)
CUSTOM SYMBOLS
psxy and psxyz allows users to dene and plot their own custom symbols. This is done by encoding the symbol using a simple plotting code described below. Put all the plotting codes for your new symbol in a le whose extension must be .def; you may then address the symbol without giving the extension (e.g., the symbol le tsunami.def is used by specifying Sktsunami/size. The denition le can contain any number of plot code records, as well as blank lines and comment lines (starting with #). psxy and psxyz will look for the denition les in (1) the current directory, (2) the /.gmt directory, and (3) the $GMT_SHAREDIR/custom directory, in that order. Freeform polygons (made up of straight line segments and arcs of circles) can be designed - these polygons can be painted and lled with a pattern. Other standard geometric symbols can also be used. Generate freeform polygons by starting with an anchor point (append [ Wpen ] and [ Gll ] to indicate pen and ll attributes): x0 y0 M and draw a straight line from the current point to the next point with x y D or add an arc by using xc yc r dir1 dir2 A When a record other than the D or A is encountered, the polygon is closed and considered complete. The optional pen and ll setting hardwires particular values for this feature. If not present the polygons characteristics are determined by the command line settings for pen and ll. To deactivate ll or outline for any given polygon, give G or W. To add other geometric shapes to your custom symbol, add any number of the following plot code records (each accepts the optional [ Wpen ] and [ Gll ] at the end): circle: x cross: x diamond: ellipse: x hexagon: invtriangle: letter: x octagon: x pentagon: plus: x rect: x square: x star: x triangle: x wedge: x x-dash: x y-dash: x y y x y x x y y x y y y y y y y y size size y dir y y size size y size xwidth size size size radius size size c x size major size size string g size + ywidth s a t dir1 y
d minor h i l n r
dir2
When designing your symbol, the x, y and other dimensions are relative to a symbol of size 1, and all the dimensions will be scaled by the actual symbol size chosen at run-time. To design a symbol, make a grid paper with psbasemap R-0.5/0.5/-0.5/0.5 JX4i Ba0.1g0.05 P > grid.ps and draw your symbol, centering it on (0,0). For examples of symbols, see the set supplied with GMT in $GMT_SHAREDIR/custom.
BUGS
The N option does not adjust the BoundingBox information so you may have to post-process the PostScript output with ps2raster -A to obtain the correct BoundingBox. psxy cannot handle lling of polygons that contain the south or north pole. For such a polygon, make a copy and split it into two and make each explicitly contain the polar point. The two polygons will combine to give the desired effect when lled; to draw outline use the original polygon.
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), gmtcolors(5), psbasemap(1), psxyz(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSXYZ(1)
PSXYZ(1)
NAME
psxyz Plot lines, polygons, and symbols in 3-D
SYNOPSIS
psxyz les Jparameters Jz|Zparameters Rwest/east/south/north[/zmin/zmax][r] [ B[p|s]parameters ] [ Ccptle ] [ Ddx/dy[dz] ] [ Eazim/elev[+wlon/lat[/z]][+vx0/y0] ] [ Gll ] [ H[i][nrec] ] [ Iintens ] [ K ] [ L ] [ N ] [ O ] [ P ] [ Q ] [ S[symbol][size] ] [ U[just/dx/dy/][c|label] ] [ V ] [ W[-|+][pen] ] [ X[a|c|r][x-shift[u]] ] [ Y[a|c|r][y-shift[u]] ] [ Zzlevel ] [ :[i|o] ] [ bi[s|S|d|D[ncol]|c[var1/...]] ] [ ccopies ] [ fcolinfo ] [ g[a]x|y|d|X|Y|D|[col]z[+|-]gap[u] ] [ m[ag] ]
DESCRIPTION
psxyz reads (x,y,z) triplets from les [or standard input] and generates PostScript code that will plot lines, polygons, or symbols at those locations in 3-D. If a symbol is selected and no symbol size given, then psxyz will interpret the fourth column of the input data as symbol size. Symbols whose size is <= 0 are skipped. If no symbols are specied then the symbol code (see S below) must be present as last column in the input. Multiple segment les may be plotted using the m option. If S is not used, a line connecting the data points will be drawn instead. To explicitly close polygons, use L. Select a ll with G. If G is set, W will control whether the polygon outline is drawn or not. If a symbol is selected, G and W determines the ll and outline/no outline, respectively. The PostScript code is written to standard output. les J List one or more le-names. If no les are given, psxyz will read standard input. Selects the map projection. Scale is UNIT/degree, 1:xxxxx, or width in UNIT (upper case modier). UNIT is cm, inch, or m, depending on the MEASURE_UNIT setting in .gmtdefaults4, but this can be overridden on the command line by appending c, i, or m to the scale/width value. When central meridian is optional, default is center of longitude range on R option. Default standard parallel is the equator. For map height, max dimension, or min dimension, append h, +, or to the width, respectively. More details can be found in the psbasemap man pages. CYLINDRICAL PROJECTIONS: Jclon0/lat0/scale (Cassini) Jcyl_stere/[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Stereographic) Jj[lon0/]scale (Miller) Jm[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Mercator) Jmlon0/lat0/scale (Mercator - Give meridian and standard parallel) Jo[a]lon0/lat0/azimuth/scale (Oblique Mercator - point and azimuth) Jo[b]lon0/lat0/lon1/lat1/scale (Oblique Mercator - two points) Joclon0/lat0/lonp/latp/scale (Oblique Mercator - point and pole) Jq[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Equidistant) Jtlon0/[lat0/]scale (TM - Transverse Mercator) Juzone/scale (UTM - Universal Transverse Mercator) Jy[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Equal-Area) CONIC PROJECTIONS: Jblon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Albers) Jdlon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Conic Equidistant) Jllon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Lambert Conic Conformal) Jpoly/[lon0/[lat0/]]scale ((American) Polyconic) AZIMUTHAL PROJECTIONS: Jalon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Lambert Azimuthal Equal-Area) Jelon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Azimuthal Equidistant) Jflon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Gnomonic)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSXYZ(1)
PSXYZ(1)
Jglon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Orthographic) Jglon0/lat0/altitude/azimuth/tilt/twist/Width/Height/scale (General Perspective). Jslon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (General Stereographic) MISCELLANEOUS PROJECTIONS: Jh[lon0/]scale (Hammer) Ji[lon0/]scale (Sinusoidal) Jkf[lon0/]scale (Eckert IV) Jk[s][lon0/]scale (Eckert VI) Jn[lon0/]scale (Robinson) Jr[lon0/]scale (Winkel Tripel) Jv[lon0/]scale (Van der Grinten) Jw[lon0/]scale (Mollweide) NON-GEOGRAPHICAL PROJECTIONS: Jp[a]scale[/origin][r|z] (Polar coordinates (theta,r)) Jxx-scale[d|l|ppow|t|T][/y-scale[d|l|ppow|t|T]] (Linear, log, and power scaling) Jz R Sets the vertical scaling (for 3-D maps). Same syntax as Jx. xmin, xmax, ymin, and ymax specify the Region of interest. For geographic regions, these limits correspond to west, east, south, and north and you may specify them in decimal degrees or in [+-]dd:mm[:ss.xxx][W|E|S|N] format. Append r if lower left and upper right map coordinates are given instead of w/e/s/n. The two shorthands Rg and Rd stand for global domain (0/360 and -180/+180 in longitude respectively, with -90/+90 in latitude). Alternatively, specify the name of an existing grid le and the R settings (and grid spacing, if applicable) are copied from the grid. For calendar time coordinates you may either give (a) relative time (relative to the selected TIME_EPOCH and in the selected TIME_UNIT; append t to JX|x), or (b) absolute time of the form [date]T[clock] (append T to JX|x). At least one of date and clock must be present; the T is always required. The date string must be of the form [-]yyyy[-mm[-dd]] (Gregorian calendar) or yyyy[-Www[-d]] (ISO week calendar), while the clock string must be of the form hh:mm:ss[.xxx]. The use of delimiters and their type and positions must be exactly as indicated (however, input, output and plot formats are customizable; see gmtdefaults).
OPTIONS
No space between the option ag and the associated arguments. B C Sets map boundary annotation and tickmark intervals; see the psbasemap man page for all the details. Give a color palette le. If S is set, let symbol ll color be determined by the t-value in the fourth column. Additional elds are shifted over by one column (optional size would be in 5th rather than 4th eld, etc.). If S is not set, then psxyz expects the user to supply a multisegment line or polygon le (requires m) where each segment header contains a Zval string. The val will control the color of the line or polygon (if L is set) via the cpt le. Offset the plot symbol or line locations by the given amounts dx/dy[dz] [Default is no offset]. Sets the viewpoints azimuth and elevation (for perspective view) [180/90]. For frames used for animation, you may want to append + to x the center of your data domain (or specify a particular world coordinate point with +wlon0/lat[/z]) which will project to the center of your page size (or specify the coordinates of the projected view point with +vx0/y0). Select color or pattern for lling of symbols or polygons [Default is no ll]. (See SPECIFYING FILL below). Note when m is chosen, psxyz will search for G and W strings in all the subheaders and let any values thus found over-ride the command line settings (see m below).
D E
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSXYZ(1)
PSXYZ(1)
Input le(s) has header record(s). If used, the default number of header records is N_HEADER_RECS. Use Hi if only input data should have header records [Default will write out header records if the input data have them]. Blank lines and lines starting with # are always skipped. Use the supplied intens value (nominally in the -1 to + 1 range) to modulate the ll color by simulating illumination [none]. More PostScript code will be appended later [Default terminates the plot system]. Force closed polygons: connect the endpoints of the line-segment(s) and draw polygons. Also, in concert with C, m, and Z settings in the headers will use the implied color for polygon ll [Default is polygon pen color]. N Do NOT skip symbols that fall outside map border [Default plots points inside border only]. Selects Overlay plot mode [Default initializes a new plot system]. Selects Portrait plotting mode [Default is Landscape, see gmtdefaults to change this]. Turn off the automatic sorting of items based on their distance from the viewer. The default is to sort the items so that items in the foreground are plotted after items in the background. Plot symbols. If present, size is symbol size in the unit set in .gmtdefaults4 (unless c, i, m, or p is appended). If the symbol code (see below) is not given it will be read from the last column in the input data; this cannot be used in conjunction with b. Optionally, append c, i, m, p to indicate that the size information in the input data is in units of cm, inch, meter, or point, respectively [Default is MEASURE_UNIT]. Note: if you give both size and symbol via the input le you must use MEASURE_UNIT to indicate the units used for the symbol size. The uppercase symbols A, C, D, G, H, I, N, S, T are normalized to have the same area as a circle with diameter size, while the size of the corresponding lowercase symbols refers to the diameter of a circumscribed circle. Choose between these symbol codes: x-dash (-). size is the length of a short horizontal (x-dir) line segment. plus (+). size is diameter of circumscribing circle. star. size is diameter of circumscribing circle. Vertical bar extending from base to y. size is bar width. Append u if size is in x-units [Default is plot-distance units]. By default, base = ymin. Append bbase to change this value. Horizontal bar extending from base to x. size is bar width. Append u if size is in y-units [Default is plot-distance units]. By default, base = xmin. Append bbase to change this value. circle. size is diameter of circle. diamond. size is diameter of circumscribing circle. ellipse. Direction (in degrees counter-clockwise from horizontal), major_axis, and minor_axis must be found in columns 4, 5, and 6. Same as Se, except azimuth (in degrees east of north) should be given instead of direction. The azimuth will be mapped into an angle based on the chosen map projection (Se leaves the directions unchanged.) Furthermore, the axes lengths must be given in km instead of plot-distance units. An exception occurs for a linear projection in which we assume the ellipse axes are given in the same units as R. front. Sfgap/size[dir][type][:offset]. Supply distance gap between symbols and symbol size. If gap is negative, it is interpreted to mean the number of symbols along the front instead. Append dir to plot symbols on the left or right side of the front [Default is centered]. Append type to specify which symbol to plot: box, circle, fault, slip, or triangle. [Default is fault]. Slip means left-lateral or right-lateral strike-slip arrows (centered is not an option). Append :offset to offset the rst symbol from the beginning of the front by that amount [Default is 0].
I K L
O P Q S
SS+ Sa Sb SB Sc Sd Se SE
Sf
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSXYZ(1)
PSXYZ(1)
Sg Sh Si Sj SJ
octagon. size is diameter of circumscribing circle. hexagon. size is diameter of circumscribing circle. inverted triangle. size is diameter of circumscribing circle. Rotated rectangle. Direction (in degrees counter-clockwise from horizontal), x-dimension, and ydimension must be found in columns 4, 5, and 6. Same as Sj, except azimuth (in degrees east of north) should be given instead of direction. The azimuth will be mapped into an angle based on the chosen map projection (Sj leaves the directions unchanged.) Furthermore, the dimensions must be given in km instead of plot-distance units. An exception occurs for a linear projection in which we assume the dimensions are given in the same units as R. kustom symbol. Append <name>/size, and we will look for a denition le called <name>.def in (1) the current directory or (2) in /.gmt or (3) in $GMT_SHAREDIR/custom. The symbol as dened in that le is of size 1.0 by default; the appended size will scale symbol accordingly. The symbols are plotted in the x-y plane. Users may add their own custom *.def les; see CUSTOM SYMBOLS in the psxy man page. letter or text string (less than 64 characters). Give size, and append /string after the size. Note that the size is only approximate; no individual scaling is done for different characters. Remember to escape special characters like *. Optionally, you may append %font to select a particular font [Default is ANNOT_FONT_PRIMARY]. math angle arc, optionally with one or two arrow heads [NOT IMPLEMENTED YET]. The size is the radius of the arc. Start and stop directions (in degrees counter-clockwise from horizontal) for arc must be found in columns 3 and 4. Use Smf to add arrow head at rst angle, Sml for arrow head at last angle, and Smb for both [Default is no arrow heads]. pentagon. size is diameter of circumscribing circle. column (3-D) extending from base to z. size sets base width (Use xsize/ysize if not the same). Append u if size is in x-units [Default is plot-distance units]. If no size is given we expect both xsize and ysize as two extra data columns. By default, base = 0. Append bbase to change this value. The facet colors will be modied to simulate shading. Use SO to disable such 3-D illumination. point. No size needs to be specied (1 pixel is used). quoted line, i.e., lines with annotations such as contours. It is assumed that each individual line has a constant z level (i.e., each line must lie in the x-y plane). Append [d|f|n|l|x]info[:labelinfo]. The required argument controls the placement of labels along the quoted lines. Choose among ve controlling algorithms: ddist[c|i|m|p] or Ddist[d|e|k|m|n] For lower case d, give distances between labels on the plot in your preferred measurement unit c (cm), i (inch), m (meter), or p (points), while for upper case D, specify distances in map units and append the unit; choose among e (m), k (km), m (mile), n (nautical mile), or d (spherical degree). [Default is 10c or 4i]. ffle.d Reads the ascii le fle.d and places labels at locations in the le that matches locations along the quoted lines. Inexact matches and points outside the region are skipped.
Sk
Sl
Sm
Sn So
Sp Sq
l|Lline1[,line2,...] Give start and stop coordinates for one or more comma-separated straight line segments. Labels will be placed where these lines intersect the quoted lines. The format of each line specication is start/stop, where start and stop are either a specied point lon/lat or a 2-character XY key that uses the justication format employed in pstext to indicate a point on the map, given as [LCR][BMT]. L will interpret the point pairs as dening great circles [Default is straight line].
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSXYZ(1)
PSXYZ(1)
nn_label Species the number of equidistant labels for quoted lines line [1]. Upper case N starts labeling exactly at the start of the line [Default centers them along the line]. N-1 places one justied label at start, while N+1 places one justied label at the end of quoted lines. Optionally, append /min_dist[c|i|m|p] to enforce that a minimum distance separation between successive labels is enforced. x|Xxle.d Reads the multi-segment le xle.d and places labels at the intersections between the quoted lines and the lines inxle.d. X will resample the lines rst along great-circle arcs. In addition, you may optionally append +rradius[c|i|m|p] to set a minimum label separation in the x-y plane [no limitation]. The optional labelinfo controls the specics of the label formatting and consists of a concatenated string made up of any of the following control arguments: +aangle For annotations at a xed angle, +an for line-normal, or +ap for line-parallel [Default]. +cdx[/dy] Sets the clearance between label and optional text box. Append c|i|m|p to specify the unit or % to indicate a percentage of the label font size [15%]. +d +ffont Turns on debug which will draw helper points and lines to illustrate the workings of the quoted line setup. Sets the desired font [Default ANNOT_FONT_PRIMARY].
+g[color] Selects opaque text boxes [Default is transparent]; optionally specify the color [Default is PAGE_COLOR]. (See SPECIFYING COLOR below). +jjust +kcolor Sets color of text labels [Default is COLOR_BACKGROUND]. (See SPECIFYING COLOR below). +llabel Sets the constant label text. +Lag Sets the label text according to the specied ag: +Lh Take the label from the current multisegment header (rst scan for an embedded Llabel option, if not use the rst word following the segment ag). For multiple-word labels, enclose entire label in double quotes. Take the Cartesian plot distances along the line as the label; append c|i|m|p as the unit [Default is MEASURE_UNIT]. Calculate actual map distances; append d|e|k|m|n as the unit [Default is d(egrees), unless label placement was based on map distances along the lines in which case we use the same unit specied for that algorithm]. Requires a map projection to be used. Use text after the 2nd column in the xed label location le as the label. Requires the xed label location setting. As +Lh but use the headers in the xle.d instead. Requires the crossing le option. Sets label justication [Default is MC]. Ignored when -SqN|n+|-1 is used.
+Ld +LD
+Lf +Lx
+ndx[/dy] Nudges the placement of labels by the specied amount (append c|i|m|p to specify the units). Increments are considered in the coordinate system dened by the orientation of the line; use +N to force increments in the plot x/y coordinates system [no nudging].
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSXYZ(1)
PSXYZ(1)
+o +p[pen]
Selects rounded rectangular text box [Default is rectangular]. Not applicable for curved text (+v) and only makes sense for opaque text boxes. Draws the outline of text boxsets [Default is no outline]; optionally specify pen for outline [Default is width = 0.25p, color = black, texture = solid]. (See SPECIFYING PENS below).
+rmin_rad Will not place labels where the lines radius of curvature is less than min_rad [Default is 0]. +ssize Sets the desired font size in points [Default is 9]. +uunit Appends unit to all line labels. If unit starts with a leading hyphen (-) then there will be no space between label value and the unit. [Default is no unit]. +v +w +=prex Prepends prex to all line labels. If prex starts with a leading hyphen (-) then there will be no space between label value and the prex. [Default is no prex]. Sr Ss St Su rectangle. No size needs to be specied, but the x- and y-dimensions must be found in columns 4 and 5. square. size is diameter of circumscribing circle. triangle. size is diameter of circumscribing circle. cube (3-D). size sets length of all sides. Append u if size is in x-units [Default is plot-distance units]. The facet colors will be modied to simulate shading. Use SU to disable such 3-D illumination. vector. Direction and length must be found in columns 4 and 5 (this is a vector in the horizontal plane). size, if present, will be interpreted as arrowwidth/headlength/headwidth [Default unit is 0.075c/0.3c/0.25c (or 0.03i/0.12i/0.1i)]. By default arrow attributes remains invariant to the length of the arrow. To have the size of the vector scale down with decreasing size, append nnorm, where vectors shorter than norm will have their attributes scaled by length/norm. To center vector on balance point, use Svb; to align point with the vector head, use Svh; to align point with the vector tail, use Svt [Default]. To give the head points x, y, z coordinates instead of direction and length, use Svs. Upper case B, H, T, S will draw a double-headed vector [Default is single head]. Same as Sv, except azimuth should be given instead of direction. The azimuth will be mapped into an angle based on the chosen map projection (Sv leaves the directions unchanged.) pie wedge. Start and stop directions (in degrees counter-clockwise from horizontal) for pie slice must be found in columns 4 and 5. Same as Sw, except azimuths (in degrees east of north) should be given instead of the two directions. The azimuths will be mapped into angles based on the chosen map projection (Sw leaves the directions unchanged.) cross (x). size is diameter of circumscribing circle. y-dash (|). size is the length of a short horizontal (y-dir) line segment. zdash. size is the length of a short vertical (z-dir) line segment. Draw Unix System time stamp on plot. By adding just/dx/dy/, the user may specify the justication of the stamp and where the stamp should fall on the page relative to lower left corner of the plot. For example, BL/0/0 will align the lower left corner of the time stamp with the lower left corner of the plot. Optionally, append a label, or c (which will plot the command string.). The GMT parameters UNIX_TIME, UNIX_TIME_POS, and UNIX_TIME_FORMAT can affect Species curved labels following the path [Default is straight labels]. Species how many (x, y) points will be used to estimate label angles [Default is 10].
Sv
SV Sw SW
Sx Sy Sz U
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSXYZ(1)
PSXYZ(1)
the appearance; see the gmtdefaults man page for details. The time string will be in the locale set by the environment variable TZ (generally local time). V W Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"]. Set pen attributes for lines or the outline of symbols [Defaults: width = 1, color = black, texture = solid]. A leading + will use the lookup color (via C) for both symbol ll and outline pen color, while a leading - will set outline pen color and turn off symbol ll. (See SPECIFYING PENS below).
X Y Shift plot origin relative to the current origin by (x-shift,y-shift) and optionally append the length unit (c, i, m, p). You can prepend a to shift the origin back to the original position after plotting, or prepend r [Default] to reset the current origin to the new location. If O is used then the default (x-shift,y-shift) is (0,0), otherwise it is (r1i, r1i) or (r2.5c, r2.5c). Alternatively, give c to align the center coordinate (x or y) of the plot with the center of the page based on current page size. Z : bi For 3-D projections: Sets the z-level of the basemap [lower end of z-range]. Toggles between (longitude,latitude) and (latitude,longitude) input and/or output. [Default is (longitude,latitude)]. Append i to select input only or o to select output only. [Default affects both]. Selects binary input. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of columns in your binary input le if it exceeds the columns needed by the program. Or append c if the input le is netCDF. Optionally, append var1/var2/... to specify the variables to be read. [Default is the required number of columns given the chosen settings]. Species the number of plot copies. [Default is 1]. Special formatting of input and/or output columns (time or geographical data). Specify i or o to make this apply only to input or output [Default applies to both]. Give one or more columns (or column ranges) separated by commas. Append T (absolute calendar time), t (relative time in chosen TIME_UNIT since TIME_EPOCH), x (longitude), y (latitude), or f (oating point) to each column or column range item. Shorthand f[i|o]g means f[i|o]0x,1y (geographic coordinates). Examine the spacing between consecutive data points in order to impose breaks in the line. Append x|X or y|Y to dene a gap when there is a large enough change in the x or y coordinates, respectively, or d|D for distance gaps; use upper case to calculate gaps from projected coordinates. For gap-testing on other columns use [col]z; if col is not prepended the it defaults to 2 (i.e., 3rd column). Append [+|-]gap and optionally a unit u. Regarding optional signs: -ve means previous minus current column value must exceed |gap to be a gap, +ve means current minus previous column value must exceed gap, and no sign means the absolute value of the difference must exceed gap. For geographic data (x|y|d), the unit u may be meter [Default], kilometer, miles, or nautical miles. For projected data (X|Y|D), choose from inch, centimeter, meter, or points [Default unit set by MEASURE_UNIT]. Note: For x|y|z with time data the unit is instead controlled by TIME_UNIT. Repeat the option to specify multiple criteria, of which any can be met to produce a line break. Issue an additional ga to indicate that all criteria must be met instead. The g option is ignored if S is set. Multiple segment le. Segments are separated by a record whose rst character is ag [Default is >]. On these segment header records one or more of the following options can be added: Gll Use the new ll and turn lling on G- Turn lling off G+ Revert to default ll (none if not set on command line) Wpen Use the new pen and turn outline on W- Turn outline off W+ Revert to default pen (none if not set on command line) Zzval Obtain ll via cpt lookup using z-value zval ZNaN Get the NaN color from the cpt le
c f
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
PSXYZ(1)
PSXYZ(1)
SPECIFYING PENS pen The attributes of lines and symbol outlines as dened by pen is a comma delimetered list of width, color and texture, each of which is optional. width can be indicated as a measure (points, centimeters, inches) or as faint, thin[ner|nest], thick[er|est], fat[ter|test], or obese. color species a gray shade or color (see SPECIFYING COLOR below). texture is a combination of dashes - and dots ..
EXAMPLES
To plot blue columns (width = 1.25 cm) at the positions listed in the le heights.xyz on a 3-D projection of the space (010), (010), (0100), with tickmarks every 2, 2, and 10, viewing it from the southeast at 30 degree elevation, use: psxyz heights.xyz R0/10/0/10/0/100 Jx1.25c Jz0.125c So1.25c Gblue B2:XLABEL:/2:YLABEL:/10:ZLABEL::."3-D PLOT":15 E135/30 Uc W P > heights.ps
BUGS
No hidden line removal is employed for polygons and lines. Symbols, however, are rst sorted according to their distance from the viewpoint so that nearby symbols will overprint more distant ones should they project to the same x,y position. psxyz cannot handle lling of polygons that contain the south or north pole. For such a polygon, make a copy and split it into two and make each explicitly contain the polar point. The two polygons will combine to give the desired effect when lled; to draw outline use the original polygon. The N option does not adjust the BoundingBox information so you may have to post-process the PostScript output with ps2raster -A to obtain the correct BoundingBox.
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), gmtcolors(5), psbasemap(1), psxy(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
SAMPLE1D(1)
SAMPLE1D(1)
NAME
sample1d Resampling of 1-D data sets
SYNOPSIS
sample1d inle [ Fl|a|c|n ] [ H[i][nrec] ] [ Ixinc ] [ Nknotle ] [ Sxstart ] [ Tx_col ] [ V ] [ b[i|o][s|S|d|D[ncol]|c[var1/...]] ] [ f[i|o]colinfo ] [ m[i|o][ag] ]
DESCRIPTION
sample1d reads a multi-column ASCII [or binary] data set from le [or standard input] and interpolates the timeseries/prole at locations where the user needs the values. The user must provide the column number of the independent (monotonically increasing or decreasing) variable. Equidistant or arbitrary sampling can be selected. All columns are resampled based on the new sampling interval. Several interpolation schemes are available. Extrapolation outside the range of the input data is not supported. inle This is a multi-column ASCII [of binary, see b] le with one column containing the independent variable (which must be monotonically in/de-creasing) and the remaining columns holding misc. data values. If no le is provided, sample1d reads from standard input.
OPTIONS
No space between the option ag and the associated arguments. F Choose from l (Linear), a (Akima spline), c (natural cubic spline), and n (no interpolation: nearest point) [Default is Fa]. You may change the default interpolant; see INTERPOLANT in your .gmtdefaults4 le. Input le(s) has header record(s). If used, the default number of header records is N_HEADER_RECS. Use Hi if only input data should have header records [Default will write out header records if the input data have them]. Blank lines and lines starting with # are always skipped. xinc denes the sampling interval. [Default is the separation between the rst and second abscissa point in the inle] knotle is an optional ASCII le with the x locations where the data set will be resampled in the rst column. Note: if H is selected it applies to both inle and knotle. For equidistant sampling, xstart indicates the location of the rst output value. [Default is the smallest even multiple of xinc inside the range of inle] Sets the column number of the independent variable [Default is 0 (rst)]. Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"]. Selects binary input. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of columns in your binary input le if it exceeds the columns needed by the program. Or append c if the input le is netCDF. Optionally, append var1/var2/... to specify the variables to be read. [Default is 2 (or at least the number of columns implied by T)]. Selects binary output. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of desired columns in your binary output le. [Default is same as input]. Special formatting of input and/or output columns (time or geographical data). Specify i or o to make this apply only to input or output [Default applies to both]. Give one or more columns (or column ranges) separated by commas. Append T (absolute calendar time), t (relative time in chosen TIME_UNIT since TIME_EPOCH), x (longitude), y (latitude), or f (oating point) to each column or column range item. Shorthand f[i|o]g means f[i|o]0x,1y (geographic coordinates). Multiple segment le(s). Segments are separated by a special record. For ASCII les the rst character must be ag [Default is >]. For binary les all elds must be NaN and b must set the number of output columns explicitly. By default the m setting applies to both input and output. Use mi and mo to give separate settings to input and output.
I N S T V bi
bo
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
SAMPLE1D(1)
SAMPLE1D(1)

CALENDAR TIME SAMPLING

If the abscissa are calendar times then you must use the f option to indicate this. Furthermore, I then expects an increment in the current TIME_UNIT units. There is not yet support for variable intervals such as months.
EXAMPLES
To resample the le proles.tdgmb, which contains (time,distance,gravity,magnetics,bathymetry) records, at 1km equidistant intervals using Akimas spline, use sample1d proles.tdgmb I1 Fa T1 > proles_equi_d.tdgmb To resample the le depths.dt at positions listed in the le grav_pos.dg, using a cubic spline for the interpolation, use sample1d depths.dt Ngrav_pos.dg Fc > new_depths.dt
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), lter1d(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
SPECTRUM1D(1)
SPECTRUM1D(1)
NAME
spectrum1d compute auto [and cross ] spectra from one [or two] timeseries.
SYNOPSIS
spectrum1d [ x[y]le ] Ssegment_size] [ C[xycnpago] ] [ Ddt ] [ Nname_stem ] [ V ] [ W ] [ b[i|o][s|S|d|D[ncol]|c[var1/...]] ] [ f[i|o]colinfo ]
DESCRIPTION
spectrum1d reads X [and Y] values from the rst [and second] columns on standard input [or x[y]le]. These values are treated as timeseries X(t) [Y(t)] sampled at equal intervals spaced dt units apart. There may be any number of lines of input. spectrum1d will create le[s] containing auto [and cross ] spectral density estimates by Welchs method of ensemble averaging of multiple overlapped windows, using standard error estimates from Bendat and Piersol. The output les have 3 columns: f or w, p, and e. f or w is the frequency or wavelength, p is the spectral density estimate, and e is the one standard deviation error bar size. These les are named based on name_stem. If the C option is used, up to eight les are created; otherwise only one (xpower) is written. The les (which are ASCII unless bo is set) are as follows: name_stem.xpower Power spectral density of X(t). Units of X * X * dt. name_stem.ypower Power spectral density of Y(t). Units of Y * Y * dt. name_stem.cpower Power spectral density of the coherent output. Units same as ypower. name_stem.npower Power spectral density of the noise output. Units same as ypower. name_stem.gain Gain spectrum, or modulus of the transfer function. Units of (Y / X). name_stem.phase Phase spectrum, or phase of the transfer function. Units are radians. name_stem.admit Admittance spectrum, or real part of the transfer function. Units of (Y / X). name_stem.coh (Squared) coherency spectrum, or linear correlation coefcient as a function of frequency. Dimensionless number in [0, 1]. The Signal-to-Noise-Ratio (SNR) is coh / (1 - coh). SNR = 1 when coh = 0.5.
REQUIRED ARGUMENTS
x[y]le ASCII (or binary, see bi) le holding X(t) [Y(t)] samples in the rst 1 [or 2] columns. If no le is specied, spectrum1d will read from standard input. S segment_size is a radix-2 number of samples per window for ensemble averaging. The smallest frequency estimated is 1.0/(segment_size * dt), while the largest is 1.0/(2 * dt). One standard error in power spectral density is approximately 1.0 / sqrt(n_data / segment_size), so if segment_size = 256, you need 25,600 data to get a one standard error bar of 10%. Cross-spectral error bars are larger and more complicated, being a function also of the coherency. Read the rst two columns of input as samples of two timeseries, X(t) and Y(t). Consider Y(t) to be the output and X(t) the input in a linear system with noise. Estimate the optimum frequency response function by least squares, such that the noise output is minimized and the coherent output and the noise output are uncorrelated. Optionally specify up to 8 letters from the set { x y c n p a g o } in any order to create only those output les instead of the default [all]. x = xpower, y = ypower, c = cpower, n = npower, p = phase, a = admit, g = gain, o = coh.
OPTIONS
C
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
SPECTRUM1D(1)
SPECTRUM1D(1)
D N V W bi
dt Set the spacing between samples in the timeseries [Default = 1]. name_stem Supply the name stem to be used for output les [Default = "spectrum"]. Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"]. Write Wavelength rather than frequency in column 1 of the output le[s] [Default = frequency, (cycles / dt)]. Selects binary input. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of columns in your binary input le if it exceeds the columns needed by the program. Or append c if the input le is netCDF. Optionally, append var1/var2/... to specify the variables to be read. [Default is 2 input columns]. Selects binary output. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of desired columns in your binary output le. [Default is 2 output columns]. Special formatting of input and/or output columns (time or geographical data). Specify i or o to make this apply only to input or output [Default applies to both]. Give one or more columns (or column ranges) separated by commas. Append T (absolute calendar time), t (relative time in chosen TIME_UNIT since TIME_EPOCH), x (longitude), y (latitude), or f (oating point) to each column or column range item. Shorthand f[i|o]g means f[i|o]0x,1y (geographic coordinates).
bo

EXAMPLES
Suppose data.g is gravity data in mGal, sampled every 1.5 km. To write its power spectrum, in mGal**2-km, to the le data.xpower, use spectrum1d data.g S256 D1.5 Ndata Suppose in addition to data.g you have data.t, which is topography in meters sampled at the same points as data.g. To estimate various features of the transfer function, considering data.t as input and data.g as output, use paste data.t data.g | spectrum1d S256 D1.5 Ndata C
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), grdfft(1)
REFERENCES
Bendat, J. S., and A. G. Piersol, 1986, Random Data, 2nd revised ed., John Wiley & Sons. Welch, P. D., 1967, The use of Fast Fourier Transform for the estimation of power spectra: a method based on time averaging over short, modied periodograms, IEEE Transactions on Audio and Electroacoustics, Vol AU-15, No 2.
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
SPLITXYZ(1)
SPLITXYZ(1)
NAME
splitxyz lter to divide (x,y,z[,distance,heading]) data into (x,y,z) track segments.
SYNOPSIS
splitxyz [ xyz[dh]le ] Ccourse_change [ Aazimuth/tolerance ] [ Dminimum_distance ] [ Fxy_lter/z_lter ] [ Ggap_distance ] [ H[i][nrec] ] [ M ] [ Nnamestem ] [ Qags ] [ S ] [ V ] [ Z ] [ :[i|o] ] [ b[i|o][s|S|d|D[ncol]|c[var1/...]] ] [ f[i|o]colinfo ]
DESCRIPTION
splitxyz reads a series of (x,y[,z]) records [or optionally (x,y,z,d,h); see S option] from standard input [or xyz[dh]le] and splits this into separate lists of (x,y[,z]) series, such that each series has a nearly constant azimuth through the x,y plane. There are options to choose only those series which have a certain orientation, to set a minimum length for series, and to high or lowpass lter the z values and/or the x,y values. splitxyz is a useful lter between data extraction and pswiggle plotting, and can also be used to divide a large x,y,z dataset into segments. The output is always in the ASCII format; input may be ASCII or binary (see b). xyz[dh]le(s) 3 (but see Z) [or 5] column ASCII le [or binary, see b] holding (x,y,z[,d,h]) data values. To use (x,y,z,d,h) input, sorted so that d is non-decreasing, specify the S option; default expects (x,y,z) only. If no le is specied, splitxyz will read from standard input. C Terminate a segment when a course change exceeding course_change degrees of heading is detected. Write out only those segments which are within +/- tolerance degrees of azimuth in heading, measured clockwise from North, [0 - 360]. [Default writes all acceptable segments, regardless of orientation]. Do not write a segment out unless it is at least minimum_distance units long [0] Filter the z values and/or the x,y values, assuming these are functions of d coordinate. xy_lter and z_lter are lter widths in distance units. If a lter width is zero, the ltering is not performed. The absolute value of the width is the full width of a cosinearch lowpass lter. If the width is positive, the data are lowpass ltered; if negative, the data are highpass ltered by subtracting the lowpass value from the observed value. If z_lter is nonzero, the entire series of input z values is ltered before any segmentation is performed, so that the only edge effects in the ltering will happen at the beginning and end of the complete data stream. If xy_lter is nonzero, the data is rst divided into segments and then the x,y values of each segment are ltered separately. This may introduce edge effects at the ends of each segment, but prevents a lowpass x,y lter from rounding off the corners of track segments. [Default = no ltering]. Do not let a segment have a gap exceeding gap_distance; instead, split it into two segments. [Default ignores gaps]. Input le(s) has header record(s). If used, the default number of header records is N_HEADER_RECS. Use Hi if only input data should have header records [Default will write out header records if the input data have them]. Blank lines and lines starting with # are always skipped. Not used with binary data. Use Map units. Then x,y are in degrees of longitude, latitude, distances are in kilometers, and angles are azimuths. [Default: distances are cartesian in same units as x,y and angles are counterclockwise from horizontal]. Create Named output les, writing each segment to a separate le in the working directory named namestem.prole#, where # increases consecutively from 1. [Default writes entire output to stdout, separating segments by sub-headings that start with > marks]. Specify your desired output using any combination of xyzdh, in any order. Do not space between the letters. Use lower case. The output will be ASCII (or binary, see bo) columns of values corresponding to xyzdh [Default is Qxyzdh (Qxydh if Z is set)].
OPTIONS
A
D F
G H
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
SPLITXYZ(1)
SPLITXYZ(1)
S V Z : bi
d and h is supplied. In this case, input contains x,y,z,d,h. [Default expects (x,y,z) input, and d,h are computed from delta x, delta y, according to M option] Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"]. Data have x,y only (no z-column). Toggles between (longitude,latitude) and (latitude,longitude) input and/or output. [Default is (longitude,latitude)]. Append i to select input only or o to select output only. [Default affects both]. Selects binary input. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of columns in your binary input le if it exceeds the columns needed by the program. Or append c if the input le is netCDF. Optionally, append var1/var2/... to specify the variables to be read. [Default is 2, 3, or 5 input columns as set by S, Z]. Selects binary output. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of desired columns in your binary output le. [Default is 1-5 output columns as set by Q]. Special formatting of input and/or output columns (time or geographical data). Specify i or o to make this apply only to input or output [Default applies to both]. Give one or more columns (or column ranges) separated by commas. Append T (absolute calendar time), t (relative time in chosen TIME_UNIT since TIME_EPOCH), x (longitude), y (latitude), or f (oating point) to each column or column range item. Shorthand f[i|o]g means f[i|o]0x,1y (geographic coordinates).
bo

EXAMPLES
Suppose you want to make a wiggle plot of magnetic anomalies on segments oriented approximately eastwest from a cruise called cag71 in the region R300/315/12/20. You want to use a 100km lowpass lter to smooth the tracks and a 500km highpass lter to detrend the magnetic anomalies. Try this: gmtlist cag71 R300/315/12/20 Fxyzdh | splitxyz A90/15 F100/-500 M D100 S V | pswiggle R300/315/12/20 Jm0.6 Ba5f1:.cag71: T1 W0.75p Ggray Z200 > cag71_wiggles.ps MGD-77 users: For this application we recommend that you extract d, h from mgd77list rather than have splitxyz compute them separately. Suppose you have been given a binary, double-precision le containing lat, lon, gravity values from a survey, and you want to split it into proles named survey.prole# (when gap exceeds 100 km). Try this: splitxyz survey.bin Nsurvey V G100 D100 : M bi3
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), mgd77list(1), pswiggle(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
SURFACE(1)
SURFACE(1)
NAME
surface adjustable tension continuous curvature surface gridding algorithm
SYNOPSIS
surface [ xyzle ] Goutputle.grd Ixinc[unit][=|+][/yinc[unit][=|+]] Rwest/east/south/north[r] [ Aaspect_ratio ] [ Cconvergence_limit ] [ H[i][nrec] ] [ Lllower ] [ Luupper ] [ Nmax_iterations ] [ Q ] [ Ssearch_radius[m] ] [ Ttension_factor[i|b] ] [ V[l] ] [ Zover-relaxation_factor ] [ :[i|o] ] [ bi[s|S|d|D[ncol]|c[var1/...]] ] [ fcolinfo ]
DESCRIPTION
surface reads randomly-spaced (x,y,z) triples from standard input [or xyzle] and produces a binary grid le of gridded values z(x,y) by solving: (1 - T) * L (L (z)) + T * L (z) = 0 where T is a tension factor between 0 and 1, and L indicates the Laplacian operator. T = 0 gives the "minimum curvature" solution which is equivalent to SuperMISP and the ISM packages. Minimum curvature can cause undesired oscillations and false local maxima or minima (See Smith and Wessel, 1990), and you may wish to use T > 0 to suppress these effects. Experience suggests T 0.25 usually looks good for potential eld data and T should be larger (T 0.35) for steep topography data. T = 1 gives a harmonic surface (no maxima or minima are possible except at control data points). It is recommended that the user preprocess the data with blockmean, blockmedian, or blockmode to avoid spatial aliasing and eliminate redundant data. You may impose lower and/or upper bounds on the solution. These may be entered in the form of a xed value, a grid with values, or simply be the minimum/maximum input data values. xyzle G I 3 column ASCII le [or binary, see b] holding (x,y,z) data values. If no le is specied, surface will read from standard input. Output le name. Output is a binary 2-D .grd le. Note that the smallest grid dimension must be at least 4. x_inc [and optionally y_inc] is the grid spacing. Optionally, append a sufx modier. Geographical (degrees) coordinates: Append m to indicate arc minutes or c to indicate arc seconds. If one of the units e, k, i, or n is appended instead, the increment is assumed to be given in meter, km, miles, or nautical miles, respectively, and will be converted to the equivalent degrees longitude at the middle latitude of the region (the conversion depends on ELLIPSOID). If /y_inc is given but set to 0 it will be reset equal to x_inc; otherwise it will be converted to degrees latitude. All coordinates: If = is appended then the corresponding max x (east) or y (north) may be slightly adjusted to t exactly the given increment [by default the increment may be adjusted slightly to t the given domain]. Finally, instead of giving an increment you may specify the number of nodes desired by appending + to the supplied integer argument; the increment is then recalculated from the number of nodes and the domain. The resulting increment value depends on whether you have selected a gridline-registered or pixel-registered grid; see Appendix B for details. Note: if Rgrdle is used then grid spacing has already been initialized; use I to override the values. xmin, xmax, ymin, and ymax specify the Region of interest. For geographic regions, these limits correspond to west, east, south, and north and you may specify them in decimal degrees or in [+-]dd:mm[:ss.xxx][W|E|S|N] format. Append r if lower left and upper right map coordinates are given instead of w/e/s/n. The two shorthands Rg and Rd stand for global domain (0/360 and -180/+180 in longitude respectively, with -90/+90 in latitude). Alternatively, specify the name of an existing grid le and the R settings (and grid spacing, if applicable) are copied from the grid. For calendar time coordinates you may either give (a) relative time (relative to the selected TIME_EPOCH and in the selected TIME_UNIT; append t to JX|x), or (b) absolute time of the form [date]T[clock] (append T to JX|x). At least one of date and clock must be present; the T is always required. The date string must be of the form [-]yyyy[-mm[-dd]] (Gregorian calendar) or yyyy[-Www[-d]] (ISO week calendar), while the clock string must be of the form hh:mm:ss[.xxx]. The use of delimiters and their type and positions must be exactly as indicated (however, input, output and plot formats are customizable; see gmtdefaults).
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
SURFACE(1)
SURFACE(1)
OPTIONS
A C Aspect ratio. If desired, grid anisotropy can be added to the equations. Enter aspect_ratio, where dy = dx / aspect_ratio relates the grid dimensions. [Default = 1 assumes isotropic grid.] Convergence limit. Iteration is assumed to have converged when the maximum absolute change in any grid value is less than convergence_limit. (Units same as data z units). [Default is scaled to 0.1 percent of typical gradient in input data.] Input le(s) has header record(s). If used, the default number of header records is N_HEADER_RECS. Use Hi if only input data should have header records [Default will write out header records if the input data have them]. Blank lines and lines starting with # are always skipped. Not used with binary data. Impose limits on the output solution. llower sets the lower bound. lower can be the name of a grid le with lower bound values, a xed value, d to set to minimum input value, or u for unconstrained [Default]. uupper sets the upper bound and can be the name of a grid le with upper bound values, a xed value, d to set to maximum input value, or u for unconstrained [Default]. Number of iterations. Iteration will cease when convergence_limit is reached or when number of iterations reaches max_iterations. [Default is 250.] Suggest grid dimensions which have a highly composite greatest common factor. This allows surface to use several intermediate steps in the solution, yielding faster run times and better results. The sizes suggested by Q can be achieved by altering R and/or I. You can recover the R and I you want later by using grdsample or grdcut on the output of surface. Search radius. Enter search_radius in same units as x,y data; append m to indicate minutes. This is used to initialize the grid before the rst iteration; it is not worth the time unless the grid lattice is prime and cannot have regional stages. [Default = 0.0 and no search is made.] Tension factor[s]. These must be between 0 and 1. Tension may be used in the interior solution (above equation, where it suppresses spurious oscillations) and in the boundary conditions (where it tends to atten the solution approaching the edges). Using zero for both values results in a minimum curvature surface with free edges, i.e., a natural bicubic spline. Use Ttension_factori to set interior tension, and Ttension_factorb to set boundary tension. If you do not append i or b, both will be set to the same value. [Default = 0 for both gives minimum curvature solution.] Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"]. Vl will report the convergence after each iteration; V will report only after each regional grid is converged. Over-relaxation factor. This parameter is used to accelerate the convergence; it is a number between 1 and 2. A value of 1 iterates the equations exactly, and will always assure stable convergence. Larger values overestimate the incremental changes during convergence, and will reach a solution more rapidly but may become unstable. If you use a large value for this factor, it is a good idea to monitor each iteration with the Vl option. [Default = 1.4 converges quickly and is almost always stable.] Toggles between (longitude,latitude) and (latitude,longitude) input and/or output. [Default is (longitude,latitude)]. Append i to select input only or o to select output only. [Default affects both]. Selects binary input. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of columns in your binary input le if it exceeds the columns needed by the program. Or append c if the input le is netCDF. Optionally, append var1/var2/... to specify the variables to be read. [Default is 3 input columns]. Special formatting of input and/or output columns (time or geographical data). Specify i or o to make this apply only to input or output [Default applies to both]. Give one or more columns (or column ranges) separated by commas. Append T (absolute calendar time), t (relative time in chosen TIME_UNIT since TIME_EPOCH), x (longitude), y (latitude), or f (oating point) to each column or column range item. Shorthand f[i|o]g means f[i|o]0x,1y (geographic coordinates).
N Q
: bi
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
SURFACE(1)
SURFACE(1)

EXAMPLES
To grid 5 by 5 minute gravity block means from the ASCII data in hawaii_5x5.xyg, using a tension_factor = 0.25, a convergence_limit = 0.1 milligal, writing the result to a le called hawaii_grd.grd, and monitoring each iteration, try: surface hawaii_5x5.xyg R198/208/18/25 I5m Ghawaii_grd.grd T0.25 C0.1 Vl
BUGS
surface will complain when more than one data point is found for any node and suggest that you run blockmean, blockmedian, or blockmode rst. If you did run blockm* and still get this message it usually means that your grid spacing is so small that you need more decimals in the output format used by blockm*. You may specify more decimal places by editing the parameter D_FORMAT in your .gmtdefaults4 le prior to running blockm*, or choose binary input and/or output using single or double precision storage. Note that only gridline registration is possible with surface. If you need a pixel-registered grid you can resample a gridline registered grid using grdsample T.
SEE ALSO
blockmean(1), blockmedian(1), blockmode(1), GMT (1), nearneighbor(1), triangulate(1)
REFERENCES
Smith, W. H. F, and P. Wessel, 1990, Gridding with continuous curvature splines in tension, Geophysics, 55, 293305.
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
TREND1D(1)
TREND1D(1)
NAME
trend1d Fit a [weighted] [robust] polynomial [or Fourier] model for y = f(x) to xy[w] data.
SYNOPSIS
trend1d Fxymrw N[f]n_model[r] [ xy[w]le ] [ Ccondition_number ] [ H[i][nrec] ] [ I[condence_level] ] [ V ] [ W ] [ :[i|o] ] [ b[i|o][s|S|d|D[ncol]|c[var1/...]] ] [ f[i|o]colinfo ]
DESCRIPTION
trend1d reads x,y [and w] values from the rst two [three] columns on standard input [or xy[w]le] and ts a regression model y = f(x) + e by [weighted] least squares. The functional form of f(x) may be chosen as polynomial or Fourier, and the t may be made robust by iterative reweighting of the data. The user may also search for the number of terms in f(x) which signicantly reduce the variance in y.
REQUIRED ARGUMENTS
F N Specify up to ve letters from the set {x y m r w} in any order to create columns of ASCII [or binary] output. x = x, y = y, m = model f(x), r = residual y - m, w = weight used in tting. Specify the number of terms in the model, n_model, whether to t a Fourier (Nf) or polynomial [Default] model, and append r to do a robust t. E.g., a robust quadratic model is N3r.
OPTIONS
xy[w]le ASCII [or binary, see b] le containing x,y [w] values in the rst 2 [3] columns. If no le is specied, trend1d will read from standard input. C Set the maximum allowed condition number for the matrix solution. trend1d ts a damped least squares model, retaining only that part of the eigenvalue spectrum such that the ratio of the largest eigenvalue to the smallest eigenvalue is condition_#. [Default: condition_# = 1.0e06. ]. Input le(s) has header record(s). If used, the default number of header records is N_HEADER_RECS. Use Hi if only input data should have header records [Default will write out header records if the input data have them]. Blank lines and lines starting with # are always skipped. Iteratively increase the number of model parameters, starting at one, until n_model is reached or the reduction in variance of the model is not signicant at the condence_level level. You may set I only, without an attached number; in this case the t will be iterative with a default condence level of 0.51. Or choose your own level between 0 and 1. See remarks section. Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"]. Weights are supplied in input column 3. Do a weighted least squares t [or start with these weights when doing the iterative robust t]. [Default reads only the rst 2 columns.] Toggles between (longitude,latitude) and (latitude,longitude) input and/or output. [Default is (longitude,latitude)]. Append i to select input only or o to select output only. [Default affects both]. Selects binary input. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of columns in your binary input le if it exceeds the columns needed by the program. Or append c if the input le is netCDF. Optionally, append var1/var2/... to specify the variables to be read. [Default is 2 (or 3 if W is set) columns]. Selects binary output. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of desired columns in your binary output le. [Default is 1-5 columns as given by F]. Special formatting of input and/or output columns (time or geographical data). Specify i or o to make this apply only to input or output [Default applies to both]. Give one or more columns (or column ranges) separated by commas. Append T (absolute calendar time), t (relative time in chosen TIME_UNIT since TIME_EPOCH), x (longitude), y (latitude), or f (oating point) to each column or column range item. Shorthand f[i|o]g means f[i|o]0x,1y (geographic coordinates).
V W : bi
bo
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
TREND1D(1)
TREND1D(1)

REMARKS
If a Fourier model is selected, the domain of x will be shifted and scaled to [-pi, pi] and the basis functions used will be 1, cos(x), sin(x), cos(2x), sin(2x), ... If a polynomial model is selected, the domain of x will be shifted and scaled to [-1, 1] and the basis functions will be Chebyshev polynomials. These have a numerical advantage in the form of the matrix which must be inverted and allow more accurate solutions. The Chebyshev polynomial of degree n has n+1 extrema in [-1, 1], at all of which its value is either -1 or +1. Therefore the magnitude of the polynomial model coefcients can be directly compared. NOTE: The stable model coefcients are Chebyshev coefcients. The corresponding polynomial coefcients in a + bx + cxx + ... are also given in Verbose mode but users must realize that they are NOT stable beyond degree 7 or 8. See Numerical Recipes for more discussion. For evaluating Chebyshev polynomials, see gmtmath. The Nr (robust) and I (iterative) options evaluate the signicance of the improvement in model mist Chi-Squared by an F test. The default condence limit is set at 0.51; it can be changed with the I option. The user may be surprised to nd that in most cases the reduction in variance achieved by increasing the number of terms in a model is not signicant at a very high degree of condence. For example, with 120 degrees of freedom, Chi-Squared must decrease by 26% or more to be signicant at the 95% condence level. If you want to keep iterating as long as Chi-Squared is decreasing, set condence_level to zero. A low condence limit (such as the default value of 0.51) is needed to make the robust method work. This method iteratively reweights the data to reduce the inuence of outliers. The weight is based on the Median Absolute Deviation and a formula from Huber [1964], and is 95% efcient when the model residuals have an outlier-free normal distribution. This means that the inuence of outliers is reduced only slightly at each iteration; consequently the reduction in Chi-Squared is not very signicant. If the procedure needs a few iterations to successfully attenuate their effect, the signicance level of the F test must be kept low.
EXAMPLES
To remove a linear trend from data.xy by ordinary least squares, use: trend1d data.xy Fxr N2 > detrended_data.xy To make the above linear trend robust with respect to outliers, use: trend1d data.xy Fxr N2r > detrended_data.xy To nd out how many terms (up to 20, say) in a robust Fourier interpolant are signicant in tting data.xy, use: trend1d data.xy Nf20r I V
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), gmtmath(1), grdtrend(1), trend2d(1)
REFERENCES
Huber, P. J., 1964, Robust estimation of a location parameter, Ann. Math. Stat., 35, 73-101. Menke, W., 1989, Geophysical Data Analysis: Discrete Inverse Theory, Revised Edition, Academic Press, San Diego.
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
TREND2D(1)
TREND2D(1)
NAME
trend2d Fit a [weighted] [robust] polynomial model for z = f(x,y) to xyz[w] data.
SYNOPSIS
trend2d Fxyzmrw Nn_model[r] [ xyz[w]le ] [ Ccondition_number ] [ H[i][nrec] ] [ I[condence_level] ] [ V ] [ W ] [ :[i|o] ] [ b[i|o][s|S|d|D[ncol]|c[var1/...]] ] [ f[i|o]colinfo ]
DESCRIPTION
trend2d reads x,y,z [and w] values from the rst three [four] columns on standard input [or xyz[w]le] and ts a regression model z = f(x,y) + e by [weighted] least squares. The t may be made robust by iterative reweighting of the data. The user may also search for the number of terms in f(x,y) which signicantly reduce the variance in z. n_model may be in [1,10] to t a model of the following form (similar to grdtrend): m1 + m2*x + m3*y + m4*x*y + m5*x*x + m6*y*y + m7*x*x*x + m8*x*x*y + m9*x*y*y + m10*y*y*y. The user must specify Nn_model, the number of model parameters to use; thus, N4 ts a bilinear trend, N6 a quadratic surface, and so on. Optionally, append r to perform a robust t. In this case, the program will iteratively reweight the data based on a robust scale estimate, in order to converge to a solution insensitive to outliers. This may be handy when separating a "regional" eld from a "residual" which should have non-zero mean, such as a local mountain on a regional surface. F N Specify up to six letters from the set {x y z m r w} in any order to create columns of ASCII [or binary] output. x = x, y = y, z = z, m = model f(x,y), r = residual z - m, w = weight used in tting. Specify the number of terms in the model, n_model, and append r to do a robust t. E.g., a robust bilinear model is N4r.
OPTIONS
xyz[w]le ASCII [or binary, see b] le containing x,y,z [w] values in the rst 3 [4] columns. If no le is specied, trend2d will read from standard input. C Set the maximum allowed condition number for the matrix solution. trend2d ts a damped least squares model, retaining only that part of the eigenvalue spectrum such that the ratio of the largest eigenvalue to the smallest eigenvalue is condition_#. [Default: condition_# = 1.0e06. ]. Input le(s) has header record(s). If used, the default number of header records is N_HEADER_RECS. Use Hi if only input data should have header records [Default will write out header records if the input data have them]. Blank lines and lines starting with # are always skipped. Iteratively increase the number of model parameters, starting at one, until n_model is reached or the reduction in variance of the model is not signicant at the condence_level level. You may set I only, without an attached number; in this case the t will be iterative with a default condence level of 0.51. Or choose your own level between 0 and 1. See remarks section. Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"]. Weights are supplied in input column 4. Do a weighted least squares t [or start with these weights when doing the iterative robust t]. [Default reads only the rst 3 columns.] Toggles between (longitude,latitude) and (latitude,longitude) input and/or output. [Default is (longitude,latitude)]. Append i to select input only or o to select output only. [Default affects both]. Selects binary input. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of columns in your binary input le if it exceeds the columns needed by the program. Or append c if the input le is netCDF. Optionally, append var1/var2/... to specify the variables to be read. [Default is 3 (or 4 if W is set) input columns].
V W : bi
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
TREND2D(1)
TREND2D(1)
bo
Selects binary output. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of desired columns in your binary output le. [Default is 1-6 columns as set by F]. Special formatting of input and/or output columns (time or geographical data). Specify i or o to make this apply only to input or output [Default applies to both]. Give one or more columns (or column ranges) separated by commas. Append T (absolute calendar time), t (relative time in chosen TIME_UNIT since TIME_EPOCH), x (longitude), y (latitude), or f (oating point) to each column or column range item. Shorthand f[i|o]g means f[i|o]0x,1y (geographic coordinates).
REMARKS
The domain of x and y will be shifted and scaled to [-1, 1] and the basis functions are built from Chebyshev polynomials. These have a numerical advantage in the form of the matrix which must be inverted and allow more accurate solutions. In many applications of trend2d the user has data located approximately along a line in the x,y plane which makes an angle with the x axis (such as data collected along a road or ship track). In this case the accuracy could be improved by a rotation of the x,y axes. trend2d does not search for such a rotation; instead, it may nd that the matrix problem has decient rank. However, the solution is computed using the generalized inverse and should still work out OK. The user should check the results graphically if trend2d shows decient rank. NOTE: The model parameters listed with V are Chebyshev coefcients; they are not numerically equivalent to the m#s in the equation described above. The description above is to allow the user to match N with the order of the polynomial surface. For evaluating Chebyshev polynomials, see grdmath. The Nn_modelr (robust) and I (iterative) options evaluate the signicance of the improvement in model mist Chi-Squared by an F test. The default condence limit is set at 0.51; it can be changed with the I option. The user may be surprised to nd that in most cases the reduction in variance achieved by increasing the number of terms in a model is not signicant at a very high degree of condence. For example, with 120 degrees of freedom, Chi-Squared must decrease by 26% or more to be signicant at the 95% condence level. If you want to keep iterating as long as Chi-Squared is decreasing, set condence_level to zero. A low condence limit (such as the default value of 0.51) is needed to make the robust method work. This method iteratively reweights the data to reduce the inuence of outliers. The weight is based on the Median Absolute Deviation and a formula from Huber [1964], and is 95% efcient when the model residuals have an outlier-free normal distribution. This means that the inuence of outliers is reduced only slightly at each iteration; consequently the reduction in Chi-Squared is not very signicant. If the procedure needs a few iterations to successfully attenuate their effect, the signicance level of the F test must be kept low.

EXAMPLES
To remove a planar trend from data.xyz by ordinary least squares, use: trend2d data.xyz Fxyr N2 > detrended_data.xyz To make the above planar trend robust with respect to outliers, use: trend2d data.xzy Fxyr N2r > detrended_data.xyz To nd out how many terms (up to 10) in a robust interpolant are signicant in tting data.xyz, use:
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
TREND2D(1)
TREND2D(1)
trend2d data.xyz N10r I V
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), grdmath(1), grdtrend(1), trend1d(1)
REFERENCES
Huber, P. J., 1964, Robust estimation of a location parameter, Ann. Math. Stat., 35, 73-101. Menke, W., 1989, Geophysical Data Analysis: Discrete Inverse Theory, Revised Edition, Academic Press, San Diego.
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
TRIANGULATE(1)
TRIANGULATE(1)
NAME
triangulate Perform optimal Delaunay triangulation and gridding of Cartesian data [method]
SYNOPSIS
triangulate inles [ Dx|y ] [ Eempty ] [ F ] [ Ggrdle ] [ H[i][nrec] ] [ Ixinc[unit][=|+][/yinc[unit][=|+]] ] [ Jparameters ] [ Q ] [ Rwest/east/south/north[r] ] [ V ] [ Z ] [ :[i|o] ] [ b[i|o][s|S|d|D[ncol]|c[var1/...]] ] [ f[i|o]colinfo ] [ m[i|o][ag] ]
DESCRIPTION
triangulate reads one or more ASCII [or binary] les (or standard input) containing x,y[,z] and performs Delaunay triangulation, i.e., it nd how the points should be connected to give the most equilateral triangulation possible. If a map projection (give R and J) is chosen then it is applied before the triangulation is calculated. By default, the output is triplets of point id numbers that make up each triangle and is written to standard output. The id numbers refer to the points position (line number, starting at 0 for the rst line) in the input le. As an option, you may choose to create a multiple segment le that can be piped through psxy to draw the triangulation network. If G I are set a grid will be calculated based on the surface dened by the planar triangles. The actual algorithm used in the triangulations is either that of Watson [1982] [Default] or Shewchuk [1996] (if installed; type triangulate to see which method is selected). This choice is made during the GMT installation. inles Data les with the point coordinates in ASCII (or binary; see b). If no les are given the standard input is read. Take either the x- or y-derivatives of surface represented by the planar facets (only used when G is set). Set the value assigned to empty nodes when G is set [NaN]. Force pixel node registration [Default is gridline registration]. (Node registrations are dened in GMT Cookbook Appendix B on grid le formats.) Only valid with G). Use triangulation to grid the data onto an even grid (specied with R I). Append the name of the output grid le. The interpolation is performed in the original coordinates, so if your triangles are close to the poles you are better off projecting all data to a local coordinate system before using triangulate (this is true of all gridding routines). Input le(s) has header record(s). If used, the default number of header records is N_HEADER_RECS. Use Hi if only input data should have header records [Default will write out header records if the input data have them]. Blank lines and lines starting with # are always skipped. x_inc [and optionally y_inc] sets the grid size for optional grid output (see G). Append m to indicate minutes or c to indicate seconds. Selects the map projection. Scale is UNIT/degree, 1:xxxxx, or width in UNIT (upper case modier). UNIT is cm, inch, or m, depending on the MEASURE_UNIT setting in .gmtdefaults4, but this can be overridden on the command line by appending c, i, or m to the scale/width value. When central meridian is optional, default is center of longitude range on R option. Default standard parallel is the equator. For map height, max dimension, or min dimension, append h, +, or to the width, respectively. More details can be found in the psbasemap man pages. CYLINDRICAL PROJECTIONS: Jclon0/lat0/scale (Cassini) Jcyl_stere/[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Stereographic) Jj[lon0/]scale (Miller) Jm[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Mercator) Jmlon0/lat0/scale (Mercator - Give meridian and standard parallel)
OPTIONS
D E F G
I J
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
TRIANGULATE(1)
TRIANGULATE(1)
Jo[a]lon0/lat0/azimuth/scale (Oblique Mercator - point and azimuth) Jo[b]lon0/lat0/lon1/lat1/scale (Oblique Mercator - two points) Joclon0/lat0/lonp/latp/scale (Oblique Mercator - point and pole) Jq[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Equidistant) Jtlon0/[lat0/]scale (TM - Transverse Mercator) Juzone/scale (UTM - Universal Transverse Mercator) Jy[lon0/[lat0/]]scale (Cylindrical Equal-Area) CONIC PROJECTIONS: Jblon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Albers) Jdlon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Conic Equidistant) Jllon0/lat0/lat1/lat2/scale (Lambert Conic Conformal) Jpoly/[lon0/[lat0/]]scale ((American) Polyconic) AZIMUTHAL PROJECTIONS: Jalon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Lambert Azimuthal Equal-Area) Jelon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Azimuthal Equidistant) Jflon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Gnomonic) Jglon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (Orthographic) Jglon0/lat0/altitude/azimuth/tilt/twist/Width/Height/scale (General Perspective). Jslon0/lat0[/horizon]/scale (General Stereographic) MISCELLANEOUS PROJECTIONS: Jh[lon0/]scale (Hammer) Ji[lon0/]scale (Sinusoidal) Jkf[lon0/]scale (Eckert IV) Jk[s][lon0/]scale (Eckert VI) Jn[lon0/]scale (Robinson) Jr[lon0/]scale (Winkel Tripel) Jv[lon0/]scale (Van der Grinten) Jw[lon0/]scale (Mollweide) NON-GEOGRAPHICAL PROJECTIONS: Jp[a]scale[/origin][r|z] (Polar coordinates (theta,r)) Jxx-scale[d|l|ppow|t|T][/y-scale[d|l|ppow|t|T]] (Linear, log, and power scaling) Q R Output the edges of the Voronoi cells instead [Default is Delaunay triangle edges]. Requires both m and R and is only available if linked with the Shewchuk [1996] library. xmin, xmax, ymin, and ymax specify the Region of interest. For geographic regions, these limits correspond to west, east, south, and north and you may specify them in decimal degrees or in [+-]dd:mm[:ss.xxx][W|E|S|N] format. Append r if lower left and upper right map coordinates are given instead of w/e/s/n. The two shorthands Rg and Rd stand for global domain (0/360 and -180/+180 in longitude respectively, with -90/+90 in latitude). Alternatively, specify the name of an existing grid le and the R settings (and grid spacing, if applicable) are copied from the grid. For calendar time coordinates you may either give (a) relative time (relative to the selected TIME_EPOCH and in the selected TIME_UNIT; append t to JX|x), or (b) absolute time of the form [date]T[clock] (append T to JX|x). At least one of date and clock must be present; the T is always required. The date string must be of the form [-]yyyy[-mm[-dd]] (Gregorian calendar) or yyyy[-Www[-d]] (ISO week calendar), while the clock string must be of the form hh:mm:ss[.xxx]. The use of delimiters and their type and positions must be exactly as indicated (however, input, output and plot formats are customizable; see gmtdefaults).
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
TRIANGULATE(1)
TRIANGULATE(1)
V Z : bi
Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"]. Controls whether binary data le has two or three columns [2]. Ignored if b is not set. Toggles between (longitude,latitude) and (latitude,longitude) input and/or output. [Default is (longitude,latitude)]. Append i to select input only or o to select output only. [Default affects both]. Selects binary input. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of columns in your binary input le if it exceeds the columns needed by the program. Or append c if the input le is netCDF. Optionally, append var1/var2/... to specify the variables to be read. [Default is 2 input columns]. Selects binary output. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of desired columns in your binary output le. [Default is same as input]. Node ids are stored as binary 4-byte integer triplets. bo is ignored if m is selected. Special formatting of input and/or output columns (time or geographical data). Specify i or o to make this apply only to input or output [Default applies to both]. Give one or more columns (or column ranges) separated by commas. Append T (absolute calendar time), t (relative time in chosen TIME_UNIT since TIME_EPOCH), x (longitude), y (latitude), or f (oating point) to each column or column range item. Shorthand f[i|o]g means f[i|o]0x,1y (geographic coordinates). Output triangulation network as multiple line segments separated by a record whose rst character is ag [>]. To plot, use psxy with the m option (see Examples).
bo


EXAMPLES
To triangulate the points in the le samples.xyz, store the triangle information in a binary le, and make a grid for the given area and spacing, use triangulate samples.xyz bo R0/30/0/30 I2 Gsurf.grd > samples.ijk To draw the optimal Delaunay triangulation network based on the same le using a 15-cm-wide Mercator map, use triangulate samples.xyz m R-100/-90/30/34 JM15c | psxy m OPR(R)-100/-90/30/34 JM15c W0.5p B1 > network.ps To instead plot the Voronoi cell outlines, try triangulate samples.xyz m Q R-100/-90/30/34 JM15c | psxy m OPR(R)-100/-90/30/34 JM15c W0.5p B1 > cells.ps
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), pscontour(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
TRIANGULATE(1)
TRIANGULATE(1)
REFERENCES
Watson, D. F., 1982, Acord: Automatic contouring of raw data, Comp. & Geosci., 8, 97101. Shewchuk, J. R., 1996, Triangle: Engineering a 2D Quality Mesh Generator and Delaunay Triangulator, First Workshop on Applied Computational Geometry (Philadelphia, PA), 124-133, ACM, May 1996. www.cs.cmu.edu/quake/triangle.html
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
XYZ2GRD(1)
XYZ2GRD(1)
NAME
xyz2grd Converting an ASCII or binary table to grid le format
SYNOPSIS
xyz2grd xyzle Ggrdle Ixinc[unit][=|+][/yinc[unit][=|+]] Rwest/east/south/north[r] [ A[n|z|u|l] ] [ Dxname/yname/zname/scale/offset/title/remark ] [ E[nodata] ] [ F ] [ H[i][nrec] ] [ Nnodata ] [ S[zle] ] [ V ] [ Z[ags] ] [ :[i|o] ] [ bi[s|S|d|D[ncol]|c[var1/...]] ] [ fcolinfo ]
DESCRIPTION
xyz2grd reads a z or xyz table and creates a binary grid le. xyz2grd will report if some of the nodes are not lled in with data. Such unconstrained nodes are set to a value specied by the user [Default is NaN]. Nodes with more than one value will be set to the average value. As an option (using Z), a 1-column z-table may be read assuming all nodes are present (z-tables can be in organized in a number of formats, see Z below.) [xy]zle ASCII [or binary] le holding z or (x,y,z) values. xyz triplets do not have to be sorted (for binary triplets, see b). 1-column z tables must be sorted and the Z must be set). G I grdle is the name of the binary output grid le. (See GRID FILE FORMAT below.) x_inc [and optionally y_inc] is the grid spacing. Optionally, append a sufx modier. Geographical (degrees) coordinates: Append m to indicate arc minutes or c to indicate arc seconds. If one of the units e, k, i, or n is appended instead, the increment is assumed to be given in meter, km, miles, or nautical miles, respectively, and will be converted to the equivalent degrees longitude at the middle latitude of the region (the conversion depends on ELLIPSOID). If /y_inc is given but set to 0 it will be reset equal to x_inc; otherwise it will be converted to degrees latitude. All coordinates: If = is appended then the corresponding max x (east) or y (north) may be slightly adjusted to t exactly the given increment [by default the increment may be adjusted slightly to t the given domain]. Finally, instead of giving an increment you may specify the number of nodes desired by appending + to the supplied integer argument; the increment is then recalculated from the number of nodes and the domain. The resulting increment value depends on whether you have selected a gridline-registered or pixel-registered grid; see Appendix B for details. Note: if Rgrdle is used then grid spacing has already been initialized; use I to override the values. xmin, xmax, ymin, and ymax specify the Region of interest. For geographic regions, these limits correspond to west, east, south, and north and you may specify them in decimal degrees or in [+-]dd:mm[:ss.xxx][W|E|S|N] format. Append r if lower left and upper right map coordinates are given instead of w/e/s/n. The two shorthands Rg and Rd stand for global domain (0/360 and -180/+180 in longitude respectively, with -90/+90 in latitude). Alternatively, specify the name of an existing grid le and the R settings (and grid spacing, if applicable) are copied from the grid. For calendar time coordinates you may either give (a) relative time (relative to the selected TIME_EPOCH and in the selected TIME_UNIT; append t to JX|x), or (b) absolute time of the form [date]T[clock] (append T to JX|x). At least one of date and clock must be present; the T is always required. The date string must be of the form [-]yyyy[-mm[-dd]] (Gregorian calendar) or yyyy[-Www[-d]] (ISO week calendar), while the clock string must be of the form hh:mm:ss[.xxx]. The use of delimiters and their type and positions must be exactly as indicated (however, input, output and plot formats are customizable; see gmtdefaults). Add up multiple values that belong to the same node (same as Az). Append n to simply count the number of data points that were assigned to each node. Append l or u to nd the lowest (minimum) or upper (maximum) value at each node, respectively. [Default (no A option) will calculate mean value]. Ignored if Z is given. Give values for xname, yname, zname, scale, offset, title, and remark. To leave some of these values untouched, specify = as the value. Alternatively, to allow "/" to be part of one of the values, use any non-alphanumeric character (and not the equal sign) as separator by both starting and ending with it. For example: D:xname:yname:zname:scale:offset:title:remark:
OPTIONS
A
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
XYZ2GRD(1)
XYZ2GRD(1)
Convert an ESRI ArcInfo ASCII interchange grid format le to a GMT grid. Append nodata which is a data value that should be set to NaN in the grid [If we nd the optional 6th record in the le we will use it instead]. The values normally given by R, I, and F are determined from the ESRI header instead. Force pixel node registration [Default is gridline registration]. (Node registrations are dened in GMT Cookbook Appendix B on grid le formats.) Input le(s) has header record(s). If used, the default number of header records is N_HEADER_RECS. Use Hi if only input data should have header records [Default will write out header records if the input data have them]. Blank lines and lines starting with # are always skipped. Not used with binary data. No data. Set nodes with no input xyz triplet to this value [Default is NaN]. For z-tables, this option is used to replace z-values that equal nodata with NaN. Swap the byte-order of the input only. No grid le is produced. You must also supply the Z option. The output is written to zle (or stdout if not supplied). Selects verbose mode, which will send progress reports to stderr [Default runs "silently"]. Read a 1-column ASCII [or binary] table. This assumes that all the nodes are present and sorted according to specied ordering convention contained in ags. If incoming data represents rows, make ags start with T(op) if rst row is y = ymax or B(ottom) if rst row is y = ymin. Then, append L or R to indicate that rst element is at left or right end of row. Likewise for column formats: start with L or R to position rst column, and then append T or B to position rst element in a row. For gridline registered grids: If data are periodic in x but the incoming data do not contain the (redundant) column at x = xmax, append x. For data periodic in y without redundant row at y = ymax, append y. Append sn to skip the rst n number of bytes (probably a header). If the byteorder needs to be swapped, append w. Select one of several data types (all binary except a): A ASCII representation of one or more oating point values per record a ASCII representation of a single item per record c signed 1-byte character u unsigned 1-byte character h short 2-byte integer i 4-byte integer l long (4- or 8-byte) integer [architecture-dependent!] f 4-byte oating point single precision d 8-byte oating point double precision Default format is scanline orientation of ASCII numbers: ZTLa. Note that Z only applies to 1-column input. The difference between A and a is that the latter can decode both dateTclock and ddd:mm:ss[.xx] formats while the former is strictly for regular oating point values.
F H
N S V Z
: bi
Toggles between (longitude,latitude) and (latitude,longitude) input and/or output. [Default is (longitude,latitude)]. Append i to select input only or o to select output only. [Default affects both]. Selects binary input. Append s for single precision [Default is d (double)]. Uppercase S or D will force byte-swapping. Optionally, append ncol, the number of columns in your binary input le if it exceeds the columns needed by the program. Or append c if the input le is netCDF. Optionally, append var1/var2/... to specify the variables to be read. [Default is 3 input columns]. This option only applies to xyz input les; see Z for z tables. Special formatting of input and/or output columns (time or geographical data). Specify i or o to make this apply only to input or output [Default applies to both]. Give one or more columns (or column ranges) separated by commas. Append T (absolute calendar time), t (relative time in chosen TIME_UNIT since TIME_EPOCH), x (longitude), y (latitude), or f (oating point) to each column or column range item. Shorthand f[i|o]g means f[i|o]0x,1y (geographic coordinates).
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012
XYZ2GRD(1)
XYZ2GRD(1)

GRID FILE FORMATS


EXAMPLES
To create a grid le from the ASCII data in hawaii_grv.xyz, use xyz2grd hawaii_grv.xyz Ddegree/degree/mGal/1/0/"Hawaiian Gravity"/"GRS-80 Ellipsoid used" Ghawaii_grv_new.grd R198/208/18/25 I5m V To create a grid le from the raw binary (3-column, single-precision) scanline-oriented data raw.b, use xyz2grd raw.b Dm/m/m/1/0/=/= Graw.grd R0/100/0/100 I1 V Z b3 To make a grid le from the raw binary USGS DEM (short integer) scanline-oriented data topo30. on the NGDC global relief Data CD-ROM, with values of -9999 indicate missing data, one must on some machine reverse the byte-order. On such machines (like Sun), use xyz2grd topo30. Dm/m/m/1/0/=/= Gustopo.grd R234/294/24/50 I30c N-9999 B ZTLhw Say you have received a binary le with 4-byte oating points that were written on a machine of different byte-order than yours. You can swap the byte-order with xyz2grd oats.bin Snew_oats.bin V Zf
SEE ALSO
GMT (1), grd2xyz(1), grdedit(1)
GMT 4.5.8
1 Apr 2012

GMT Manpages

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GMT Manpages

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

GMT Manpages

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GMT(1)

Generic Mapping Tools

Generic Mapping Tools

Generic Mapping Tools

Generic Mapping Tools

ASCII FORMAT PRECISION

Generic Mapping Tools

Generic Mapping Tools

ASCII FORMAT PRECISION

Generic Mapping Tools

Generic Mapping Tools

Generic Mapping Tools

ASCII FORMAT PRECISION

Generic Mapping Tools

Generic Mapping Tools

ASCII FORMAT PRECISION

Generic Mapping Tools

Generic Mapping Tools

ASCII FORMAT PRECISION

Generic Mapping Tools

Generic Mapping Tools

guessing algorithm makes uses of FFTs.

Generic Mapping Tools

Generic Mapping Tools

Generic Mapping Tools

Generic Mapping Tools

Generic Mapping Tools

Generic Mapping Tools

Generic Mapping Tools

Generic Mapping Tools

Generic Mapping Tools

Generic Mapping Tools

85 186 174 150 102 79 73 63 43 36 33 29 19 48 44 38 26 64 59 51 35 105 98 84 57 122 114 98 66 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 86 80 69 47 71 66 57 38 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 147

Generic Mapping Tools

Generic Mapping Tools

93 255 238 205 139 0 0 3 3 5 5 8 8 10 10 13 13 15 15 18 18 20 20 23 23 26 26 28 28 31 31 33 33 36 36 38 38 41 41 43 43 46 46 48 48 51 51 54 54 56 56 59 59 61

71 225 210 181 123 0 0 3 3 5 5 8 8 10 10 13 13 15 15 18 18 20 20 23 23 26 26 28 28 31 31 33 33 36 36 38 38 41 41 43 43 46 46 48 48 51 51 54 54 56 56 59 59 61

139 255 238 205 139 0 0 3 3 5 5 8 8 10 10 13 13 15 15 18 18 20 20 23 23 26 26 28 28 31 31 33 33 36 36 38 38 41 41 43 43 46 46 48 48 51 51 54 54 56 56 59 59 61

Generic Mapping Tools

Generic Mapping Tools

Generic Mapping Tools

Generic Mapping Tools

Generic Mapping Tools

ASCII FORMAT PRECISION

Generic Mapping Tools

Generic Mapping Tools

Generic Mapping Tools

Generic Mapping Tools

Generic Mapping Tools

Generic Mapping Tools

Generic Mapping Tools

Generic Mapping Tools

Generic Mapping Tools

Generic Mapping Tools

Generic Mapping Tools

Generic Mapping Tools

Generic Mapping Tools

Tongan Turkish British English US English

Generic Mapping Tools

Generic Mapping Tools